P. 1
Servis Za Minolta C351

Servis Za Minolta C351

|Views: 197|Likes:
Published by 7days
Konica Minolta Service Manual
Konica Minolta Service Manual

More info:

Categories:Types, Brochures
Published by: 7days on Apr 26, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

09/14/2015

pdf

text

original

SERVICE MANUAL

FIELD SERVICE

This Service Manual is designed for machine with Firmware Card Ver. G4 and onward.

2006.08 Ver. 3.0

FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION ..............................................................................................S-1 SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2 WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-14 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT .....................................................................................................................S-17 Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1 Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2

bizhub C351/C450 Main Unit
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 9 Adjustment/Setting...................................................................................................... 159 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 387 Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 511

Standard Controller
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 37 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 39

Automatic Document Feeder (DF-601)
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5 Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 15 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 31

Automatic Duplex Unit
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Adjustment/Setting.......................................................................................................... 7 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 11

i

PC-102/PC-202
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 13 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 19

PC-402
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 17 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 25

FS-507
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5 Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 11 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 25

FS-603
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5 Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 23 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 51

ii

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate. The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended. Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly. Keep this Service Manual also for future service.

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care. DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

:Precaution when servicing the product. :Prohibition when servicing the product. :Direction when servicing the product.

General precaution General prohibition General instruction

Electric hazard High temperature

Do not touch with wet hand Unplug

Do not disassemble Ground/Earth

S-1

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

Prohibited Actions DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. • Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object. • Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. • Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT • Using parts not specified by KMBT

S-2

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

Power Cord Set or Power Plug WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria: - provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and - the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and - provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity, and - the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area. Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock. • Attach power plug which meets the following criteria: - having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and - the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and - meets regulatory requirements for the area. Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. • Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug according to the following order: • Black or Brown: • White or Light Blue: • Green/Yellow: L (line) N (neutral) PE (earth)

kw

Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results in fire or electric shock.

S-3

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks. 1. Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock. • Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation. • Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. • If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. • Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. • Check whether the product is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product. Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.

kw

S-4

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. • Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock. • Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. • Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists. • When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

S-5

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Wiring WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result. 2. Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Places WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. • Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

When not Using the Product for a long time WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

S-6

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Ventilation CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple products at the same time

Stability CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.

Inspection before Servicing CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. • Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists. • The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burnt.

S-7

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury. • Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Safety Checkpoints WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damage. The user or CE may be injured. • Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the product. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. • Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. • Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire. • Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

S-8

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints WARNING
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. • Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. • When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority. Improper replacement can cause explosion. • After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. • Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam). • Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

S-9

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints WARNING
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

Handling of Consumables WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician. • Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.

Handling of Service Materials CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists. • Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists.

S-10

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Handling of Service Materials CAUTION
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. • When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

S-11

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[4] Used Batteries Precautions
ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. France ATTENTION Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. Denmark ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren. Finland, Sweden VAROlTUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

S-12

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[5] FUSE
CAUTION Double pole / neutral fusing ATTENTION Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre.

[6] LED Radiation Safety
• This product is a copier which operates by means of a LED (light emitting diodes) exposure system. There is no possibility of danger from the LED optical radiation, because the LED optical radiation level dose not exceed the accessible radiation limit of class 1 under all conditions of operation, maintenance, service and failure.

S-13

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.

High voltage

High temperature

High voltage

High temperature

4037P0C501DA

S-14

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage High voltage High voltage 4037P0C502DA S-15 .

Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read. S-16 .SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage 4037P0C503DA CAUTION: • You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label. contact our Service Office.

an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified. 2. S-17 . conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents. 3. To determine the cause of the accident. in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT. follow the regulations specified by every distributor. If an accident has occurred.MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1. the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. 4. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT S-18 .

and their countermeasures etc. and mechanical adjustment etc. C-1 . a rough outline of the object and role of each function.Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options. and the timing of operation of each part. removal/reinstallation methods of major parts. as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product. a rough outline of the service schedule and its details. the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system. and paper path COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit. the object and role of each adjustment. Field Service section gives. unit configuration. Theory of Operation section gives. timing chart. maintenance steps. However some options may not be applied to the following configuration. The basic configuration of each section is as follows. Parts layout drawings. connector layout drawings. product specifications. as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer’s premise). and control system <Field Service section> GENERAL: MAINTENANCE: Explanation of system configuration. and firmware version up method etc. overall layout drawing are attached. operating system. service tools. ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: TROUBLESHOOTING: APPENDIX: Explanation of utility mode. service mode. error codes and supplementary information. maintenance steps. <Theory of Operation section> OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration. and product specifications Explanation of service schedule. Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes.

[S] will not be added to the paper size. Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company. <Sample notation> Paper size A4 A3 Feeding direction Long Edge Feeding Short Edge Feeding Short Edge Feeding Notation A4 A4S A3 C-2 . The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the Short Edge Feeding is called the Long Edge Feeding.0: Microsoft Windows 2000: Microsoft Windows XP: MFP Control Board Main Unit Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4. Feeding Direction • When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction.Notation of the service manual A. C.0 or Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 95/98/Me Windows NT 4. it is called Short Edge Feeding. Product name In this manual.0/2000 Windows NT/2000/XP Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above: B. each of the products is described as follows: (1) PWB-MFP: (2) bizhub C351/C450: (3) Microsoft Windows 95: Microsoft Windows 98: Microsoft Windows Me: Microsoft Windows NT 4. • Short Edge Feeding will be identified with [S (Abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)] on the paper size. When the size has only the Short Edge Feeding with no Long Edge Feeding. No specific notation is added for the Long Edge Feeding.

.

3.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Main Unit 2006.08 Ver.0 .

0 Service manual Ver. Therefore.0 2 Error corrections / Corresponded to a Card Version G4 Error corrections / Corresponded to a Card Version A7 / Integrated with the bizhub C351 Service Manual. Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision 2006/02 2005/03 Date 2. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. • When a page revised in Ver.0 1. 2006/08 3. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 deleted. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 has been changed in Ver.Revision history After publication of this service manual. 2. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. 1 — Revision mark .0 are left as they are. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 3. • To indicate clearly a section revised. 2. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3. 2. • When a page revised in Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver.

2................................................... 16 Replacing the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller ..... 3.......5.................................1. System configuration...........000-print).... 19 Replacing the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller ..........................2.......8 3.......................................................................................5........................... 27 Replacing Ozone Filter............................................ 9 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) ...................9 3................5 Maintenance items.......................3 3..........................2 3.................. 16 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy ...............................................................................2......3 3..................3... 12 Cleaning parts.............14 i General ......................... 27 3..................... 21 Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller ...........................5................ 11 Replacement parts..000-print)...............2 3........5......1 Periodical check ........... 10 Maintenance Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance parts ......................5.......................Field Service Ver..........000-print)..................... 3.......... 19 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller................................................... 25 Cleaning of Transport Roller ..............................3........................... 12 Concept of parts life....... 26 Replacing the Waste Toner Box .................................... 10 Maintenance call (per 60............5......................5.. 3 Maintenance 3............5..0 Aug............... 24 Paper Dust Remover..............................................................................................5........................................1 3............................................................... 26 Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port................................................................1 3..........2 3....................................11 3........................... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 CONTENTS bizhub C351/C450 Main Unit General 1.. 14 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ............. 9 Service schedule .........................4 3......................................2................................................................................................5......................................7 3.......................1 3.........13 3..... 1 Product specifications .................. 13 3..................... 2............................4 3.........................................2 3..............................................................1 3... 11 Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 200.... 9 bizhub C450..................3 3.........................5.....................................5 3......................6 3.............5....................4 3..... 17 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy ........ 9 bizhub C351....10 3...1...........12 3............................... 23 Cleaning of Registration Roller ....5 3.................5..........................................................000-print) ................................5.....2.............2 3..... 11 Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300.............. 25 Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide ..... 10 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 150........................................ 16 Replacing the Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller ........................

.....1 5..................................................................................3....0 Aug...............................3 4..................................... 43 Writing into the Compact flash........2...... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 3........................................................... 47 Troubleshooting 5..................................... 33 Replacing the Fusing Unit.....3 5...........1 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 ...............1 Adjustment / Setting 5..............2 5................... 55 Updating method .... Y........3......4 4................2.................................................1 Updating the Firmware with the Internet ISW........... 38 4.............2 Service tool ..........................................................................................4................2 3.................. 50 Screen ................................2.5 5................4 Firmware rewriting by compact flash ..................................... 3.... 47 Function outline .......4 5............ 62 Out line .......................................................................................................... 40 Outline .....................4....................6.... 29 Image Transfer Belt Unit .....................1 4............................................7 5......... 5........ 28 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter.......................................2 5...........2 Maintenance 4................................... 48 Update of software.6 3.................................................. 4.6........................................................18 3.................................. 39 Outline ..............................5................. 60 5.........................................2....................................8 Appendix 5.......................................3................ 37 Copy materials .............................15 3................................. 40 Settings of the Windows Environmental Variable .......................6................3 5....2.....................4 5..5 5......................3................................. M..............................................4 5..3 Cleaning of the Comb Electrode.... 53 How to write firmware data ............ 60 Action When Data Transfer Fails.....................................3 5............................................................1 3.................................2................................16 3...............2............................2............ 36 Replacing the unit.2.1 4.............. 30 Replacing the Imaging Unit (C................................ 29 General 3........... 28 Cleaning LPH Assy.......................................... 44 Correspond model .......................................... 37 CE Tool list ........5 5............. 29 Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit ......................................................................5........................ 51 Details of each function .........................2 Firmware upgrade............. 38 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C) ...................................................................6 5... 47 System environment ........................................................... 29 Replacement of the Dust Filter .................................. 38 Waste Toner Box................ 40 Installing the Cygwin..............3...................................................... 38 Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU) ......................................................... K) ........ 39 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin .................3.....5...........................................3..................................5........................6....17 3................................................................... 63 ii ....................................... 63 5................................ 40 Service environment ..........................5....................2 5...........................Field Service Ver..................................1 5................................................................................................................................................3............................. 38 Maintenance Kit ........................................... 47 Installation of software .............................................

.................................3.......6 6......16 6............................18 6.......10 6..... 81 Tray 1 ............................12 6.............3.........................11 6....... 77 Front Door/Panel Cover/Tray 1 Front Right Cover................................ 85 Image Processing Board (PWB-C) ............... 91 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) ..........3......... 97 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1)........2...............27 Disassembly/Assembly procedure..........................................5....... 63 Preparations for Firmware rewriting ...........................................3..................................3.................5....................................15 6...............3......................... 73 Disassembly/Assembly parts list.2 5.................... 78 IR Upper Front Cover/IR Upper Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover ..................................23 6...............0 Aug.................................................................3............... 3.....................................3......................25 6...............................................5 6............................................................20 6................................................................................... 91 Control Board (PWB-MC) ..............5.. 101 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2)............................ 76 Exit Tray/IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Front Cover .3..... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 5.................. 72 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ...3...............19 6.................................................................3........................17 6....... 101 6.. 72 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)..........7 6................................................Field Service Ver....3...............................24 6....4 6............. 66 Error Code List for the Internet ISW........................26 6..2...3.........1 6......... 76 iii ......................................3.....22 6.......3.... 82 Tray 2 ..5......... 98 LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) .......................... 73 Cleaning parts list .................3 6.................3.......................................3......................................................3................... 96 High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) .................................. 79 Original Glass/IR Front Cover ................ 6...........9 6.... 84 Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) ........................................................3...............................3 5.3.3...........................................................................4 5... 90 Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES)................... 89 Standard Memory (D_FILE0)............3...........................................3 6... 93 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) ..3..............................3..................................................21 6.....................2 6.............................................................................................................................3. 69 Other .............................................. 100 Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z).............................. 63 Firmware rewriting ..................................................................................................................3........................... 94 High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) ......3.......... 78 Lower Rear Cover/Tray 2 Rear Cover/Rear Cover/Rear Right Cover/ Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Wiring Cover ....................13 6..........2 6............................................. 88 LAN Board (PWB-LAN)............................. 90 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)................... 84 CCD Unit...............2 Service environment ..................... 86 Copier Board (PWB-CF) ..................8 6................... 98 DC Power Supply (PU1).......................................5 6.................................................................. 80 Control Panel (UN201)...1 6..........................14 6................ 75 IR Right Cover/Front Right Cover/Bypass Right & Left Cover .1 6.......................................

........................................... 146 Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller...........36 6............................................................................3.............................................................................4.....47 6................ 134 Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19)........................31 6..............................54 6............... 119 PWB Box ...................4..... 127 Color PC Drum Motor (M5).........51 6........................................... 104 LPH Unit ..........................3..........................2 6.................. 126 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103)........................ 130 K PC Motor (M7).....5 6..................4 6...................... 131 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11).....................Field Service Ver.. 136 Cleaning Brush Motor (M22).. 125 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) ....3.4..................3...............................46 Adjustment / Setting 6..3........... 124 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4)....33 6........... 106 Scanner Motor (M201)..............................................3....................3............................3.43 6... 128 Color Developing Motor (M6).................1 6......49 6...3..... 125 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) ..... 3........................... 151 General 6..............................................................................................................................3...................................37 6.50 6.................................3......................3..........................................3.........................................................................41 Maintenance 6............................................. 111 Scanner Drive Cables .. 149 Tray 2 Pick-up Roller..................................3...0 Aug.........3.....................40 6...4...4 Cleaning procedure ....................................... 112 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables .......................................30 6........3.............................................................................................. 142 TCR Sensor Y/M/C (PWB-N1/-N2/-N3) ...... 139 IDC/Registration Sensor/1....................4........3............... 147 Tray 1 Separation Roller ........................................................................................... 114 PWB Unit ....................................4...7 6...8 iv ....... 132 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13).......................... 149 Tray 2 Separation Roller ......... 102 Multi Bypass Unit ....4............................ 148 Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller..........55 6................................ 123 Fusing Drive Motor (M2) ...........48 6........................................29 6.....................................................44 6.............................53 Troubleshooting 6.................... 147 Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller.................. 148 Bypass Tray Separation Roller................3................... 120 Main Motor (M1) .......................................2 (PC8/PC9)........42 6.... 133 Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) .........................................................3...............................39 6..............................................3.............................................................35 Inverter Board (PU201)........ 109 Scanner Assy.........................3..............3...................... 103 Toner Hopper Unit.............................................................. 141 LPH......45 6.............. 2006 bizhub C351/C450 6...... 149 Tray 2 Transport Roller.........3......................................................3....................34 6..............52 6.....3........................................32 6...............................3.............................. 147 Appendix 6...........................6 6............3...............................28 6....38 6........4................. 123 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) ...........................................3......................................3 6................

..6 8.....................1 8....5............... 160 Utility Mode function tree .... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 6.....................................................1 6............2 8............................1 8................................................................ 214 One-Touch Registration ........ 182 Scanner Setting .........................................................................6............................5..........3 8..5 8..................................... 161 Utility Mode function setting procedure......................................................................................2 8..............................2 8.................................1 8...... 175 Display Setting ............................................3. 170 Procedure ....................................3..6............................ 172 User Box ...........................10 6..................................5.......................................................13 6......................................4..........................................6 Scanner Rail ...................................................................4 8....7 8... 160 Touch Panel Adj.......................... 152 CCD Sensor.................................................4...........................................3 8..5.................................................................................................................. 190 Change E-Mail Address .................................................... 159 Utility Mode ........................... 220 Network Setting................................. 157 6..........4............................................................................0 Aug................ 224 8..............4.........................................1 8.....................3 8................................ 171 User Setting .......... 156 Installation of The Counter/K .......................... 8.............................................................. 191 v ........................................................2 8............................................................................................Field Service Ver........ 152 Original Glass . 185 Printer Setting .......................................3............12 6.......6..............2 Adjustment/Setting 7.............................................................................5.................................................................................................................. 170 Exiting ..........5 6..............................9 6.............................................................................4................5.....................................1 8................................ 156 Installation method for the Key Counter ................ 171 Fax ..3 How to use the adjustment section ........................................................................... 153 Mount the original size detecting sensor FD2 (PC204) ..3 8....... 178 Initial Setting ...............................................................................5 One-Touch Registration ..........2 8........................................................................6.....................................5 8................... 151 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) ........................................ 174 System Setting................ 170 Scan...................................4..................6 8........4 8.....4.................4 8...... 151 Lens .......4.............................................................. 154 Option counter ..11 6.......5....6........ 214 User Authentication/Account Track ....6...............8 8........................................................................................................ 182 Copier Setting .................................................................... 185 Change Password . ................................................. 175 Administrator Setting .............................................................. 3..5................. 8... 191 Administrator/Machine Setting ...................... 190 System Setting......................6. 170 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions.....

...................7 9................ 292 Scan Area ...6.................................... 307 D Max Density ................................................................................................................................................8 10..8 10........................... 312 vi ..........5 10.....1 Date/Time Input mode screen ..................9 10......4 10............................................ 278 Adjustment item list................................................................................................... 253 Fax Setting................6................4.................................................................6............................................................6 Imaging Process Adjustment................................. 303 10...........................4....................4 Machine.............................................. 301 LPH Rank .............Field Service Ver......4........................10 TCR Toner Supply ..........................2 Service Mode function tree...... Detecting Sensor Adj.......................... 282 General 10.............................................................4...........6.........13 Cooling Fan Speed ................................................................. 290 Fusing Transport Speed.....9 10............................. 284 10.............................................................................................................6............................. 304 10......................................................5 Firmware Version.......................... 289 10............................................7 8.... 291 Org................ 280 Service Mode .........8 8.. 268 Security Setting.......................................4 10.......................6...................................................................... 300 Color Registration Adjustment ......... 312 Thin Paper Duplex Mode ....................................................................................... 312 Appendix 10..... 305 10................................................................. 254 System Connection....................... 288 Fusing Nip........................................................................ 252 Printer Setting ............................................ 288 10.7 10......... 309 TCR Level Setting.....................4............................................ 10................................................4............................ . 310 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment .3 10......4......................................10 LPH Chip Adjust ....... 269 Banner Printing.......................4............................................11 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment................................1 10.....................7 Adjustment / Setting Maintenance 10...........................................3 10....................................6.................................................6.........6....6.......................6 10.......5 Gradation Adjust ................................12 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment ..............................................6.................................................. 305 10.3.........................6........................4...6....................... 291 Printer Area.. 289 Fusing Temperature...................................... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 8..................2 10.............................................................................. 306 10.................................4................... 282 10....... 3............................................................................4..............................................3 Date/Time Input mode.............................1 Service Mode function setting procedure ......... 305 Troubleshooting 10..........................9 8...........6...................................6... 311 Thick Paper Density Adjustment....................................................4.................................. Copier Setting ..............0 Aug.............................. 296 Printer Resist Loop ..6 10...............1 10....... 306 Transfer Belt............................................................... 309 Background Voltage Margin..................................................10 8.................6 8.......... 305 10..................................................... 310 Stabilizer ........4.....................2 10.........................

............... 333 Serial Number ...........................10..................... 322 Detail on settings ..........6 10.......6 10.....9..................................8 10.. 3.........................7............................. 336 10..................................... 335 Communication System Setting ......................10 Data Capture..... 340 10................................................................................9....................................... 328 10..........6......9.................................10 Counter ...............................8.....................2 10................................... 334 Original Size Detection ............................. 334 Initialization ............................................................... 333 10.................... 343 10......................... 332 10................................ 339 10.............................................................. 317 Setup confirmation .9..........................3 10...............................................................4 10................................. 313 10..................... 343 vii ...........................................9................7.............1 Procedure ............................................................................................................................2 Life ........................3 10.................1 10.7..9 Outlines ........................ 314 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care ..........4 10......................... 313 10..........................8 10..........................................10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care .........7...................... 337 Option Board Status.............................................. 322 Calling the Center from the Administrator ...................................................................... 339 Line Mag Setting ..................................................................................................6 10......9............................... 333 Tel/Fax Number ........3 10......................... 336 HDD ..............................9 System 2.8.....7....................................................9 Marketing Area............................... 314 Setting Up the CS Remote Care ........9....... 322 Checking the transmission log ...6....10..7...... 322 Calling the Maintenance ...............................................7 10.................9............................1 10........................7 10.............................................................................11 Network Fax Settings ........................................................0 Aug...8 10...............................................8 System 1.8....5 10........................................................................................................................................ Bias Choice ............................................ 338 Software Switch Setting .......8...11 Monochrome Density Adjustment .....................................1 10.....................................9 10.............................2 10...............Field Service Ver.......2 10..................... 339 Scan Caribration ...8................................................ 342 10.....................7 10.......8...8................................................. 339 LCT Paper Size Setting.................................................. 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 10.......................................................9............. 314 10... 335 Install Date ...................................................7.......9......................... 333 No Sleep ...... 323 List of the CS Remote Care error code....................7...4 10......................................................... 338 Consumable Life Reminder.....................9..................................... 336 Image Controller Setting ................................. 334 Foolscap Size Setting ...............7..........................5 10..........................8.......................... 343 10...........................................................................................................8........7......7 CS Remote Care ....12 Dev....................... 338 Unit Change ....5 10..........................................................................................................................................

..11 List Output .....................6 Color Sample ............... 346 10.......................................11 Paper Jam History .........4 Service Call Counter..... 344 10......... 346 10.................. 364 10.....................12..............................................................13...11............13. 344 10.................................7 Memory / HDD Adj.............................................................................2 Adjustment List ........ 358 10............................................................................... 346 10................10.......10 IU Lot No......4 Level History2 .......................... 357 10..........................................................1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output ............................6 Maintenance .12.............................12..........................................8 Counter of Each Mode...........................................5 Warning ............Field Service Ver...... 346 10.............................................................. & Humidity................... 363 10............................................................................. 365 viii .................................5 Protocol Trace.....................13.................................................................. 362 10..........10.........12.....4 Service Parameter .......... 344 10....................................................... 361 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting 10.................9 Service Call History (Data) ........................... 356 10..............................10..................5 Solid Pattern ..... 346 Maintenance 10..................12 Fax Connection failed ................................. 345 10.................................................................................... 344 10...........7 8 Color Solid Pattern...... 361 10..............................................................6 CCD Check................................................................. 347 10.........................12....13...............................................12............................13.......0 Aug.................... 363 10..10.2 Gradation Pattern ...............................10 ADF Paper Pages .......11....................................... 346 10....................................................... 362 10........10......1 Sensor Check .........................................10........................ 2006 bizhub C351/C450 10.......................................12 State Confirmation........................................................................................................ 357 10................................. 362 10.............................12.............................................6 Fax Setting List .13...............................13................................................11......................................................................... 3......................................................................................................... 361 10................................................ 345 10.................................4 Lattice Pattern..........3 Parameter List............ 346 10....................2 Table Number .................... 345 General 10......................... 345 10...............................................12 Adjustment Data List....................................................................10.11.............11..............................9 Color Regist .................................................5 Temp............................ 345 10.................................................................3 Level History1 ............13 Test Mode .....12...................................................................................................................................... 362 Appendix 10................................... 347 10.........11...........................................................10....................... 361 10.... 357 10. 345 10..................................3 Halftone Pattern.........................................12............................................................................1 Machine Management List...........................3 Jam ....................7 Service Total ............................12. 364 10..........................................................11 LPH Status........ 357 10....................................................8 Memory/HDD State ..10...............................10......12..........12.......

Enhanced Security ...... 382 13........................... 382 13.......2 HTTP Setting ..... 370 11........................................ 383 14................................................. 367 10.............................................................................. 365 10............5 Download ............................... 372 CE Authentication ............................... 366 10............3...............................15 FAX ..........................................3 13........................................................ 366 10............. 382 14....................................................................1 Internet ISW Set.................... 383 ix .............................................................................. 366 10...... 370 11......1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure ........................... 370 11......................2 12.0 Aug............................................................. 369 10..............4 Forwarding Access Setting ................................. 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 10.........................................................................................1 11. 370 Exiting ..................3 Settings in the Enhanced Security...........................1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure ...................................3 11.................................................................................................................................................... 366 10....................1.................. 368 10.... Mechanical adjustment ....1.............................2 Procedure ....................... Counter Setting ............ 371 Administrator Feature Level . 3...................1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt ...........................................3 Settings in the Billing Setting ..................................1 Trouble resetting ............................................................................................1..............................8 LPH Pattern................................................................13....3...........3 FTP Setting ............................... 371 Administrator Password ............2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function............. 372 NVRAM Data Backup...................9 Running Mode.............................. 370 11.............................1......................................2 Procedure ........17........................................................................... 374 12...1...16 Finisher ......................................... 374 12..3..................... 383 14.......................................1 12...................................5 11...........................................................17..........................2 11.......... 365 10.. 374 12...3................................................................1 11..................................14 ADF ...............17 Internet ISW....................................................... CE Password............. 371 11.......................................................... 369 11.................................. 375 12............1 12..................... 375 Management Function Choice ............................. 372 IU Life Stop Setting ................................Field Service Ver.......................13.............................................................17...................................................... 381 Procedure for Resetting .....................3.................4 11........... 366 10..................3.......................................... 373 Billing Setting .............................................................................................................................................................1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section.........17.....................17..........3....................13............................................................3......................................................................3........................................................................... 374 12.................................................................10 Fax Test...................2 Billing Setting Function Tree ................ 374 Exiting ........................................... 376 Coverage Rate Clear . 366 10........6 12..............................2 Enhanced Security Function Tree...........................................................................................................................................................

.................. .1 Alert list.............. 2nd Image Transfer..............................3.....4 16....................2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit........ Fusing Misfeed ....11 P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure ........................................ 403 16.1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit .. 402 Troubleshooting 16.....................3...................... 402 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure ...............................................7 15...........................................6 Adjustment / Setting Maintenance 15............................. Malfunction code.......2......................3 Solution ................3.. 391 Tray 1 take-up....3..............................................Field Service Ver.......................................9 16............. 398 Fusing/Exit Misfeed............................. 403 P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure........... 389 15..................1 Misfeed Display ............1 Restarting ....2 Alert code .............. 3.....3........... 396 Tray 4 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC202).................................................................................................................................................................................1 16.......................... 387 15.......12 P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure......... Multiple Bypass take-up ...................................3... 402 P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure........... 404 16........ 384 14........2 15................................. 403 P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure ..... ....10 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure..................... 400 16....... 387 15..............3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section .............................3 15.................................8 Appendix 16.................1.......................................3.... 391 15..........2.........................3.......................... 385 Troubleshooting 15................. 397 Duplex Transport Misfeed ...3..........3........................3........................................................ 404 x ........................................................3....... 389 System Mounted with PC-202.......2 Sensor layout...............2...... 390 Initial Check Items .......... 399 15..............................................4 15............5 16....... 388 System Mounted with PC-402...3 Solution ........3..............5 15............................................7 16..................... 404 16.......... 395 Tray 3 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-102/PC202) ............. 403 P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure....................... 401 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure.................................. Vertical Transport..................................................................... 400 16........... 403 P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure ...... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 14................ 393 LCT Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-402) ......................................8 16.....................................3.......................................... General Jam Display.........................2 Scanner Position Adjustment ....................................................................... 385 14.. 384 14......................... 403 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure................0 Aug.................3 16..................3.......... 392 Tray 2 take-up....................3..........................3..............................................................................................2 16................... 402 P-5: IDC Sensor (Front) failure ..................... 400 16.....................................................................1 15.....................................................................3...3............1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure......................................................................3....3............1.2 15...............................1 15.......................6 16..........

..1 16.......... 435 16..5 How to reset........23 C3461: New Fusing Unit resetting failure............. 3.............4 16......6.......................... 435 16......6.27 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor .......5 16................6.............6 Solution....... 439 xi ....6.6...6......... 432 16..........................7 16..17 C2256: Color Developing Motor turning at abnormal timing ..6... 405 16......3 16.........6.Field Service Ver.......6......... 438 16.........6...... 431 C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure........... 430 16........... 433 16....4............................31 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor........6.....................................................6........................................... 430 C0211: Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure ...........11 C2164: PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction..............................0 Aug...........14 C2253: Color PC Motor’s failure to turn ............................................ 432 C2161: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction.............. 439 16... 432 C2160: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction ....... 405 16..............................6...............................6.............................20 C2351: Toner Suction Fan Motor/K’s failure to turn ...........................14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction ........3............. 431 C0351: Paper Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn ......18 C2257: Cleaning Brush Motor’s failure to turn ..9 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure ..4 Trouble code .....................6...... 437 16..6.. 433 16..6 16................24 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor.....8 16................... 431 C2152: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure................. 436 16.....13 C2252: K PC Motor turning at abnormal timing ...... 435 16....10 C2163: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction ... 437 16..16 C2255: Color Developing Motor’s failure to turn ... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16............19 C2258: Cleaning Brush Motor Turning at abnormal timing ..... 432 16.6.... 404 16....... 436 16..... 438 16.......12 C2251: K PC Motor’s failure to turn ....6...................6... 438 16.....................6..6..........26 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor...........................................................6............. 434 16.....2 16...... 438 16.....6.30 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor .................................6.....6.......6...6.........6.......................................................15 C2254: Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing ...............21 C2352: Toner Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn ..................6...............................32 C2559: Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure .................................29 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor ....... 434 16..................22 C2451: New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure ...... 432 16...3............................................25 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor .............. 434 16...... 404 16.............................. 430 C0301: Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn...... 432 C2162: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction...........................................1 Trouble code list ............. 436 16.................6................ 437 16............................6...............6.........................................13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction ................ 433 16.........................28 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor ........... 429 16.............................

.....................6.....64 C4782: Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure .......... 444 16.. 442 Maintenance 16........................ 443 16........... 445 16................. 440 16............6.. 2006 bizhub C351/C450 16....49 C3451: Heating Roller warm-up failure........................................................ 439 16.....................47 C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1’s failure to turn...........65 C4783: Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure ..............58 C4770: JBIG0 Error ..46 C3202: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing .........6................ 442 16................. 444 16.....38 C2653: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error........6..... 442 16.....52 C3752: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature............6.........................57 C4765: Extraction hardware timeout ............. 440 16........................ 439 16........................61 C4773: JBIG3 Error ........................69 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn ..................................................51 C3751: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature............................. 444 16....... 444 Appendix 16......39 C2654: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error ........................ 441 16..................36 C2651: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error ........................................6...........0 Aug.41 C2656: Yellow LPH correction data download failure ....50 C3452: Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure ....................... 444 Troubleshooting 16....... 443 16............6............... 443 Adjustment / Setting 16.6.6..54 C3852: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature ...35 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure......33 C255A: Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure........................ 444 16....6............................68 C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn . 446 16................... 444 16................. 441 16....6..........................................................................6........... 444 16..................55 C4705: Printer Time Out......................... /3’s failure to turn......................6................6.........6................60 C4772: JBIG2 Error ...6............... 443 16............................................................................... 444 16...........6....62 C4780: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure .......42 C2657: Magenta LPH correction data download failure .............. 445 16..... 441 16... 444 16.......... 441 16......6..........37 C2652: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error...63 C4781: Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure .......... 3..........6...........................................................45 C3201: Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn ....................6...................................................6....43 C2658: Black LPH correction data download failure............6...6.........6.......... 440 16.6........................................44 C3101: Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure ..6...48 C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2.............. 443 16......................6...6....67 C5103: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing...Field Service Ver... 440 16....56 C4761: Compression hardware timeout ........66 C5102: Main Motor’s failure to turn......... 443 16................6............ 440 16....................34 C255B: Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure...40 C2655: Cyan LPH correction data download failure ...... 443 16...................53 C3851: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature ...................6..................... 441 General 16.....6.........6.....6... 446 xii .....6...................59 C4771: JBIG1 Error .6.6......... 444 16........6..........

........................................................ 450 16.......................................... 450 16.......... 451 16........................6.......... 447 16..........6.... 448 16.................6.....94 CD008: Hard Disk Error 4 ...................98 CD00C: Hard Disk Error 8 ...........78 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure ...........6..................... 452 16.....................................6................................... 449 16.............6................................... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16.......... 451 16........... 452 16.................. 452 16.......6........................6. 446 16...........103 CD010: Hard disk unformat .......93 CD007: Hard Disk Error 3 . 452 16....104 CD011: Hard disk specifications error ...............................................................75 C6103: Scanner overrun failure ................................................. 452 16...80 C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing ............91 CD005: Hard Disk Error 1 ................. 451 16........ 452 16......................................6......................6..........................................................0 Aug.................................................... 452 16.....................6.6..........6.............................. 3................. 451 16.........................6...............6................6............6......6..6.. 450 16.........................6............. 452 16.. 452 16............................. 450 16..........6........................................102 CD020: Hard disk verify error............105 CD201: File memory mounting error........................................76 C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn ..97 CD00B: Hard Disk Error 7.............99 CD00D: Hard Disk Error 9 ........6................106 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy ..................................90 CD004: Hard disk access error ...............84 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) .........6........ 452 16........74 C6102: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction.............6....... 449 16...........................82 CC001: Vendor connection failure ...........96 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6........... 447 16................100 CD00E: Hard Disk Error A .......................................................................77 C6704: Scanner Time Out ........... 448 16...........................6...................... 448 16......Field Service Ver.............81 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure..............83 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC).............................................................. 451 16..........................86 CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (LPH).............. 451 16.........6................79 C9401: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON ....................................................6.. 447 16.6..85 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT)............72 C5356: Cooling Fan Motor/1’s failure to turn............71 C5355: Cooling Fan Motor/3’s failure to turn...101 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error....... 453 xiii ..................6..................6.............................................................................88 CD001: Hard disk initialization abnormality .89 CD002: JOB RAM save error............ 452 16.............. 453 16..........92 CD006: Hard Disk Error 2 ...........6...................... 452 16............... 453 16.......6....6........ 451 16.......... 452 16.....................................6....6......73 C5370: MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn . 452 16.................................................................................6.......................................87 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) ...............6.....70 C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn...........95 CD009: Hard Disk Error 5 ....

.............. 455 General 16..................1.............. 453 16..118 CEEE2: Scanner Section undefined malfunction ...2..........................................6.......6.................112 CD241: Encryption board setting error ...................... 458 16..................................................................2 How to identify problematic part ................................2 Control panel indicators do not light............ 462 18.......... 3.........117 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring .........................3 Fusing Heaters do not operate ... .............................107 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 ..... 454 16................... white bands in Sub Scan Direction.....6............................. 454 16................3.......1 18..............3.....1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check) .........................1 17..........................................................4 Power is not supplied to ADF ...... 464 Initial Check Items ... 463 Level History 2 ...........2 Table Number . 462 Level History 1 ..... 453 16.......................3................6 Power is not supplied to option.............109 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure..........3 18...........................6...................................... 458 17....................................................................1................................................................. 459 17.......6.............1 18.........................................................1........... 460 17.....................................................6.... 468 Scanner System: color spots ..116 CE002: Message and Method parameter failure ......5 xiv ....3................ 457 16....................... 461 17.................................... 467 18............. 461 Adjustment / Setting Image quality problem.........114 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting ..............................108 CD204: Expanded memory unit not mounted at JScribe able............................................................. 460 17.111 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting .......... 471 18................... 467 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction..........6.................................................................... blotchy image.............. Power supply trouble......................2 18.3........................... 465 18..... 2006 bizhub C351/C450 16........................... 454 16......................................................... and colored bands in Main Scan Direction......4 18.........3 Solution ...............................2 Appendix 18.....................6..................................................................................................6...................... 459 Maintenance 17..... 457 16............... Optional paper feed cabinet..... colored lines in Sub Scan Direction......................................... 465 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction........................ 454 16............................................6...................................... 459 17.....115 CD3##: NVRAM Data error .......0 Aug.........3 18....................................................... 461 Finisher ...............5 Power is not supplied to duplex ......................119 CEEE3: Engine Section undefined malfunction................................. 456 16...... and colored bands in Sub Scan Direction ...... 460 17.Field Service Ver................. colored lines in Main Scan Direction..................................................... 454 16....... white bands in Main Scan Direction.........................1 18............. 469 Scanner System: fog ...........................................................113 CD242: Encryption board mounting error ...........................6.......6..............................................6......... 462 Troubleshooting 18.....6.....1 How to read element date .....................6....................... 470 Scanner System: blurred image...........................................................110 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection...................

..29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction...............3..... 506 xv ...... colored lines in sub scan direction. 489 18.............................3...... black copy ....3..........22 Printer Monocolor: blurred image... rough image .................... 476 18..21 Printer Monocolor: colored spots ..................... colored bands in Main Scan Direction ...........................9 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration......7 18...... and colored bands in main scan direction.5-mm-pitch uneven image ............................18 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure ..... 482 18.....................34 Printer 4-Color: void areas.................... 492 18..... offset.............3.......................25 Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image ...........................36 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance. 505 18....... colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction..........10 Scanner System: low image density........... 473 Scanner System: skewed image................ white bands in Main Scan Direction....................33 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration ..... 503 18........ 490 18....3...............................13 Scanner System: abnormal image......3......................16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction........23 Printer Monocolor: blank copy..........3.3.3...32 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction.... white spots ........24 Printer Monocolor: 0...3.......... 493 18........3....................... white bands in sub scan direction....................................................... 483 18.............. 497 18..........3... white bands in Sub Scan Direction............ 472 Scanner System: moire....... 3......19 Printer Monocolor: foggy background ........ 498 18.......................... colored lines in Main Scan Direction.............. sync shift (lines in main scan direction)...........................3..37 Printer 4-Color: brush effect............ 481 18............ 480 18........................3.3.................. white spots ...3. 494 18.................8 18....................................... 496 18...................3.....3....3..................15 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction.............................. blurred image....................3.............................6 18..................................30 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction.... 499 18.................. 487 18.....................20 Printer Monocolor: void areas.. 501 18.....................11 Scanner System: defective ACS .......................................................................................... 475 18...................... black copy ........27 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction....3.....................3.............26 Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image ....12 Scanner System: blank copy.....3......... and colored bands in sub scan direction ...35 Printer 4-Color: colored spots ........... colored lines in main scan direction......................... 485 18............3............3.. 502 18.......................................................17 Printer Monocolor: low image density .........28 Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction..................Field Service Ver.. 504 18..... 495 18.............................31 Printer 4-Color: low image density ....3....... 491 18.............. 2006 bizhub C351/C450 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 18...............................................3.14 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction............ 474 Scanner System: distorted image ........ 479 18............................. white bands in main scan direction.....................................................3.... 477 18....... white lines in Main Scan Direction...............................3........ 500 18.........3......................3..............................................3.....0 Aug... 478 18.......

.....................................2 1-sided mode ...............................1 21................ 521 19.............................................6 FS-603 (Option)..................... 511 IR section....2..............................................1... 534 21... 511 General 19.........................................................................................................................................................................40 Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image......................Field Service Ver.............1 Main unit.. 520 Duplex section ......... 531 Timing chart .........1 Main unit..........3........39 Printer 4-Color: 204-mm-pitch uneven image...4 FS-507 (Option).............. 534 21...................5 JS-601 (Option) .............................................................. 507 18...................................................................... 527 19....................................................... 21...........2 PC102/PC202 (Option) ............... 524 19........3.......................................................................................................1................. 513 Tray 1 ...6 19............................................ 539 Appendix Troubleshooting xvi .................. 509 Appendix 19.......................3 19...................................................................................................3 PC-402 (Option) .......................2 19.......... Connector layout drawing ...................................................................................1 ADF section .5 19................................................................................................ 529 19................................ 535 Mixed original detection mode ..................4 19........................1........................................ 508 18......................... 523 19.................8 Horizontal Transport Unit............................................................. 535 21.................................................................1.............. 522 Maintenance 19....................................1..... 530 Adjustment / Setting 20.................. Parts layout drawing...................................... 519 Tray 2 ..................................................................................................... 526 19........................... 511 19............. 2006 bizhub C351/C450 18.....3............................... 512 Engine section ..................................38 Printer 4-Color: back marking...........................................................................................................1...............7 PK-501 (Option) ..................................................................................2 Automatic Document Feeder .............................. 3...0 Aug..............2.................................................................

System configuration bizhub C351/C450 [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] 4037F1J602DA General 1. 3. 2006 1.Field Service Ver. 1 [10] System configuration [11] [12] 1/2 System Front View [9] [1] [8] [7] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Machine Working Table WT-501 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-202 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-102 Desk DK-501 Paper Feed Cabinet PC-402 [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Finisher FS-507 Job Separator JS-601 Finisher FS-603 Punch Kit PK-501 Automatic Document Feeder DF-601 *1 Original Cover OC-501 *1 *1: bizhub C351 only 1 General .0 Aug.

3. System configuration bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 2006 2/2 System Rear View 2 [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [1] [15] General [2] [3] [4] [5] [7] PC-102 PC-202 PC-402 DK-501 [6] 4037F1E603DB [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Machine Scan Accelerator Kit SA-501 Fax Kit FK-502 Mount Kit MK-703 Mount Kit MK-704 Dehumidifier Heater 1C Image Controller IC-402 Expanded Memory Unit EM-306 [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Video Interface Kit VI-502 Fax Multi Line ML-501 Local Interface Kit EK-702 Mechanical Counter MC-501 Key Counter Kit KIT-1 Security Kit SC-503 Vender Kit VK-501 2 [8] 2 .1.

Type Product specifications Desktop/Console scanner/printer Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Tandem-type indirect electrostatic recording system OPC (organic photo conductor) Equivalent to 600 dpi White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction × 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction Stationary (mirror scan) Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD (one-shot reading system) Rear left edge Multiple Bypass: 150 sheets Tray 1: 250 sheets Tray 2: 500 sheets Four-LED exposure HMT developing system DC comb electrode Scorotron system with electrode cleaning function (manual) Intermediate transfer belt system A.Field Service Ver. Type Copying System Printing Process PC Drum Type Scanning Density Exposure Lamp Print Density Platen Original Scanning Registration Paper Feeding System (Standard) Three-way system Exposure System Developing System Charging System Image Transfer System Paper Separating System Selecting either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding + low-pressure paper separator claws Fusing System Belt fusing 3 General . 3. Product specifications bizhub C351/C450 2.0 Aug. 2006 2.

000 Metric Area: ×0. Functions Types of Original Max. ×1. Original Size Multiple Copies Warm-up Time Image Loss First Copy Time Sheets. or less 8. and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 × 17 1 to 999 99 sec.414. 2-sided: 31 copies/min. books.001 increments Fixed Zoom Ratios Full size Reduction Enlargement Variable Zoom Ratios ×0. Color print 1-sided: 35 copies/min.4 °F and rated source voltage) Leading edge: 4. ×0. A4.545.866 Inch Area: ×0.214.2. Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch). Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch). 3.733.707. ×1. 2-sided: 31 copies/min.154.. ×0. 2-sided: 37 copies/min.785 Metric Area: ×1.816.5 sec. ×0. ×0. full size) Monochrome print Color print Copying Speed for Multicopy Cycle (A4.8 sec. ×1.250 to ×4.000 Inch Area: ×1.5 sec. 2006 B.000 in 0. or less (at ambient temperature of 23 °C/73.2 mm (3/16 inch).294. or less General 1 1 bizhub C450 1-sided: 45 copies/min.000 4 . 8-1/2 × 11) bizhub C450 5.500.500. ×2. ×1.647... Product specifications bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Monochrome print bizhub C351 1-sided: 35 copies/min. ×2. ×0. ×0. ×1.0 Aug. or less bizhub C351 6. Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch) (Tray 1.224.

75 to 42.5 lb) Max. Maintenance 1 Machine Durability bizhub C450: 1. : Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb) and thick paper 1 to 3 is reliably fed.25 to 55.000.1 × 457. 3. 2006 C. 2 1 Optional Paper Feed Cabinet : Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m (16 to 24 lb) Automatic Duplex Unit and thick paper 1 to 3 is reliably fed. whichever is earlier bizhub C351: 800. D.7 mm 3 1/2 × 5 1/2 inches 210 to 297 mm × 1200 mm or less 1 Long Size Paper (127 to 160 g/m2 / 33.000 prints or 5 years.000 prints or 5 years.1 × 457. Product specifications bizhub C351/C450 Paper Source Tray 1 ❍ – Tray 2 ❍ – – Multiple Bypass ❍ – ❍ (20 sheets or less) Paper type ❍ (20 sheets or less) ❍ (150 sheets or less) ❍ (10 sheets or less) ❍ (20 sheets or less) ❍ 311.2 mm 12 1/4 × 18 inches 90 × 139.7 mm 3 1/2 × 5 1/2 inches – – – – 2. whichever is earlier 5 General .75 to 68 lb) *1 Postcards Envelopes Labels ❍ (10 sheets or less) ❍ (20 sheets or less) – 311.2 mm 12 1/4 × 18 inches 90 × 139. (width × length) Long Size Paper (width × length) – 297 × 432 mm 11 × 17 inches 140 × 182 mm 5 1/2 × 8 1/2 inches – 1 *1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used.0 Aug.5 lb) Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2 / 55. Types of Paper Type Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb) Translucent paper OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only) Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2 / 24.Field Service Ver. (width × length) Paper dimensions Min.25 to 40 lb) Thick paper 2 (151 to 209 g/m2 / 40.

0 (SP6a) MacOS 9. 127 V.1) Emulation PostScript 3 Emulation (3011) Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction × 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction PCL PS Server Latin 80 Fonts Latin 136 Fonts Windows NT 4. Machine Specifications Power Requirements Voltage: Frequency: Max Power Consumption Dimensions Space Requirements Mass AC 110 V. Print Functions Type CPU RAM HDD Interface Supported Protocols Print Speed (A4. 1 Levelness 1 G. F. 3.2 or later or MacOS X 10.3 Print Resolution Printer Fonts Supported Operating Systems Client 6 .0 Hz Less than 1500 W (120 V. IPX/SPX. Product specifications bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.75 (H) inches 1014 (W) × 765 (D) mm *2 40 (W) × 30 (D) inches *2 Approx.5 lb (without IU) General *2: The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully extend the bypass tray. USB 2. Windows Me. or Server 2003 Windows 98 Second Edition. 2000. 120 V. 125 kg / 275.2.5 x 11) Built-in type controller PPC750FX 600 MHz 512 MB (Shared with the Main Unit) 40 GB (Shared with the Main Unit) Standard Option Ethernet (10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX) USB 1.0 Aug. AppleTalk (EtherTalk) Monochrome print Color print bizhub C450: 45 pages/min (1-sided/2-sided) bizhub C351: 35 pages/min (1-sided/2-sided) 35 pages/min (1-sided/2-sided) Printer Driver PCL5e/c Emulation PCL6 (XL 2.1.0. Windows 2000. 220-240 V 50/60 Hz ± 3. or IEEE 1284 TCP/IP. NetBEUI. 8.75 (W) × 30 (D) × 35. 12 A / 220 . right and left should be 1 degree or under. 2006 E. Windows NT 4.240 V. Operating Environment Temperature Humidity 10 to 30 °C / 50 to 86 °F (with a fluctuation of 10 °C / 18 °F or less per hour) 15 to 85 % (with a fluctuation of 20 %/h) Difference between front and back. Windows XP.2 or 10. 8 A) 706 (W) × 765 (D) × 908 (H) mm 27.0.

Field Service Ver. 3. 2006 1 2. Scan to SMB. A4) Same as the copier (Max.0 Aug. Windows XP 38 pages/min. Product specifications bizhub C351/C450 H. . A3) Scan to E-Mail. Scan to FTP. Scan to BOX 200/300/400/600 dpi 7 General NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.0 (SP6 or later). Scan Functions Driver Compatible Operating Systems Scan Speed Scannable Range Functions Resolution KONICA MINOLTA Scanner Driver Windows 98/98SE/Me. Windows NT 4. for both monochrome and full color (600 dpi. Windows 2000.

3.0 Aug. Product specifications bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.2. 2006 General Blank Page 8 .

0 Aug.000 FS-603 ● ● ● Main body 3.000 FS-603 Number 12 15 18 20 24 30 36 40 42 45 48 54 60 66 72 75 78 of times ● ● ● 6 ● Main body 9 Maintenance .000 PC-102 PC-202 300.000 prints) Per cycle × 10.000 200. 2006 3.1 3.000) 150.000) 150.000 PC-102 PC-202 300.000.1.000-print Number × print of times 6 12 15 18 20 24 30 36 40 42 45 48 54 60 66 72 75 78 80 84 90 96 number Upon each call ● ● (60.1.000 PC-402 FS-507 300.000 300.000 300.1 Periodical check Service schedule bizhub C450 Guarantee period (5-year or 1.000-print ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 13 5 3 2 2 2 Maintenance 3.2 bizhub C351 Guarantee period (5-year or 800.000 PC-402 FS-507 300. 3.000 prints) Per cycle × print number Upon each call (60.000 200.Field Service Ver. 3. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 16 6 4 3 3 3 × 10.

5 K 11. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.5 K 11.2 No. 2006 3.5 K 30 K When IU is replaced ● ● ● ● ● ● *2 *2 Clean Replace Descriptions ● ● ● *1 *1 Maintenance *1: The Imaging Unit K and Dust filter are the Kit parts.2. Roller and Roll DUP Roller 10 .2. *2: The TC K and Deodorant filter are the Kit parts. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ADF section 12 13 Duplex section Transport section Maintenance call (per 60. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Maintenance items Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) Class Parts to be replaced Imaging Unit C/M/Y Imaging Unit K Dust filter Processing sections Comb electrode Toner cartridge: TC (TC Y/TC M/TC C) Toner cartridge: TC (TC K) Deodorant filter Image Transfer section LPH section Waste Toner Box LPH Assy Cycle 50 K 100 K 100 K When TC is replaced 11.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Registration Roller Paper Dust Remover Transport Roller 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide Lubrica.3.2 3. 3.0 Aug. 3.DescripNumber of Check Clean Replace tion tions personnel ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Overall Image TransAround waste toner port fer section LPH section LPH Assy Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Transport Belt.1 No.

Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 150.3 No.0 Aug. 2006 3.2.2.4 No.2. Roll Transport route. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance Replace those three parts at the same time. Guide Sensor PC-102 PC-202 10 PC-402 9 11 FS-507 12 FS-603 13 11 . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 200.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Lubrica.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Paper Dust Remover 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit Ozone Filter 1 1 1 Number of Lubrica.Image Transfer Belt fer section Unit Fusing section Fusing Unit Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Paper Feed Roller.5 No.Field Service Ver. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tray 2 Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 300.DescripNumber of Check Clean Replace tion tions personnel ● ● 1 1 2 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● Overall Tray 1 Bypass Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Pick-up Roller ADF section Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller 3.DescripCheck Clean Replace personnel tion tions ● ● ● ● ● ● Overall 3. 1 2 3 4 5 Transport section Processing section 3. 3.000-print) Class Parts to be replaced Paper take-up and image conditions Appearance Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● Number of LubriCheck Clean Replace Descriptions personnel cation ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Overall Image Trans.

16 P. it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed.3.38 P.5 K 300 K 30 K 200 K 200 K 200 K P.29 Maintenance 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 300 K 50 K 100 K 150 K 11.0 Aug.17 P.3.19 P. *2: Also replace the Dust filter packed in the black imaging unit at the same time when 100 K is reached. • Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter. Main unit No.36 P. • Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 1/2 × 11.26 11 12 Processing 13 section 14 15 Image transfer 16 section 17 18 19 4582 3022 ## Replace those 4582 3014 ## three parts at the ADF 4582 3047 ## same time.21 P. 4021 3012 ## 4034 0151 ## 4131 3001 ## 4034 0151 ## 4030 3005 ## 4030 3005 ## 4030 0151 ## 1483 0762 ## 4049-411 4049 522 *4 4049 523 *5 4049 524 *6 ⎯ ⎯ 1483 0757 ## ⎯ 4049 212 4049 111 Dust filter *2 Descriptions Ref. *4: 220-240 V areas only.3 Maintenance parts • To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life.38 P. 3.19 P.25 P. *5: 120 V/127 V areas only.27 Deodorant filter *3 P.23 P.38 P. *1: Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value.5 K is reached. 1 2 3 4 Classification Tray 1 Bypass Parts name Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Pick-up Roller Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Transport 2nd Image Transfer section Roller Unit Fusing section Fusing Unit Imaging Unit C/M/Y Imaging Unit K Ozone Filter Toner Cartridge (YMCK) Image Transfer Belt Unit Waste Toner Box Pick-up Roller ADF section Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Paper Dust Remover Qua ntity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 200 K 200 K 200 K 200 K 300 K 300 K 300 K 150 K 150 K Parts No. 3. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.Page in this manual P. 12 . Standard mode and Low Power Mode OFF.1 Replacement parts A. 2006 3. *6: 110 V areas only. *3: Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the black toner cartridge at the same time when 11.30 P.16 P.

2006 B. 3.Page in this manual P. *2: See each Option Service Manual. 1 2 3 Classification PC-102 PC-202 PC-402 Parts name Pick-up Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Assy Qua ntity 1 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 300 K 300 K 300 K Parts No.0 Aug. 3. *2: See Automatic Duplex Unit Service manual. Option No.25 P.28 6 Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port LPH Assy Paper Feed Roller Upon each call Upon each call or When IU is replaced Upon each call (60 K) P.24 P.25 P. 13 .26 No.Page in this manual 4030 3005 ## Replace those 4030 3005 ## three parts at the *2 4030 0151 ## same time.2 Cleaning parts Classification Ref.28 *2 *1: Actual cleaning cycle is the Life counter value.5 K) P.27 7 8 P. *1: Actual durable cycle is the Life counter value. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance Descriptions Ref. 1 2 3 4 Parts name Registration Roller Actual cleaning cycle *1 Upon each call (60 K) Upon each call (60 K) Upon each call (60 K) Upon each call (60 K) Descriptions Transport Transport Roller section 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide Processing section Image transfer section LPH section Duplex section Comb Electrode Paper Dust Remover 5 When TC is replaced (11.Field Service Ver. 3.3.

000 402. is detected.000 Transfer Belt Unit 300.000 402.) The number of copies made is counted. When printing prohibited is encountered.0 Aug.000 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. 3. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.) The number of copies made is counted.000 Maintenance 2nd Transfer Roller Unit 150. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. Life value (Specification value) – Max.137 M *2 4.) When printing prohibited is encountered.000 Ozone Filter 150.3.000 *1 Imaging Unit C/M/Y 2. the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle.4 Concept of parts life Description A waste toner full condition is detected when about 8. whichever reaches the life specifications value. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. whichever reaches the life specifications value.000 152. 14 . number of printed pages Waste Toner Bottle 30.000 *1 Paper Dust Remover 150. (The counter counts up 2 for paper whose sub scan direction exceeds 216 mm. The number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned is compared with the number of hours through which the Developing Roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours through which the PC Drum has turned and the value.000 152. The number of copies made is counted.) The number of copies made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the belt has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of copies made and the value. *2: The mark “M” is indicated the value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value.220 M *2 *1: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed pages is reached.000 *1 Fusing unit 300.928 M *2 3.000 152.) The number of copies made is counted. 2006 3. the machine prohibits the initiation of any new print cycle.045 M *2 Imaging Unit K 4. The number of copies made is counted. is detected.

Imaging Unit /M. of Operating Days per Month Description Monochrome: Making 5 copies per job Color: Making 4 copies per job A4 Black to Color = 5:1 Black: 12. Fusing unit. make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached. 2006 3.0 Aug. Imaging Unit /K Target parts 15 . Imaging Unit /C. Conditions for Life Specifications Values • The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions (see the Table given below) are met. Image Transfer Belt Unit. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user. Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part Purpose In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts.400 B/W = 5 % for each color. and replace those parts at the same time.Field Service Ver. (1) bizhub C450 Item Job Type Paper Size Color Ratio CV/M Original Density No.000 / Color: 1. Imaging Unit /Y. 6 % for Monochrome 20 days (Main Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month) B. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance A. 6 % for Monochrome 20 days (Main Power Switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month) (2) bizhub C351 Item Job Type Paper Size Color Ratio CV/M Original Density No.200 B/W = 5 % for each color. 3. of Operating Days per Month Description Monochrome: Making 4 copies per job Color: Making 4 copies per job A4 Black to Color = 5:1 Black: 6.000 / Color: 2.

4. 3. 2. 3. Lock the Paper Lifting Plate [1] into position.5. 3. Remove two screws [1] and the Tray 1 Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy [2]. [1] Maintenance 4037F2C002DB [4] [6] [5] 4037F2C003DB 5. Slide out the Tray 1.1 [3] Replacing the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller [2] 1. Snap off the C-clip [4]. Remove the shaft for the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller Assy [3] from the front Bushing. [1] [2] 4036fs2013c1 16 . reverse the order of removal. 2006 3. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. To reinstall. 2.3.2 Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy 1. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the Tray 1 Paper Take-Up Roller Assy [3].0 Aug. 7. NOTE • Replace the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller and Tray 1 Separation Roller at the same time. 6. Slide out the Tray 1.5. one collar [5] and remove the Tray 1 Paper TakeUp Roller [6]. 3. Select [Service Mode]→ [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [1st].5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

[4] [3] 4037F2C517DA 17 . reverse the order of removal. Remove four screws [3]. and remove the Frame [4].103 2. To reinstall. and remove Bypass Paper Separation roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. shaft [4]. and guide plate [6] to remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [7]. 5. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.3 Replacing the Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller 1. 3. [2] [1] 4037F2C515DA [3] 3.0 Aug. NOTE • Replace the Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller and Tray 1 Separation Roller at the same time. spring [5]. [9] [8] 4037F2C509DA 4.Field Service Ver.5. Snap off the E-ring [8] and the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller Assy [9]. See P. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [7] [3] [5] 4037F2C508DA 3. 6. Take off the rubber stopper [3]. 3. 2006 [4] [6] 3. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [1st].

reverse the order of removal.3. [6] [5] 4037F2C518DA [7] [9] 5. 9. Remove five screws [5]. 3. 6. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 [5] [5] Field Service Ver. and remove the Frame [6] under the Bypass Unit. 2006 4. NOTE • Replace the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller and the Bypass Separation Roller Assy at the same time. Snap off the C-clip [11]. 8. and remove the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller [12]. Maintenance [8] [10] 4037F2C519DA [11] [12] 4037F2C520DA 7.0 Aug. and remove the Bypass Paper Feed Clutch [8]. 18 . Snap off the C-clip [9] for the Paper Take-up roller. and remove the shaft [10]. To reinstall. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray]. Snap off the C-clip [7].

See P. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray]. 2. To reinstall.5 Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller 1. 3. and the Reinforcement plate [2]. Open the Vertical transport door. reverse the order of removal. [1] [2] 4036fs2018c0 [3] 4. 5. 3. Remove the Multi Bypass unit. 5. NOTE • Replace the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller and the Bypass Separation Roller Assy at the same time.4 Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy 3. Slide out the Tray 2. [4] 4036fs2019c0 19 . Remove the Screw [1].Field Service Ver. and remove Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [2] [1] 1. 4.0 Aug.5. and remove the spring [4] and the guide plate [5]. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit. 4037F2C515DA [3] [5] [4] [6] 4037F2C522DA 3. Snap off the C-clip [3].5.103 2. 3. Remove two Claws [3] and the Vertical transport door [4]. 2006 3. Remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller Assy [6]. Remove two screws [1].

3. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 [6] Field Service Ver. Remove two Screws [5].3. 2006 6. 4037F2C552DA 20 . and remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller Assy [14]. [14] [13] [12] 9. Remove two C-rings [9] and the Shaft [10]. [5] [8] 4037F2C004DA 7. Remove two Screws [7] and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [8]. NOTE • Use care not to miss the Spring.0 Aug. and remove the Separation Roller fixing plate Assy [11]. and remove the Jam processing cover [6]. Remove the C-ring [12] and Guide [13]. Maintenance [7] 4036fs2021c1 [11] [9] [9] [10] 4037F2C551DA 8.

[3] 4036fs2024c1 [6] 4. and remove the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Assy [5]. 2006 3. Remove the Screw [1] and Wiring cover [2]. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [1] [2] 4036fs2023c0 1.5.Field Service Ver. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller cover [9]. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. Remove two Screws [6] and the Installation flame [7] of the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. See the procedures 1 to 7 in “Tray 2 Separation Roller. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4].6 Replacing the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller 3.” See P.0 Aug. 3.19 2. [6] [7] 4037F2C005DB [9] 5. [5] [4] 3. [8] 4037F2C006DB 21 .

3. Remove two E-rings [18] and Bushing [19]. Remove the C-ring [10] and Bushing [11]. Remove the C-ring [13] and Gear [14] while sliding out the Shaft Assy [12] in the direction indicated in left figure. [16] [15] [17] [18] [20] [18] 4036fs2029c2 9. 3.0 Aug. Remove the C-ring [15] and Bushing [16]. [11] [10] 4036fs2027c0 [12] 7. [19] 4036fs2595c0 22 . and remove the Tray 2 Pickup Roller fixing plate Assy [20]. 2006 6. Maintenance [14] [13] 4036fs2028c2 8. and remove the Shaft Assy [17]. Periodical check bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006
[21]

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

10. Remove the C-ring [21] and Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller [22]. 11. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [2nd].

[22]
4036fs2596c0

3.5.7

Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller 1. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. See the procedures 1 to 7 in “Tray 2 Separation Roller.” See P.19 2. Remove the Screw [1] and Wiring cover [2].

[1] [2]
4036fs2023c0

[5]

[4]

3. Remove two Screws [3] and Connector [4], and remove the Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller Assy [5].

[3]

4036fs2024c1

[6]

4. Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [7] together with Frame.

[6] [7]
4037F2C005DB

23

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5. Remove two Screws [8] and Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller cover [9].

[9]

[8] [10]

4037F2C006DB

[12] [11] Maintenance [11]
4036fs2597c1

6. Remove two C-rings [10] and two Bushings [11], and remove the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller Assy [12].

[13]

7. Snap off the C-ring [13], and remove the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [14].

[14]

4036fs2598c0

3.5.8

Cleaning of Registration Roller 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover. See P.25 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Registration Rollers [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

4036fs2502c0

24

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.5.9 Paper Dust Remover
[2] [1]

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Pushing the hook [1] with a blue label inward, remove the Paper Dust Remover [2].

4036fs2501c0

[3]

3. Using a brush, whisk dust off the Paper Dust Remover [3].

4036fs2503c0

[2] [1]

4036fs2501c0

B. Replacing Procedure 1. Open the Right Door. 2. Pushing the hook [1] with a blue label inward, remove the Paper Dust Remover [2]. 3. Remove the Ozone Filter. See P.27 4. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Paper Dust Remover/Ozone Filter].

3.5.10

Cleaning of Transport Roller
[1]

1. Open the Right Door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.

4036fs2519c0

25

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

3.5.11

Cleaning of 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide
[1]

4036fs2518c0

1. Open the Right Door. 2. Open the Left Door. 3. Remove the Waste Toner Box. See P.38 4. Remove two screws and slide the Transfer Belt Unit out halfway. See P.30 5. Wipe the 2nd Image Transfer Entrance Upper Guide [1] clean of dirt using a soft cloth. NOTE • When cleaning, use care not to be hurt by the leading edge of the guide that is sharp.

3.5.12

Replacing the Waste Toner Box

Maintenance

NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the Main Unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle. • When removing the Finishing Option, support the Horizontal Transport Unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping.
[1]

4037F2C525DA

1. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2. Open the Left Door. 3. Grasp the handle, and remove the waste toner box [1]. NOTE • Raise the waste toner box gently before removing it. • If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt the waste toner bottle when removing it. • Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it. 4. Remove the Cover [2] of Waste Toner Box, and set it on the Collecting port.

[2]

4036fs2615c1

26

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

3. Periodical check 5. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port. 6. Remove the waste toner box from its box, and remove the packing material. 7. Grasp the handle, and set the waste toner box in place. 8. Close the Left Door.
4036fs2509c0

3.5.13

Cleaning of the Area around the Waste Toner Collecting Port
[1]

1. Open the Rear Left Cover. 2. Remove the Waste Toner Box [1].

4037F2C525DA

3. Wipe the areas around the Waste Toner Collecting Port clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol.

4036fs2509c0

3.5.14

Replacing Ozone Filter 1. Holding onto the hook, remove the Ozone Filter [1]. 2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover. See P.25 3. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Paper Dust Remover/Ozone Filter].

[1]

4037F2C011DA

27

Maintenance

bizhub C351/C450

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

3.5.15

Cleaning of the Comb Electrode 1. Open the Front Door. 2. Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever [1] In and Out several times. NOTE • Move the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever slowly forward and backward until it stops.
4036fs2511c0

[1]

3.5.16

Cleaning LPH Assy

NOTE • After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit, be sure to place it in the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth, and store it in a dark place. Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time, as it may become damaged.
Maintenance

[2]

1. Open the Front Door. 2. Slide out the IU (C/M/Y/K). See P.33 3. Remove the LED Cleaning Jig [1] and LED Cleaning Jig Pad [2].

[1] [4]

4036fs2512c1

4. Affix a LED Cleaning Jig Pad [4] to the LED Cleaning Jig [3].

[3]

4036fs2513c0

[5] [6]

5. Clean the LED [5] of the LPH Assy by moving the LED Cleaning Jig [6] three reciprocating motions. NOTE • Use only the specified jig (LED Cleaning Jig) for cleaning.

4036fs2514c0

28

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 3.5.17 Replacement of the Deodorant Filter
[1]

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

1. Holding onto the hook, take out the Deodorant Filter [1]. NOTE • The Deodorant Filter is supplied with the toner cartridge (black). Replace it when replacing the toner cartridge (black).
4036fs2515c0

3.5.18

Replacement of the Dust Filter
[1]

1. Grasping the hook, remove the Dust Filter [1]. NOTE • The Dust Filter is supplied with the Imaging Unit (black). Replace it when replacing the Imaging Unit (black).

4037F2C012DB

3.6
3.6.1

Replacing the unit
Replacing the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit

NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the main unit before trying to replace the Waste Toner Bottle. • When removing the Finishing Option, support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping.
[2]

A. 1. 2. 3.

[1]

Removal Procedure Turn OFF the main power switch. Open the Right Door. Unlock the blue lock levers [1] (at two places). 4. Holding onto the blue lock levers [1] (at two places), remove the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit [2].

[1]
4036fs2516c0

29

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Holding onto the blue lock levers [1] (at two places), mount the 2nd Image Transfer Roller Unit [2]. 2. Lock the blue lock levers [1](at two places). 3. Close the Right Door. NOTE • Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear. 4. Turn ON the Main Power Switch. 5. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Transfer Roller Unit].

[2]

[1]

[1]
4036fs2517c0

3.6.2

Image Transfer Belt Unit
[1]

4037F2C537DA

A. Cleaning Procedure 1. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. See P.30 2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the Transfer belt [1]. NOTE • If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth with a solvent. • Do not wipe out with water. • When solvent is used to dampen a cloth, do not use the ones other than shown below: isopropyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, PPC Cleaner, Sol mix AP-7 • After cleaned with the solvent, make copies more than 28-piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise.

Maintenance

30

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

B. Replacing Procedure NOTE • If a Finishing Option is installed, remove if from the main unit before trying to replace the Transfer Belt Assembly. • When removing the Finishing Option, support the horizontal transport unit with your hand to prevent if from dropping. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch. 2. Slide out the IU (C/M/Y/K). NOTE • After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit, be sure to place it in the plastic bag (black) or wrap it in a light shielding cloth, and store it in a dark place. Do not leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time, as it may become damaged.
[1]

3. Open the Right Door. 4. Remove two Screws [1] and release the Lock of the Image Transfer Belt Unit [2].

[2]

4037F2C013DA

[3]

5. Open the Left Door. 6. Grasp the handle, and remove the waste toner box [3]. NOTE • Raise the waste toner box gently before removing it. • If scattered toner has accumulated in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt the waste toner box when removing it. • Do not leave the waste toner box in a tilted condition after removing it.
4037F2C526DA

31

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450 [4]

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 7. Pull out the Image Transfer Belt Unit [4].

4037F2C527DA

C. Reinstallation Procedure
[1] Maintenance

1. Insert the Transfer Belt Unit [1]. NOTE • Insert the Transfer Belt Unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.

4037F2C528DA

[2]

2. Install the Image Transfer Belt Unit with two Screws [2].

4037F2C014DA

32

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006
[3]

3. Periodical check 3. Hold the handle and install the Waste Toner Box [3] in position. 4. Close the Left Door. 5. Close the Right Door. NOTE • Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear. 6. Turn ON the Main Power Switch. 7. Select [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] and carry out Gradation Adjust.
4037F2C529DA

3.6.3

Replacing the Imaging Unit (C, M, Y, K) A. 1. 2. 3. 4. Removal Procedure Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. Unplug the power cord. Open the Front Door. Release the lock lever [1] of the Imaging Unit.

[1]

4036fs2578c0

5. Pull out the IU [2], and remove it from main body. 6. Clean the LPH Assy. See P.28
[2]

4036fs2579c0

33

Maintenance

bizhub C351/C450

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. Remove the Imaging Unit from its plastic bag. 2. Tilt the Imaging Unit [1] to the left and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice. Then, tilt it to the right and shake it a small stroke in the tilt direction twice. NOTE • Since the Imaging Unit is highly susceptible to light, keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed. • Carefully unseal the plastic bag (black). • If the Imaging Unit is packed in the plastic bag (black) again, seal the package using tape or another means.

[1]
4036fs2580c0

Maintenance

NOTE • When installing the Imaging Unit, ensure that the color of the mounting guide of the Imaging Unit is the same as the color of the label at the mounting position on the main unit. 3. Keeping the Imaging Unit [2] in a level position, insert the Imaging Unit [2] into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped. NOTE • Do not allow the Imaging Unit to become tilted while installing them into the Main Unit, as damage to the PC Drum or the LED assembly can result. • Insert the Imaging Unit until a click is heard.

[2]

4036fs2581c0

34

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

[3]

4. Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet [3] while pressing the IU. NOTE • Pull out the PC Drum protective sheet half way, and pull it down slantwise.

4036fs2582c0

[4]

4036fs2583c1

5. Close the Imaging Unit Locking Lever [4] while pressing the IU. NOTE • Place the IU Lock Lever into the locked position until a click is heard. 6. Close the Front Door. 7. Plug in the power cord. 8. Turn ON the Main Power Switch. 9. Select [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] and carry out Gradation Adjust.

35

Maintenance

3. Periodical check
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

3.6.4

Replacing the Fusing Unit

NOTE • Before replacing the Fusing Unit, ensure that it has had time to cool down. 1. Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then wait for about 20 minutes. 2. Open the Right Door. 3. Remove the Screw [1], and remove the Connector protective cover [2].
4036fs2046c0

[2] [1]

[3]

4. Remove the Connector [3].

Maintenance

4037F2C015DA

[4] [4]

5. Remove the Exit Tray. See P.77 6. Remove wire saddle and remove two Connectors [4] of Fusing unit.

4036fs2048c1

[6]

7. Remove two Screws [5], and remove the Fusing unit [6].

[5]
4036fs2049c0

36

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

4. Service tool
bizhub C351/C450

4.
4.1

Service tool
CE Tool list
Tool name Shape Parts No. Personnel Remarks

Scanner Drive Cable Holding Jig
4036fs2001c0

4581 7901 ##

2

LED Cleaning Jig

4004 7502 ##

1

4036fs2002c0

LED Cleaning Jig Pad

4004 7503 ##

1

4036fs2003c0

LPH Assy Mounting Jigs

4025 7901 ##

2

4036fs2004c0

Color chart
4036fs2577c0

1

Safety Switch Holding Jig

1174 7901 ##

1

4036fs2184c0

1

Compact Flash
4037F2C601DA

4037 0751 ##

1

37

Maintenance

4. Service tool
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

4.2
4.2.1

Copy materials
Imaging Unit Single Parts (IU)
Parts name IU Black IU Yellow IU Magenta IU Cyan Replacing period 100,000 copies 50,000 copies 50,000 copies 50,000 copies

Also replace the Dust filter packed in the Imaging Unit Black at the same time.

See P.15 4.2.2 Toner Cartridge Single Parts (T/C)
Parts name T/C Black T/C Yellow Replacing period *1 11,500 copies 11,500 copies 11,500 copies 11,500 copies

Also replace the Deodorant filter packed in the T/C Black at the same time.

Maintenance

T/C Magenta T/C Cyan

*1: Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90% even with product-to-product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration, when the T/C is used under the conditions of B/W ratio 5% for each color 4.2.3 Waste Toner Box
Parts name Waste Toner Box Replacing period 30,000 copies

See P.15 4.2.4 Maintenance Kit

There is no setting for the Maintenance Kit.

38

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

5.
1

Firmware upgrade
Outline

5.1

• There are two ways to update the Firmware: One is by directly connecting with the Copier using the Compact Flash, and the other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW. NOTE • When updating the Firmware card before Ver. A7 to the Ver. A7 or later, perform the following procedure without fail. 1. When the Serial Number Input screen is displayed after the Firmware was updated with Main power being ON, enter the Serial Number with the following step. [Service mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number] See P.333 2. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [HDD Version Up] See P.359 3. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. 4. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [NVRAM Data Backup]. See P.373 5. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. NOTE • In the case the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is installed, following phenomena occurs when MFP controller firmware is updated with following conditions. (Occurrence condition) • When updating the Firmware card from the version before Ver.69 to the Ver.69 or later (Phenomena) • Long size paper fax cannot be received (reception error for over 600 mm.) • 600 dpi fax cannot be received (the resolution is decreased to 400 dpi.) (Workaround) After updating the firmware, initialize Fax Function Parameter by following procedures. NOTE • Before initializing the parameter, output the list of the items which need to be reset. • Initialize the [Fax Function Parameter] by the following setting. [Service Mode] → [Fax Setting] → [Initialization] For detail of initializing procedure, see FK-502 Service Manual. However, in following case Fax Function Parameter dose not need to be initialized. • When firmware Ver.69 or later is installed before shipment. • When initialization of Fax Function Parameter has been completed after updating the firmware to Ver.69 or later.

39

2.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin Outline • Write the firmware into the compact flash using Cygwin.exe] on CD-ROM in which Cygwin is stored.2 Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash • Compact flash (Service Tool: 4037 0751 ##) 5.3 Installing the Cygwin A. For the full installation version 1. 4037F2E545DA 3. Double click the [setup. • Cygwin consists of two types: Full install version and light version that is comprised only of necessary files. and click [Next (N)]. Maintenance 4037F2C501DA 2.2.0 Aug. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver. 5. 2006 5. Click [Next (N)].2. 4037F2E546DA 40 . Select “Install from Local Directory”. 3.2 5.5.

) 7. 4037F2E548DA 41 Maintenance . 2006 5.Field Service Ver. [C:\cygwin].” 5. select the [cygwin] folder in CD-ROM drive. For installing from CD-ROM. Click [Next (N)]. Specify the place of the data to be installed. Check to make sure that “Root Directory” is in default setting. NOTE • Make sure to check that “Root Directory” is in default setting. 3. 4037F2E547DA 6. Click [Next (N)]. Specify the folder for installation. [C:\cygwin]. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 4.0 Aug. • Do not change the setting value except “Root Directory. (Described below is the sample procedure when CD-ROM drive is E-drive.

zip” directly to the C drive (Windows system drive). Maintenance 4037F2E550DA B.0 Aug.5. Decompress the downloaded compressed file “cygwin_rhein_phase2. Confirm that the “Cygwin” folder is created directly in the C drive (Windows system drive). 4037F2E549DA 9. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. For the light version 1. Click [Next (N)]. Click [Complete] to start installing. 3. 2. 42 . 2006 8.

4 Settings of the Windows Environmental Variable 5. Variable name CYGWIN HOME Variable value ntsec /home/username 4036fs2621e0 43 . Click the “New” in System Variable Setting. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1.2. 2006 5. open the Property of “My Computer”.Field Service Ver. 4036fs2620e0 3. 3. After installing. 2. and click the “Environmental Variable” of “Advanced” tab.0 Aug.

(C:\bizhub in the below figure) Maintenance 4038F2E562DB NOTE • The file name of Firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. “card_work” folder is created in the selected directory and the data is decompressed in this folder. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. • When the firmware data is decompressed.exe. 3. Double-click the Firmware data.5 Writing into the Compact flash 1.” 2.2. and then uncompress it. and specify the directory to be uncompressed.0 Aug.5. 2006 5. 44 . 4038F2E563DB NOTE • When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed. delete it before uncompressing. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

which was recognized in the Windows. which was recognized through the procedure 3. and execute the “mksf. Click “Start” → “Program” → “Accessories” → “Command Prompt” to open the Command Prompt. 3. and check the Drive name. 5.bat.Field Service Ver. 2006 5. Mount the Compact flash on the PC.” (Input the C: \bizhub\card_work>mkcf f (Drive number): in the below figure. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory.) 45 . (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 4. 6.0 Aug. Specify the Drive of Compact flash. and push the “Enter”. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 4038F2E564DB 3.

bat” is executed. CHECKSUM is executed. Remove the Compact flash from PC. “VERIFY OK” appears. data writing into the Compact flash is started. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched. 2006 7.5. Once the “mkcf. NOTE • When removing the Compact flash. 8. 46 . Maintenance 4038F2E565DB 9.0 Aug. 3. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. Upon completion of writing. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

See P. Function type Basic functions Function name Write Firmware to a card Description • Write firmware data into the compact flash card.3. See P.53 • Compare the firmware data written into the compact flash card with the one saved in PC.0 Aug. See P.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card.54 • Format the compact flash card by the FAT or vxWorks form.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 5. Color machine B/W machine • bizhub C250/C300/C350/C351/C352/C450 • bizhub C250P/C352P/C450P • bizhub 200/250/350 • Di2510/3010/3510/2510f/3010f/3510f 5.54 Display information about a card • Acquisition the information of firmware data written into the compact flash card.3. NOTE • vxWorks form is not applicable See P. 2006 2 5.Field Service Ver. 256MB (Windows XP/2003) is recommended. See P. 3.54 Compare Firmware with a card Advanced functions Create a Firmware Image from a card Format a card 5. Computer CPU Correspond OS Required memory Others • IBM PC/AT compatible machine • Pentium III / 500 MHz or higher is recommended. 5. Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 • More than 128 MB (Windows 2000). • Windows 2000.3 System environment • The following system environments are required or recommended to use the software.3.53 • Create the firmware image form using the firmware data written into the compact flash card. • Drive that is able to Read/Write compact flash 47 .2 Function outline • The following functions are available with this software.

3. 9J06F2C673DA Maintenance 2.0 Aug. • When any anti-virus program is activated.4 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. 9J06F2E700DA 48 . 1.5. 2006 5. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. quite the program before the installation. Click [Next >].3. Double click [setup.exe] to start the installation of the software.

After checking the contents of license agreement. 3. 2006 5. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 3.0 Aug. 9J06F2E702DA 49 Maintenance . select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. 9J06F2E701DA 4. and click [Next>].Field Service Ver. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006.

6.5. Quite the program if the software is activated. 9J06F2E709DA 50 . 3. 1. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 9J06F2E703DA Maintenance 7. delete (uninstall) the currently installed program and install the new version.5 Update of software • To update the software version. 9J06F2E708DA 5. 2. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). • Follow the procedures shown below to delete (uninstall) the program. 2006 5.3.0 Aug. Select [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006] of [Add/Remove Programs] in Windows Control Panel menu to delete the program. Click [Install] to start installation. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

corresponds to the card you wish to write to: 51 . [4] What would you like to do? [5] Select the location of the Firmware to write to the card: [6] Select the drive letter that • To select the location where the firmware is stored in PC. See P.52 • To select the function to be used. • Select the check box of [Enabled Advanced Features] to enable advanced functions at main window.6 Screen 5. 3.53 • To select the compact flash drive to which the data to write.0 Aug. 2006 5. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode. • To display the license agreement and version information of the tool. • Displayed screen is different between Basic mode and Advanced mode. Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected [6] [1] [2] [3] About Copyright Info Settings • To display the outline of the tool. • To display the dialog to enable the advanced functions. See P. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 [1] [2] Maintenance [3] [4] [5] 9J06F2E704DA A.3.Field Service Ver. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software.

it fails to ensure the reliability of the written data. • Not available yet. 3.) • If [No] is selected.0 Aug. None : [Please Select] is displayed on the screen every starting and the drive should be selected every time. data consistency can be ensured by data verification of check sums during data writing. FAT : The format to be used by all models that the software supports. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • Set whether to calculate check sums during data writing. However. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Features].5. 52 . • Select how to set default of compact flash drive during software starting. check sums calculation is skipped during data writing. vxWorks : Not available yet. it takes more time for data writing compared to the case without sums calculation (Basically this mode shall be selected. LastUsed : The drive used at previous time is selected. [2] [3] Default Drive Letter [4] [5] Default Image Block Size Calculate sums when writing [6] Folder for Temporary Files • Set the folder for saving temporary files during the tool is activating. The temporary file is automatically deleted after the operation completes normally. [1] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Maintenance 9J06F2E705DA [1] Enable Advanced Features Default Setting for Card Format • Enable the setting of advanced functions at the dialog by selecting the check box. Also advanced functions can be selected at the main window. • If [YES] is selected. 2006 B. Although it take less time for data writing compared to the case with sums calculation. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. • Select the default card format during software starting.

tar. The FW data of the models shown below can be written. it is not covered under warranty. use the compact flash with the same capacity as the one used for the original image file. 3.img. • C350 firmware requires the compact flash over 64 MB.gz rhein3_cf.img. display the check sum information (comparison result dialog) of the firmware data of the compact flush and the file. The FW data of the models shown below can be written. • The firmware data (file) format saved in PC shall consistent with the one written into the compact flash.img Compressed firmware type Uncompressed firmware type Di3510/350/250/ 200 firmware type ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ma001 ma001a NOTE • The above-mentioned [Indexed firmware type] and [Di3510/350/250/200 firmware type] shall be comprised of multiple files and one of the files shall be named as above.gz or *.img) into the compact flash.tar.0 Aug.Field Service Ver.3.tar. • To write the image file data (*. • Firmware of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P requires the compact flash over 128 MB.gz tss2_cf. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash.gz *.gz ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ *. 2006 5. <Corresponding models and firmware file type> File type Models C450/C450P/C351 C352/C352P/C300 C350 C250/C250P Di2510/3010/3510/ 2510f/3010f/3510f 200/250/350 Indexed firmware type rhein1_cf. (2) Compare Firmware with a card • Compare the firmware data written into the compact flash and the one (file) saved in PC. • [Uncompressed firmware type] means the image file that is uncompressed the compressed firmware file.tar. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance A. • After the comparison. 53 . • [Compressed firmware type] means the compressed formed image file that is created using the tool’s function of the [Create a Firmware Image from a card]. • To write FW data into the compact flash. Although the compact flash with larger capacity than the original one can be used.gz rhein2_cf.7 Details of each function 5.

Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash.0 Aug. 3.5. Maintenance 54 . however. it becomes the own file style that is different from the FAT. • The created FW image file is automatically compressed and created as the Compressed firmware file (*. This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data. NOTE • In current version. • For the series of Di3510/200/250/350 series. check sums of each firmware data is displayed.img). (2) Format a card • Make format of the compact flash in FAT or vxWork form. the uncompressed data would occupy too much capacity. • After the firmware data is written into the compact flash. The information to be displayed is according to the type of written FW data. (3) Display information about a card • Display the information of the firmware data written into the compact flash. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. 2006 B. MSC version is displayed. • To write the firmware data into the compact flash. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. which makes file control difficult. • For the series of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P. the card should be formatted in FAT form to clear (initialize) the description of the compact flash. The image file is written into the compact flash in the uncompressed form.img. and the compact flash that the firmware data is written cannot be browsed on the Windows OS. Therefore this tool doesn't create uncompressed firmware file (*. only FAT format is available but not vxWork format.gz).

2006 5. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 A.3. and specify the directory to be uncompressed. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. In the case of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P series 1. and then uncompress it.0 Aug.exe.” 2. delete it before uncompressing. 9J06F2E711DA NOTE • When old firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed.Field Service Ver. Put the firmware data in the optional directory.8 How to write firmware data 5. 3. 55 Maintenance . Double-click the firmware data.

2006 3.0 Aug. Select the check box of [Write Firmware to a card]. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. NOTE • When using the external compact flash drive such as USB be sure to connect them before starting this tool. 5.5. Maintenance 9J06F2E706DA 56 . and check the drive name. which was recognized in the Windows. 3. Mount the compact flash on the PC. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006.

0 Aug.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed. the file name “. 2006 6. Select the file type [C450/ C351/C352/ C300/C350/C250 Indexed Firmware]. 57 Maintenance . confirm that only "###_cf. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2.Field Service Ver. Click [Browse]. Click [Open]. and select. 9. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 9J06F2E707DA 9J06F2E713DA 9J06F2E714DA 7. 3. 8.tar.gz” will not be displayed. NOTE • If the file extension is set to be not displayed in Windows. 5.

it may give fatal damage on Windows system or delete the saved data. If these drives are selected mistakenly to make the writing. and click [YES]. the following dialog is displayed. the screen goes back of the main window. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination. When clicking [Write] button.0 Aug. Maintenance 9J06F2E715DA 11. In the dialog. (If [NO] is clicked. 3.) 9J06F2E716DA 58 . which is confirmed at step 3. 12.5. [Write] button is changed form gray into active status. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted. Therefore pay close attention when selecting the drive. Firmware upgrade bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. re-confirm the firmware data and the written destination drive. 2006 10.

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 13. Click [Yes], and data writing starts.

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance
9J06F2E717DA

NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer - do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 14. When the writing is completed, the following screen appears. In this screen, check sums will be compared between the firmware data and one written into the compact flash.

NOTE • The contents displayed on the screen may different according to the model type. The above is the screen displayed for firmware data writing of bizhub C450. 15. Confirm each check sums are identical and quit Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. 16. Take out the compact flash from the PC. NOTE • When removing the compact flash, be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method.

59

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5.4

Firmware rewriting by compact flash

• The F/W is updated using the Compact flash. 5.4.1 Updating method

NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON.
1

1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. 2. Remove the screw [1] and the metal Blanking Plate [2].

Maintenance

[2]

[1]

4037F2C016DA

3. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot.

[3] 1 4.

4037F2C017DA

Turn ON the Main Power Switch. 5. Up to six types of F/W will be displayed on the control panel. 6. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated.

4037F2J517DA

60

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

7. Press the Start key. (At this time, the Start key starts blinking red.) 8. Check that the Control Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly (“Downloading Completed”). Check also the Check Sum value (“Check Sum XXXX”) shown on the Touch Panel. (The Start key blinks green.) 9. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. 10. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot. 1 11. Turn ON the main power switch. NOTE • When turning the main power ON for the first time after the Firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power OFF until either the Serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

4037F2E627DA

12. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 13. Select [Firmware Version]. 14. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.

61

Maintenance

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5.4.2

Action When Data Transfer Fails

• If “NG” appears on the Touch Panel, indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red), take the following steps.
1 2.

1. Perform the data rewriting procedure again. If the procedure is abnormally terminated, change the Compact Flash for a new one and try another rewriting sequence. 3. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated, change the board that has caused “NG” and carry out data rewriting procedure.
MFP Controller Scanner Printer LPH Fax Board Controller1 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Board (PWB-MC) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) Fax Board (Main) *1 Fax Board (Sub) *2

1

Fax Board Controller2

Maintenance

*1: The Optional FAX Kit FK-502 is necessary for the above procedure. *2: The Optional Fax Multi Line ML-501 is necessary for the above procedure.

62

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

5.5
5.5.1

Updating the Firmware with the Internet ISW
Out line

• [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the Firmware with the control panel of the Copier, so the Copier will automatically receive the Firmware from the Program Server over a network for updating. With the Internet ISW, the Firmware can be updated when the operator is at the User’s without Firmware data. 5.5.2 Service environment

The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function. • The Copier is connected to such a network environment that the Firmware can be downloaded on the internet using the ftp or http Protocol. The “Internet ISW” will not operate under the following conditions. • Main power switch is set to OFF. • Sub-power switch is set to OFF. • When the following setting is set to “ON”: [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • The Copier has the job currently performing. 5.5.3 Preparations for Firmware rewriting

• For using the Internet ISW, the Network parameter, Program Server Address as well as Firewall Address need to be set to the Copier. • For details of each setting item, refer to Adjustment/Setting “Internet ISW”. See P.366 A. Internet ISW Set 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [Internet ISW].

4037F2E621DA

3. Touch [ON], and touch [END]. NOTE • Settings such as Server setting, etc. will be available by selecting “ON” on this setting. • When the following setting is set to “ON”, “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

63

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

B. Protocol Setting • It performs the setting concerning the Protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW. • When connecting to the Program Server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a Proxy Server.
Step 0 1 2 Connecting by http Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. Data Input Setting • Touch [HTTP Setting], and select [ON]. Connect Proxy • For connecting via Proxy Server, select [ON]. Proxy Server • For connecting via Proxy Server, set the Proxy Server Address and the Port Number. 3 1. Select the [Server Address], and set the Proxy Server Address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme. 2. Select [Port Number], and set the Port Number for the Proxy Server from 1 through 65535. Connection Setting Proxy Authentication • Set the Login name and the Password which • Perform the setting for accessing FTP may be necessary for Authentication when server. accessing to the Proxy Server. 1. Select [Port Number], and set the Port Number for FTP server from 1 through 65535. 1. When Authentication is necessary for accessing to the Proxy Server, select 2. Select [Connection Time Out], and set the time for the Connection Time Out from 1 [Authentication], and select [ON]. 2. Select [Log-in Name], and enter the Login through 60. 3. When connecting in PASV mode, select name on the on-screen keyboard. [PASV Mode], and select [ON]. 3. Select [Password], and enter the Password on the on-screen keyboard. *PASV Mode: This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as inside the Firewall. Since with PASV mode, the client with restriction sets the Port Number, data transmission port can be secured to enable the file transmission. Connection Time-Out • Select [Connection Time-Out], and set the time for the Connection Time Out between 30 and 300 seconds. ⎯ Data Input Setting • Touch [FTP Setting], and select [ON]. Connecting by ftp

Maintenance

4

5

64

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

C. Forwarding Access Setting • To make the access setting for the Program Server which stores the Firmware data 1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting].

4037F2E622DA

3. Select [User ID], and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END]. 4. Select [Password], and enter the Password which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END]. 5. Select [URL], and enter the directory which stores the Program Server Address and the Firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL method, and touch [END]. NOTE • Enter the URL which matches to the Protocol to be used. When connecting to http http://(host name or IP address)/directory name or https://(host name or IP address)/directory name When connecting to ftp ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name 6. Select [File Name], and enter the file name of the Firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen keyboard, and touch [END]. 7. Touch [END] to finish setting.

65

Maintenance

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5.5.4

Firmware rewriting

NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission beforehand. • Do not turn power OFF while downloading. A. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 1. Perform the following setting. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Download] 2. Touch [ISW Start].

Maintenance

4037F2E623DA

3. The Copier will automatically start running, and it starts accessing the server.

4037F2C624DA

4. Select the F/W to be updated, and start downloading.

4037F2J517DA

66

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance
4037F2E627DA

B. During Firmware Updating 1. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data. C. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the Copier in auto or manual mode to display the outcome, and touch [OK] to return to the Main screen. NOTE • When turning the main power ON for the first time after the Firmware is updated, data may sometimes be internally updated. In that case, the following message will be displayed. Never turn the main power OFF until either the Serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.

(2) Failing to update the Firmware due to the Network trouble. 1. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network, an error code and the message will be displayed. 2. Restart the Copier in auto or manual mode, and touch [OK]. It can be used with the Firmware Version before conducting updating. 3. Check the settings for the network by error codes, and try updating again. NOTE • For error codes, refer to “Error Code List for the Internet ISW”. See P.69

67

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

(3) Failing to update the Firmware after downloading has started 1. Once Firmware updating has started, the ROM in the Copier will be deleted. When it failed right after updating has started, restart the Copier, and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading. 2. When updating on the control panel, touch [settings] on the standby screen, and check the Network settings again. Touch [Download], and restart the Internet ISW. NOTE • Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the Main power OFF/ON if the Firmware is not updated. • Firmware can be updated with the Compact flash with the Main power OFF. D. 1. 2. 3. Confirming the Firmware Version. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Select the [Firmware Version]. Check if the Firmware Version is updated.

Maintenance

68

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 5.5.5 Error Code List for the Internet ISW

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

• When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected, the message on the status and the error code will be displayed on the control panel. When updating with CS Remote Care, the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center. <Sample Display>

4037F2C619DA

Error code Control panel

Description

Countermeasure • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • Check the status of the following setting. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to KONICA MINOLTA. • Check the User’s network environment. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following setting. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally.

0x00000001

Illegal error on the control

0x00000010

Parameter error

0x00111000

Error concerning the network • Connection has been completed.

69

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450
Error code Control panel 0x00111001 0x00111100 0x00111101 0x00111110 0x00110010

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

Description Error concerning the network • It cannot be connected to the server. Error concerning the network • Communication Timeout. Error concerning the network • Disconnection occurred Error concerning the network • The network is not connected. Error concerning the network • Others FTP error • Reply code when it failed to be connected

Countermeasure

• Check the network environment of the User. • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally.

0x00001###

• Check to see if FTP server normally operates. • Check the IP address, User’s name, etc.

0x00002###

Maintenance

0x00003###

FTP error • Error reply code for the User command • Check to see if FTP server operates or Pass command normally. FTP error • Error reply code for CWD command FTP error • Error reply code for the TYPE command. FTP error • Error reply code for the PORT command. FTP error • Error reply code for the PASV command. FTP error • Error rely code for the RETR command. • It cannot be accepted because of the job currently being executed. • ISW being executed by other method. • It cannot be accepted because the sub-power is OFF.

0x00004###

• Check to see if FTP server operates normally.

0x00005###

0x00006###

• Check to see if FTP server operates normally. • Set the PASV mode to “Invalid”, and try it again. • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. • Wait for about 30 minutes and try it again. • Wait for the current job to be completed and try it again. • Turn sub-power ON and try it again.

0x00007###

0x1000 0100

0x10000101 0x10000102

• The Internet ISW is already being exe- • Wait for the current Internet ISW to be cuted. completed. • It failed to prohibit the job. (It failed to lock the operation.) → It failed to lock the job because the operation is already locked with PSWC, etc. • There is no space for F/W data to be downloaded. • Check sum error • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.

0x10000103

0x10000104 0x10000106

70

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006
Error code Control panel

5. Firmware upgrade
bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance

Description

Countermeasure

0x10000107

File access error • The file downloaded has an error. • The header of the file which has been read has an error. • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is • The size of the file to be downloaded is of the correct type. too large. • When it is identified to be the different type of F/W. • The area F/W is stored is destroyed, and another ISW is necessary. The temporary error when running the subset • When starting the Internet ISW in a normal program, the rebooting will start • Wait until ISW is automatically exeand the Internet ISW will be executed cuted on MFP side. with the subset program. During the process by the subset program, it has to be in the “Failed” status unless the Internet ISW is successfully conducted. This code is used temporarily to make it in error status.

0x10000108

0x20000000

71

6. Other
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

6.
6.1

Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items

A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. • As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. B. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. C. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.

Maintenance

D. Removal of PWBs NOTE • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. • Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.

72

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

6. Other
bizhub C351/C450

6.2
6.2.1
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
Section Original Glass IR Upper Right Cover Control Panel IR Front Cover IR Upper Front Cover IR Left Cover IR Upper Rear Cover IR Right Cover Rear Left Cover Panel Cover Front Door Exterior parts Front Left Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Rear Right Cover Exit Tray Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 1 Front right cover Lower Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Cover Tray 2 Rear Right Cover Multi Bypass Right Cover Multi Bypass Left Cover Scanner Motor Drive Board CCD Unit Image Processing Board Copier Board LAN Board Standard Memory Hard Disk Drive Board and etc. Electronic Sorting Board MFP Control Board Control Board Slide Interface Board High Voltage Unit/1 High Voltage Unit/2 Tray 1 Paper Size Board DC Power Supply Part name Ref.Page P.80 P.79 P.81 P.80 P.79 P.77 P.79 P.76 P.77 P.78 P.78 P.77 P.76 P.78 P.78 P.77 P.82 P.84 P.78 P.78 P.78 P.77 P.76 P.76 P.84 P.85 P.86 P.88 P.89 P.90 P.90 P.91 P.91 P.93 P.94 P.96 P.97 P.98 P.98

73

Maintenance

6. Other
bizhub C351/C450
No. 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 IR Unit Board and etc. Section LED Drive Board Tray 2 Board Tray 2 Paper Size Board Inverter Board Multi Bypass Unit Hopper Unit LPH Unit Scanner Motor Scanner Assy Scanner Wire PWB Unit PWB Box Main Motor Fusing Drive Motor Toner Supply Motor C/K Toner Supply Motor Y/M Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor Others Color PC Drum Motor Color Developing Motor K PC Motor Part name

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006
Ref.Page P.100 P.101 P.101 P.102 P.103 P.104 P.106 P.109 P.111 P.112 P.119 P.120 P.123 P.123 P.124 P.125 P.125 P.126 P.127 P.128 P.130 P.131 P.132 P.133 P.134 P.136 P.139 P.141 P.142 P.146

Maintenance

55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor Intermediate Transport Motor Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor Cleaning Brush Motor IDC/Registration Sensor/1,2 LPH Assy ATDC Sensor Y/M/C

74

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 6.2.2
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 IR Tray 2

6. Other
bizhub C351/C450

Cleaning parts list
Section Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Paper Take-up Roller Separation Roller Paper Take-up Roller Pick-up Roller Separation Roller Transport Roller Scanner Rail Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) Lens Original Glass CCD Sensor Part name Ref.Page P.147 P.147 P.148 P.148 P.149 P.149 P.149 P.151 P.151 P.151 P.152 P.152 P.153

Bypass

75

Maintenance

Remove the Screw [7].1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure IR Right Cover/Front Right Cover/Bypass Right & Left Cover [1] [2] [6] [4] [5] [3] Maintenance [8] [7] 4037F2C018DB 1. 5. 76 . Remove the Panel Cover. and remove the Bypass Right Cover [6]. 2006 6.3 6. and remove the Bypass Left Cover [8]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove the Screw [3].6. and remove the Front Right Cover [4]. 4.78 3. 2. and remove the IR Right Cover [2]. Remove four Screws [1]. 3.0 Aug. Remove two Screws [5]. See P.3.

and remove the IR Left Cover [5]. and remove the Exit Tray [3]. [9] 4037F2C020DA [10] 7. Open the Front Door [1]. Remove the Screw [9].0 Aug. Remove Connectors [10] and the Left Front Cover [11]. [11] 4037F2C021DA 77 . Remove two Screws [2]. Open the Left Door [7]. 5. Remove four Screws [4]. 3. 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 4037F2C019DB [5] [4] [1] [6] [8] [6] [3] [2] [7] Maintenance 1. 2006 6. 2.2 Exit Tray/IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Front Cover 6. Remove four Screws [6].Field Service Ver. 3.3. and remove the Rear Left Cover [8]. 4.

3.3 [3] [2] [1] [5] [4] Maintenance [6] 4037F2C022DB 1.0 Aug. 4. 2.6. Remove the Screw [2]. and remove the Tray 1 Front Right Cover [6]. and remove the Panel Cover [3]. Remove six Screws [1].4 [7] [1] [8] [2] [3] [5] [6] [3] [4] 4037F2C023DB 1. Pull out the Tray 1 [4]. 78 . Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Pick up the Front Door [1] and remove it. Remove four Screws [3]. Lower Rear Cover/Tray 2 Rear Cover/Rear Cover/Rear Right Cover/Tray 2 Rear Right Cover/Wiring Cover 6. Remove two Screws [5]. and remove the Lower Rear Cover [2]. 2. 5.3. and remove the Wiring Cover [8]. and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [6]. Remove the Screw [7].3. and remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover [4]. 3. 3. 2006 Front Door/Panel Cover/Tray 1 Front Right Cover 6. Open the Front Door [1]. 4. Remove two Screws [5].

Open the Right Door [12]. Other bizhub C351/C450 [10] [9] 4037F2C024DB [12] [9] [11] [13] [11] 6. and remove the IR Upper Right Cover [5]. 6.3. 2. and remove the Rear Cover [10]. Remove four Shoulder Screws [6] and three Screws [7]. 79 Maintenance 5. Remove two Shoulder Screws [1] and a Screw [2]. 3.0 Aug. Remove four Screws [11].Field Service Ver. 2006 6. 7. Remove three Screws [4]. Remove four Screws [9]. . 3.5 IR Upper Front Cover/IR Upper Right Cover/IR Upper Rear Cover [6] [5] [4] [1] [3] [8] [7] [6] [2] 4037F2C025DB 1. and remove the Rear Right Cover [13]. and remove the IR Upper Front Cover [3]. and remove the IR Upper Rear Cover [8].

and remove the IR Front Cover [5].79 2. 80 . See P.77 6.3. Remove the IR Upper Right Cover.76. P. Remove each Screw [1]. 4.6 [4] Maintenance [1] 4037F2C026DB 1. See P. Remove five Screws [4].6. 3. See P. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove the IR Left Cover. Remove the IR Right Cover and IR Upper Front Cover. 2006 Original Glass/IR Front Cover [5] [3] [2] 6. and remove the Original Glass fixing bracket (near side/ inmost side) [2].0 Aug.79 5. 3. Remove the Original Glass [3].

Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1.7 Control Panel (UN201) 6.3. Remove four Screws [2]. Remove four caps [1] at both ends of Control Panel.Field Service Ver. [2] [2] 4037F2C028DB 81 .0 Aug. [1] [1] 4037F2C027DB 2. 3. 2006 6.

Slide out the Tray 1 [1].6. 3. [4] [3] 4037F2C029DA 6. 2006 3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. hold two tabs [3] and remove the spacer [4].3. Loosen the screw [2].8 Tray 1 1. Remove the Flat Cable [3]. [2] [3] [4] 4038F2C609DA 82 . Remove the Control Panel [4]. [1] Maintenance 4036fs163c0 2 2.0 Aug. 4.

Slide out the Tray 1 [6] while pressing the Slide Locks [5] at both ends. [6] [5] [5] [6] 4037F2C044DB 83 . 2006 6. 3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 3.Field Service Ver.0 Aug.

[2] Maintenance [4] 4037F2C031DB 6.6. 4036fs165c0 [3] 2.79 2. [2] 4036fs2142c1 84 . Remove the Scanner Motor Drive Board [3].9 1.3. 3. Remove one Screw [2]. 3. and remove the Stopper [3]. 2006 Tray 2 [1] 6.0 Aug. Remove the IR Upper Rear Cover. 3.3. Slide out the Tray 2 while pressing the Slide Locks [4]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Slide out the Tray 2 [1]. Remove three Connectors [1] and four Board Supports [2]. See P.10 [1] Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) [3] 1.

2006 6. and remove the CCD Unit [5]. 85 . Align the CCD Unit with the center of the graduations as illustrated on the left and then tighten the four screws. Remove seven Screws [1]. [5] [4] Maintenance [3] 4037F2C032DA B.3.Field Service Ver. Turn ON the main power switch. and remove the CCD Unit Cover [2]. 4037F2C033DA 2. 3. Reinstall the Original Glass.11 CCD Unit [2] 6. Reinstallation Procedure 1.0 Aug. Remove the Original Glass. Removal Procedure 1.80 2. [1] 4037F2C009DA [3] 3. See P. Other bizhub C351/C450 [1] A. 3. Remove four Screws [3] and Flat Cable [4].

78 2. and remove the IR Frame Protective Cover [2]. See P. Carry out the Cross Direction Adjustment. [5] [6] [5] 4037F2C036DA 86 . If the specifications are not met. • When CCD unit is replaced. [3] [4] [3] 4037F2C035DA [5] 5. 4037F2C034DA 4. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it. See P. and remove the Original Size Detection Sensor Assy [4].12 Image Processing Board (PWB-C) [1] Maintenance [2] 1.298 NOTE • Hold the CCD Unit by hand when moving it. 2006 4. Remove three screws [3]. Remove the Rear Cover and IR Right Cover. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens results.153 3.0 Aug. See P. Remove six screws [5].6. Remove four Screws [1].3. and remove the Board cover [6]. loosen the CCD Unit mounting screws and move the CCD Unit in the sub scan direction as necessary. “Scan Calibration” and “Line Mag” Setting under System 2 available in Service Mode should be OFF. Remove the CCD Unit Cover. 6.

rewriting the Firmware to the latest one.0 Aug. 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 [7] [7] 4037F2C037DA [8] 7. 3.Field Service Ver. and remove the Image Processing Board [11]. NOTE • When the Image Processing Board is to be replaced. Remove six Screws [9] and two Bolts [10]. Remove two connectors [7]. 2006 6. Remove all the Connectors and Flat Cables on the Image Processing Board [8]. [10] [11] [9] 4037F2C039DB 87 Maintenance . 4037F2C038DA 8.

Maintenance 4037F2C041DA [3] 4. and pull out the Copier Board Assy [3]. Mounting and removing the Copier Board without PWB Box may damage the back side of the board. [4] 4037F2C042DA 88 . Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug.78 2. Remove three screws [4] and two hex-head screws [5].3. 6. Remove the connector [1].13 [1] 4037F2C040DA [2] [3] 3. 2006 Copier Board (PWB-CF) 1. NOTE • Remove the Copier Board Assy only when the PWB Box is mounted on the Copier. 3. Remove the right rear cover See P. Loosen two screws [2].6.

Remove the Interface connector [5] and LAN Board [6]. 3.14 LAN Board (PWB-LAN) 6. 3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [3] [2] 1. 2006 6. [5] [6] 4037F2C045DA 89 . Remove four screws [4].0 Aug.Field Service Ver. See P. Remove four screws [1] and two hexhead screws [2]. [4] 4037F2C044DA 5. [1] 4037F2C043DA 4. Remove the Interface Cover [3]. Remove the PWB Unit.119 2. Pull out the Copier Board.3.

119 2. See P. Remove the PWB Unit. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove two Standard memories [1].16 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) [1] Maintenance 1. Remove the PWB Unit.0 Aug.3. 3. 4037F2C538DA 6. See P. [2] 4037F2C540DA 90 .15 1. Remove four screws [1].3. [1] 4037F2C539DA [3] 3.119 2.6. Remove the Flat cable [2] and the Hard Disk Drive Assy [3]. 2006 Standard Memory (D_FILE0) [1] 6.

Remove the Hard Disk Drive [6].119 2.Field Service Ver. 3. Remove the PWB Unit. Other 4. See P. NOTE • When the Hard Disk is replaced.119 2.91 3.17 Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES) 1.18 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) 1. [1] 4037F2C049DA 91 . Remove the work memory [1] on the MFP Control Board.” → “HDD Format” in Service Mode for Logical format. See P. bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [4] [5] 4037F2C541DA 6. See P. Remove the PWB Unit.0 Aug. Remove four screws [4] and the Flat cable [5]. Remove the Electronic sorting Board. [2] [1] 4037F2C046DA 6. select “State Confirmation” → “Memory/HDD Adj. Remove three screws [1] and the Electronic sorting Board [2].3.3. 2006 [6] [4] 6.

make sure to update the firmware. ➁ Perform the following setting for all the patterns. mount the removed Backup RAM to the new MFP Control Board. Note on replacing the MFP Control Board • When the MFP Control Board is replaced.306 ➂ Perform the following setting. Remove three Interface connectors [5] and the MFP Control Board [6]. [2] 4037F2C050DA [3] 5. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6. 4037F2C048DA 1 NOTE • When the Firmware’s card Ver. 3. 2006 4. ➀ Update the Firmware to the latest version. [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] See P.0 Aug. is Ver A7 or later. Remove three screws [3] and seven shoulder screws [4].373 92 . [4] Maintenance [4] [3] 4037F2C047DA [5] [6] 6. [Service Mode] → [Security Setting] → [NVRAM Data Backup] See P. • When the MFP Control Board is replaced. the following operation must be performed without fail when replacing the MFP Control Board. Remove the NVRAM [2] on the MFP Control Board.

2006 6. [1] [1] 4037F2C052DA 93 Maintenance . Remove all the Connectors on the Control Board. 3.0 Aug.19 Control Board (PWB-MC) 6. See P. [2] 3. NOTE • When the Control Board is to be replaced.3. rewriting the Firmware to the latest one. Remove the Lower Rear Cover. Other bizhub C351/C450 4037F2C051DB 1.78 2. Remove eight Screws [1].Field Service Ver. and remove the Control Board [2].

Remove seven screws [1] and the Board Unit [2]. [2] [1] 4037F2C054DA 94 . Remove the PWB Box.120 2. precisely fit the directions of each “A”.0 Aug.3. A 4037F2C534DA 6. 3.20 Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) [1] 1. relocate the Parameter Chip (IC40). Maintenance 4037F2C053DB A NOTE • When the Parameter Chip (IC40) is mounted. See P. 2006 Cautions in replacing the Control Board: • When Control Board (PWB-MC) is replaced. Mount the Parameter Chip (IC40) of old Control Board onto the new Control Board. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6.

2006 6. Remove seven screws [7] and the Flat cable [8]. [7] [8] [9] 4037F2C057DA 95 Maintenance . Other bizhub C351/C450 [3] 3.Field Service Ver. [4] 4037F2C055DA [5] [5] 4. Remove four screws [3] and the cover [4]. 3.0 Aug. [6] [5] [5] 4037F2C056DA [7] 5. Remove fifteen screws [5] and the Control Board Assy [6]. Remove the Slide Interface Board [9].

0 Aug. See P. and remove two Harness Holder [3]. Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit/1 [4]. [6] [5] 4036fs2067c2 96 .3.120 2. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove the PWB Box.21 [3] [1] 1. [4] Maintenance 4036fs2066c1 [5] 4. 2006 High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) [2] 6.6. Remove 9 Screws [5]. and remove the High Voltage Unit/1 [6]. Remove four Screws [1] and eight Connectors [2]. 3. [1] 4037F2C058DA 3.

Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1. See P. 2006 6. and remove the High Voltage Unit/2 Assy [3]. [1] 4037F2C059DA [2] 3. Remove six Screws [4]. Remove all the Connectors on the High Voltage Unit/2 [1]. Remove two Screws [2]. and remove the High Voltage Unit/2 [5].120 2. [3] 4037F2C060DA [4] 4.22 High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) 6.3.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Remove the PWB Box. 3. [5] [4] 4036fs2070c1 97 .

23 [4] [3] [1] 1. 3. and remove the Board Cover [2]. Remove two Screws [2] and Connector [3]. Remove the PWB Box.6.0 Aug. 4.120 3. Remove the Connector [1] on the High Voltage Unit/2. Remove the Exit Tray. [6] Maintenance [5] 4036fs2072c1 6. 2. Remove the Lever [5]. 4036fs2071c1 5. Remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board [6]. 2006 Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) [2] 6. Slide out the Tray 1.3.3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. [1] [1] [2] 4036fs2073c0 98 . and remove the Tray 1 Paper Size Board Assy [4]. See P. Remove six Screws [1]. See P.24 DC Power Supply (PU1) 1.77 2. 6.

2006 6. and remove the DC Power Supply Assy [4].0 Aug. 4036fs2074c1 [3] [3] [4] 5.Field Service Ver. Unplug all connectors from the DC Power Supply. and remove the Protective Cover [6]. Remove four Screws [5]. [6] 4036fs2076c1 99 . Remove seven Screws [3]. [3] [3] [5] 4036fs2075c1 6. Remove the Harness from thirteen wire saddles. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 3. 3. 4.

3. 4036fs2546c1 [5] [5] 4. Remove two screws [1]. Remove 12 Screws [7]. and remove the LED Drive Board [7].106 2. and remove the DC power Supply [8]. unplug two connectors [6].6. See P.25 LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) [3] [2] Maintenance 1. Remove the LPH Unit. and remove each guide Assy. 3. Remove eight screws [5].0 Aug. Remove the flat cables [4] (eight). Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. [7] [8] [7] 4036fs2077c1 6. [1] 4036fs2545c0 [4] [4] 3. 2006 7. [7] [6] [5] 4036fs2143c1 100 . unplug the connector [2] each.

Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. 4037F2C061DA [1] [2] 3. and remove the Tray 2 Board Fixing Bracket [4]. 4036fs2148c0 6. Remove the harness [2] from the wire saddle [1].0 Aug. 4. Remove four Screws [1].3. See P. 3. Slide out the Tray 2.3. 2006 6.78 2.78 3.26 Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) 6. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover.Field Service Ver. and remove the Tray 2 Board [2]. Remove all the Connectors on the Tray 2 Board. See P.27 Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) 1. Remove three Screws [3]. 2. [1] [4] [3] [2] 4037F2C062DA 101 . Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1.

3. Remove two Claws [5] and Connector [6].6. and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board Assy [7]. Maintenance [9] 4037F2C533DA 6. Remove the Scanner Assy. 2006 5. Remove four Screws [1]. [2] [4] [1] [1] [3] 4036fs2152c0 102 . 3. Remove the Lever [8]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. and remove the Inverter Board [4].111 2. See P.28 Inverter Board (PU201) 1. [5] [6] [7] 4037F2C063DA [8] 6. and remove the Tray 2 Paper Size Board [9].0 Aug. Flat Cable [2] and Connector [3].

3.0 Aug. [3] 4036fs2079c1 3. Remove the Screw [4]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1. [5] [6] [4] 4036fs2080c1 [6] 4.Field Service Ver. and remove the Tray 2 Rear Right Cover [2]. [7] 4036fs2081c1 103 . and remove the Bypass Left Cover [5].29 Multi Bypass Unit [2] 6. [1] 4036fs2078c1 2. NOTE • The earth terminal will be screwed with one of four screws. and remove the Multi Bypass Unit [7].3. Remove four Screws [6]. 2006 6. Remove three Connectors [3]. Remove two Screws [1].

2. Remove two Terminals [5].6. Remove the Left Front Cover and Panel Cover. K). 3. Y. Remove the Toner Cartridge (C. and remove the Front Right Cover [2].3.30 1. [5] 4037F2C065DA 104 . 2006 Toner Hopper Unit 6. DO NOT leave the Imaging Unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged. [3] 4037F2C064DA 7. See P. Remove two screws [3] and the Front Door Switch cover [4]. Remove two Screws [1]. connect the Terminals in the sequence of blue and then white from upper. M. Y. K). [2] [1] 4036fs2082c0 Maintenance [4] 6. 3. M. NOTE • After the Imaging Unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place.0 Aug. Remove the IU (C. NOTE • For installation of Hopper Unit. 4. Open the Front Door.77 5. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

2006 6. 3. [6] 4037F2C066DA [7] 9. Remove five screws [7] and the Toner Hopper Unit [8]. Other bizhub C351/C450 8.Field Service Ver. Disconnect five connectors [6]. [7] 4036fs2086c2 105 Maintenance [8] .0 Aug.

3. [3] [3] 4037F2C068DA 106 . Slide out the IU (C. 2006 LPH Unit 6. When installing the Imaging Unit into the main unit. and remove the Harness Protective Cover [4]. make sure that the Toner supply shutter is opened if the Imaging Unit Lower Cover is not used. 2. K).30 4.6. See P. Remove four Screws [3]. Maintenance [1] [2] 4037F2C067DA [4] 6. Open the Left Door. Remove the Rear Right Cover. place the IU lock lever back into the locked position. Open the Front Door. Y.77 5. Remove the Image Transfer Belt Unit. NOTE • After the IU has been pulled out. Remove two screws [1] and the lattice connector fixing bracket [2]. 3.31 1.0 Aug. M. 3. See P. 7. Rear Left Cover and Rear Cover. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

Remove five Connectors [5] on the Control Board. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [6]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 8.Field Service Ver. [6] 4037F2C070DA [7] 10. [5] 4037F2C069DB 9. 2006 [5] 6.0 Aug. Remove the Screw [7] and Connector [8]. [8] 4037F2C071DA 107 . 3.

use care not to touch the LED surface. NOTE • During the locking procedure. however. This step is not. M. See P. 3.146 108 . [9] 4037F2C072DA [10] Maintenance 12. NOTE • When the LPH Unit is to be replaced. clean it with the LED Cleaning Jig. Y. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. K) drive hub [10]. 4037F2C073DA [12] [11] [11] 4037F2C074DA 13. push it into the locked position (at four places). • Should the LED surface be touched.0 Aug. Remove the Connector [9]. remove the TCR Sensor from the old LPH Unit and remount it on the new one. Turning the IU (C. necessary if the IU is replaced at the same time. 2006 11. Remove four screws [11] and slide out the LPH Unit [12].6.

4036fs2091c0 109 . be sure to run [Stabilizer] available from [Image Adjust] of the [Service Mode].3.78 3. 2. 2006 6. [2] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [3] 5. 3. See P. Removal Procedure 1. 4.Field Service Ver. Proceeding with job while still being locked may unintentionally release the locking condition. Remove the Connector and the reinforcement frame [2]. • When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled. • For installation of the LPH Unit. bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [1] 4037F2C076DB [13] 4037F2C075DA 6. Remove the Rear Cover and IR Upper Rear Cover.32 Scanner Motor (M201) A. lock four Drive hubs again before installation.0 Aug. be sure to turn four Drive Hubs [13] to release locking. Remove the tension spring [3] for the Scanner Motor belt. Remove 16 screws [1]. Other NOTE • After replacing the LPH Unit. Remove the ADF. thus damaging the Drive hub.

3. Remove three screws [4] and the Scanner Motor Assy [5]. 110 . Temporarily secure the Scanner Motor Assy [2] using three screws [1].6. 4. With the Scanner drive gear set screw located on the right-hand side as shown on the left. 2006 6. 2. slide the Scanner Motor Assy to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring. Other bizhub C351/C450 [5] [4] Field Service Ver. Maintenance [9] [6] 4036fs2524c1 [1] [3] [2] 4036fs2525c0 B. Reinstallation Procedure 1. 3. damper [8] and the Scanner Motor [9].0 Aug. Securely tighten the three screws to fix the Scanner Motor Assy [2] into position. Remove two screws [6]. Hook the spring [3]. Perform this step three times. [4] [4] [7] [8] 4036fs2523c0 7. set screw [7].

80 2. See P.33 Scanner Assy 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1. [2] 4036fs2526c0 [3] 3. Remove the Original Glass. 3.Field Service Ver. 4036fs2527c0 111 . 2006 6. Move the Scanner Assy [1] to the location shown and remove one mounting screw each at the front and rear end. [1] 4037F2C077DA NOTE • Do not remove the Scanner Positioning Screws (red-painted) [2]. Take out the Scanner Assy [3] by turning it in the direction of the arrow shown.3.0 Aug.

80 7. 6. Unhook the springs [3] of the Scanner Drive Cables on the hook side. Remove the Original Glass. [5] [4] [6] [7] 4037F2C078DA 6. Remove four screws [2] and the control panel base [3]. See P. Removal Procedure Maintenance [1] [1] 4036fs2094c0 [2] [3] 4. See P.6. 4036fs2547c0 112 . See P. 5. Remove four Presser Bars [1] of Flat Cable. 4036fs2095c1 [3] [3] 6. Remove the Scanner Assy. See P. A. Remove the IR Front Cover.34 Scanner Drive Cables 1. See P.80 5.3.81 3. Remove the screw [4] and the holder [5].111 8. 2006 4. Remove the flat cable [6].78 2. Remove the Scanner Assy [7]. 3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. one each at the front and in the rear.0 Aug. Remove the Control Panel. Remove the Rear Cover.

4036fs2552c0 113 . 15. Then. 4036fs2550c0 13. Remove the screw [8] and the Scanner drive gear [9]. Remove the Screw [6].Field Service Ver. See P. Slide the shaft [12] toward the rear and lift it.109 10. Remove the Scanner Motor Assy.0 Aug. Remove the Scanner Drive Cables. 3. Remove the screw [4] and then slide the front pulley [5] toward the front. [11] [10] 4036fs2551c0 [12] [13] 14. and slide the Wire Pulley [7] (Rear side) in the direction of front side. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 9. [7] 4036fs2549c0 [8] [9] 12. 2006 [4] [5] 6. Snap off the C-clip [10] and remove the bushing [11] (front). remove the front and rear pulleys [13]. 4036fs2548c0 [6] 11.

4036fs2555c0 114 . Reinstallation Procedure [1] [2] <Front> 1.6.3.35 <Overall figure> Maintenance 4036fs2553c0 A.0 Aug. Position the round bead [1] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [2] as shown. 2006 Winding of the Scanner Drive Cables 6. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley. 4036fs2554c0 2. 3. from the rear toward the front side. Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clockwise. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

Slip the Cable Holding Jig [3] onto the pulley to secure the cable in position. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counterclockwise. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. Wind the hook end of the cable around the pulley five turns counterclockwise. from the front toward the rear side. 4036fs2558c0 6. 4036fs2557c0 [4] [5] <Rear> 5. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. 3. from the rear toward the front side. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley. 4036fs2556c0 [3] 4. from the front toward the rear side. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. 4036fs2560c0 115 Maintenance bizhub C351/C450 . Wind the fixed bead end of the cable around the pulley five turns clockwise. Other 3.Field Service Ver. 2006 6. 4036fs2559c0 7.0 Aug. Position the round bead [4] of the Scanner Drive Cable in the pulley [5] as shown.

[6] 4036fs2561c0 [9] [7] 9. Mount the Scanner drive gear [11] on the shaft [12] and secure it using the screw [13]. 4036fs2564c0 116 . Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6.0 Aug. NOTE • Allow a clearance of about 0. Install the front and rear pulleys [7] and bushings [8] onto the shaft [9] and fit the C-clip [10]. Secure the front and rear pulleys [14] using the screw [15] each. Slip the Cable Holding Jig [6] onto the pulley to secure the cable in position.1 mm between the Scanner drive gear and bushing. 3. 2006 8. NOTE • Apply the Screw lock on the Screw. 0. [8] [10] 4036fs2562c0 Maintenance [13] [12] 10.1 mm [11] 4036fs2563c0 [14] [15] [15] [14] 11.

1 mm or more: Retry to put the spring on the catch B. 2006 [17] 6. bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [18] [16] 4036fs2584c0 [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] 4036fs2565c0 14. 3.Field Service Ver. [26] [24] [25] 4036fs2566c0 A B C 15. See P. Wind the hook end of the cable [24] around pulley A [25] and pulley B [26]. Other NOTE • Mount the Screw [16] in the direction that is opposite against the direction for which Scanner Drive Gear [17] and Screw [18] are screwed together as shown in the left figure. [28] [27] 4036fs2567c0 117 . Wind the bead end of the cable [19] around pulley C [20] and pulley B [21]. Fit the hook end of the cable [27] to the spring [28] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame.109 <Front> 13.9 mm or less: Retry to put the spring on the catch C. then hook the bead [22] onto the Adjustable Anchor [23].0 mm ± 1 mm. • In case of 61. Mount the Scanner Motor Assy. 12. 16. Measure the Spring length. and check if its length is within the range of 63.0 Aug. <When out of the given range> • In case of 64.

Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 mm ± 1 mm.6.296 118 . See P. Measure the Spring length.384 23.0 Aug. 22. [29] [31] [32] [30] [33] 4036fs2568c0 [36] [35] 18. Adjust the focus positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit. See P. Maintenance [37] [38] 4036fs2570c0 21. be sure to carry out the “Feed Direction Adjustment” procedure. Wind the bead end of the cable [29] around pulley F [30] and pulley E [31].1 mm or more: Retry to put the spring on the catch B. • In case of 61. Adjust the position of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. and check if its length is within the range of 63. Fit the hook end of the cable [37] to the spring [38] and then hook the spring to the catch A in the frame. then hook the bead [32] onto the Adjustable Anchor [33]. 2006 <Rear> 17. 3. 20.384 NOTE • Whenever the Scanner Drive Cables have been removed. [34] 4036fs2569c0 A B C 19. See P. Wind the hook end of the cable [34] around pulley D [35] and pulley E [36].9 mm or less: Retry to put the spring on the catch C. Remove the Cable Holding Jigs from the front and rear pulleys. <When out of the given range> • In case of 64.

78 2. [3] 4037F2C080DA 119 Maintenance .3. Other bizhub C351/C450 1.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. Remove eight screws [2]. 2006 6. See P. [1] 4037F2C040DA 3. 3.36 PWB Unit 6. Remove the Right Rear Cover. [2] [2] 4037F2C079DB 4. Disconnect the connector [1]. Remove the PWB Unit [3].

See P. 5. Remove the Rear Cover. Left Rear Cover. Open the Left door. Right Rear Cover. 3.37 [1] [2] 4037F2C067DA [4] 4. 6.27 2. See P. Remove four screws [3] and the Harness Protective Cover [4].6. Maintenance [3] [3] 4037F2C068DA [5] [6] 6.0 Aug. NOTE • Do not remove the Flat cable [6].76 3. Remove two screws [1] and the lattice connector fixing bracket [2]. Remove the Ozone filter. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. and IR Left Cover. 4037F2C081DB 120 . 2006 PWB Box 1.3. Lower Rear Cover. Remove all the connectors on the Mechanical Control Board [5].

Remove two connectors [8]. 2006 6.0 Aug. [7] [7] 4037F2C082DB [8] 8. [8] 4037F2C083DB [9] 9. 4037F2C084DA 121 . 3. Remove the connector set screw [9]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [7] [7] 7.Field Service Ver. Remove the Harness from fourteen wire saddles [7].

[11] [10] 4037F2C085DA 11. 3.6. 2006 10. Remove six connectors [11] connected to the Slide Interface Board [10]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove eleven screws [13]. [12] Maintenance 4037F2C086DA 12.0 Aug. Remove the connector [12]. [13] [13] [13] 4037F2C087DC 122 .

120 2. 3. and remove the Harness from two wire saddles [2]. [2] [4] 4037F2C090DA 123 . [15] [14] [14] Maintenance 4037F2C088DB 6. Remove the PWB Box.3. Remove the PWB Box. 2006 6. Remove two connectors [1]. and remove the Main Motor [3].Field Service Ver.3.38 [2] Main Motor (M1) [3] [1] 1.0 Aug. Other bizhub C351/C450 13. See P. See P. Remove the Connector [1] and three Screws [2].120 2. Remove three screws [3] and the Fan Motor Assy/1 [4]. 4036fs2100c0 6.39 [1] Fusing Drive Motor (M2) [3] 1. Remove two claws [14] and the Board Box [15]. 3.

Remove the Panel Cover. See P. 5. and remove the Toner Supply Motor C/K [3].78 2.40 Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) 1. 3. Remove two connectors [5].3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. [5] [7] [6] [5] [7] [8] [6] 4037F2C091DA 6. 4. Remove two shoulder screws [7] and the Fan Motor Assy[8]. Remove the Harness for the Toner Supply Motor C/K [3] from the wire saddle [4]. Maintenance [9] [9] [11] [10] 4037F2C092DA 6. and remove the Fusing Drive Motor [11]. Remove two Screws [1]. and remove the Front Right Cover [2]. 2006 4. Remove two Screws [5] and Connector [6]. Remove four Screws [9] and Connector [10]. and remove the Harness from three wire saddles [6]. [2] [1] 4036fs2082c0 [5] [6] [4] 3.6. [3] 4037F2C093DA 124 .

Remove three screws [2] and the Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor [3].Field Service Ver.3. [3] 4036fs2105c0 [5] 4. turn the Toner Replenishing Motor Y/M [5] counterclockwise and take it off the machine. Remove the connector [1]. 2006 6.41 Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) 6. 2. [4] 4036fs2530c1 6.3. Then.78 3. Remove the Connector [3]. See P. Pull out the Tray 2. Remove the Toner Hopper.104 2. 3. See P. Remove two screws [4]. 4. Remove the screw [1] and the gear [2].0 Aug. 4037F2C094DA 125 . 4036fs2529c1 3.42 Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) [1] [3] [2] 1. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [2] [1] 1.

Remove two screws [6]. 4. Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. Remove two screws [4] and the Motor Assy [5]. [7] 4037F2C097DA 126 .0 Aug. See P. 3. and remove Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor [7].6.3. Maintenance [5] [4] 4037F2C096DA [6] 6. [1] 4037F2C095DA 5. 2. 2006 Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) [3] 6. Remove the Harness for the Motor Assy [2] from four wire saddles [1]. Pull out the Tray 2.78 3. Remove two connectors [3].43 [2] 1. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

Pull out the Tray 2.78 3. 2006 6.3. [7] 4037F2C098DB 127 . Remove the Tray 2 Rear Cover. Remove two connectors [3]. See P. 3. 2. Remove two screws [4] and the Motor Assy [5]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1.Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [6] and the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor [7]. [5] [4] 4037F2C096DA [6] 6. 4. [1] 4037F2C095DA 5. Remove the Harness Assy [2] from four wire saddles [1].44 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) [3] [2] 6.0 Aug.

45 1. 128 . and remove the Harness Holder [3]. and remove the Color PC Drum Motor [6]. Remove four Screws (Red-painted) [4] and Connector [5].0 Aug. be sure to check the assembled position of PC Gear. See P. Remove two Screws [2]. If its position is improper.120 2. 3. and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.6. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each Gear hole at the same time. 2006 Color PC Drum Motor (M5) [1] 6. A. make positioning adjustment. Remove the PWB Box. 2. Remove four Connectors [1] on the High Voltage Unit/1.3. Slowly turn the PC Gear/1 [1]. Cautions when mounting the Color PC Drum Motor: • Before mounting the Color PC Drum Motor. Checking method [1] [3] [4] [2] 4036fs2170c1 1. [3] [2] 4037F2C089DA [4] Maintenance [4] [6] [5] 4036fs2106c2 4.

2006 B. 3. and fit the hole A [2] with the PC Gear/1 [1] hole while visually checking.Field Service Ver. Reinstall the Upper Frame Assy. Adjusting method [1] [4] 6. [5] 4036fs2171c1 129 . and then fit the hole B [3] with the PC Gear/2 [4] hole while visually checking. Fix the PC Gear/1 [1].0 Aug. Mount the Color PC Drum Motor [5] while two hole positions are well set. 2. [2] [3] 4036fs2173c1 4. Remove seven Screws and Upper Frame Assy. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1. 3. 5. Turn the PC Gear/1 [1].

130 . 3.120 2. See P. and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the Gear holes as shown on the above figure.6. If its position is improper. 2. 3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.3. Maintenance [4] Cautions when mounting the Color Developing Motor: • Before mounting the Color Developing Motor. make positioning adjustment.46 [3] 1. be sure to check the assembled position of PC Gear. Slowly turn the PC Gear/1 [1]. [2] 4037F2C099DA [4] [6] [5] 4036fs2108c1 4. Remove the PWB Box. Checking method [1] [4] [2] [3] 4036fs2638c0 1. and remove the Harness Holder [3]. A. 2006 Color Developing Motor (M6) [1] 6. Remove two Screws [2].0 Aug. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each Gear hole at the same time. Remove four Screws [4] and Connector [5]. Remove eight Connectors [1] on the High Voltage Unit/1. and remove the Color Developing Motor [6].

120 2. Mount the Color Developing Motor [5] while two hole positions are well set. Turn the PC Gear/3 [1]. Reinstall the Upper Frame Assy. 2.0 Aug. Remove seven Screws and the Upper Frame Assy. [2] [3] 4036fs22639c0 4. 3. and then fit the hole B [3] with the PC Gear/2 [4] hole while visually checking. and fit the hole C [2] with the PC Gear/3 [1] hole while visually checking.47 K PC Motor (M7) [2] 1. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1. Fix the PC Gear/3 [1]. 2006 B. 3. Remove the PWB Box. Remove four Screws [1] and Connector [2]. [3] [1] 4037F2C100DA 131 . and remove the K PC Motor [3]. Adjusting method [1] [4] 6. [5] 4036fs2640c0 6. 5.Field Service Ver. See P.3.

6.0 Aug. Remove the PWB Box. See P.3. [2] [4] 4037F2C090DA Maintenance [4] 4. Remove two Screws [4]. and remove the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor [8]. 132 . 3. and remove the Harness from two wire saddles [2]. [5] 4037F2C101DA [7] [6] [8] 4036fs2112c1 6. Remove two connectors [1].48 1. and remove the High Voltage Unit/1 Fixing plate [5]. Remove the High Voltage Unit/1. See P. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove three screws [3] and the Fan Motor Assy/1 [4].120 2. 3. Remove two Screws [6] and Connector [7]. 2006 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) [1] [3] 6.96 5.

Remove four screws [2]. [2] Maintenance [4] 4036fs2531c0 4. 4037F2C510DA [2] [3] [5] 3. Remove two screws [6] and the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor [7].Field Service Ver. Unlock the tab and remove the Transport Unit Assy [1].0 Aug. Open the Right Door. 2006 6. unplug the connector [3].3. 3.49 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) [1] 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 1. 2. and remove the gear Assy [4] and motor Assy [5]. [7] [6] 4036fs2532c0 133 .

0 Aug. 2. [6] [7] 4036fs2114c0 [8] 5. Remove the C-ring [8].50 1. and remove the Transport section Assy [5]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6. and remove the Gear 1 [9]. [9] 4036fs2115c0 134 .3. 2006 Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) [1] 6. 3. Open the Right Door. Remove six Connectors [3] and Earth [4]. and remove the Holder [7]. Remove three Screws [6]. Maintenance [4] [3] 4036fs2113c1 4. Remove the Lock claw to make free conditions of Transport section Assy [1]. 4037F2C510DA [3] [5] 3.

and remove the Mounting plate [15]. 3. • Use care on the harness not to be bitten. [14] [15] 4036fs2118c0 [17] [16] 9. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 6. NOTE • Remove the Intermediate Transport Motor while its Harness is well fit with the groove.Field Service Ver. Remove the C-ring [12]. and remove the Sensor Assy [17]. Remove two Screws [14]. 135 . [10] [11] 4036fs2116c0 7.0 Aug. 2006 6. 4036fs2119c1 [19] [18] 4036fs2120c0 10. [13] [12] 4036fs2117c0 8. and remove the Gear 2 [11]. Remove the C-ring [10]. and remove the Intermediate Transport Motor [19]. Remove two Screws [18]. and remove the Gear 3 [13]. Remove the Screw [16].

5. 3. See P.6. 3. Remove two Screws [8].3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove eight Screws [6]. [7] [8] [6] 4037F2C091DA [6] [6] 6. [2] [4] 4037F2C090DA [5] [7] [6] [5] Maintenance 4. 7.120 2. [7] 4037F2C102DA [8] 10. Remove the Fusing Unit. [9] 4036fs2122c1 136 .0 Aug. and remove the Harness Guide [9]. and remove the Harness from two wire saddles [2]. See the procedure 2 of “Replacing of Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller”. Remove the Wiring Cover. Remove two shoulder screws [7] and the Fan Motor Assy/2 [8]. Remove two connectors [1].36 8. Remove two connectors [5].21 9. 2006 Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) [1] [3] 6. and remove the Harness from three wire saddles [6]. Remove three screws [3] and the Fan Motor Assy/1 [4]. See P. See P. and remove the Rear Handle Assy [7].51 1. Remove the PWB Box. Open the Right Door.

Other bizhub C351/C450 [10] 4036fs2124c1 12. Remove the Gear [12]. Remove six Connectors [11]. [10] 6.Field Service Ver. Remove four Screws [10]. [11] Maintenance [11] [11] 4036fs2123c1 13. [12] 4036fs2125c1 137 . 2006 11. 3.0 Aug.

0 Aug. [18] 4036fs2129c1 [19] [21] [20] 18.6. Remove the E-ring [13]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. [17] 16. Maintenance 4036fs2128c1 17. Remove the Screw [15]. 3. and remove the Gear [14]. and remove the Wire Rail [16]. NOTE • Use care not to hurt the Right Door wire and Harness around. Remove the Fusing Drive Gear Assy [17]. NOTE • Use care not to miss the Shaft. 2006 14. Remove four Screws [18]. [14] [13] 4036fs2126c1 [15] [16] 4036fs2127c1 15. NOTE • Close the Right Door when removing to prevent the wire from damaging. and remove the Gear [21]. Remove the E-ring [19] and Shaft [20]. 4036fs2130c1 138 .

and remove the Cover [23]. 2006 6.Field Service Ver. and remove the Gear [25]. See P. See the procedures 1 to 4 of “1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor”.3. [1] [1] [2] [1] 4037F2C103DA 139 Maintenance 21. Remove the High Voltage Unit/1 mounting plate. and remove the Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor [27]. and remove the IR Left Frame [2].52 Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) 1. Remove the two Screws [26]. . Remove ten screws [1]. Remove two E-rings [22]. Remove the E-ring [24].132 2. 4036fs2132c1 [27] [26] 4036fs2133c1 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 19. [23] [22] 4036fs2131c1 [25] [24] 20.0 Aug. 3.

Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Remove the connector [5]. Remove two Screws [6].6. Maintenance [5] 4037F2C105DA [6] 5. 3. 2006 3.0 Aug. [3] [3] [4] 4037F2C104DA 4. and remove the Harness Holder [7]. [7] 4037F2C106DA 140 . Remove four screws [3] and the wiring guide plate [4].

[2] [1] 4036fs2082c0 4. See P. Remove the Panel Cover. Open the Front Door. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [9] 6. 2006 6.78 3.2 (PC8/PC9) 1. 4037F2C109DA 141 . Open the Right Door. Remove four screws [4] and the Registration Roller entrance guide [5]. Remove two Screws [1]. Remove the Connector [3]. Remove four Screws [8]. and remove the Front Right Cover [2]. [8] [8] 4037F2C107DA 6. 2. [3] 4037F2C108DA [5] [4] [4] 5.53 IDC/Registration Sensor/1. 3.Field Service Ver.0 Aug.3. and remove the Cleaning Brush Motor [9]. 6.

[8] [6] [7] 4037F2C110DA [10] [11] Maintenance [9] 8. • If the LPH Assy comes off position when the Lock is unlocked.3.2 have been replaced.6. the LPH Assy must be installed using the LPH Assy mounting jig. See P. 4037F2C111DA 6. Clean the LED. Removal Procedure 1. Remove the LPH Unit. be sure to replace the Image Transfer Belt Unit. and remove the IDC/Registration Sensor/1 [8]. Remove two Screws [9] and Connector [10]. Holding the LPH Assy [1] with hands. NOTE • Do not touch the LED by hand. 3. NOTE • Whenever the IDC/Registration Sensor/1.0 Aug. if touched by hand. 2006 7. using the LED cleaning jig. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. and remove the IDC/Registration Sensor/2 [11].106 2.54 LPH A. Remove three Screws [6] and Connector [7]. unlock [2] it. • Be careful about the spring that can spring off when the LPH Assy is unlocked. 4036fs2627c0 [1] [2] 142 .

and C). whether it is for black or color. Reinstallation Procedure NOTE • The LPH comes in two types. 2006 [3] 6. make sure of the type of the LPH. Perform the same procedure for each of different colors of LPH. <Check method> Determine the type of LPH using the marking on the side face of the LPH. 6. unlock [5] the LPH Assy. The markings are: LPH for black: BLACK LPH for color: COLOR 4037F2C524DA 143 .Field Service Ver. 5. [7] 4036fs2629c0 B. At replacement. Remove the three LPH mounting screws [3]. 3. 4036fs2628c0 [4] [6] [5] 4. M. Peel off the seal [4]. Remove the LPH [7]. and remove the flat cable [6]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 3. one for black and the other for color (common to Y.0 Aug.

0 Aug.6. Remove two Screws [6] and Connector [7]. [5] [4] 4036fs2631c0 [6] [8] [7] 4. and remove the guide Assy [8]. Affix the seal [3] that comes with the LPH Assy to the location shown on the left. 4036fs2533c1 144 . NOTE • Failure to affix the seal could cause the flat cable to come off the LPH Assy. Remove two screws [4] and the Guide [5]. 2. Other bizhub C351/C450 [3] [2] Field Service Ver. Insert the flat cable [2] into the LPH [1] and lock the LPH [1]. [1] Maintenance 4036fs2630c0 3. 2006 1. 3.

0 Aug.Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent. 4036fs2635c0 [13] [14] [13] [15] 4036fs2543c0 9. Connect the connector [15]. 6. Install the two screws [13] to secure the guide Assy [14]. 10. Other 5. Install the Guide. bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance [9] [9] <LPH Y/M> [9] 4036fs2634c0 [11] 7. • Make sure that the flat cable is aligned with the groove in the Guide Assy. 2006 <LPH C/Bk> 6. Align the markings [9] on the flat cable with the positions shown in the photo. Secure the LPH [10] using three screws [11]. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the flat cable is wedged in mechanisms or bent. 3. [10] 4036fs2632c0 [12] [12] 8. 145 . Push the slack portion in the flat cable [12] into the inside of the machine.

[16] 4036fs2633c0 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Maintenance 146 .3. unplug the connector [2]. NOTE • Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [LPH Rank] and change the value of [LPH Rank] to “1”. See P. Press the LPH Assy [16] down into the locked position.0 Aug.106 2. Remove the LPH Unit. and remove the TCR Sensor. NOTE • When the TCR Sensor has been reinstalled. 2006 11. • When the LPH Unit has been reinstalled. be sure to run [Stabilizer] available from [Image Process Adjustment] of the [Service Mode].55 TCR Sensor Y/M/C (PWB-N1/-N2/-N3) [1] [3] [2] 4036fs2544c0 1.6. be sure to run [Stabilizer] available from [Image Process Adjustment] of the [Service Mode]. Remove two screws [1]. 3.

4. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 6.0 Aug.1 Tray 1 Paper Take-up Roller [1] 1. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove two screws [1] and the Tray 1 Paper Separation Roller mounting bracket Assy [2].4.Field Service Ver. Slide out the Tray 1. wipe the Tray 1 Paper TakeUp Roller [1] clean of dirt.4 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. [3] 4036fs2014c1 147 . wipe the Tray 1 Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt. 4037F2C001DA 6. [1] [2] 4036fs2013c1 3. 2006 6. Slide out the Tray 1. 3.2 Tray 1 Separation Roller 1. 2.

Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. See P.4 Bypass Tray Separation Roller 1.0 Aug. 6.4. Maintenance [3] 4037F2C516DA 6. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.3 [2] [1] 4037F2C515DA 3. Remove two screws [1]. Remove two screws [1]. 3.103 2. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.6. 2006 Bypass Tray Paper Take-up Roller 1. and remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. wipe the Bypass Paper Take-up Roller [3].4.103 2. [2] [1] 4037F2C515DA 148 . See P. and remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

[3] 4037F2C521DA 6. Remove the Multi Bypass unit. Using the soft cloth dampened with alcohol.6 Tray 2 Pick-up Roller 1. 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4. [1] [2] 4036fs2018c0 149 . [1] 4036fs2022c1 6. Slide out the Tray 2.4. 2006 6. See the procedures 1 to 7 in “Cleaning of Tray 2 Separation Roller. 3. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. [1] 4036fs2030c1 6. wipe the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller [1].7 Tray 2 Separation Roller 1. 2.5 Tray 2 Paper Take-up Roller 1. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 3.0 Aug.” See P.” See P. Remove the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy. and the Reinforcement plate [2].4.149 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.Field Service Ver. wipe the Tray 2 Paper Takeup Roller [1]. wipe the Bypass Paper Separation Roller [3].149 2. Remove the Screw [1]. See the procedures 1 to 7 in “Cleaning of Tray 2 Separation Roller.

[3] [4] 4036fs2019c0 [6] 6. 5. Remove two Screws [7] and the Tray 2 Separation Roller installation plate Assy [8]. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [7] 4036fs2021c1 [9] 8.0 Aug. Remove two Claws [3] and the Vertical transport door [4]. 2006 4. and remove the Jam processing cover [6]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. wipe the Tray 2 Separation Roller [9]. Open the Vertical transport door. Maintenance [5] [8] 4037F2C004DA 7. 4036fs2592c0 150 .6. Remove two Screws [5]. 3.

Remove the Original Glass [5]. [5] [4] 4036fs2505c0 [6] 4. 2006 6. Remove three screws [1] and the IR Upper Right Cover [2]. wipe the Tray 2 Transport Roller [1].4. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 1. 3. [1] 4036fs2504c0 [3] 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the Mirror 1 [1] and Mirror 2/3 [2].8 Tray 2 Transport Roller 6. Open the Vertical transport door.Field Service Ver. Remove the Original Glass. NOTE • Apply lubricant after cleaning.4. Remove two screws [3] and two Original Glass fixing brackets [4] (at the front and rear).10 [2] Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) [1] 1. 4036fs2507c0 151 .0 Aug. [1] 4036fs2033c1 6. 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the Scanner Rails [6] clean of dirt. 4036fs2506c1 6. See P.9 [2] Scanner Rail 1.4. 2.80 2.

Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2006 Lens [2] 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6.0 Aug. [1] [1] 4037F2C007DA 3. Remove the Original Glass. Remove two Screws [1] and Lens cover [2]. wipe the Lens [3] clean of dirt.80 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. See P.4. wipe the Original Glass [1] clean of dirt. 4036fs2508c0 152 .11 1.12 [1] Original Glass 1. 3. Maintenance [3] 4037F2C008DA 6.4.

2006 6.0 Aug. wipe the CCD Sensor [5] clean of dirt. Remove two hooks [3] and the lens cover [4]. 4036fs2044c1 153 .80 2. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol. 3. [1] 4037F2C009DA [3] [4] [3] 3. Remove the Original Glass.Field Service Ver.4. [5] 4. See P. Remove seven Screws [1] and CCD Unit protective cover [2]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 4037F2C010DA [1] 1.13 CCD Sensor [2] 6.

2. 2006 6. Remove the Original glass. Using the screw [2].5 Mount the original size detecting sensor FD2 (PC204) [1] 1.0 Aug.6. [2] 4037F2C113DB <How to set the Harness> Maintenance PC203 PC204 4037F2C114DB 154 . 3. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. mount the Original Size Detection Sensor FD2 (PC204) [1] and fix it.

See P. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Org. 4037F2E530DA 4. 2006 6. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 3. Select [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Original Size Detection].0 Aug. Check to make sure that the [Org. 3. 4037F2E531DA 155 . Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set] is displayed on the Original Size Detection Sensor Adjustment screen.Field Service Ver. Size Detecting Sensor Adj]. and set the Original Glass to [Table2].291 5.

and remove the Front Right Cover [2]. Cut out the knockout [4] in the Front Right Cover [3]. See P. Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6 6. Remove the Panel Cover. Remove the Screw [1]. [6] [5] 4036fs2573c0 6. Remove two screws [5] and the Right Front Cover [6]. [1] 4036fs2571c0 [2] [4] [3] 4. Install the Mounting plate [7] on the Counter/K [9] with the Screw [8].0 Aug.6.1 Option counter Installation of The Counter/K 1. Maintenance 4036fs2572c0 5. 2.6. 2006 6.78 3. [9] [7] [8] 4036fs2574c0 156 . Open the Front Door. 3.

and remove the Cover [2]. Secure the Counter/K [11] with the screw [10]. Other bizhub C351/C450 Maintenance 7. 4. 2.Field Service Ver. Reinstall the Rear Cover. 3. See P.0 Aug.2 Installation method for the Key Counter 1. Mount the Connector [4].6. [4] [3] 4037F2C532DA [7] [6] 5. [5] 4036fs2586c0 157 . Remove the Lower Rear Cover. Secure the counter cable [5] and cable holder [6] with one screw [7]. Mount the Connector [12] of Counter/K on the Relay Connector [13] at main body side. [11] [10] 4036fs2575c0 [12] [13] 8. Pass the Key Counter Harness [3] through the hole. 6. Remove two Screws [1]. 4036fs2576c0 6.78 [2] [1] 4036fs2585c1 3. 2006 6.

Other bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. NOTE • Secure the Counter Mounting Bracket passing the connector into the bracket. Select [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] → [Key Counter] and set Color Mode and Message. 3. 8.6. 12.0 Aug.” [16] 4036fs2626c0 158 . 9. Connect the Key Counter Socket connector [10]. use the short screws (9646-0408-14: M4x8). secure the counter socket [11]. Fix the harness [16] with the cable clamp [15] as shown in the left figure. see “Adjustment/ Setting. secure the Counter Mounting Bracket [8]. Using four screws [9]. 4036fs2589c0 [15] 11. For details on setting. Using two screws [12]. • Use the four long screws (96460418-14: M4x18) in the Key Counter Kit to secure the Counter Mounting Bracket. 2006 7. [8] [9] 4036fs2587c1 [11] Maintenance [12] [10] 4036fs2588c0 [13] [14] 10. Using two screws [14]. secure the Key Counter Cover [13]. When installing the Key Counter to the other products.

levelness of the installation site. PC Drum. • Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. parts. • If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. 159 . elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). • The Original Glass.Field Service Ver. 3. etc. • Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. slit glass. • Correct paper is being used for printing. • The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. • The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. • Toner is not running out. high humidity.0 Aug..g. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. the following advance checks must be made. and supplies used for printing (developer. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. direct sunlight.. • The units. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting. • Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. CAUTION • To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. How to use the adjustment section bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Adjustment/Setting 7. or related part is dirty. • The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. • The power supply is properly grounded. • The density is properly selected. etc. ventilation. Check to see if: • The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 2006 7. • The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field.

2006 8. Touch [Touch Panel Adj]. 3.0 Aug. • These crosses may be touched in any order. Press the Accessibility key.1 Utility Mode Touch Panel Adj. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in green. 1. • To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display • Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. but be sure to touch the center of each cross. • Use during the setup procedure. Functions Use Adjustment Procedure 4037F3E512DA Adjustment / Setting 4. 8. Press the Start key. 2. 160 . • Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen. Using the tip of a pen or similar object. touch the four crosses (+) on the screen in sequence.8. 5.

172 P.173 Address Book Abbr.177 User Box Public/Personal User Box Bulletin Board User Box Relay User Box User Setting System Setting Language Selection Measurement Unit Setting Paper Tray Setting Auto Tray Select Setting Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Print Lists Auto Color Level Adjustment Power Save Setting* Low Power Mode Setting* Sleep Mode Setting* 161 Adjustment / Setting P.0 Aug.175 P.171 P.174 P.372 NOTE • Keys indicated on each screen differ depending on the setting.172 P.270 • For displaying the keys with *** marks.173 .173 P.174 P. Utility Mode One-Touch Registration Scan Address Book E-Mail FTP SMB User Box Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) Fax Subject Text Ref.175 P.171 P.177 P.175 P.171 P.175 P. 2006 8. • For displaying the keys with *. ** marks.” See P.176 P.172 P.” See P.174 P.171 P.Field Service Ver. page P. see “Administrator Feature Level.173 P.176 P.172 P.174 P.2 Utility Mode function tree * The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.175 P. see “Administrator Security Level. 3. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 8.172 P.173 P.171 P. Dial E-Mail User Box IP Address Fax Destination Internet Fax Address Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) Subject Text P. NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.176 P.

183 P.183 P.178 P.182 P.180 P. 3.183 P.184 P.180 P. Display Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Copy Operating Screen TX Display RX Display P.185 P.184 P.180 P.185 P.183 P.185 P.182 P.0 Aug.186 P.177 P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Utility Mode User Setting System Setting Output Setting** Field Service Ver.186 P. page Print/Fax Out.181 P.179 P.178 P.182 Copy Initial Screen Setting Job List Default Initial Setting Copier Setting Auto Paper Select for Small Original Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Sort/Group Auto Change Set for Incorrect AMS Direction Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)* Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)* Specify Default Tray when APS Off* Select Tray for Insert Sheet* Print Setting for Separate Scan Print Jobs During Copy Operation** Scanner Setting JPEG Compression Level Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Printer Setting Basic Setting PDL Setting Number of Sets Original Direction Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch Banner Setting P.186 Adjustment / Setting 162 .183 P.181 P.178 P.179 P. 2006 Ref.184 P.8. of Characters for Dest.186 P.179 P.180 P.184 P.179 P.181 P.178 P.Print** put Setting** Fax** Output Tray Setting** AE Level Adjustment** Display Setting Sub Screen Display ON/OFF Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Program Default Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display Default Tab Default Program Address Book Default Index Address Type Symbol Display No.185 P.181 P.179 P.186 P.

194 P.187 P.195 163 .193 P.191 P.190 P.192 P.187 P.195 P.Printer put Settings Fax Output Tray Setting Date/Time Setting Daylight Savings Time Setting Weekly Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Timer Setting Time Setting Date Setting Select Time for Power Save Password for Non-Business Hours Restrict User Access Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Delete Saved Program Jobs Restrict Changing Job Priority Access to Job Deleting Other User’s Jobs Settings Registering and Changing Addresses Changing Zoom Ratio Changing the “From” Address Restrict Oper. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Ref.193 P. 2006 Utility Mode User Setting Printer Setting Paper Setting Paper Tray Default Paper Size 2-Sided Print Bind Direction Staple Hole-Punch Banner Paper Tray PCL Setting Font Setting Symbol Set Font Size PCL Setting Line/Page CR/LF Mapping PS Setting PS Error Print 8.195 P.193 P.193 P.191 P.195 P.194 P.190 P.188 P.194 P.193 P.191 P.194 P.192 P.194 P.187 P.192 P.189 P.188 P.192 P.188 P.187 P.188 P.Field Service Ver.Restrict Fax Broadcasting ation Setting P.187 P.189 P. page P.189 Print Reports Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Change Password Change E-Mail Address Administrator System Setting Setting Power Save Low Power Mode Setting Sleep Mode Setting Power Save Key Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) Output Setting Print/Fax Out.188 P.0 Aug. 3.189 P.

199 P.201 P.200 P.208 P.205 P.197 P.200 P.203 Image Stabilization Thin Paper Duplex Mode Color Regis.211 164 .200 P. 2006 Ref. page P.196 P.198 P.195 P.211 P.204 P.201 P.207 P.Color Registration Adjust tration Adjust (Yellow) Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) Color Registration Adjust (Black) Gradation Adjustment Copy Printer (Gradation) Printer (Resolution) Scanner Adjustment *** Leading Edge Adjustment *** Centering *** Horizontal Adjustment *** Vertical Adjustment *** ADF Adjustment *** Centering*** Original Stop Position*** Centering Auto Adjustment*** Auto Adj.211 P.200 Leading Edge Adjustment Centering Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Vertical Adjustment *** Erase Leading Edge *** Finisher Adjustment Density Adjustment Center Staple Position Half-Fold Position Thick Paper Image Density– Yellow Thick Paper Image Density– Magenta Density Adjustment Thick Paper Image Density– Cyan Thick Paper Image Density– Black Black Image Density P.200 P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Utility Mode Administrator System Setting Setting Expert Adjustment AE Level Adjustment Printer Adjustment Field Service Ver.206 P. of Stop Position*** List/Counter Management Job Settings List List Paper Size/Type Counter Meter Counter List Consumable Life List Adjustment / Setting P.211 P.201 P.0 Aug.208 P.210 P.8. 3.209 P.209 P.202 P.

219 When Original is set on ADF When NEXT JOB is selected Staple Setting Original Set/ Bind Direction Reset Data After Job User Box Setting Delete Unused User Box Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Documents Standard Size Original Glass Original Size Detect*** Setting*** Foolscap Size Setting*** Administra.214 P.218 P.0 Aug.212 P.214 P.215 P.215 P.216 P.Field Service Ver.219 P.214 P.212 P.214 P.215 P.216 P.217 P.215 P. Dial E-Mail User Box IP Address Fax Destination Internet Fax Address Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) User Box Public/Personal User Box Bulletin Board User Box Relay User Box Annotation User Box One-Touch Registration List Address Book List Group List Program List E-Mail Subject/Text List 165 .217 P.213 P.212 P.212 P.217 P.218 P.215 Subject Text P.216 P.214 P.217 P.218 P.213 P. page P.219 P.216 P. 3.213 P.213 P.218 P.215 P.213 P.217 Subject Text P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Ref.216 P. 2006 Utility Mode Administrator System Setting Setting Reset Setting System Auto Reset Auto Reset Job Reset When Account is changed 8.213 P.218 P.Administrator Registration tor/Machine Input Machine Address Setting One-Touch Scan Registration Address Book E-Mail FTP SMB User Box Group Program Subject/Text (for E-mail) Fax Address Book Addr.

243 P.246 P.227 P.250 IP Address Fax Internet Fax P.8.246 P.222 P.222 P.244 P.244 P.251 P.239 P.223 P.251 P.251 P.245 P.Administratication tive Setting Setting Field Service Ver.249 P.0 Aug.244 P. 2006 Ref.223 P.232 P.224 P.223 P.224 P.252 User Registration User Counter Account Track Account Track Registration Setting Account Track Counter Print without Authentication Counter List Network Setting TCP/IP Setting NetWare Setting http Server Setting FTP Setting SMB Setting AppleTalk Setting LDAP Setting Enabling LDAP Setting Up LDAP E-Mail Setting E-Mail TX (SMTP) E-Mail RX (POP) Detail Setting Device Setting Adjustment / Setting Time Adjustment Setting Status Notifi.222 P.246 P.235 P.245 ON/OFF Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting P.245 P.Notification Address Setting cation Setting Notification Item Setting Notification Time Setting Total Counter Report Setting PING Confirmation SLP Setting LPD Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting Action for Invalid Certificate SNMP Setting Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Setting Network Fax Setting Network Fax Function Settings SMTP TX Setting SMTP RX Setting 166 .244 P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Utility Mode Administrator User Setting Authentication / Account Track General Settings User Authen.220 User Name List Default Function Permission Public User Key P. page P. 3.224 P.231 P.245 P.229 P.241 P.235 P.234 P.223 P.243 P.

page P.256 P.256 P.256 P.259 P.257 P.258 P.255 P.256 P.259 P.252 P.254 P. 2006 Utility Mode Administrator Copier Setting Setting Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Select Tray when APS OFF Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Printer Setting I/F Timeout Parallel I/F IEEE 1284/USB Fax Setting Header Information Header/ Footer Position Telephone Line Settings Header Position To Name Footer Position Dialing Method Receive Mode Number of RX Call Rings Number of Redials Redial interval Line Monitor Sound Line Monitor Sound Volume TX/RX Setting Duplex Print (RX) Inch Paper Priority Over A4 Print Paper Selection Print Paper Size Incorrect User Box No.260 P.253 P. 3.255 P.259 P.255 P.257 P.254 P.0 Aug. Entry Tray Selection for RX Print Min.258 P.252 P. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages File After Polling TX No.261 167 .254 P.256 P.253 P.255 P.258 P.254 P.260 P. of Sets (RX) Function Setting Function ON/ F Code TX OFF Setting Relay RX Relay Print Destination Check Display Function Memory RX Closed Network RX Forward TX Setting Incomplete TX Hold PC-Fax RX Setting TSI User Box Setting PBX CN Set 8.253 P.257 P.258 P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Ref.252 P.260 P.257 P.258 P.257 P.253 P.255 P.259 P.Field Service Ver.253 P.

267 P.264 P.262 P.268 P.269 P.269 P.263 P. SSL Authentication Call Remote Center Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting Administrator Security Setting Setting Administrator Password User Box Admin.268 P.270 P.271 P.0 Aug.262 P.261 P.266 P.268 P.261 P.265 P. 2006 Ref.8.263 P.262 P.268 P.264 P.263 P.271 P.264 P.264 Dialing Method Number of RX Call Rings Line Monitor Sound Function Setting PC-FAX TX Setting P.265 P.262 P.268 P.269 P.270 P.262 P.271 Sequential TX Report Timer Reservation TX Report Confidential RX Report Bulletin TX Report Relay TX Result Report Relay Request RX Report PC-FAX TX Error Report Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Check Network Fax RX Error Report MDN Message DSN Message Receipt Mail Text Job Settings List Multi Lines Setting Telephone Line Setting Adjustment / Setting Multi Lines Setting Sender Fax No.266 P.265 P. Setting Administrator Security Level Security Details Password Rules Prohibit Functions When Auth Error Manual Destination Input Print Data Capture 168 . Network Fax Setting Black Compression Level Internet Fax Rx Ability I-Fax Advanced Settings System OpenAPI Connection Setting Access Setting Port No.265 P.261 P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Utility Mode Administrator Fax Setting Setting Report Settings Activity Report TX Report Field Service Ver.261 P.261 P. page P. 3.263 P.

277 P. page P.272 P.272 P.273 P.278 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Enhanced Security Mode HDD Setting Check HDD Capacity Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Overwrite All Data HDD Lock Password HDD Formatting HDD Encryption Setting Management Each Function Setting Function Max Copy Set Setting Network Function Setting Authentication Time Setting Check Consumable Life Banner Printing Meter Count Details Print Toner Coverage Copy Print Scan/Fax Other 169 .276 P.274 P.0 Aug.275 P.Field Service Ver.277 P.272 P.276 P.278 ⎯ P. 3. 2006 Utility Mode Administrator Security Setting Setting Security Details Secure Document Access Method Restrict Fax TX 8.275 P.277 P. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Ref.

2. 2006 8.) 170 .3.1 Utility Mode function setting procedure Procedure 1.8.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions Adjustment / Setting • Use [+] / [-] to enter or change the setting value. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 4037F3E522DA 8.0 Aug.3. Press the Utility/Counter key.2 Exiting • Touch [Close]. The Utility mode screen will appear.3.3 8. 3. (To change the setting value. first press the Clear key before making an entry. • Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. 8.

4. • At least one address must be registered for registering a new group. change or delete the setting. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. (4) User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the hard disk in the main unit. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] A. (2) FTP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change FTP address to send scanned data. 2006 8. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change a group to send scanned data simultaneously.Field Service Ver. • Select any displayed address to check. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 8. • Select any displayed address to check. • At least one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address. 3. • Select any displayed group to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed address to check. change or delete them. Address Book (1) E-Mail Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data. 8. 171 .1 Scan • It will not be displayed when the Authentication Device is set to “Set” by the following setting. (3) SMB Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change SMB address to send scanned data. B. change or delete the setting. change or delete the setting. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed address to check.4 One-Touch Registration 1 • It will not be displayed during the User Authentication by the External Server or MFP. change or delete the setting.0 Aug.

Dial Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Fax numbers. change or delete the setting. (2) Text Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data. • Select any displayed address to check.2 Adjustment / Setting Fax • Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. • Select any program No. • The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. D. change or delete the setting. change. 2006 C. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. A. • Select any displayed address to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. 172 . Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Scan Program.8. to register. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Address Book (1) Abbr. (2) E-Mail Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the e-mail address when transmitting the Fax data. Subject/Text (for E-mail) (1) Subject Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data.4. • Select any displayed address to check. • Select any displayed address to check. or delete the setting. change or delete the setting. 8. check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. 3.0 Aug. change or delete the setting.

[Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data. Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change a group of addresses to send Fax data simultaneously. • Select any displayed address to check. • Select any displayed address to check. • At least one user box should be registered in order to register the Box address. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. 2 (5) Internet Fax Address • Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings.0 Aug. change or delete the setting. C. change or delete the setting. to register. 3. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data. • Select any program No. 2 (4) IP Address Destination • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To register/change the Box address when storing the Fax original in the box of the hard disk in the machine. 2006 (3) User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. 173 . • Select any displayed group to check. change or delete the setting. • Select any displayed address to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New].Field Service Ver. change or delete the setting. Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Fax program. change or delete the setting. check. B. • A new group can be registered by touching [New]. • At least one address should be registered in order to register the group.

8. • A new subject can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. 8. Bulletin Board User Box • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] A. change or delete the setting. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. change or delete the setting. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [Prefix Suffix Auto Setting] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Bulletin Board User Box. • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. • A new message can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. 2006 D.4. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure B. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. • It will not be displayed during User Authentication if the FAX control is set to “Restrict” by the function restriction. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. • Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use.3 User Box • It will not be displayed when the Authentication Device is set to “Set” by the following setting. • Select any displayed subject to check. (2) Text Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the Fax original. • Select any displayed message to check. Public/Personal User Box Functions • To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine.0 Aug. 174 . Subject/Text (for E-mail) (1) Subject Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the Fax original. 3.

• The default setting is Restrict. B. Measurement Unit Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the unit displayed on the LCD display. • The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] available from [System 1] under Service Mode.5 8. 8. • Select the Tray on the Auto Tray Select screen. • Set the priority on the Tray priority screen. Allow “Restrict” 175 . • The default setting varies depending on the marketing area mm (Numerical Value) inch (Numerical Value) inch (Fraction) C.5. Relay User Box • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. 3. Language Selection Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the language on the LCD display • To change the language on the control panel to another language.0 Aug. • To change the unit displayed on the control panel. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting C. Paper Tray Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Auto Tray Select Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Tray for automatic selection when APS is being set. • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. • To establish the priority for switching the Tray when ATS is being set. [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [Prefix Suffix Auto Setting] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Relay User Box. 2006 2 8. • To specify the Tray to be used when APS is being set.1 User Setting System Setting A. • To switch the Paper Take-up Tray automatically. • To establish the priority of the Tray when ATS is being set.Field Service Ver. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • It will not be displayed during User Authentication if the FAX control is set to “Restrict” by the function restriction. (2) Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically switch to another Tray with same size paper when the Paper Take-up Tray runs out of paper during printing.

Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • It sets the Simplex/Duplex printing of the output for the Sales counter or the Unit check list. “Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)” Switch Trays (Tray Priority) Setting/ Procedure (4) Print Lists 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or the Vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-andwhite original in the Auto Color mode • To change the criterion level for the partly colored image to be taken as a black-andwhite original • Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) : It stops printing when the specified Tray runs out of paper.8. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted. <Simplex/Duplex> • The default setting is 1-Sided. Switch Trays (Tray Priority): To switch to another Tray with the specified paper and print when the Tray is out of paper • The default setting is Stop Printing (Tray Fixed). (Only when the Duplex unit is mounted.0 Aug. D. Black 1 Standard “3” Full Color 4 5 2 176 . 3.) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Paper Take-up Tray for output the list for the Meter count or the Unit check. 2006 (3) No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Functions Use • To set whether to switch to another Tray automatically when the specified Tray runs out of paper during printing.) <Paper tray> • The default setting is Tray 1. Auto Color Level Adjustment Adjustment / Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 is mounted.

<Fax> • The default setting is Batch Print. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting E.) (1) Print/Fax Output Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or Fax received. • Use the 10-Key Pad for setting. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Administrator Security Level] 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or the Vendor is mounted. Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received <Printer> • The default setting is Page Print. and lower the power consumption. • “OFF” will only be displayed when [No Sleep] in Service Mode is set. 177 .” (15 to 240) / OFF Use Setting/ Procedure F. • The default setting is 30 min. Output Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”.0 Aug. • Use the 10-Key Pad for setting. 2006 1 8. Power Save • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1”. “30 min. (1) Low Power Mode Setting Functions • To set the time until Low Power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for Control. • To change the time until the Sleep Mode starts. • The default setting is 15 min. • To change the time until Low Power starts. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Administrator Security Level] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the Vendor 1 is mounted.” (10 to 240) Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Sleep Mode Setting Functions • To set the time until Sleep Mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • Low Power: To turn LED and LCD OFF. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted. “15 min. 3. NOTE • [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted.Field Service Ver.

5. Printer. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Default Tab Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode. Copy : Tray 2 Print : Tray 2 Report Output : Tray 3 Fax : Tray 3 G. Sub Screen Display ON/OFF Functions Use • To set the Sub Screen Display on the control panel. “Program” Group Address Book Direct Input 178 . Scan Basic Screen Default Seeing 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Deice is mounted. Setting Value : An illustration of the selected key will be displayed Job List : The list of job which are being executed will be displayed • The default setting is Setting Value. “Setting Value” Job List Setting/ Procedure B. 2006 (2) Output Tray Setting Functions • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print. AE Level Adjustment • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”.0 Aug. To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value • The default setting is 2. 3. • The default settings are as follows. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.2 Display Setting A. “2” (0 to 4) Adjustment / Setting 8. Fax and Print Reports). • To change the Basic Screen display in Scanner mode. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted.8. Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the output tray according to the application. * This setting is available only when FS-507 is mounted. • The default setting is Program.) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Administrator Security Level] 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or the Vendor is mounted. • To change the Sub Screen Display.

• To change the basic screen display during Fax mode. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set the default display for the program screen during Scanner mode. “ON” OFF C. • The default setting is PAGE 1. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scanner mode • The default setting is PAGE 1. • The default setting is Main. • The default setting is Program. 2006 (2) Program Default Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. “Main” /ABC to WXYZ / etc (4) Address Type Symbol Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the Address Type Symbol on each address key when selecting the address to transmit scanned data. Temporary One-Touch / “PAGE1” to PAGE27 179 .0 Aug. • To keep the default display instead of search string on the Address Book which frequently changes during Scanner mode.Field Service Ver. “Program” Group Address Book Direct Input (2) Default Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for the program screen during Fax mode. Temporary One-Touch/ “PAGE1” to PAGE27 (3) Address Book Default Index Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for the Address Book screen during Scanner mode. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during Fax mode. • The default setting is ON. Fax Basic Screen Default Setting 1 • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. • To cancel displaying the Address Type Symbol on the address key. (1) Default Tab Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the basic screen display during Fax mode. 3.

8.” 24 char. “Main” / ABC to WXYZ / etc (4) Address Type Symbol Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the Address Type symbol on each address key when selecting the address to transmit Fax. • To keep the default display instead of abbreviations/address search string which frequently changes during Fax mode. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Copy Operating Screen Functions Use • To set the display on the control panel screen during printing. • The default setting is OFF. D. or Authentication Device is mounted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Vendor. • The default setting is Main. The copy reservation is available. ON : The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. The normal Copy setting screen will be displayed. 2006 (3) Address Book Default Index Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for abbreviation/address screen during Fax mode. “ON” OFF (5) No. Copy Screen Adjustment / Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Key Counter.0 Aug. of Characters for Dest. “14 char. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure 180 . • The default setting is ON. • To display the whole address which consists of over fifteen characters. • To cancel displaying the Address Type symbol on each address key. Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of characters for the address displayed on the address key when selecting the address to transmit Fax. 3. • The default setting is 14 char. The job can be reserved with [Program Next Job]. • To display the screen to indicate printing when printing is being carried out. OFF: The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out.

“Current Print Jobs” Print Job History 181 . Type 1: Normal initial screen Type 2: Quick screen Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is TYPE1.0 Aug. 8. Current print jobs : [Current Jobs] screen is displayed. Job List Default Functions Use • To set the displayed screen in default when pressing [Job List]. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Current Print Jobs. • To switch the initial screen to the quick screen (All basic copy settings can be done at the same time on the single screen) when selecting the copy function. or Authentication Device is mounted. ON “OFF” (2) RX Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving Fax. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Key Counter. Fax Active Screen 1 • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. • To display “Receiving” on the screen when receiving the Fax. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) TX Display Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting Fax. ON “OFF” 2 F. “TYPE1” TYPE2 2 G. • The default setting is OFF. Vendor. Print Job History : [Job History] screen is displayed. • To display “Sending” on the screen when transmitting Fax. Copy Initial Screen Setting • To select the initial screen when selecting the copy function.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is OFF. 3. • To change the displayed screen in default when pressing [Job List]. 2006 E.

“Auto Select Booklet” OFF 182 . [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions • To register the default setting for the Copy mode function. Copy on A4/Letter : Copies on A4 or Letter size paper. Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the Auto Booklet when Fold & Staple is selected. the Scanner mode function. • To cancel setting the Auto Booklet when Fold & Staple is selected. • Panel is reset. <Factory Default> • Mode set prior to the shipping. 8.5. • Auto Clear. 3.4 Copier Setting A.8. 2006 8.0 Aug. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: • The Main Power Switch is turned ON. • The corresponding setting will be the one which has been set prior to the shipping by carrying out this setting from each mode screen.3 Initial Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or Vendor is mounted. • The password entry screen for account Track is changed. <Current Setting> • To register the Copy mode. • To copy the original such as business cards with which the Original detection is not effective. Prohibit Copy : Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected. or Fax mode set on the panel. Paper Take-up Tray needs to be selected prior to pressing the Start key. • The default setting is Prohibit Copy. Copy on Small Size Copy on A4/Letter “Prohibit Copy” Setting/ Procedure B. • In an Interrupt mode. Copy on Small Size : Copies on A5 paper. • The default setting is Auto Select Booklet. scanner mode. or no original is being set. Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the Initial mode setting to meet the user's need.5. • Application is changed. Auto Paper Select for Small Original Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small. and the Fax mode function. • Carry out this setting after the necessary setting for each mode. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

“Print” Delete Job F. “Auto Display Zoom Ratio” OFF D. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select.) • To function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected. • The default setting is ON.Field Service Ver. “ON” OFF 2 E.0 Aug. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. “ON” OFF 183 . • The default setting is ON. Auto Magnification Selection (ADF) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode. 2006 C. ON “OFF” G.) • To function the Auto Magnification when the Tray is selected. • The default setting is OFF. • To cancel the function to automatically sort two originals or more when they are set to ADF. 3. Sort/Group Auto Change Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically switch Sort/Group according to the number of originals and the copies. • To display alarm when original is set in different direction from paper and to cancel the job during auto zoom select. Print Delete Job Setting/ Procedure : To print according to the selected direction and size of paper : To display alarm and cancel the job • The default setting is Print. • To cancel selecting the appropriate magnification when Combine or Booklet is selected during Auto Paper Select. Auto Magnification Selection (Platen) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to function the Auto Magnification when the Feed Tray is selected with document set on the Original Glass (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode. Set for Incorrect AMS Direction Functions Use • To set whether to print when the original is set in different direction from the set paper during auto zoom select. • The default setting is Auto Display Zoom Ratio.

• To refuse Print data or Fax data during copy operation. 2006 H. Select Tray for Insert Sheet • To select the default setting of the Tray for Cover sheet paper.8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Batch print : Print all at once after reading all data. • The default setting is Accept. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions Use • To set whether to accept the printing job for Print data or Fax data during copy operation. “Auto Print” Batch Print Adjustment / Setting K.0 Aug. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 2 J. “Accept” Receive Only Setting/ Procedure 184 . Receive Only : Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished. Specify Default Tray when APS Off Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled. • To print all at once after reading all data. Copy setting can be changed after the read operation. Accept : Receives the Print data or Fax data to print. Auto Print : Print consecutively during the read operation. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Auto Print. • The default setting is Tray 2. 3. • The default setting is Tray Before APS ON. “Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray I. Print Setting for Separate Scan • To set the output mode at Separate Scan setting. • To set the Tray for the initial setting when APS is cancelled.

JPEG Compression Level Functions Use • To set the JPEG Compression method when scanning with JPEG while in Scanner mode. (30 to 300) 8. • The default setting is Auto. “Auto” PCL PS 185 . 2006 8. • The default setting is MMR.Field Service Ver. • To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning. It usually switches automatically. • To fix the PDL as necessary. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning. High Quality “Standard” High Compression Setting/ Procedure B. MH “MMR” C.6 Printer Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image controller (IC-402) is mounted.5 Scanner Setting 8. Basic Setting (1) PDL Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing. TWAIN Lock Time 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image controller (IC-402) is mounted. 3.0 Aug. • The default setting is 120 sec. High Compression: Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning. A.5. Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning.5. 120 sec. • The default setting is Standard. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the monochrome compression method for scanning in the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode. Black Compression Level 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image controller (IC-402) is mounted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting A. • To be used when changing the monochrome mode while in Scanner mode.

• To output A4 size document to Letter size. “ON” OFF (5) A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter size paper.8. etc. and Ledger size document to A3 size. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. the image will be printed in the same magnification. • The default setting is OFF. “1” (1 to 999) (3) Original Direction Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. • To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. and A3 size document to Ledger size. • To output Letter size document to A4 size. • The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency. and A3 and Ledger size paper in reading. “Portrait” Landscape (4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during Rip process of the current job. • The default setting is 1. • The default setting is Portrait. 3. NOTE • When switching the size. • To use when the Banner (front cover) page is to be printed. 2006 (2) Number of Sets Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • The default setting is ON. ON “OFF” Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 186 . ON “OFF” 1 (6) Banner Setting • To set whether or not to print on the Banner (front cover) page.

• The default setting is Left Bind. • The default setting is OFF. etc. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set the Paper Take-up Tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.0 Aug. 1 Position 2 Positions “OFF” 187 . 3. • To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS. 2006 B. Paper Setting (1) Paper Tray Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • The default setting is Auto. (2) Default Paper Size Functions Use • To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing. • To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows DOS. (3) 2-Sided Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is OFF. etc. • To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. • To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS. etc. Top Bind “Left Bind” Right Bind (5) Staple Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. etc. etc. • To use when Paper Take-up Tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from Windows DOS. ON “OFF” (4) Bind Direction Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.

• To use when the Font Symbol Set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows DOS. Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting (2) Symbol Set Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Font Symbol Set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. 1. When using the Download font. etc. (3) Font Size Functions Use • To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 1 (1) C. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2. • It can be selected from the Internal font (Internal) or the Download font (Disk or Soft).00 pitch Setting/ Procedure 188 . 2006 (6) Hole-Punch Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. 3. • The default setting is Roman-8 or PC8. etc. etc. touch [Internal]. etc. Code Page 437. ON “OFF” 1 (7) Banner Paper Tray • To set the Feed tray for printing on the Banner (front cover) page. When selecting from the Internal font. • The default setting is OFF. select [Disk] or [Soft].0 Aug. PCL Setting Font Setting Functions Use • To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.8. • The default setting is Scalable Font : 12. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS. • To set the Feed tray for printing on the Banner (front cover) page. • The default setting is Auto. • To set Scalable Font (: Point) and Bitmap Font (: Pitch) respectively. • The default setting is Courier. and select the font using the font #. and select the one from the displayed font list.00 points Bitmap Font : 10.

0 Aug. Select the report to be output. • To print the information concerning the PostScript error. 3. • To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. : PS Font List will be output. Select the Feed tray. 189 . Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Setting/ Procedure 1. Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports]. Mode 1 : Replacing CR with CR-LF Mode 2 : Replacing LF with CR-LF Mode 3 : Replacing with CR-LF OFF : Does not replace • The default setting is OFF.) Functions Use • To output the report or Demo Page concerning the print setting. ON “OFF” E. 3. 4. 2006 (4) Line/Page Functions Use • To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data. The types of report available for output are as follows. PS Setting (1) PS Error Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS rasterizing.Field Service Ver. Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 “OFF” Setting/ Procedure D. 2. and touch the Start key. : The test page will be output. : The list of printer setting will be output. Select Simplex or Duplex print (Only when the Auto Duplex unit is mounted). • The default setting is OFF. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted. : PCL Font List will be output. 8. Print Reports 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or Vendor is mounted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 1 Setting/ Procedure • Default setting value differs depending on the values by the following two different settings. [Utility] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Basic Setting] → [Original Direction] [Utility] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Paper Setting] → [Default Paper Size] 5 to 128 lines (5) CR/LF Mapping Functions Use • To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. • To check the setting concerning the printer. • To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data.

: Enter the new User Authentication Password to be used. entering the incorrect Password three times will cause access lock. Current Password New Password Retype Password : Enter the User Authentication Password currently used. 3.5. it will be displayed only when the Authentication is complete.0 Aug.5. When an access lock occurred. Functions Use • To modify the E-Mail Address which is registered as a User.7 Change Password • When conducting User Authentication. Password using the single letter or the Password same with the previous one. [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] • When the following setting is set to “ON”. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 190 . • To modify the User Authentication Password currently used. • Enter the User Authentication Password with the keys on the control panel.8. • Enter the new E-Mail Address using the keys on the control panel. 2006 8.8 Change E-Mail Address • When conducting User Authentication. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 1 8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. NOTE • When [Password Rules] which can be displayed by the following setting is set to “ON”. and wait for 10 seconds or more and turn power ON again to enter the Password again. • To use when modifying the E-Mail Address currently being used. turn the Main power OFF. less than 8-digit will not be modified. it will be displayed only when the Authentication is complete. : Enter the new User Authentication Password again. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To modify the Password used for the User Authentication.

• To change the time until the Sleep Mode starts. entering the incorrect administrator password three times will cause access lock.Field Service Ver. turn the main power OFF. • The default setting is 15 min. and lower the power consumption. • Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.” (10 to 240) Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Sleep Mode Setting Functions • To set the time until Sleep Mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. 3. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 8. “Low Power” Sleep 191 . • To change the time until Low Power starts.” (15 to 240) / OFF Use Setting/ Procedure (3) Power Save Key Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the type of the Power Save Mode which starts by pressing the Power Save Key. and wait for 10 seconds or more and turn power ON again to enter the password again.6 Administrator Setting • The Administrator setting will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the administrator setting or Service Mode. 2006 8.1 System Setting A. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for Control. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 8.”) 1 NOTE • When the following setting is set to “ON”. “30 min. Power Save (1) Low Power Mode Setting Functions • To set the time until Low Power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • The default setting is 30 min. • Low Power: To turn LED and LCD OFF.0 Aug. • “OFF” will only be displayed when [No Sleep] in Service Mode is set.6. • Use the 10-Key Pad for setting. • To change the Power Save function which starts by pressing the Power Save key. • The default setting is Low Power. When an access lock occurred. “15 min.

Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the output tray according to the application. Date/Time Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock.0 Aug. NOTE • [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted.8. 1 Adjustment / Setting (2) Output Tray Setting Functions • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print. Functions Use • To set whether to immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode. Touch [Set Data] and modify the time. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Detail Setting] → [Time Adjustment Setting] 1 192 . Fax and Print Reports). * This setting is available only when FS-507 is mounted. “Normal” Immediately Setting/ Procedure B. Immediately : Switches to the Power Save Mode immediately after the printing. • For time zone. • The default setting is Normal. • Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes) • When the following setting is set to “ON”. • The default settings are as follows. <Fax> • The default setting is Batch Print. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • This setting should be carried out for set up. • To immediately switch to the Power Save Mode after printing in case of receiving the Fax during Power Save Mode. Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received <Printer> • The default setting is Page Print. Output Setting (1) Print/Fax Output Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or Fax received. • To change settings concerning the date/time. Normal : Switches to the Power Save Mode according to the normal Power Save Mode after the printing. Copy : Tray 2 Print : Tray 2 Report Output : Tray 3 Fax : Tray 3 C. 2006 (4) Entering Power Save Mode (Fax) 1 • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. set the time difference with the world standard time. 3. [Set Data] will be displayed. Printer.

• To set the Weekly Timer. For cancelling the setting. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use or not to use the Weekly Timer. Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted. 193 Adjustment / Setting . and touch [OK]. 2. • The default setting is OFF. For setting by the date. 3. For setting by the day of the week. (3) Date Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the date or the day of the week for the Weekly Timer to function. ON “OFF” 8. set the time difference to move up.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 • When setting to ON. Touch the key of the day to be set. • The default setting is OFF. • To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time. Daylight Saving Time Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the daylight saving time. Weekly Timer Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 or Vendor 2 is mounted. ON “OFF” <Set Time for Power Save> • Using the 10-Key Pad. “60 min. touch [Clear]. input the ON time and the OFF time. • To turn power OFF for a certain period of time when the Weekly Timer is set. (4) Select Time for Power Save Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the Weekly Timer is set and the power is ON. touch the appropriate key of the week by [Daily Setting].0 Aug. input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again.” (1 to 150) E. Select the Year/Month with [+] / [-]. 3. Using the 10-Key Pad. 1. 2. 1. 3. ON “OFF” (2) Time Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time to turn ON/OFF the Weekly Timer for each day of the week. touch the appropriate key of the day. 2006 D. • The default setting is OFF. 4. • To set the daylight saving time.

3. • To Restrict the change on the print priority for the Job. Touch the appropriate Program Job. • The default setting is Restrict. ON “OFF” • When setting to ON. F. enter the password (eight digits). 2. • To delete the registered Program Job. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Restrict Access to Saved Program Jobs Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the prohibition for modifying the registered Copy program. Allow “Restrict” 194 . Touch the key for the appropriate Copy program.0 Aug. Touch [Delete]. 1. • To allow other users to delete the Job when the user is authenticated. • To set the password for turning the power ON temporarily when the Weekly Timer is set. Restrict User Access 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 is mounted. 3. 2006 (5) Password for Non-Business Hours Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to input the password before using when the Weekly Timer is set. 1. Adjustment / Setting (3) Restrict Access to Job Settings <Changing Job Priority> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the Job. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.8. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen to delete the Program Job. “Allow” Restrict <Deleting Other User’s Jobs> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict Job delete by other users when the user is authenticated. • The default setting is Allow. 2. • The default setting is OFF. (2) Delete Saved Program Jobs Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the registered Program Job. • To be used when prohibiting the user from changing the Copy program. Touch [OK].

To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value • The default setting is 2. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting 2 shows that switch No. • The default setting is Allow. • The default setting is Allow. • To prohibit changing the registered From Address. • To prohibit sending the FAX to more than one address. ON “OFF” G. 2006 <Registering and Changing Addresses> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment.0 Aug. • To prohibit the change on the registered address. Expert Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 or Vendor 2 is mounted. “Allow” Restrict <Changing the “From” Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to prohibit the registered From Address to be changed. “2” (0 to 4) 195 Adjustment / Setting (4) Restrict Operation Setting <Restrict Fax Broadcasting> . • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is Allow. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) (1) AE Level Adjustment Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 • To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address. 3. • To prohibit the change on registered magnification. “Allow” Restrict NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. “Allow” Restrict Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to prohibit sending the FAX to more than one address. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] <Changing Zoom Ratio> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification.

A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.2 ± 0. If width A falls outside the specified range. 5. adjust for Thick 1 to 3.Following the same procedure. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1. 3. • • • • The LPH Unit has been replaced. 9. 2. Select the [Normal].5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3. 7. If width A is outside the specified range. OHP. 2006 (2) Printer Adjustment <Leading Edge Adjustment> 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. make the setting value smaller than the current one. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 6. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Leading Edge Adjustment]. 11. Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 196 . touch [OK].8. 10. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.0 mm (in 0. The paper type has been changed. 8. 3.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification 4036fs3009c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. If width A is shorter than the specifications. make the setting value greater than the current one. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 1. 4. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. and envelope.0 Aug. change the setting again and make a check again. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction. Width A Specifications: 4.If width A falls within the specified range. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.

2. Specifications: 3. 1. Select the paper source to be adjusted. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 7. 3.0 mm to +3. touch [END]. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Bypass.Following the same procedure. make the setting value greater than the current one. • A paper feed unit has been added. If width A falls outside the specified range. 9. 3. • The LPH Unit has been replaced. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.5 mm Setting Range: -3.Field Service Ver.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. If width A is outside the specified range. make the setting value smaller than the current one. 6. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. change the setting again and make a check again.If width A falls within the specified range. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. 11. 4. 10. adjust for all other paper sources. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering].) Adjustment Procedure 197 . 8. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.0 Aug. 2006 <Centering> 8.0 mm (in 0. • The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern.0 ± 0. If width A is shorter than the specifications. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 5.

Select the paper source to be adjusted. 11.0 mm (in 0.0 mm to +3. 9. 3. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 7. 2.0 ± 0. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy.5 mm Setting Range: -3. make the setting value greater than the current one. 6.Following the same procedure. 10. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.0 Aug. 4. If width A is outside the specified range. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. touch [END]. make the setting value smaller than the current one. change the setting again and make a check again. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. • If width A is shorter than the specifications. use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Backside Specifications: 3. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.) Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting 198 . 2006 <Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)> 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 5. If width A falls outside the specified range. 3.8.2 mm increments) 4036fs3010c0 Adjustment Instructions • If width A is longer than the specifications. 8. •For measurement. adjust for all other paper sources.If width A falls within the specified range. 1. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.

12. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting <Vertical Adjustment> • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”.3 B: 389. shrunk). (Check width A only for [OHP] and [Envelope]. 2006 8. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges. [FEET]. 11. 13.Check width A and width B on the test pattern. change the setting using the Up/ Down keys.) Adjustment Procedure 199 . make the setting value smaller than the current one.0 Aug. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.1 to 392.If width A or B falls outside the specified range.Following the same procedure. 3. touch [OK]. • When the image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.If width A or B falls within the specified range. change the setting value and make a check again. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. 10. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] → [Lattice Pattern]. [FD Width:6]. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. 1. [OHP]. 7. Width A: equivalent to one grid Width B: equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A: 7. B: -10 to +10 Adjustment Specification A 4036fs3017c0 Adjustment Instructions If width A or B is longer than the specifications. make the setting value greater than the current one. 4. 14.9 to 8. and [Normal]. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern. adjust for [Thick 1 to 3]. 8. • The image on the copy distorts (stretched. [CD Width:6]. Select [Black]. 3. [SINGLE]. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Vertical Adjustment]. 2. and [Envelope].Field Service Ver. 5. 9. [Density:255]. 6. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range. • The l adjustment becomes necessary. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.1 Setting Range A. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Load Tray 1 with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper.

Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. Magenta. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density. (5 steps) 1. See P.26 of FS-603 Service Manual. Light color: Touch the Darker key.0 Aug. • Use when the center folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Fold function. • Use when the center staple positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Staple function.0 mm to +7. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Density Adjustment] → [Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow/Magenta/Cyan/Black]. • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies • The fine-adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps. 3. (5 steps) Dark color: Touch the Lighter key.0 mm to +7. two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level. • Center staple position: The adjustment range is -7. <Center Staple Position> Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the positions of center staple for the Finisher. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.8.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). • The default setting is “4 mm”. Cyan. 3.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). • Fold position: The adjustment range is -7. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] • To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper. • To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper. Adjustment / Setting (4) Density Adjustment <Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow. “4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm Functions Use Setting/ Procedure (3) Finisher Adjustment For details of adjustment method. 200 . <Half-Fold Position> Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the positions of folding for the Finisher. Black> Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies. 2006 <Erase Leading Edge> 1 • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. 2.

2. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.0 Aug. 4. touch the Lighter key. 8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1. • The default setting is OFF. 3. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. 4. 3. touch the Darker key. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. • Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Image Stabilization has been executed. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Image Stabilization] → [Initialize+Image Stabilization]. 3. • When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed. 2006 <Black Image Density> Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy • To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Lighter (2 steps). Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. • It decreases the transfer output value so as to prevent a paper misfeed from occurring. Adjustment Procedure <Initialize+Image Stabilization> Functions Use • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Density Adjustment] → [Black Image Density]. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure 201 Adjustment / Setting . Darker (2 steps) If the black is light. “Std”. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Image Stabilization] → [Image Stabilization Only]. 1. • Use when a paper misfeed occurs when thin paper is used.Field Service Ver. 1. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. 2. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density. If the black is dark. 3. Adjustment Procedure (6) Thin Paper Duplex Mode Functions • Turn this function ON when thin paper (64 g/m2) is used in an ambience of high temperature and high humidity in the 2-sided mode. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. (5) Image Stabilization <Image Stabilization Only> Functions Use • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. 2. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence.

If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Color Registration Adjust] → [Color Registration Adjust (Black)]. increase the setting value. decrease the setting value. Check Procedure Check point A. decrease the setting value. 7. 2006 (7) Color Registration Adjust 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. and yellow) after this adjustment has been made. 3. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 5. 8. 1. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] <Color Registration Adjust (Black)> Functions • To correct black color shift. increase the setting value. “0” (-10 to +10 dot) If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C. Select the paper type. 2. if it occurs • The LPH Assy (K) has been replaced.8. magenta. Change the setting value using the [+] / [-] as necessary. Load Tray 1 with A3 or A4 paper (plain or thick). B Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Adjustment / Setting A B Direction of C 4036fs3001c0 If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C. 4. • Make Color Registration Adjust (cyan. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Press the Start key. Check deviation between black lines A and B. 6. 10. Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation (the image on the inside). Direction of D A A B B 4036fs3002c0 4036fs3003c0 202 . if it occurs with plain or thick paper. • To correct black color shift. 9. Select black.0 Aug. 3.Produce another test pattern and check for deviation.

Cyan)> Functions 8. • Before making this adjustment. 3. decrease the setting. 2. Direction of D 4036fs3005c0 4036fs3006c0 Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y If the cross deviates in the direction of C. 3. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure Check Procedure Check point X.) Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation. 4. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. On the test pattern produced. Select the color to be adjusted. Magenta. Load Tray 1 with A3/11x17 or A4/8 1/2x11 paper (Normal or Thick 1 to 3). 6.0 Aug. decrease the setting. Direction of D Direction of C 4036fs3007c0 4036fs3008c0 203 . check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. Press the Start key. increase the setting. 2006 <Color Registration Adjust (Yellow. Select the paper type. 5. (At this time. be sure to perform Color Registration Adjust (Black). decrease the setting. 1. increase the setting. increase the setting. 9. Using the [+] / [-]. change the setting value as necessary. 8.Field Service Ver. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Color Registration Adjust]. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. • To correct any color shift “0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of C. Y 4036fs3004c0 Adjustment for X direction: Check point X Direction of C If the cross deviates in the direction of C. 7. only the line of the selected color moves. If the cross deviates in the direction of D.

[Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Dev.0 Aug.8. Adjustment / Setting 204 . Bias Choice] 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 2 through 7 twice (a total of three times). Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts.) 8. • The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced. • If the image is faulty. : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts. 2006 (8) Gradation Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. 5. 3. 4. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. • Printer (Gradation) • Printer (Resolution) • Copy Adjustment Procedure : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts. perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems. 1. 6. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner • Color reproduction performance becomes poor. 3. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass. Select the appropriate mode for the Gradation Adjustment. Press the Start key. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. • The IU has been replaced. 2. 7. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjustment]. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.

8. 4. 1. Press the Start key to make a copy. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.0 Aug. 9. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting (9) Scanner Adjustment • Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. If the image falls outside the specified range. 205 . a scale may be used instead.Field Service Ver. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. Check point B on the image of the copy. 2006 8. decrease the setting value.0 to +5.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length. 5. 7. •B width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 3.0 (in 0. Press the Start key to make another copy. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.5 mm Setting Range -5. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • • • • A: Centering B: Leading Edge Adjustment C: Horizontal Adjustment D: Vertical Adjustment C B A Original Reference D 4036fs3018c0 <Leading Edge Adjustment> Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sensor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. When the Original Width Scale is replaced. If the copy image exceeds the specified length. 4036fs3020c0 Use Adjustment Specification B Specifications B: ± 0. When the Original Glass is replaced. • If the Color Chart is not available. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Leading Edge Adjustment]. increase the setting value. 6. 2. 3. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment.

9. • The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced. 6. •A width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. Adjustment Specification A 4036fs3019c0 Adjustment / Setting 206 . 1. • When the CCD Unit is replaced. If the image falls outside the specified range.0 mm Setting Range -10.0 (in 0. increase the setting value. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment. 3. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length. Check point A on the image of the copy. 2. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. If the copy image exceeds the specified length. decrease the setting value.0 Aug. 4. 7. 5. Press the Start key to make a copy. 3. • When the Original Glass is replaced.0 to +10. 8. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. Press the Start key to make a copy. 2006 <Centering> Functions Use • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Centering]. Specifications A: ± 1. Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met.8.

9. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 6. 207 . increase the setting. 2006 <Horizontal Adjustment> Functions Use Adjustment Specification 8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section • The CCD Unit has been replaced. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Horizontal Adjustment].001 increments) C 4036fs3021c0 Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. 4. If the image falls outside the specified range. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. Press the Start key to make another copy. decrease the setting.990 to 1. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Vertical Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment. 3. Specifications C: ± 1. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. 7. 1. Press the Start key to make a copy. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.Field Service Ver. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. 5.0 mm Setting Range 0. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 2. If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. •Measure C width on the color chart and on the sample copy. 3.010 (in 0. Check the C width on the image of the copy.0 Aug. 8.

[Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] <Centering> 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To make a manual adjustment of the document centering position in each of the ADF modes. Press [OK]. 3. use [-] key. If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 7.5 mm Setting Range 0. Adjustment / Setting (10) ADF Adjustment 1 • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. change the setting using the [+] / [-]. • The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced. •Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Centering]. 2006 <Vertical Adjustment> Functions Use • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section • The Scanner Assy has been replaced. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.001 increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. If the image falls outside the specified range. • To use when the “Centering Auto Adjustment” cannot make adjustment completely. 3. 1. Adjustment range: -3 mm to +3 mm • To read the image in direction A. decrease the setting. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Vertical Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment. 1. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. 2. Press the Start key to make another copy. 4.8. Enter the numeric value using the [+] / [-] key. • To read the image in direction B.0 Aug. 4036fs3022c0 Adjustment Specification D Specifications D: ± 1.010 (in 0. 5. 9. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 8. Press the Start key to make a copy. 4038F3C502DA 208 . Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Vertical Adjustment]. 2. 6. • The Scanner Motor has been replaced. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen.990 to 1. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. use [+] key. Check the D width on the image of the copy. increase the setting. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 3.

3. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. Press [OK]. 3. 4. 4038F3C503DA <Centering Auto Adjustment> 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the start position for image scanning • Upon setup of the ADF 1. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Centering Auto Adjustment]. 4038F3C504DA 209 . use [+] key. 2006 <Original Stop Position> 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Adjustment range: -7 mm to +7 mm • To read the image in direction C. • To read the image in direction D. *If adjustment result is [NG]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes. 1. Set the furnished Chart on the Original Feed Tray (the side with arrow faces up) and press the Start key. of Stop Position” cannot make adjustment completely. • Make a manual adjustment on [Centering].Field Service Ver. 2. Make sure that adjustment result is [OK] and press [SET]. use [-] key. • To use when the “Auto Adj.0 Aug. 4. 3. Select either Front side or Back side. Enter the numeric value using the [+] / [-] key. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Original Stop Position]. • Check the document position and correct it. 2. 5.

3. • Upon setup of the ADF 1. of Stop Position: Back> 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the second side. of Stop Position: Front> 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the first side. *If adjustment result is [NG]. of Stop Position: Back]. *If adjustment result is [NG]. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Auto Adj. 4038F3C504DA <Auto Adj. 2006 <Auto Adj. Set the furnished Chart on the Original Feed Tray (blank side faces up) and press the Start key. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. 3. 4. • Check for skew. • Check the document position and correct it. Make sure that adjustment result is [OK] and press [SET]. 2. 4. 2.0 Aug. Set the furnished Chart on the Original Feed Tray (the side with arrow faces up) and press the Start key. Make sure that adjustment result is [OK] and press [SET]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. Adjustment / Setting 4038F3C504DA 210 .8. of Stop Position: Front]. • Check the document position and correct it. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. • Make a manual adjustment on [Original Stop Position]. Touch [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [ADF Adjustment] → [Auto Adj. • Upon setup of the ADF 1. • Make a manual adjustment on [Original Stop Position].

Touch the paper size key to select the paper size. Vendor 1. Select the Feed tray. 2. 2. 2.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. Vendor 1. 1. Vendor 2 or Key counter IF vendor is mounted. Select Simplex or Duplex print. 1. and touch the Start key. [Utility] → [Check Consumable Life] 1. and touch the Start key. 2006 8. 3. List/Counter (1) Management List 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. (only when the Auto Duplex unit is mounted). Management device 2. Select the Feed tray. • To print out the list in this setting because counter list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. 2 (3) Meter Counter List • Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either Authentication Device.0 Aug. (only when the Auto Duplex unit is mounted). [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the value set by the setting menu. Management device 2. 3. 3. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To output the consumable life list • To print out the list in this setting because the list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. Touch [Meter Counter List]. and touch the Start key. Select the Feed tray. Touch [Job Settings List]. Select the paper type. Select Simplex or Duplex print. Setting/ Procedure 211 . Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys. (2) Paper Size/Type Count Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type. 3. 3. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To output the meter counter list. 2. (only when the Auto Duplex unit is mounted). [Meter Counter] → [Details] 1.Field Service Ver. Touch [Consumable Life List]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting H. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No. and to set the count. Setting/ Procedure 2 (4) Consumable Life List • Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either Authentication Device. Select Simplex or Duplex print. Vendor 2 or Key counter IF vendor is mounted.

“1 min. • To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device.8. OFF) Scan Fax Box (2) Auto Reset Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning in “Copier”.0 Aug. “1 min. User Authentication/Volume Track is set. “Reset” Do Not Reset Use Setting/ Procedure <When Original is set on ADF> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF. <Priority Mode> • To set the functions displayed during System Auto Reset from Copier. and the “Fax. • The default setting is 1 min. Fax and the Box. “Scanner”. • To change the period of time until System Auto Reset starts functioning. OFF) Adjustment / Setting (3) Job Reset <When Account is changed> Functions • To select whether to reset the copying mode functions to the default ones when the Key Counter is unplugged. • The default setting is Copy.” (1 to 9. a magnetic card is pulled out. • The default setting is Do Not Reset. • To reset the copy mode to the default setting when the original is set to ADF. Reset “Do Not Reset” 212 . Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 I. Reset Setting (1) System Auto Reset Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time until System Auto Reset stars functioning. Scanner.” (1 to 9.” • To change the period of time until Auto Reset starts functioning. 3. NOTE • [Fax] will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. “Copy” <System Auto Reset Time> • The default setting is 1 min. • The default setting is Reset.

• The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” <When NEXT JOB is selected: Original Set / Bind Direction> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to cancel the Original Set/Bind direction when the job (which original set/bind direction is set) started and the next job setting has become available. • The default setting is 1 Day. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen. • The default setting is OFF. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen. ON “OFF” 1 J. Touch “[Delete Secure Documents]. (2) Delete Secure Print Documents Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the whole classified documents in the Box. ON “OFF” <When NEXT JOB is selected: Reset Data After Job> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting Fax when the scanning is finished or Fax is transmitted. 1. Touch [Delete Unused User Box]. (The address will be cleared even when “OFF” is selected. 3.Field Service Ver. 2. It also sets the period of time to store data. 2006 <When NEXT JOB is selected: Staple Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. User Box Setting (1) Delete Unused User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the unnecessary box without data. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 30 Days Save • To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the Staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available. 12 Hours “1 Day” 2 Days 3 Days 7 Days Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 213 .0 Aug. making the next job setting available. 1 (3) Auto Delete Secure Document • To set whether or not to delete the confidential documents in the Box after a certain period of time. 2.) • The default setting is OFF. 1.

3.0 Aug. 220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8 x 13 8. Scan 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device is mounted. • To change the size for Foolscap paper. • Select the size from among the following four.8. E-Mail : To be used as from address at internal Fax transmission. Touch [Machine Name] and input the name. enter the Extension No.” “Table1” Table2 (2) Foolscap Size Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the size for Foolscap paper. Machine Name : When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of document registered in Box is generated automatically. 1. Adjustment / Setting B. 2006 K. • Use to change the setting for the document size detection table. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. [E-Mail Address] to input them. • Touch [New] to register the new address. 214 . 1.3 One-Touch Registration A. change. Using the 10-Key Pad.6. • Upon setup. it is added.6. 2. Touch [E-Mail] and input the E-Mail address. 2 Setting/ Procedure 8. 2. Standard Size Setting 1 • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”. or delete the setting. • Select any displayed address to check. Administrator Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the information on Administrator and the From address for e-mail transmission. Touch [Name]. • The default setting is “Table1.2 Administrator/Machine Setting A. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] (1) Original Glass Original Size Detect Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the document size detection table. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Address Book <E-Mail> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. Input Machine Address Functions Use • To register the name of the Machine and E-mail address.

Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP. • At least one address must be registered in order to register the group. <SMB> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. (3) Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Scan Program.0 Aug. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • Select any displayed address to check. (2) Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simultaneously. and to check. change. to register. or delete the setting. • At least one user box must be registered in order to register the Box address. (4) Subject/Text (for E-mail) <Subject> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. • Select any program No. or delete the setting. <User Box> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Box address for storing the scanned data to the Box in the hard disk of the Machine. • Touch [New] key to register the new group. change. change. • elect any displayed group to check. change. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. • Select any displayed subject to check. • Touch [New] to register the new address. or delete the setting. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • Select any displayed address to check. change or delete the setting.Field Service Ver. change. • Select any displayed address to check. 215 . • Touch [New] to register the new subject. 2006 <FTP> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. 3.

• A new address can be registered by touching [New]. or delete the setting. Adjustment / Setting <User Box> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Box address in the hard disk of the machine when storing the Fax data in the Box. Dial> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Fax number for transmitting the Fax. or delete the setting. 3. • Select any displayed address to check.0 Aug. change. • Touch [New] to register the new message. • Select any displayed address to check. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • Touch [New] to register the new address. 2006 <Text> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. or delete the setting. • Select any displayed message to check. • The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. 2 <IP Address Fax Destination> • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings.8. (1) Address Book <Addr. Fax • The settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • At least one user box must be registered in order to register the Box address. change. B. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. change. <E-Mail> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the e-mail address for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. change. or delete the setting. • Select any displayed address to check. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data. • Select any displayed address to check. change or delete the setting. 216 .

• Touch [New] key to register the new subject. • Touch [New] to register the new address. 217 . or delete the setting. change or delete the setting. change. and to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. <Text> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. • Select any Program No. • Select any displayed subject to check. • Select any displayed group to check. (4) Subject/Text (for E-mail) <Subject> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail Subject for transmitting the Fax original by e-mail. change.Field Service Ver. (2) Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit the Fax data simultaneously.0 Aug. 2006 2 8. • Select any displayed address to check. (3) Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Fax Program. • At least one address of the group must be registered in order to register the group. or delete the setting. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting <Internet Fax Address> • Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings. 3. or delete the setting. • The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. change. or delete the setting. • Touch [New] key to register the new message. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data. change. to register. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. • Select any displayed message to check.

• To attach the image of the date. • To register the shared or personal box for any purpose. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted.0 Aug.) (1) Address Book List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Address Book List. • Touch [New] key to register the new box. and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses.) (1) Public/Personal User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use • To register/change the Relay User Box. 3. 1. Specify the Registration No. 2 (3) Relay User Box • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • Touch [New] key to register the new box. D. User Box 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Authentication Device or Vendor is mounted. 3. 4. range to be output. Touch [Print]. (2) Bulletin Board User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Bulletin Board User Box. and to distribute them. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • Touch [New] key to register the new box. and select the Paper Take-up Tray. and/or filing number to the document data stored in the scanner mode. One-Touch Registration List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. time.8. Select the Simplex or Duplex print (only when the Auto Duplex Unit is mounted). 218 . Select the Destination Type to be output. 2. • To print the list of abbreviated addresses which are registered. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted. 2006 C. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (4) Annotation User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the Annotation User Box.

Select the Paper Take-up Tray.Field Service Ver. Select the Simplex or Duplex print (only when the Auto Duplex Unit is mounted). Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 1. and press the Start key. 3. • To print out the list of the Program addresses which are registered. 3. and select the Paper Take-up Tray. Specify the Registration No. 2. 2. 4.0 Aug. 1 Setting/ Procedure 219 . Specify the Registration No. • To print out the E-mail Subject/Text List which are registered. (4) E-Mail Subject/Text List Functions Use • To output the Subject or the Text list. 8. range to be output. 1. 1. and select the Paper Take-up Tray. range to be output. and output the list of Program. 3. Touch [Print]. • To print out the list of addresses of the group which are registered. and press the Start key to output the Subject/Text List. 2006 (2) Group List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Group List. (3) Program List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the Program List. 2. Touch [Print]. Select the Simplex or Duplex print (only when the Auto Duplex Unit is mounted). Select the Simplex or Duplex print (only when the Auto Duplex Unit is mounted). Select the Destination Type to be output. and press the Start key to output the list of the addresses of the group.

3. “OFF” ON (External Server) ON (MFP) NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [SMB Setting] → [User Authentication (NTLM)] • [NDS] will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “OFF”.4 User Authentication/Account Track 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting is not set to [Unset]. • The default setting is Restrict. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] A. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • [Allow] cannot be selected when Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] is set to “Do Not Synchronize”. • The default setting is “Active Directory” “Active Directory” NDS NTLM v1 NTLM v2 NOTE • [NTLM v1] and [NTLM v2] will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “OFF”. • To select whether to authenticate the user by the External Server or MFP.8. “Restrict” Allow 1 NOTE • This setting is not available without User Authentication. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [NetWare Setting] → [User Authentication Setting] Adjustment / Setting (2) Public User Access Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User authentication has been set. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • Select the type of Authentication server when “On (External Server)” is selected.6. (3) Account Track Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable the Account Track function or not. • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. • Select the Authentication Server type. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. General Settings (1) User Authentication 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the User Authentication method. • To enable the Account Track function. 2006 8. “OFF” ON 220 . • The default setting is OFF.0 Aug. • The default setting is OFF. and conduct setting for each server type.

(7) Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track. 2006 (4) Account Track Input Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication method for the Account Track. • To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the User authentication and the Account Track.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is Skip Job. “Restrict” Allow (6) When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Functions • To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job. 1 (5) Scanner Setting • It is displayed only when the optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted and User Authentication or Account track has been set.0 Aug. • The default setting is Synchronize. “Synchronize” Do not synchronize NOTE • The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication and Account Track. • The default setting is Account Name & Password. when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the User Authentication and the Account Track. • To be used when not to synchronize the User Authentication and Account Track. 221 Adjustment / Setting . 3. • The default setting is Restrict. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 • To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password. or to stop the machine. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use TWAIN Scan function of Fiery Remote Scan or not when User Authentication or Account Track has been set. “Account Name & Password” Password Only NOTE • This setting is not available without the Account Track. 8. • To use TWAIN Scan function at the Fiery Remote Scan software supplied with the Image Controller when User Authentication or Account Track has been set. • “Password Only” cannot be set when using both User Authentication and Account Track. “Skip Job” Stop Job Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • This setting is available only with User Authentication and the Account Track.

2006 (8) # of Counters Assigned for Users Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account registration. • The default setting is 500. Display “Do Not Display” 222 . 3. ON “OFF” <Default Function Permission> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • To set the default value for the Function Permission in User Authentication by the External Server. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display or not the list key for User names on User Authentication screen. “Allow” Restrict” Setting/ Procedure 1 <Public User Key> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to Authenticate the public user on the User Authentication screen. Fax operation. • To change the number available to be assigned for the User registration and Account registration. Print Scan/Fax From Box • The default settings are Allow. • To display the list key for User names on User Authentication screen • The default setting is OFF. User Authentication Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the User Authentication. the number available for Account Track will be 950. User Box operation. • To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the user by the External Server. (1) Administrative Setting <User Name List> 1 • It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON”. • The default settings are Do Not Display. The number for the User registration will be set. • The total number to be registered for the User Authentication and Account Track is 1000. B. • Items available for setting: Copy operation. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • When setting the [# of Counters Assigned for Users] to 50.0 Aug. Scan operation. • To authenticate the public user on User Authentication screen when “Public User Access” available from “Authentication Method” is set to “Allow”. and printing.8.

2. Set the Output Permission. Select the user. Select the user (001 to 1000). Input the User Name. For clearing the counter. printer. touch [Clear Counter]. Account Track Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the Account Track. Set the Output Permission. Select the proper Account. scanner. 2. (001 to 500). For clearing the counter. 3. 4. printer. 1. scanner. Input the Account Name and the Password. touch [Clear Counter]. and touch [OK]. Select the key for the item to be checked. and Max. 3. and Fax for each user. • To check the status of use of the copier.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Select the key to check to see the status of use. C. • To register and change the account for Account Track. For clearing the all counters. 2. Select the account. touch [Reset All Counters]. 3. 1. (1) Account Track Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register and change the Account. touch [Reset All Counters]. printer. and Fax for each user. 1. and Function Permission. ([E-Mail address] will not be displayed when IC-402 is mounted. • To check the status of use of the copier. 3. the Output Permission and the Function Permission can be set. scanner. Allowance Set. 4. and E-Mail address. printer. and Fax for each account. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 NOTE • It cannot be entered when conducting Authentication by External Server. 1 (3) User Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the status of use of the copier.) 8. NOTE • When the public users are allowed. For clearing the all counters. 3. 2006 (2) User Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the user. 1. scanner. Max Allowance Set. 223 Adjustment / Setting . • To register or change the user for authentication. and Fax for each account. 2. and touch [OK]. (2) Account Track Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the status of use of the copier. User Password.

Counter List • The setting is available only when carrying out the User Authentication or Account Track. Print without Authentication • It cannot select [Allow] when the following setting is set to “ON”. “ON” OFF NOTE • When the setting is changed.5 Network Setting A. Manual Input “Auto Input” Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • When it is set to [Auto Input]. and press the start key to output the counter list. 224 . • To disable TCP/IP setting. DHCP Setting BOOTP Setting ARP/PING Setting AUTO IP Setting : : : : ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF NOTE • [ARP/PING Setting] and [Auto IP Setting] cannot be set to “OFF” simultaneously. (1) TCP/IP Setting Functions Use • To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP setting. 8. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To print out the User counter and the account counter. Allow “Restrict” E. 3. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 1 (2) IP Address Setting Method • To set whether to enter the IP address directly or to obtain it automatically. • They will all be set to “ON” when [Manual Input] is changed to [Auto Input].8. 2. • The default setting is Auto Input.6.0 Aug. 2006 D. Select the Simplex or Duplex print (only when the Auto Duplex Unit is mounted). • To change the method for setting the IP address. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified. 1. select the method to obtain it automatically. • The default setting is Restrict. • To output the user counter and account counter to be checked. • The default setting is ON. Touch [Counter List]. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified. turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. TCP/IP Setting • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted.

• To enter the IP address of the machine. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . (7) Priority DNS Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Priority DNS Server. [0 to 255] 8. “Enable” Disable Functions Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”. [0 to 255] (8) Substitute 1/2 DNS Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Substitute DNS Server. [0 to 255] . 2006 (3) IP Address 1 • It cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”. [0 to 255] 1 (6) DNS Server Auto Obtain • To set whether or not to enable the Auto Obtaining of the DNS Server Address. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 (4) Subnet Mask 1 • It cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”. • The default setting is Enable. [0 to 255] . • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] .0 Aug. [0 to 255] . Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the IP address of the device used in the network. [0 to 255] . • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the gateway address of the device used in the network. [0 to 255] . • To disable the Auto Obtaining of the DNS Server Address. [0 to 255] . Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network. 3. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • To enter the subnet mask of the machine. • To enter the gateway address of the machine. • To enter the Substitute DNS Server. • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] .Field Service Ver. [0 to 255] . • To enter Priority DNS Server. [0 to 255] 225 Adjustment / Setting . [0 to 255] (5) Default Gateway 1 • It cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”.

Enable “Disable” (13) Host Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the DNS Host name. 2. • To set the Dynamic DNS. Touch [DNS Host Name]. 1. • The default setting is Enable. Touch [DNS Default Domain Name]. Enter the DNS Default Domain Name on the on-screen keyboard. 1 (10) DNS Default Domain Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the DNS Default Domain Name. • To enter the DNS Default Domain Name. • To disable the Auto Obtaining for the DNS Domain name. • To enter the DNS Search Domain Name. 1 (11) DNS Search Domain Name1 to 3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the DNS Search Domain Name.0 Aug.8. 2. • The default setting is Disable. and touch [OK]. and touch [OK]. and touch [OK]. 3. 1 (12) Dynamic DNS Setting Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable the Dynamic DNS setting. • To enter the DNS Host name. Enter the DNS Host name on the screen key board. 2006 (9) DNS Domain Auto Obtain Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable the Auto Obtaining for the DNS Domain name. Touch [DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3]. “Enable” Disable NOTE • “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”. 1. Enter the DNS Domain Name on the on-screen keyboard. 2. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. 226 . 1.

Field Service Ver.0 Aug. • The default setting is ON. 4. “ON” OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 227 Adjustment / Setting B.3 Ethernet II 802. 3. “ON” OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Ethernet Frame Type Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Ethernet Frame Type. 2. Touch [Deny Access]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 • To set whether to receive IP address within the specified range of the value. Select the necessary port number. Touch [OK]. <Deny Access> 1. <Permit Access> 1.3SNAP 1 (3) User Authentication Setting • To set whether or not to use the User Authentication setting. • To use NetWare (IPX) setting. • To set the RAW port number for the printer. Touch [OK]. Select Enable or Disable on [Deny Access]. Select to use or not to use. 2. Select range Set 1 to Set 5. • Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports. 8. • To conduct User Authentication in Netware environment. Select range Set 1 to Set 5. Touch [OK]. 2. 4. 3. When using the selected port. NetWare Setting • It will not be displayed excluding [Ethernet Frame Type] when optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted. 2006 (14) IP Filtering Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the IP Filtering. (15) RAW Port No.2 802. “Auto Detect” 802. Functions • To set the RAW port No. press the Clear key to clear the value. • The default setting is Auto Detect. Select Enable or Disable on [Permit Access]. 3. 3. and enter address using the 10-Key Pad. and enter the RAW port number using the 10-Key Pad. • To specify the Frame type for transmission. and input address using the 10-Key Pad. 1. . 1 Use Setting/ Procedure 1 (1) IPX Setting • To enable or disable the NetWare (IPX) setting. • The default setting is ON.

and touch [OK]. Touch [Status]. • To set the Full server name for the print server to logon. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. Enter the Print server name or the Print server password (up to 63 characters) using the on-screen keyboard. 2. • To set the interval to search the print queue. 3. Press the Clear key.X model and after. 2006 (4) Netware Print Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Netware print mode. Check the NetWare status. 3. • To enter the print server name or the print server password. Enter the Polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. 1. 1. (6) Print Server Name/Print Server Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Print server name and Print server password. and touch [OK].0 Aug. • To enable the Bindery service. 2. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (8) NDS/Bindery Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the Bindery setting when using NetWare4. 228 . (7) Polling Interval Functions • To set the Polling interval. Touch [Print Server name] or [Print Server Password]. • The default setting is PServer. OFF PServer Nprinter/Rprinter (5) Status Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display NetWare Status.8. 2. “NDS” NDS&Bindery (9) File Server Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the File server name. Touch “File Server Name” key. • The default setting is NDS. • To change the Netware print mode. 1. 2. Touch UP/Down arrow keys to select the server to check. 1. • To check NetWare status. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-Key Pad. Touch [NDS Tree Name]. • Not to use the http Server setting. (13) Printer Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer number. 2. Touch [NDS Context name]. 1. (11) NDS Tree Name 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NDS Tree name (Name to login) • To set the NDS Tree name. and touch [OK]. Touch [Printer Name]. 2. and touch [OK].0 Aug.Field Service Ver. 1. 2006 (10) NDS Context Name 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • The default setting is ON. 1. 2. 3. “ON” OFF (2) PSWC Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set the NDS Context name (Context name to register NDS Print Server) • To set the NDS Context name. http Server Setting (1) http Server Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the http Server setting. • Not to use the PageScope Web Connection. (12) Printer Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer Name. Enter the NDS Context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Press the Clear key. • To set the Printer Name. Enter the NDS Tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 1 C. Enter the Printer Name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK]. 2. “ON” OFF 229 . • To set the Printer number. • The default setting is ON. 1.

• The default setting is ON. Touch [Support Operation].8. • To conduct IPP Authentication. 2. Enter the Printer Name. 2006 (3) IPP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) setting. “ON” OFF (4) Accept IPP job Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job. “ON” OFF (8) Authentication Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication method for IPP Authentication. • To set the Printer information. • To restrict the IPP job • The default setting is ON. 230 . Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 1. and Printer Information on the on-screen keyboard. 3. Printer Location. 2. • To change the Authentication method when conducting IPP Authentication. • For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function. Touch [Printer Information]. • The default setting is requesting-user-name. • To disable IPP setting. Set ON or OFF for each item. (6) Printer Information Functions Use • To set the Printer information. • The default setting is ON. 3. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (7) IPP Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the IPP Authentication setting. Touch [Print URI] to check the Printer URI information. requesting-user-name basic digest. 1. “ON” OFF (5) Support Operation Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Operation support information.

2. Press the Clear key. 2. 1. 1. 1. 2. (11) realm Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the realm for identifying the Authentication setting for IPP Authentication. and touch [OK]. [0 to 255] . • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • To enter the Proxy server address. (3) Port No. Select [Host Name Input] to enter the Host name. 8. • To enter the Proxy server port number. and touch [OK]. (1) Proxy Server Address Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Proxy server address. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 (10) Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Password for IPP Authentication. • Enter the Proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. Touch [Input]. 2. • Press the Clear key. [0 to 255] 1. Enter the User name on the on-screen keyboard. 231 . and touch [OK]. Touch [Password]. (2) Proxy Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Proxy server port number. Touch [Host Address].Field Service Ver. Select [IP Address Input] to enter the IP Address. 3. Touch [User Name]. 3. Enter the Proxy Server Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad. • To enter the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port number to be used for transmission with FTP server. Enter the realm on the on-screen keyboard. FTP Setting • It will not be displayed excluding [FTP Server] when optional Image Controller is mounted.0 Aug. 3. [0 to 255] . D. 2006 (9) User Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the User name for IPP Authentication. Touch [realm]. Enter the Password on the on-screen keyboard. 2. 1.

8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • Not to use “Scan to FTP (FTP transmission). 3.” • The default setting is ON. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SMB port or not in Printer mode. • To change the timeout period for connecting. “ON” OFF 232 . 3. “ON” OFF 1 NOTE • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. • The default setting is ON. • Not to use FTP server. “ON” OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure (6) FTP Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use FTP server or not. 2006 (4) Connection Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server. • The default setting is ON. SMB Setting (1) Scan Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SMB or not in Scan mode (Scan to PC). Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-Key Pad. 1 (5) FTP Tx • To set whether to use “Scan to FTP (FTP transmission)” or not.0 Aug. • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF (2) Print Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. 1. • Not to use SMB in Scan mode (Scan to PC). 2. Touch [Input]. • Not to use SMB port in Printer mode. Press the Clear key. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Adjustment / Setting E.

233 Adjustment / Setting .0 Aug. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set NetBIOS name. • To set the Print service name. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Print service name. and touch [OK]. Functions Use • To set whether or not to enable the Auto Obtaining of the WINS Server Address. the traffic by broadcast can be reduced. Touch [Print Service Name]. up to two can be acquired. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Workgroup. • To set NetBIOS name. 1 (6) WINS Setting • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. • To acquire the WINS Server Address automatically. and the communication becomes available with the network where broadcast does not reach. “ON” OFF Setting/ Procedure 1 (7) Auto Obtain Setting • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. and touch [OK]. 2. 2. 1. (4) Print Service Name 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. 2. • The default setting is ON. 1. 3. Enter the Print Service name (up to 13 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.Field Service Ver. Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • The default setting is Enable. • To set the Workgroup. and touch [OK]. • To obtain the WINS Server Address from DHCP server. (5) Workgroup 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. • To use the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) setting is necessary. 2006 (3) NetBIOS Name 8. Functions Use • To set whether or not to enable the WINS setting. If there are more than on address settings. • By using the WINS. “Enable” Disable Setting/ Procedure NOTE • “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Address Setting Method] is set to “Auto Input”. Enter the Workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch [NetBIOS Name]. 1. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. Touch “Workgroup” key.

(The primary Address has the priority during operation. [0 to 255] . Enter the WINS Server Address. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. • To use when changing the NTLM Version for User Authentication. • To use when manually entering the WINS Server Address. Functions Use • To set the WINS Server Address. AppleTalk Setting 1 • It is not displayed when the optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted. • The default setting is v1. Touch [WINS Server Address 1] or [WINS Server Address 2]. Select the Version which suits the network environment. • The default setting is OFF. • To use when conducting the User Authentication by NTLM (NT LAN Manager). Setting/ Procedure 1 (9) User Authentication (NTLM) • To set whether or not to enable the User Authentication setting by NTLM. [0 to 255] 1. 2 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. “ON” OFF Adjustment / Setting 1 (11) NTLM Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NTLM Version for the User Authentication. “ON” OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 1 (10) SMB TX Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the SMB transmission setting. ON “OFF” 234 . 3. • The default setting is ON. • The default setting is ON. • The Primary Address and the Secondary Address can be set. (1) AppleTalk Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting. • To use when setting the SMB transmission setting. • To use AppleTalk setting.) • IP address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . • NTLM has v1 and v2.8. 2. 2006 (8) WINS Server Address 1.0 Aug. [0 to 255] . “v1” v2 v1/v2 F.

Touch [Max. and select the optional blank key to register and/or set. and touch [OK].0 Aug. Press the Clear key. 235 . 1. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-Key Pad. Search Results]. • To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network. 1. results of address for LDAP search • To change the Max. Touch [Server Name]. (3) Zone Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Zone name connected with AppleTalk network. LDAP Setting (1) Enabling LDAP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) function. • The default setting is OFF. <Max. Enter the Zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To check the current zone on the AppleTalk network. 2. 2. • To use LDAP function. G. 2006 (2) Printer Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network. results of address for LDAP search 3. (4) Current Zone Functions Use • To display the current zone on AppleTalk network. • Touch [Setting Up LDAP]. and touch [OK]. Enter the Server name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.Field Service Ver. Touch [Printer Name]. 4. Enter the Printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch [Zone Name]. 2. • To set the Printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network. 5. 3. and touch [OK]. 8. ON “OFF” (2) Setting Up LDAP 1 • Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP Server can be conducted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 1. Enter the Max. Search Results> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. <LDAP Server Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Set the LDAP Server name.

• To enter LDAP server address. and touch [OK]. 3.8. 3. and select the condition. 1. • To enter the Directory Path for LDAP server. <Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LDAP server address. Touch [Initial Setting for Search Details]. [0 to 255] . 1.0 Aug. [0 to 255] 1. Touch [Search Base]. 1. 2. 1. • To change the Max. and touch [OK]. Adjustment / Setting <Reset All Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the shipping. 2006 <Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. Touch [Server Address]. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Security Details] → [Manual Destination Input] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check the connection with the LDAP Server which has been set. Check the message and touch [Yes]. timeout period for LDAP search. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-Key Pad. Enter the Search Base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search. [0 to 255] . Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Touch [Condition] for each search item. <Search Base> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Directory Path for LDAP server. 2. Touch [Timeout]. 2. Press the Clear key. Enter the Server name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch [check Connection]. 2. 1. • IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . 236 . • It will not be displayed when the following is set to “Restrict”. timeout period for LDAP search. 2. <Check Connection> • It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to “OFF”. <Initial Setting for Search Details> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search. Touch [Reset All Settings].

2006 <Enable SSL> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8.0 SP4 and later versions.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is anonymous. 1. anonymous : User name and password are not necessary (Dynamic Authentication will be invalid when anonymous is selected. Touch [Input].) Simple : Simple method which needs the user name and the password Digest-MD5 : Method available with normal LDAP server. 1. Touch [Input]. NTLM (v2) : Standard User Authentication format used for Windows NT. etc. ON “OFF” <Port No. • To enter the LDAP server port number.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LDAP server port number. <Port Number (SSL)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port Number for LDAP Server when using SSL. NTLM (v1) : Standard User Authentication format used for Windows NT. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad. • To use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server. Press the Clear key. 1. Its security has been enhanced compared to v1. 2. • The default setting is OFF. It has been applied to the Windows NT4. 2. it automatically switches to CRAM-MD5. etc. • To enter the Port Number for LDAP Server when using SSL. 3. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 • To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server.0 Aug. Press the Clear key. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay Pad. • To change the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. <Authentication Method> Functions Use • To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. When failing to authenticate with Digest-MD5. 1. “anonymous” Simple Digest-MD5 GSS-SPNEGO NTLM v1 NTLM v2 Setting/ Procedure 237 Adjustment / Setting . GSS-SPNEGO : Method available with Window's Active Directory (Kerberos authentication).

and touch [OK]. • To set the logon name to connect to LDAP server. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Use User Authentication ID and Password : It conducts Authentication with the registration data for the Copier’s User Authentication. 2. • To use when tracing the Server with referral at the time of LDAP connection. • The default setting is ON. and touch [OK]. 1. 3. NOTE • The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. Dynamic Authentication : It conducts Authentication by Dynamic Authentication. 2006 <Select Server Authentication Method> Functions Use • To set the Authentication system when conducting LDAP Server Authentication. “ON” OFF <Login Name> Functions Use • To set the Logon name to connect to LDAP server. • To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server.0 Aug. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure <Password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. and touch [OK]. 238 . <Domain Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Domain Name for connecting to LDAP server. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. NOTE • The setting is not available when Authentication method is set to anonymous. Touch [Login Name]. • Touch [Password]. 1. • To use when changing the Server Authentication system. Touch [Domain Name]. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Use Set Value.8. Use Set Value : It conducts Authentication with the setting value set by [LDAP Server Registration]. “Use Set Value” Nprinter/Rprinter Use User Authentication ID and Password <Use Referral> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the referral setting.

“Allow” Restrict <SMTP Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the SMTP server address. E-Mail Setting (1) E-Mail TX (SMTP) <E-Mail TX Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the E-Mail transmission setting. 2. • To use when not informing the total counter by E-Mail. • The default setting is Allow. Select [Host Name Input]. • To use when not informing the status by E-Mail. 2006 H. and enter IP Address. 3.0 Aug. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by E-Mail. [0 to 255] 1. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 <Scan to E-Mail> • It will not be displayed when [E-Mail TX Setting] is set to “Restrict”. 239 Adjustment / Setting . “Allow” Restrict 1 <E-Mail Notification> • It will not be displayed when [E-Mail TX Setting] is set to “Restrict”. Touch [Host Address]. [0 to 255] . • The default setting is Allow. • To enter the SMTP server address. • The default setting is Allow. • To use when not transferring scanned data by E-Mail. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to inform the total counter by E-Mail. and enter the host name. [0 to 255] . • The default setting is Allow. • To disable the E-Mail transmission setting.Field Service Ver. “Allow” Restrict 1 <Meter Count Notification> • It will not be displayed when [E-Mail TX Setting] is set to “Restrict”. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to inform the status by E-Mail. • SMP Server Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] . “Allow” Restrict 8. Select [IP Address Input]. 3.

“No Limit” (1 to 100) Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 1 <SSL Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use SSL when sending an E-Mail. • To change the Max. • Select the timeout period using [+30] / [-30]. “ON” OFF <Divided Mail Size> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the dividing size when carrying out the Binary division for data to be transmitted. 2. 3. Touch the Clear key. Press the Clear key. • To use when sending an E-Mail using SSL. Enter the Port Number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. 2. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive. 3. <Connection Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. • The default setting is OFF. <Server Capacity> Functions Use • To set the Max. • To change the dividing size of the data.8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 <Binary Division> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted • Not to carry out Binary division for data to be transmitted • The default setting is ON. 240 . 1. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive. • The default setting is No Limit. ON “OFF” 1 <Port Number (SSL)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port Number when using SSL. • To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server.0 Aug. • To use for entering the Port Number when using SSL. 1. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 using the 10-Key Pad. Touch [Input].

[Password] and [Domain Name]. • The default setting is ON. 2006 <Port Number> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port number for transmission with SMTP server. Touch [Input]. 2. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. • The default setting is OFF. 3. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-Key Pad. Press the Clear key. • To enter the port number for transmission with SMTP server. 8.0 Aug. ON “OFF” <Detail Setting: Authentication Setting: SMTP Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable SMTP Authentication. <Detail Setting: POP Before SMTP Time> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 <Detail Setting: Authentication Setting: POP Before SMTP> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP Authentication. • To use when conducting POP Before SMTP Authentication. • To use when conducting SMTP Authentication. “ON” OFF 241 . (2) E-Mail RX (POP) <E-Mail RX Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting. 3. 1. enter the [User ID]. Press the Clear key. ON “OFF” • When set to “ON”. 3. • To disable the e-mail reception setting. • The default setting is OFF. 2. • To change the time necessary for POP Before SMTP Authentication.Field Service Ver. Touch [Input]. 1.

ON “OFF” <Detail Setting: Port No. • The default setting is OFF. Enter the password. 5. and enter the IP address. Enter the Port Number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. 2. and touch [OK]. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. Touch [Input]. Press the Clear key. 1. 2. 242 . 2. 1 <SSL Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use SSL when receiving an E-Mail. [0 to 255] . • To enter the Port No. Touch the Clear key. Enter the Port No. Enter the Login Name. • To set the timeout period of connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. Adjustment / Setting <Detail Setting: APOP Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use APOP Authentication • To use APOP Authentication • The default setting is OFF. Select [IP Address Input]. • Select the timeout period of connection using +30/-30 keys. Touch [Host Address]. 3. • To use when receiving an E-Mail which used SSL. for transmitting with POP server. ON “OFF” 1 <Port Number (SSL)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port Number when using SSL. for transmitting with POP server. 2006 <POP Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP Server Address. [0 to 255] . • To enter the Port Number when using SSL. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. <Detail Setting: Connection Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. 3. [0 to 255] 1.8. • To enter the POP Server Address. 4. 3. Select [Host Name Input] to enter the host name. 1.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port No. • SMTP Server Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] .

[0 to 255] . • To enter the NTP server address. Press the Clear key. [0 to 255] 1. Detail Setting (1) Device Setting <MAC Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the MAC address of the machine. 2. ON <NTP Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NTP server address.0 Aug. and enter the IP address. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 “OFF” <Network Speed> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Network speed. • IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255] .> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port No.Field Service Ver. Select [Host name Input]. “Auto” 10Mbps Full Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex NOTE • When Network speed setting is changed. Touch [Host Address]. for transmitting with NTP server. <Port No. • The address cannot be changed. 2006 I. [0 to 255] . 8. and enter the host name. • To set the specific network speed. 243 Adjustment / Setting . • To synchronize the time between the server and the client. • To enter the Port No. Select [IP Address Input]. 2. (2) Time Adjustment Setting <NTP Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the NTP (Network Time Protocol) setting. 3. • To check the MAC address of the machine. 3. for transmitting with NTP server. 1. Enter the Port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is Auto. turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

Touch [OK]. <Notification Item Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e-mail. Setting/ Procedure 244 . 1. 3. 5. 2. Touch [Set Schedule]. Press the Clear key. • To change the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e-mail. and touch [OK]. 4. When selecting [Daily] for the reporting cycle. and touch [OK].8.0 Aug. <Notification Time Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time necessary for notifying the machine condition by e-mail. • Two different schedules can be set for reporting. Enter the time for notifying between 1 and 10 using the 10-Key Pad. • To set the item for notifying the machine condition with e-mail. 3. 1. When selecting [Monthly] for the reporting cycle. Touch [E-Mail Address Edit]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 1. Select the reporting cycle from [Daily]. 5. 3. set the Interval of Week(s) and Day of the Week. Touch [Address 1]. When selecting [Weekly] for the reporting cycle. Select ON/OFF for each schedule. 4. set the Interval of Day(s). 2. set the Interval of Month(s) and Date of the Month. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure <Set Notification Addresses> Functions Use • To set the E-Mail Address for reporting the total counter value • Up to three E-Mail Addresses can be set. Touch [E-mail Address Edit]. 1. [Address 2] or [Address 3]. • It can be selected whether to apply the schedule of the [Set Schedule] to each address. Touch [Schedule 1] or [Schedule 2]. Select the item to be notified and touch [ON]. 2. 2006 (3) Status Notification Setting <Notification Address Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the e-mail address for notifying the machine condition. 2. Enter the password (up to 320 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. [Weekly] or [Monthly]. • To use when informing the total counter value by E-Mail regularly. 1 (4) Total Counter Report Setting <Set Schedule> Functions • To set the schedule for informing the total counter value. Enter the E-Mail Address (up to 320 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 1. • To set the e-mail address for notifying the machine condition.

4. 2. (5) PING Confirmation Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING. <Send Now> Functions Use • To transfer the current total counter value to the set address. Select [IP Address Input] to enter IP address. 2006 <Device Nickname> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • Not to use SLP. • The default setting is Enable. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set the Device Nickname for identifying the Copier when reporting the total counter. Touch [Device Nickname]. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SLP (Service Location Protocol) or not. • To check the condition of TCP/IP network. ON “OFF” 245 . 3. Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission. • To add Prefix or Suffix to the address. 2. • The default setting is Enable. Select [Host Name Input] to enter the host name. • Not to use LPD during printing. and touch [OK]. 1. Enter the Model Name (up to 20 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. (6) SLP Setting 1 • It is not displayed when the optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted. 3.Field Service Ver. “Enable” Disable (7) LPD Setting 1 • It is not displayed when the optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted. Touch [Check Connection] to check the connection. “Enable” Disable (8) Prefix/Suffix Setting <ON/OFF Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to add Prefix or Suffix to the address when calling or entering an address. 1. • The default setting is OFF. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use LPD (Line Printer Daemon) during printing or not.0 Aug.

• The default setting is Continue. • The default setting is ON. 1. • To readout Management Information Base and to enter Community name for writing. “ON” OFF • To individually set whether or not to use SNMP v1/v2c (IP). “Continue” Delete the Job Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 1 J. • Prefix can be registered with up to 20 letters • Suffix can be registered with up to 64 letters Use Setting/ Procedure 1 (9) Action for Invalid Certificate • To set how to process the Job when SSL Certificate becomes invalid. 3. 2. • To set the SNMP Version to be used. • Not to use SNMP. and SNMP v1 (IPX). SNMP v3 (IP). Touch the Clear key. Enter the Port Number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Prefix: Letters added to the top of the text (Header part) Suffix: Letters added to the bottom of the text (Footer part) • To register or change the address displayed for Prefix or Suffix.8. • The default setting is ON. 246 . “ON” OFF Adjustment / Setting (2) UDP Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the UDP standby Port Number which is used for SNMP (IP). • Eight types of Prefix and Suffix can be added. (1) SNMP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. SNMP Setting • It is not displayed when the optional Image Controller IC-402 is mounted.0 Aug. 2006 <Prefix/Suffix Setting> Functions • To register or change the Prefix or Suffix.

Enter the Context Name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.Field Service Ver. “Enable” Disable Setting/ Procedure NOTE • [Enable] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. <Write Setting> • The default setting is Enable. Write Community Name: Enter the Write Community Name. 3. • The default setting is Enable. and touch [OK]. 8. “Enable” Disable <Discovery User Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the name of the Discovery Authority Users which is used for SNMP v3. NOTE • The User name same with the Read User Name or the Write User name cannot be set. Enter the Discovery User Name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Read Community Name: Enter the Read Community Name. 2. 247 . and touch [OK]. 2. 1. <Discovery User> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable the Discovery Authority User which is used for SNMP v3. (4) SNMP v3 Setting <Context Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Set the Context Name which is used for SNMP v3. Touch [Name]. 1. Touch [Name]. 2006 (3) SNMP v1/v2c Setting Functions Use • To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c.0 Aug. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To use when changing Write setting. • To use when entering the Community Name for reading the Management Information (MIB) and writing to it.

1. 2006 <Read User Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the read-only User name used for SNMP v3. Auth Password : Conducts Authentication only for the Authentication Password when the read-only User accesses. Touch [Auth Password] or [Priv Password]. Authentication OFF : No Authentication will be conducted when the read-only User accesses. NOTE • The User Name same with the Discovery User Name cannot be used. 2. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Auth Password/Priv Password. 2. <Security Level> Functions Use • To set the security level of the read-only User used for SNMP v3. Enter the Read User Name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 248 . Auth Password/Priv Password : Conducts Authentication by Authentication Password and Privacy Password when read-only User accesses.8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2. Touch [Name]. Enter the password (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 3. 1. Touch [Name]. Enter the Write User Name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK]. Authentication OFF Auth Password “Auth Password/Priv Password” <Read User Password> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication Password for the read-only User which is used for SNMP v3. • To use when changing the security level of the read-only User. and touch [OK]. 1. and touch [OK]. <Write User Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the name of the Reading/Writing Authority User which is used for SNMP v3.0 Aug. NOTE • The User name same with the Discovery Use Name cannot be used.

Bonjour Setting • “Bonjour” is an alternative Network technology to AppleTalk.4 and later version. (1) Bonjour Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the Bonjour setting. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] <Write User Password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication Password for Reading/Writing Authority User which is used for SNMP v3. “Enable” Disable (2) Bonjour Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Bonjour name.Field Service Ver. 2006 <Security Level> Functions Use 8. Auth Password/Priv Password : Conducts Authentication by Authentication Password and Privacy Password when Reading/Writing Authority User accesses. Enter the Password (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Authentication OFF : Authentication will not be conducted when Reading/Writing Authority User accesses. 1 K. 1. 2. • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. • The default setting is Enable. Touch [Bonjour Name]. • To use when operating under the Bonjour service environment. Auth Password : Conducts Authentication only with Authentication Password when Reading/Writing Authority User accesses. and touch [OK]. • To use for changing the security level of the Reading/Writing Authority User. 1. 2. • To set the name for identifying over the Bonjour network. Authentication OFF Auth Password “Auth Password/Priv Password” NOTE • [Authentication OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. The name “Rendezvous” has been changed for Mac OS X 10. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Auth Password/Priv Password. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set the security level for the Reading/Writing Authority User which is used for SNMP v3. and touch [OK]. Touch [Auth Password] or [Priv Password].0 Aug. 249 . It automatically detects and identifies the network only by physically connecting to the network. Enter the Bonjour name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 3.

• To use when using the application. Touch [Input]. (3) TCP Socket (ASCII Mode) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to set the TCP Socket for ASCII Mode. • To use when entering the Port Number for TCP Socket transmission by ASCII Mode. etc. etc. 3. TCP Socket Setting (1) TCP Socket Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to set the TCP Socket. “ON” OFF (4) Port Number (ASCII Mode) Functions • To set the Port Number which is used for TCP Socket transmission by ASCII Mode. 1. 2. “ON” OFF (6) Port Number (SSL) • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from Pagescope Web Connection. Enter the Port Number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Touch the Clear key. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port Number when using SSL. • To use when using the application. Enter the Port Number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. • The default setting is ON. for TCP Socket transmission.8. Touch the Clear key. 3. 2. Touch the Clear key. for TCP Socket transmission by ASCII Mode. • The default setting is ON. 250 . 2. • To enter the Port Number when using SSL. 1. 2006 L.0 Aug. “ON” OFF (2) Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Port Number for TCP Socket transmission • To be used when entering the Port Number used for TCP Socket transmission 1. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (5) TCP Socket (SSL) • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from Pagescape Web Connection. • The default setting is ON. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use TCP Socket with SSL. • To use TCP Socket with SSL. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. Enter the Port Number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.

Touch [Input]. 2.0 Aug. • To use Internet fax function • The default setting is OFF. Enter the connection timeout time between 30 and 300 (sec. <Connection Timeout> 1. 2006 2 8. ON “OFF” (2) SMTP TX Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set SMTP TX when network fax function is being used. • To use IP address fax function • The default setting is OFF.) using the 10-key pad. Network Fax Setting (1) Network Fax Function Settings • It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to “OFF” in the following settings. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting M. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use Internet fax function. Touch [Input]. 2. <Port Number> 1. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. ON “OFF” <Internet Fax> • Setting will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. • To set SMTP TX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] <IP Address Fax> • Setting will be available only when [IP Address Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use IP address fax function. 3.Field Service Ver. 251 .

2. 2. • To use SMTP RX function when network fax function is being used. ON “OFF” Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure B.) using the 10-key pad. 3. <SMTP RX> • The default setting is ON.6 Copier Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor 1 is mounted.) • To function the Auto Zoom when the Feed Tray is selected. • The default setting is Tray Before APS ON. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] A. • To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used. Touch [Input]. “Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray 252 . Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. <Connection Timeout> 1. Auto Zoom (Platen) Functions Use • To set whether to function the Auto Zoom when the Tray is selected with document set on the Original Glass (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode. Touch [Input].8. Select Tray when APS OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Tray to be used when APS is cancelled. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Auto Zoom (ADF) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to function the Auto Zoom when the Feed Tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at Automatic Paper Selection mode. • The default setting is ON.> 1.6.) • To function the Auto Zoom when the Tray is selected. • The default setting is OFF.0 Aug. 8. • To set the Tray for the default setting when canceling APS. “ON” OFF C. 2006 (3) SMTP RX Setting Functions Use • To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec. “ON” OFF Setting/ Procedure <Port No.

“Accept” Receive Only Setting/ Procedure 8. • To restrict receiving printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy operation. I/F Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for I/F transmission. Parallel I/F 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set Data Transfer Mode when Parallel I/F has been used. • To be used when using the Parallel interface. A. 8.0 Aug.7 Printer Setting 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. • The default setting is ECP. 2006 D. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 E. IEEE 1284/USB Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the interface to be used when mounting the local I/F kit. • To make the timeout period longer according to the network condition. • The default settings are 60 sec. USB. • Settings have to be done separately for IEEE1284. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the initial value for the Tray for the Cover sheet paper. and Network. • The default setting is Tray 2. Compatible Nibble “ECP” C. “60 sec” (10 to 1000) B. IEEE1284 “USB” 253 Adjustment / Setting .6. • To change Data Transfer Mode of Parallel I/F. Accept : Receives the Print data or Fax data and print Receive Only : Print data or Fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished • The default setting is Accept. • The default setting is USB. 3. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions Use • To set whether to receive printing jobs for Print data or Fax data during copy operation.Field Service Ver.

2 B. • The default setting is OFF. Inside Body Text “Outside Body Text” OFF Adjustment / Setting 2 (2) To Name • It will not be displayed on the screen when [Fax Target] is set to “US” or “HK” in the following settings.0 Aug.) • The default setting is OFF. 2. 2006 8. Header Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the name of the sender and Fax ID which will be printed when transmitting Fax.8 Fax Setting • Settings are available only when the Optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting] A. Enter Sender Fax No. • To change the position to print the Header • The default setting is Outside Body Text. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. (up to 20 characters) using the 10-key pad and [+].) when transmitting fax. (Registered name or Fax No. • To print the Footer when transmitting Fax. [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Marketing Area] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print the information of TX destination (Registered name or Fax No. • Up to 20 sender names can be registered by touching [Sender Name Registration]. ON OFF (3) Footer Position Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print the Footer when transmitting Fax. • To register or change the name of the sender and Fax ID 1. 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.6. • To print information of TX destination. Header/Footer Position (1) Header Position Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the position to print the header when transmitting Fax. [Space] displayed on the screen.8. 3. The registered sender name can be selected when transmitting fax. Touch [Sender Name] and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Inside Body Text Outside Body Text “OFF” 254 .

etc. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Fax reception mode.Field Service Ver. 2006 C. “Auto RX” (3) Number of RX Call Rings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of times to receive call rings. • The default setting is PB. • The default setting is 3 X. . “PB” 10 pps 8. • To change the dialing method. “3 X” (0 to 7) NOTE • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. • To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy. • The displays are different depending on the country. etc. • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. • To change the interval for redialing. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Manual RX NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. • To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function. (5) Redial Interval Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the interval for redialing. • The default setting is 2 X. • The default setting is Auto RX. • The default setting is 3 min. (2) Receive Mode 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted. “2 X” (0 to 15) (4) Number of Redials Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of redials.0 Aug. “3 min” (1 to 15) 255 Adjustment / Setting • To change the number of times of the fake RingBack tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving. 3. when connected to the external telephone. Telephone Line Settings (1) Dialing Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Dialing method.

• The default setting is OFF. (3) Print Paper Selection Functions Use • To set the priority for Paper Take-up Tray when receiving Fax. • To change the volume of the speaker. D. • The default setting is OFF. TX/RX Setting (1) Duplex Print (RX) 1 • It will not be displayed when [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to “ON”. • The default setting is Auto Select. 3.0 Aug. • To use the Inch Paper Priority when receiving Fax. 2006 (6) Line Monitor Sound Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to output the Line monitor sound from the speaker or not.8. Fixed Size : Printed only on the fixed size. • To change the priority for Paper Take-up Tray when receiving Fax. ON “OFF” (7) Line Monitor Sound Volume Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the volume of the speaker. When the size is not set. Auto select : Selected automatically Priority Size : Printed on size with priority. • Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher]. • To carry out the Duplex print for the received original. ON OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • The default setting is different depending on the country. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out the Duplex print for the received original when receiving Fax. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. “Auto Select” Fixed Size Priority Size Setting/ Procedure 256 . ON “OFF” 1 (2) Adjustment / Setting Inch Paper Priority Over A4 • To set weather to use the Inch Paper Priority when receiving Fax. it will be printed on the closest Size.

x1. “Auto” Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 (7) Min. “96” (87 to 96.” • The initial setting is A4. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To change the paper size for printing the received text. 2006 (4) Print Paper Size Functions Use • To set the paper size to print the text when receiving Fax. • The default setting is Print. (5) Incorrect User Box No. A3 B4 “A4” Setting/ Procedure NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. set “Tray Selection for RX Print” to “Auto. • To make the setting of “Print Paper Size” enable. 8. ON “OFF” 257 . Reduction for RX Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the print magnification for received text. • To change the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. Entry Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. • Items available for selection are different depending on the Paper feed option mounted. • The default setting is 96. • The default setting is Auto. 3.Field Service Ver. • To change the print magnification for received text. “Print” Show Error Message Auto Create User Box (6) Tray Selection for RX Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the Paper Tray to be fixed when printing the received text. • To divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size. • The default setting is OFF.0 Aug. • To fix the Paper tray when printing the received text. • The displays are different depending on the country.0) 1 (8) Print Separate Fax Pages 1 • It will not be displayed when [Duplex print (RX)] is set to “ON”. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size.

• To use the machine as the relay delivery station during relay TX. 3. • The default setting is Delete. Function Setting (1) Function ON/OFF Setting <F Code TX> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the F Code transmission. When the relay delivery completes appropriately. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the relay RX function. • The default setting is OFF. • To print out the document that the machine relayed during relay TX.0 Aug. When the delivery job is cancelled due to redial over. “Delete” Save (10) No. of Sets (RX) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of copies to be printed with the received document. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during redialing. 1 to 10 set. When the delivery job is cancelled halfway by turning OFF sub power switch. • The default setting is ON. • To cancel the F Code transmission. • The default setting is 1 set. 2. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during relay delivery. 3. “ Setting/ Procedure ON “OFF” 258 .8. • The relay print will be output in the following case. 1. 2006 (9) File After Polling TX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to delete the original which Polling transmission has been completed. • For not deleting the original which polling transmission has been completed. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use • To set whether to use the relay print function. 4. • To use when changing the number of copies to be printed with the received document. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. E. “ON” OFF Adjustment / Setting 2 <Relay RX> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. • The default setting is ON. 6. 5. When main power switch is turned OFF/ON during relay print error. “ON” OFF 2 <Relay Print> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.

259 . [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON”. (4) Forward TX Setting • It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting]. set the address to forward to. • The default setting is OFF. 2006 1 8. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” • Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to ON. • The default setting is OFF. 3. ON “OFF” Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • When set to ON. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Compulsory Memory RX] • It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting]. (3) Closed Network RX 1 • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. and print all out Forward & Print (If TX Fails): Forward the received text. ON “OFF” (2) Memory RX 1 • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON”. “OFF” Forward & Print Forward & Print (If TX Fails) Setting/ Procedure • When set to ON. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting <Destination Check Display Function> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to display the list of specified addresses when sending the FAX. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To set whether to use the Forward Fax function. • To receive data only from the device which password matches. Forward & Print : Forward the received text. • To store the received text in the hard disk without printing. [Forward TX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON”. 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor or Authentication Device is mounted. • To use when displaying and checking the list of specified addresses when sending the FAX. • To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified. and prints out only when fails to be forwarded • The default setting is OFF. and print it out when ordered.Field Service Ver. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the forced memory RX function. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Closed area RX] • To set whether to use the closed network function.0 Aug. enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used.

Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver. ON “OFF” • When set to ON. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function. [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON”. (6) PC-Fax RX Setting • It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting]. <Non-matched Box Setting> • The default setting is RX Print. • The default setting is OFF. Functions Use • To set whether to use TSI distribution or not. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Re-Transmission] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted. ON “OFF” • When set to ON. Memory RX Use Box : To store the received data in the forced memory receiving box. RX print : To print the received data. • To change setting method when there is no matched box at receiving. [Memory RX] or [PC-Fax RX Setting] is set to “ON”.0 Aug. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure • Press [Registrate TSI User Box] and register the distribution. specify the address to store the file. <TSI User Box Setting> • The default setting is OFF. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure To set whether to use incomplete TX hold function. • To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk. • To use TSI distribution. • The default setting is OFF. Adjustment / Setting (7) TSI User Box Setting • It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting]. • To set setting method when there is no matched box at receiving.8. specify the Incomplete TX Hold Time. “RX Print” Memory RX User Box 260 . 2006 (5) Incomplete TX Hold • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. • To re-send the data failed to be sent after a given time. 3.

3. • This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line. “ON” OFF (5) Confidential RX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Confidential RX Report. 100/ Daily (2) TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the TX Report. • The default setting is Every 100 Comm. • The default setting is ON.0 Aug. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 “OFF” • When set to ON. • To print out the TX Report. • To print out the Confidential RX Report. “OFF” Daily Every 100 Comm. 2006 F. “ON” OFF 261 Adjustment / Setting . PBX CN Set Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not. and also the timing for printing.Field Service Ver. • To print out the Sequential TX Report. • The default setting is ON. • The default setting is ON. G. enter the external number between 0 and 9999. • To print out the Activity Report. and also the timing for printing. “ON” OFF (4) Timer Reservation TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not. ON “OFF” 8. • To print out the reservation TX. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is If TX Fails. Report Settings (1) Activity Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Activity Report or not. ON If TX Fails (3) Sequential TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Sequential TX Report or not.

• The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF 2 (8) Relay Request RX Report • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses 1 Dest. • To print out the Bulletin TX Report. “ON” OFF 2 (7) Relay TX Result Report • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. “All Dest. “ON” OFF Adjustment / Setting 2 (9) PC-Fax TX Error Report • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted. • To print out the relay TX result report after the relay delivery is completed when the machine is used as the relay delivery station. • The default setting is OFF. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Relay TX Result Report or not. [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Relay Request RX Report or not. at a time : Outputs a report after each transmission • The default setting is All Dest. • To print out the PC-Fax error report when TX error occurs during PC-Fax TX.0 Aug.8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. • To print out the Broadcast Result Report All Dest. • The default setting is ON. • To print out the Relay request RX report during relay request RX when the machine is used as the relay delivery station. 2006 (6) Bulletin TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Bulletin TX Report or not. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the PC-Fax TX Error Report or not. at a time Setting/ Procedure 262 . • The default setting is ON. ON “OFF” (10) Broadcast Result Report Functions Use • To set the format to output the Broadcast Result Report.” 1 Dest.

Print “Do Not Print” 263 Adjustment / Setting . [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print message when receiving response message to MDN request when internet fax function is being used. ON “OFF” 8. ON “OFF” 2 (13) MDN Message • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is OFF. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print RX error report when network fax function is being used. • The default setting is Do Not Print. • To print the error report at unusual situation such as receiving the image data that cannot be processed. 3. 2006 (11) TX Result Report Check Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the TX Result Report screen. “Print” Do Not Print 2 (14) DSN Message • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.Field Service Ver. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print message when receiving response message to DSN request when network fax function is being used. • The default setting is Print.0 Aug. • To display the TX Result Report screen. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 2 (12) Network Fax RX Error Report • Settings will be available when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.

2. Multi Lines Setting • It will be displayed only when the optional Fax Multi Line (ML-501) is mounted. (1) Telephone Line Setting <Dialing Method> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the dial method for the expanded line.0 Aug. Touch [Administrator Setting] → [Fax Setting] → [Job Settings List]. • The default setting is PB. “PB” 10 pps NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. and touch the Start key. • To change the number of artificial ring back tones with expanded line when receiving calls until it starts receiving operation. Select the Feed tray. 2006 (15) Receipt Mail Text • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print mail text received normally as the report when internet fax function is being used. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No. 3. “Print” Do Not Print H. 3. Job Settings List 2 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. • To use when changing the dial method for the expanded line. <Number of Rx Call Rings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of Rx call rings for the expanded line.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. • To print the received mail text when printing the received image data.8. • The default setting is Print. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver. • The default setting is 2 X. “2 X” (0 to 15) 264 . 1. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting I. Select the Simplex or Duplex print (only when the Auto Duplex unit is mounted). [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) • The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed.

3. • The default setting is No Selection.Field Service Ver. “ON” OFF (2) Function Setting <PC-FAX TX Setting> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the Management Device 2 is mounted. • To use when setting the system for using each line when using more than one line. <Multi Line Usage> • When selecting [Normal]. “No Selection” Line 1 Line 2 (3) Multi Lines Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the system for using each line when using more than one line. <Line 2 Setting> • The default setting is TX and RX. • To register the Fax ID (for additional line). • Use 10-key pad or [+] / [space]. enter the Fax ID (up to 20 characters). 265 . [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of the line used for PC-FAX transmission. perform the transmission setting for Line 2.0 Aug. • To use when specifying the line to be used for PC-FAX transmission when using the expanded line. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the Fax ID when using the additional line. “TX and RX” RX Only TX Only (4) Sender Fax No. 2006 <Line Monitor Sound> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the speaker • The default setting is ON.

Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 266 . Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver. 3. • To limit the data acceptable with internet fax. (The default setting is put in “ ”. “MH” MR MMR (2) Internet Fax Rx Ability • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. 2006 J.) Compression Type “MMR” “MR” “MH” ⎯ Paper Size “A3” “B4” “A4” ⎯ Resolution Ultra Fine Super Fine Fine Std.8. paper size and resolution. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set black compression level at monochrome TX mode when network fax function is being used. which can be received by the machine with internet fax. • The default setting is MH.0 Aug. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] -> [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Black Compression Level • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • The following shows the options of each setting item. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use • To set image data compression system. • To change black compression level at monochrome TX mode. Network Fax Setting • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings.

2006 8. TX/RX and record when internet fax function is being used. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting (3) I-Fax Advanced Settings • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. 3. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use • To set advanced functions of internet fax. MDN Request : To set whether to send MDN (Message Disposition Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax. DSN Request : To set whether to send DSN (Delivery Status Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax. In the case of time over.Field Service Ver. MDN/DSN Response Watch Time : To set the period to observe the response from the other machine when sending MDN/DSN request. time out message is notified. MDN Response : To set whether to response for MDN request made by the other machine when receiving through internet fax. Max Resolution : To set maximum resolution for reading.0 Aug. MDN Request DSN Request MDN Response MDN/DSN Response Watch Time Max Resolution : “ON” : ON : “ON” : “24 hours” (1 to 99) : Super Fine OFF “OFF” OFF OFF “Ultra Fine” 267 .” Setting/ Procedure • Default settings are shown below. NOTE • Only MDN Request will be sent when both MDN Request and DSN Request are set to “ON.

• The default setting is Allow. • The default setting is OFF.6.0 Aug. For details. Select Port No. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. and touch [Input].314 268 . Call Remote Center • It will be displayed when the setup at the CS Remote Care Center is complete. see “CS Remote Care. • To restrict access from other systems with IS OpenAPI. B. • The default setting is OFF. • To encrypt access by SSL from other systems using IS OpenAPI. OpenAPI Setting (1) Access Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To allow or restrict the access from other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator. enter the Login Name and the Password to be set.8. When the CS Remote Care setup is complete. Functions Use • To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator. 3. • To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI.9 System Connection A. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the access port for other systems with IS OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator. 2. “Allow” Restrict (2) Port No. Press the Clear key. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Key Pad. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To call the CS Remote Care Center from the Administrator.” See P. • To change the access port number for other systems with IS OpenAPI. 1. ON “OFF” • When setting to ON. (3) SSL • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from Pagescope Web Connection. ON “OFF” Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (4) Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator. or Port Number (SSL). 2006 8. 3.

Administrator Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set/change the Administrator Password. . 3.10 Security Setting A. the Password using only a single letter or the Password same with the previous one. NOTE • When the following setting shows that [Password Rules] is set to “ON”. ON “OFF” 8. the password with same characters and the same password with the one prior to change will not be changed. User Box Admin. • The default setting is OFF.0 Aug. • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the Box Administrator to use the system. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 C.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is Restrict. Current Password : Enter the current Administrator password New Password : Enter the new Administrator password to be used Re-Input Password : Reenter the new Administrator password NOTE • When selecting [Utility] → [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Security Details] leads to [Password Rules] being ON. or the Password with less than eight letters cannot be accepted. Prefix/Suffix Auto Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to automatically use Prefix and Suffix. • To change the Administrator Password. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] 269 Adjustment / Setting • To allow the Box Administrator to use the system. • Enter the Administrator password on the on-screen keyboard.6. B. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • Set the Password when setting to [Allow]. Allow “Restrict” 1 NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when User Authentication and Volume Track are not conducted. 2006 1 8.

User authentication. Classified document. ON “OFF” Adjustment / Setting 1 NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Output Setting]. Level 1 : [Power Save Setting]. Level 1 Level 2 “Prohibit” Setting/ Procedure (1) Security Details (2) Password Rules Functions Use • To set whether to apply the Password rules. [Date/Time Setting]. [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)]. [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)]. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [CE Authentication] [CE Authentication] will not be displayed and cannot be set to “OFF” when [Password Rules] is set to “ON”. [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)]. Administrator Security Level 1 • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor or Authentication Device is mounted. • To apply the password rule to enhance security. Level 2 : [Power Save Setting]. [Select Tray for Insert Sheet]. 2006 C. Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited. [Specify Default Tray when APS Off]. Prohibit : Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2 • The default setting is Prohibit. • Passwords to be covered: Password for CE. 3. • Details of the Password Rules: Password except User password. • To make part of the Administrator setting items open to the user. Password with only the same letter is prohibited.8. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. Account Track and Box Admin. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To set the level for Administrator setting item open to the user.0 Aug. 270 . Administrator. [Daylight Savings Time Setting]. Fax confidential print. the password cannot be changed or registered unless it follows the above conditions. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. (Case-sensitive) Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. Box transmission. (Case-sensitive) User password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. [AE Level Adjustment]. When the password rule is set to ON. [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)]. and [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] are available to users. and [Select Tray for Insert Sheet] are available to users. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhances Security Mode] • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “OFF”. Box transmission password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. [Specify Default Tray when APS Off]. Box user authentication.

Error Functions Use • To set the function for prohibiting Authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access. • The default setting is Allow. only turning Main-power OFF/ON will cancel it. “Mode 1” Mode 2 NOTE • [Secu Mode 2] will be set from [Administrator Setting]. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the Print Job Data. touch [Release] on the Copier. • Set the number of times for trials up to the access lock when selecting [Mode 2]. Mode 2 : When failed to Authenticate.Field Service Ver. Confidential Authentication. • To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Data capture]. and when the number reaches to the specified time. 2006 1 8. “Allow” Restrict (5) Print Data Capture 1 • It will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC-402) is mounted. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Mode 1. • Authentications which are subjected to this function: CE Authentication. etc. Administrator Authentication. Authentication operation (entering the Password) will be prohibited for a certain period of time. (4) Manual Destination Input Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the Destination Input screen. Only the number of times for trials up to the access lock can be changed. Authentication operation (entering the Password) will be prohibited for a certain period of time. It cannot be changed. 3. Mode 1 : When failed to Authenticate.0 Aug. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 271 . The number of times failure occurred will be counted. Box Authentication. • The default setting is Allow. • To prohibit entering the destination address manually. • To use when setting the system to prohibit Authentication failure when conducting Authentication by Password. Authentication will be prohibited and the access will be locked. For CE Authentication and Administrator Authentication. User Authentication. SNMP Authentication. When the access is locked. “Allow” Restrict NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting (3) Prohibit Functions When Auth. or turn Mainpower OFF/ON to cancel it.

CE Authentication : Set to [ON]. CE Password : Change it with the one which meets Password Rules. • It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set according to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth. Administrator Password : Change it with the one which meets Password Rules. Management Function Choice : Set to “Unset”. and print them with Authentication by Password. It displays the list of the corresponding Confidential document. • The default setting is OFF. Error] is set to [Mode 1]. HDD Lock Password or Encryption word : Set the HDD Lock Password or Encryption word with 20 characters. Error] is set to [Mode 2]. “Mode 1” Mode 2 1 (7) Use Restrict Fax TX • To set whether or not to prohibit sending FAX. and cancel the setting. CS Remote Care : Conduct RAM Clear. ON “OFF” Use 272 . Mode 1 : This mode is for Authentication by Confidential document ID and Password. Enhanced Security Mode Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enhance security. 3. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Mode 1. 2006 (6) Secure Document Access Method Functions Use • To display the status of the Authentication system on the control panel for the Confidential document access. • It will be set to [Mode 1] when [Prohibit Functions When Auth. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure Use Adjustment / Setting 1 D.8. • The following settings are necessary for setting the Security Enhancement “ON”. Error] setting. It will be set to [Mode 2] when [Prohibit Functions when Auth. • To prohibit sending FAX.) SSL Certificate : Register Self-Certificate for SSL communication.0 Aug. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. It displays the list of the corresponding Confidential document to print them. • The default setting is OFF. • To use when enhancing the security function at user’s option. Mode 2 : This mode is for Authentication by Confidential document ID. Image Controller Setting : Set to [Controller 0]. User Authentication : Set to “User Authentication (MFP)” or “User Authentication (External Server)”. (Encryption word can be set only when SC503 is mounted.

Error User Name List Print without Authentication User Box Admin. Error”. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • Setting the Security enhancement “ON” will change the setting values for the following functions. 3.0 Aug. and the remaining capacity of the hard disk. ON (Cannot be changed) OFF (Cannot be changed) Only Read is allowed (Cannot be changed) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Prohibited (Cannot be changed) Mode 1 OFF ON Read/Write allowed Allow Restrict Allowed E. total space capacity. 2006 8. HDD Setting (1) Check HDD Capacity Functions Use • To display the used space capacity. Name of the Function Password Rules Prohibit Functions When Auth. • To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk 273 . Setting Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Secure Document Access Method SSL FTP Server SNMPv1/v2c Registering and Changing Addresses Public User Access Print Data Capture Default Setting OFF Mode 1 OFF Restrict Restrict OFF When Security Enhancement Setting is ON ON (Cannot be changed) Mode 2 (Cannot be changed) Set to three times *Can change times (from once to three times) OFF (Cannot be change) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Mode 1 (Cannot be changed to Mode 2) Mode 2 (Cannot be changed) *It will be changed according to “Prohibit Functions When Auth.Field Service Ver.

the security level of the data will be enhanced before writing to HDD. so overwriting and erasing will be performed without fail using the specified value in the selected mode. 3. • To use when making Temporary Data Overwrite function valid. and destroy the image data itself. Mode 1: To overwrite 0x00 one time. Copier print. Using the HDD Lock Password function or optional Security Kit (SC-503) along with this function will provide a high level of security which prevents images of great importance from leaking. It is used for performing the overwriting and erasing according to the HDD data erase standard. they will all be converted into Encryption data before overwritten. It is recommended to use HDD Lock Password function or Security Kit (SC-503) along with this function for those who require high level of security. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. perform overwriting to the area data were once written in HDD or Memory in order to enhance security. Mode 2: Overwrite 0x00 → Overwrite 0xff → Overwrite 0x61 →Validation • “Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority” can be selected when the optional Security Kit SC-503 is mounted. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver. The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen. Encryption Priority : When the Encryption word is set. • To change overwriting method to use Temporary Data Overwrite function. Scanning and FAX transmission. When the operation is complete. 2006 (2) Temporary Data Overwrite Setting • When the image becomes unnecessary.) “Encryption Priority” Overwrite Priority 274 . Functions Use • To set whether or not to use Temporary Data Overwrite.0 Aug. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • The default setting is Encryption Priority. NOTE • It is necessary to make HDD format when Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority setting is changed. the remaining data included in the image data will not leak. • All data are temporarily written into HDD or Memory during PC print. Therefore. “OFF” Mode 1 Mode 2 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. overwriting will be executed with the value besides the value specified by the selected mode.8. When erasing data. • To set overwriting method to use Temporary Data Overwrite function. (Only when the optional Security Kit SC-503 is mounted. Temporary Data Overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are stored. Overwrite Priority : Standard Encryption method will be applied to data written to HDD even when the Encryption word is set.

2006 (3) Overwrite All Data Functions Use • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. Touch [HDD Lock Password].0 Aug. When the password is forgotten. 2. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. 5. Touch [YES] on the Confirmation screen. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. 3. • Select the overwriting method from Mode 1 through 8. 2. • Don’t forget the password. Mode 2 : Overwrites with random numbers → Overwrites with random numbers → Overwrites with 0x00 Mode 3 : Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with random numbers → Verifies Mode 4 : Overwrites with random numbers → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff Mode 5 : Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff Mode 6 : Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with random numbers Mode 7 : Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0xaa Mode 8 : Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0x00 → Overwrites with 0xff → Overwrites with 0xaa → Verifies 1. 3. the replacement of hard disk is needed. Mode 1 : It overwrites 0x00 once. Enter the password (up to 20 on-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE • Password using only a single letter is not acceptable. 3. 1. • To initialize the area of use for the User stored in NVRAM 8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 1 • To use when disposing of the Hard Disk. 4. 4. • To enter the Lock Password for the hard disk. and touch [OK]. Touch [Overwrite All Data].Field Service Ver. Touch [Overwrite]. 1 275 . Setting/ Procedure (4) HDD Lock Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Lock Password for the hard disk. Reenter the password to confirm.

Box for Fax ➃ Job history. • To setup Security Kit SC-503. Press [HDD Encryption Setting]. • To re-set encrypting word due to exchange of NVRAM board or etc. Enter Encryption key (20 characters) with the keyboard on the operation panel and press [OK]. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 1 Field Service Ver.8. Functions Use • To set Encryption key necessary to mount the optional Security Kit SC-503. The following data will be lost after HDD formatting. 3. Open [Administrator Setting] and conduct HDD formatting according to the instruction appeared on the panel. Setting/ Procedure 1. Touch [HDD Formatting]. Therefore it is necessary to retrieve certain data from HDD in advance. User Authentication setting. • To initialize HDD. ➀ Address data ➁ Authentication data : Authentication mode. therefore if starting with physical formatting. 3. 2006 (5) HDD Formatting Functions Use • To conduct logical formatting of HDD. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.0 Aug. follow as [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. Setting information of each box. 3. NOTE • Double-byte and identical characters are not acceptable. • HDD formatting is required after this setting. 5. NOTE • It is subject to logical formatting here. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. Touch [Yes]. Account Track setting ➂ Box setting data : Box and text in the box. 1 (6) HDD Encryption Setting • It can be set only when the optional Security Kit (SC-503) is mounted. NOTE • This setting is available only when the optional Security Kit SC-503 is mounted. 4. Adjustment / Setting 276 . 2. 2.] → [HDD Format]. Fax transmission history Setting/ Procedure 1. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

Field Service Ver.0 Aug. • [ON] for [Send Data] will not be displayed when the optional Image Controller (IC402) is connected. PC FAX transmission. 1 to “999” (3) Network Function Setting Functions Use • To set whether to use Network function or not when Management function has been set. [Send data] and [Print others]. • The default setting is ON. • Not to use the Network function whose counter is difficult to be managed when Management function has been set. 3. PS Scan Direct. • The default setting is 999. • Exercise caution since it will stay in “OFF” setting even when “unset” is selected on Vendor or Management device setting in Service Mode later. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the upper limit of the number of copy or PC print when Management function has been set. this setting is set to OFF. [PC print]. Management Function Setting (1) Each Function Setting 2 • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2. OFF : Can be used even if authentication or coin input is not made. Fiery: Scan to Box • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF NOTE • However. PS Box Operator. [Print others] is not displayed when Vender is connected. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions • To set whether to use Management function for each item of [Copy]. 2006 8. Management Device or Key Counter IF Vendor is mounted. ON : Can be used when authentication or coin input is made. • When Key Counter IF Vendor is mounted. • The following are target functions. HDD TWAIN. “ON” OFF Prohibit 2 Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Max Copy Set • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. • To set whether to use Management function to control each function or to prohibit to use the function. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting F. only [ON]/[OFF] setting of [Copy] and [PC print] can be selected. PS Job Spooler. Setting/ Procedure 277 . when the Vendor or Management device setting in the Service Mode is set.

Set the long paper to the Bypass tray. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Keep Card : Authentication is available leaving the card in the given place when making authentication with the device. authentication reset is set after completing the job in [Authentication Time].8. 4. move it to the specified position. 2. When the Finisher is mounted. <Authentication Log-out When Job is Completed> • The default setting is Yes. <Authentication Method> • The default setting is Touch and Go. “Yes” No “Touch and Go” Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 1 8. Send the job for the long paper print.7 Banner Printing • To shift to the Banner Printing Mode. 278 . Functions Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • Only PC print is available for the long paper print. 3. Touch [Finish] to finish Banner Printing Mode. 1 to 30 min. 1. • To change the authentication mode when authentication device is used. and touch [ON].0 Aug. Touch and Go : Card is placed only when authentication is made with the device and if the card is left for a given time (Authentication reset time) the authentication setting is reset. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To set the authentication mode when authentication device is used. 2006 (4) Authentication Time Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Authentication Device is mounted. 3. Touch [Banner Printing]. 5. Keep Card <Authentication Time> • The default setting is 1 min. • To use when printing on the long paper. • Normal job cannot be accepted during Banner Printing Mode. • When selecting “Touch and Go”.

3. 2006 8. Utility Mode bizhub C351/C450 279 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page .Field Service Ver.0 Aug.

2006 9.0 Aug. Serial Number 2 Scan calibration Line Mag Setting Counter Life Counter Clear Gradation Adjust Image Process Adjustment Re-entry of Utility settings Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings Parallel adjustment of Scanner/Mirrors Carriage Positioning Exposure Unit Scanner Motor belt adjustment F/W upgrading Installation of Original Size Sensor Remounting of Parameter Chip (Control Board) Remounting of NVRAM (MFP Control Board) Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ❍ ❍ (3) (3) (5) (4) (4) ❍ Adjustment / Setting Firmware Version (1) (2) ❍ ❍ ❍ 21 ❍ 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 (1) (2) 280 Replace Image Transfer Belt Unit Change Marketing Area Install Paper Feed Unit Replace Mirror Unit Replace CCD Unit Replace IU . Adjustment item list bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Touch Panel Adjust State Confirmation HDD R/W Check Memory/ HDD Adjust HDD Format Table Number Reentry of Setting Values System1.9. LPH Chip Adjust Machine LPH Rank (Changes to 1) Image position: Leading Edge Scan Area Service Mode Image position: Side Edge Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Org. Detecting Sensor Adj. Adjustment item list Change Paper (1st Drawer) Kind Replacement Part/Service Job Replace Paper Take-Up Roller Replace Paper Separator Roll Assy Adjustment/Setting Items Print Positioning: Leading Edge Printer Area Print Positioning: Side Edge Dup Print Positioning: Side Paper Feed Direction Adj. 3.

Adjustment item list ❍ 281 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C351/C450 . 32 30 28 27 26 25 (1) (3) (2) (1) (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) ❍ (1) ❍ (1) ❍ (5) 9.0 Aug.6 5 2 1 9 8 3 7 4 15 14 13 11 10 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 12 31 ❍ Replace Image Transfer Roller Unit Replace Paper Dust Remover (2) (3) Replace Original Size Detecting Sensor Replace LPH Assy Replace LPH Unit Wind Scanner Drive Cables Replace Scanner Motor Replace Scanner Assy Replace Scanner Home Sensor Replace Control Board Replace MFP Control Board Replace Image Processing Board (2) (1) Replace Original Glass Replace IDC/Registration Sensor/1.2 (1) (2) Replace Hard Disk Add Key Counter D-103 (2) (3) (4) (6) Execute Memory Clear Execute Add. 2006 ✽ This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. if applicable. 3. Priority order. during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses. Option Execute F/W update Add FAX Board (1) (1) (2) (2) (4) (4) (3) (3) ❍ (5) (3) (3) (4) (2) (2) ❍ ❍ ❍ 29 No Field Service Ver.

re-enter the right password.”) 1 • When the following setting is set to “ON”. CE Password Authentication is necessary. Press the following keys in this order. 3. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs. 1 4037F3E610DA NOTE • Be sure to change the CE Password from its default value. Enter the 8 digits CE password. 2.0 Aug. • The service code entered is displayed as “✽. (The initial setting for CE password is “92729272.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures.10.” 4. When the following setting is set to “Mode 2”. operation will be prohibited since it 1 indicates Authentication failure by failing to enter the correct CE Password within the specified number of times. • For the procedure to change the CE Password. See P. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • If a wrong CE password is entered. 3. The Service Mode menu will appear.370 282 . see the Enhanced Security. 2006 10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Touch [Details] on [Meter Count]. authentication by CE password is necessary. 1. The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE password is entered correctly. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Service Mode. turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again. Procedure Press the Utility/Counter key. To return to the Basic screen. A. It needs to be cancelled by turning Main-power OFF/ON. and touch [OK]. Service Mode 10.

first press the Clear key before making an entry.) 283 . Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions • Use the [+] / [-] key to enter or change the setting value.Field Service Ver. 10. (To change the setting value. • Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value.0 Aug. 2006 B. 3. Exiting • Touch [Exit]. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting C.

311 P.295 P. *3: It will be displayed only when the [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”.302 Adjustment / Setting 284 .310 P. Bias Choice P.307 P.301 P. 1 *1: Settings are available only when the Optional FAX Kit (FK-502) is mounted. Service Mode Machine Fusing Nip Fusing Temperature Fusing Transport Speed Org.312 P.298 P.309 P.305 P.306 P.304 P. Printer Area Print Positioning: Leading Edge Print Positioning: Side Edge Ref.296 P. *2: It will be displayed only when the optional Fax Multi Line (ML-501) is mounted.290 P. Page P.312 P.289 P.305 P.294 Paper Feed Direction Adj.10.293 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge P. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.313 P.313 P.291 P.292 P.300 P.305 P. 2006 10.310 P.309 P.291 P.299 P.0 Aug. Scan Area Image Position: Leading Edge Image Position: Side Edge Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Printer Resist Loop Color Registration Adjustment Black Cyan Magenta Yellow LPH Rank LPH Chip Adjust Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Cooling Fan Speed Firmware Version Imaging Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust Transfer Belt D Max Density TCR Level Setting Background Voltage Margin Transfer Output Fine Adjustment Stabilizer 2nd Transfer Adjust 1st Transfer Adjust Stabilization Only Initialize+Image Stabilization Thick Paper Density Adjustment Thin Paper Duplex Mode TCR Toner Supply Monochrome Density Adjustment Dev.311 P.297 P.311 P.2 Service Mode function tree ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.305 P. 3. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.312 P.303 P.

339 P.336 P.338 P.335 P. 2006 Service Mode CS Remote Care System 1 Marketing Area Tel/Fax Number Serial Number No Sleep Original Size Detection Foolscap Size Setting Initialization Install Date Communication System Setting System 2 HDD Image Controller Setting Option Board Status Consumable Life Reminder Unit Change Software Switch Setting Scan Calibration LCT Paper Size Setting Line Mag Setting Data Capture Network Fax Settings Counter Life Jam Service Call Counter Warning Maintenance Service Total Counter Of Each Mode Service Call History (Data) ADF Paper Pages Paper Jam History Fax Connection Error Counter Reset List Output Machine Management List Adjustment List Parameter List Service Parameter Protocol Trace Fax Setting List 10.346 P.345 P.338 P.340 P.335 P. 3.345 P.346 P.337 P.345 P.0 Aug.346 P.338 P.334 P.342 P.333 P. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Ref.333 P.346 285 .345 P.334 P.346 P.344 P.339 P.Field Service Ver.339 P.333 P.344 P.314 P.334 P.344 P.336 P.345 ⎯ P.344 P.346 P.343 P.345 P.339 P. Page P.

0 Aug.364 P.365 P.357 Memory Check Compress / Decompression Check Memory Bus Check Work Memory In/Out Check HDD Version Up HDD R/W Check HDD Format HDD Version Down Memory/HDD State Color Regist IU Lot No.362 P.358 P.363 P. & Humidity State Confirmation CCD Check Memory/HDD Adj.361 P.359 P.359 P.356 P.361 P. LPH Status Adjustment Data List P.365 P. Page P.359 P. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Service Mode State Confirmation Sensor Check Table Number Level History1 Level History2 Temp.365 P.366 Test Mode Gradation Pattern Halftone Pattern Lattice Pattern Solid Pattern Color Sample 8 Color Solid Pattern LPH Pattern Running Mode Fax Test Adjustment / Setting ADF Original Stop Position Registration Loop Adj.357 P.364 P. Auto Stop Position Adjustment Paper Passage Sensor Check Original Tray Width Sensor Auto Adjust 286 .357 P.360 P.358 P.362 P. Field Service Ver.361 P.361 P.347 P.10.366 P. 2006 Ref. 3.357 P.363 P.358 P.360 P.

366 P.366 P.0 Aug. Page P.369 287 .369 P.366 P.368 P.Field Service Ver. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Ref. 2006 Service Mode FAX *1 Line 1 *1 Modem/ECU *1 NetWork *1 System *1 Fax File Format *1 Communication *1 List Output *1 Function Parameter *1 Initialization *1 Line 2 *1 Modem/ECU *1 NetWork *1 Communication *1 FAX *1 Finisher Internet ISW Internet ISW Set HTTP Setting *3 FTP Setting *3 Forwarding Access Setting *3 Download *3 Line 2 *1 Initialization *1 10.367 P.366 P. 3.

day. (Year 4 digits → Month 2 digits → Day 2 digits → Hour 2 digits → Minute 2 digits) Adjustment / Setting NOTE • When setting the month. 288 . enter “0” first if the data one digit.1 Date/Time Input mode screen 4037F3E504DA A.3. 4. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. day. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2.3 Date/Time Input mode • This mode is used to set time-of-day and date.10. 5. Touch [END] key to return to the Service Mode. in that order. Enter year. Press the following keys in this order. 10. 2006 10. Stop → 1 → 1 → 4 → 4 → Clear 3. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch [Entry]. and minute.0 Aug. 3. month. Date/Time input mode setting procedure <Procedure> 1. or minute. hour. hour. from 10-key Pad.

4. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 289 Adjustment / Setting . • When a fusing failure occurs. 3. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.Field Service Ver. A A: 9 ± 0.1 Functions Use Check Range Fusing Nip • To check the Fusing Roller nip width. 3. 4036fs3032c0 Adjustment Procedure 1. 2. Check the fusing roller nip width. • When a blurred image or brush effect occurs.5 mm. 2006 10.0 Aug. 4. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Nip].4 Machine 10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 10.

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

10.4.2
Functions

Fusing Temperature
• To adjust individually the temperature of the Heating Roller and the Fusing Pressure Roller for each type of paper, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions. * Though all temperatures shown on the screen are 0 °C, they represent the following specific temperatures. <bizhub C450> Heating Roller Plain paper OHP film Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Envelope <bizhub C351> Heating Roller Plain paper OHP film Thick 1 Thick 2 Thick 3 Envelope 190 °C 190 °C 175 °C 185 °C 185 °C 185 °C Pressure Roller 145 °C 170 °C 130 °C 130 °C 130 °C 130 °C 195 °C 190 °C 175 °C 185 °C 185 °C 185 °C Pressure Roller 145 °C 170 °C 130 °C 130 °C 130 °C 130 °C

1

Adjustment / Setting

Use Adjustment Range

• When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change. Heating Roller : -10 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)............. Plain paper : -5 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)............. Envelope : -20 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)............. others Pressure Roller : -20 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)............. OHP film : -5 °C to +5 °C (step: 5 °C)............. others If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting. If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting. If offset is poor, decrease the setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Temperature]. Select the paper type and Fusing Roller type. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-]. The temperature does not change immediately when the setting is change. Wait a while before performing the subsequent steps. • As a general rule, do not adjust the fusing temperature on the pressure application side. 6. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. 7. Check the copy image for any image problem. 8. Make the adjustment for each type of paper.

Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

290

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.3
Functions Use Variable Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting

Fusing Transport Speed
• To adjust the speed of the Fusing Drive Motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed. • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental conditions or degraded durability. -2 % to +2 % (in 0.1 % increments) If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image. If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Transport Speed]. 3. Select the transport speed, at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. <bizhub C450> Transport speed 215 mm/s 165 mm/s 60 mm/s <bizhub C351> Transport speed (215 mm/s) 165 mm/s 60 mm/s Not Used *1 Plain paper Thick paper, OHP film, Envelope, Postcard, Labels: monochrome, color Paper Setting Paper Setting Plain paper: monochrome Plain paper: color Thick paper, OHP film, Envelope, Postcard, Labels: monochrome, color

1

*1: 215 mm/s will be displayed on the screen although it is not used for adjustment. Changing the setting value 215 mm/s will not be reflected in the Copier. 4. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 5. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. 6. Check the copy image for any image problem. ✽ Make the adjustment for each paper type.

10.4.4
Functions Use

Org. Detecting Sensor Adj.
• To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the Original Size Sensor. • • • • When the sensor is replaced with a new one. When an optional sensor has been added. When an erroneous original size detection is made. When the marketing area setting is changed.

Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

If the adjustment has been successfully made, it completes the adjustment procedure. If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful, check the optional Original Size Sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness. 1. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 × 17 paper on the Original Glass and lower the Original Cover. 2. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Org. Detecting Sensor Adj.]. 4. Press the Start key.

291

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

10.4.5

Printer Area

A. Print Positioning: Leading Edge
Functions Use • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in Tray 1. • • • • The LPH Unit has been replaced. The paper type has been changed. The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Width A Specifications: 4.0 ± 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

Adjustment Specification

4036fs3009c0

Adjustment Instructions

If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Print Positioning: Leading Edge]. Select the [Plain Paper]. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 10.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END]. 11.Following the same procedure, adjust for Thick 1 to 3, OHP Film, and Env.

Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment / Setting

292

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Print Positioning: Side Edge
Functions Use

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

• To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The LPH Unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. • The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Specifications: 3.0 ± 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

Adjustment Specification

4036fs3010c0

Adjustment Instructions

If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Print Positioning: Side Edge]. Select the paper source to be adjusted. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 10.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END]. 11.Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Bypass.)

Adjustment Procedure

293

Adjustment / Setting

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

C. Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge
Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. •For measurement, use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. Backside Specifications: 3.0 ± 0.5 mm Setting Range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

4036fs3010c0

Adjustment Instructions

• If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. • If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge]. Select the paper source to be adjusted. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 10.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [END]. 11.Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the Manual Bypass Tray.)

Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment / Setting

294

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 D. Paper Feed Direction Adj.
Functions Use

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

• To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. • Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary. • The image on the copy distorts (stretched, shrunk). • When the image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges. Width A: equivalent to one grid Width B: equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A: 7.9 to 8.3 B: 389.1 to 392.1 Setting Range A, B: -10 to +10

Adjustment Specification A

4036fs3017c0

Adjustment Instructions

If width A or B is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 2. 3. 4. Load Tray 1 with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] → [Lattice Pattern]. Select [Black], [SINGLE], [FEET], [CD Width:6], [FD Width:6], [Density:255], and [Normal]. 5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 6. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern. 7. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Paper Feed Direction Adj]. 8. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the Up/ Down keys. 9. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 10.Check width A and width B on the test pattern. 11.If width A or B falls outside the specified range, change the setting value and make a check again. 12.If width A or B falls within the specified range, touch [END]. 13.Following the same procedure, adjust for [Thick 1 to 3], [OHP Film], and [Env.] (Check width A only for [OHP Film] and [Env.])

Adjustment Procedure

295

Adjustment / Setting

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

10.4.6

Scan Area

• Use the following Color Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section. • If the Color Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead. • • • • A: Image Position: Side Edge B: Image Position: Leading Edge C: Cross Direction Adjustment D: Feed Direction Adjustment

C B

A Original Reference

D

4036fs3018c0

A. Image Position: Leading Edge
Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the Scanner Home Sensor and in mounting accuracy of the Original Width Scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. When the Original Glass is replaced. When the Original Width Scale is replaced. •B width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Print Positioning: Leading Edge] of Printer Area.
4036fs3020c0

Use Adjustment Specification

Adjustment / Setting

B

Specifications B: ± 0.5 mm (10 ± 0.5 mm if a scale is used) Setting Range -5.0 to +5.0 (in 0.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value. If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Image Position: Leading Edge]. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check point B on the image of the copy. 6. If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. 7. Press the Start key to make another copy. 8. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

296

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B. Image Position: Side Edge
Functions Use

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting

• To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. • When the CCD Unit is replaced. • When the Original Glass is replaced. • The Scanner Home Sensor has been replaced. •A width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Print Positioning: Side Edge] of Printer Area. Specifications A: ± 1.0 mm Setting Range -10.0 to +10.0 (in 0.1 mm increments)

Adjustment Specification A

4036fs3019c0

Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

If the copy image is less than the specified length, increase the setting value. If the copy image exceeds the specified length, decrease the setting value. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Image Position: Side Edge]. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check point A on the image of the copy. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. 7. Press the Start key to make a copy. 8. Check point A of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

297

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

C. Cross Direction Adjustment
Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section • The CCD Unit has been replaced. •Measure C width on the color chart and on the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Paper Feed Direction Adj.] of Printer Area. Specifications C: ± 1.0 mm Setting Range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments) Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting. If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Cross Direction Adjustment]. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check the C width on the image of the copy. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. 7. Press the Start key to make another copy. 8. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

C

4036fs3021c0

Adjustment / Setting

298

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 D. Feed Direction Adjustment
Functions Use

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting

• To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section • The Scanner Assy has been replaced. • The Scanner Motor has been replaced. • The Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced. •Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Paper Feed Direction Adj.] of Printer Area.
4036fs3022c0

Adjustment Specification

D

Specifications D: ± 1.5 mm Setting Range 0.990 to 1.010 (in 0.001 increments)

Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart, increase the setting. If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart, decrease the setting. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Feed Direction Adjustment]. 3. Position the Color Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. Check the D width on the image of the copy. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-]. 7. Press the Start key to make another copy. 8. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.

299

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

10.4.7
Functions

Printer Resist Loop
• To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of Tray 1 to Tray 4, Bypass, and Duplex. • To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the Registration Rollers. • Use [Paper Passage] for paper passage check. When a paper skew occurs. When a paper misfeed occurs. Different setting ranges are set for different transport speeds.

Use

1

<bizhub C450> 215 mm/s : -6 to +6 165 mm/s : -10 to +10 60 mm/s : -15 to +15 Adjustment Range <bizhub C351> (215 mm/s) : Not Used *1 165 mm/s : -10 to +10 60 mm/s : -15 to +15 *1: 215 mm/s will be displayed on the screen although it is not used for adjustment. Changing the setting value 215 mm/s will not be reflected in the Copier. Adjustment Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Printer Resist Loop]. Select the transport speed. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad.

Adjustment / Setting

300

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.8 A. Black
Functions

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting

Color Registration Adjustment

• To correct black color shift, if it occurs with plain or thick paper. • Make Color Registration Adjustment (cyan, magenta, and yellow) after this adjustment has been made. • To correct black color shift, if it occurs • The LPH Assy (K) has been replaced. “0” (-10 to +10 dot) If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting value. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Color Registration Adjustment]. Load Tray 1 with A3 or A4 paper (plain or thick). Press the Start key. Fold the printed test pattern in half lengthwise to check for deviation (the image on the inside). 6. Check deviation between black lines A and B. 7. Select the paper type. 8. Select black. 9. Change the setting value using the [+] / [-] as necessary. 10.Produce another test pattern and check for deviation. Check Procedure Check point A, B

Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

A

B
4036fs3001c0

If the black reference line deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting value. If the black reference line deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting value.

Direction of C

Direction of D

A

A B

B

4036fs3002c0

4036fs3003c0

301

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

B. Cyan, Magenta, Yellow
Functions • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • Before making this adjustment, be sure to perform Color Registration Adjustment (Black). • To correct any color shift “0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Color Registration Adjustment]. Load Tray 1 with A3 or A4 paper (plain or thick). Press the Start key. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. Select the paper type. Select the color to be adjusted. Using the [+] / [-], change the setting value as necessary. (At this time, only the line of the selected color moves.) Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.

Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure

Check Procedure Check point X, Y

Adjustment / Setting

4036fs3004c0

Adjustment for X direction: Check point X

Direction of C

If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting. Direction of D

4036fs3005c0

4036fs3006c0

Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y

If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting. Direction of D

Direction of C

4036fs3007c0

4036fs3008c0

302

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.9
Functions Use

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting

LPH Rank
• To correct uneven LPH image by producing an output of the LPH Pattern of Test Print • When an uneven image occurs and is not eliminated even after other troubleshooting procedures have been carried out. • When the LPH Unit has been replaced • When the LPH Assy has been replaced “1” (1 to 5) * 0 is not used. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Load Tray 1 with A3 plain paper. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch [Machine] → [LPH Rank]. Return the Rank settings for all four colors back to “1.” Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. LPH Pattern Green (yellow) Black Cyan Magenta
4036fs3048c0

Adjustment Range Adjustment Procedure

6. Identify the spot, at which uneven image occurs. 7. Select the color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) that develops uneven image. ✽ Select Yellow if green on the test pattern develops uneven image. 8. Using the 10-Key Pad, enter a value of the Rank value shown on the screen plus one. ✽ If Rank is “1,” enter 2. ✽ If “0” is set for Rank, set “1.” Do not use “0.” 9. Let the machine produce another test pattern and check for uneven image. 10.Repeat steps 1 through 8 until the uneven image is gone.

303

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

10.4.10
Functions Use

LPH Chip Adjust
• To correct chips of locations where sub scan direction white lines or black lines occur in the LPH Pattern produced using “Test Print.” • White line or color line or black line occurs in the sub scan direction. • The LPH Assy has been replaced. • The LPH Unit has been replaced. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] → [LPH Pattern]. Select [SINGLE], [HYPER], [Gradation], and [Border Line: ON]. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Check the test pattern for the location, at which white lines or color or black lines in sub scan direction occur. 6. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [LPH Chip Adjust]. 7. Fold the test pattern in half. (with the pattern face on the outside)

Adjustment Procedure

4036fs3023c0

8. The chip boundary line on the crease (the center) of the test pattern corresponds to “20” on the panel. Starting here count out to each side of the paper to identify each location
1

Adjustment / Setting

20

39
4036fs3024c0

4037F3E513DA

9. Find the number on the panel, to which the location of white lines or black lines in sub scan direction checked in step 5 corresponds. 10.Select the color (C, M, Y, or K) in which white lines or black lines in sub scan direction occur. ✽ If the lines occur only in green on the test pattern, select Y. 11.Touch the corresponding number on the panel. (It is then highlighted and the setting value is displayed besides the highlighted number.) 12.Change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad. ✽ When a new LPH Unit has been installed, corrections can be made for up to eight locations. ✽ Corrections for up to five locations can be made through factory adjustments. If white lines or black lines in sub scan direction occur, therefore, corrections can therefore be made in the field for three to eight locations. 13.Select HYPER and color. 14.Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern and check for lines.

304

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 10.4.11
Functions Use

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting

Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment
• To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide • Use when the Manual Bypass Paper Size Unit of the Manual Bypass Guide has been changed. • Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual Bypass is used. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment]. 3. Touch [Max. Width]. 4. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 301 mm. 5. Press the Start key and check that the results are OK. 6. Touch [Min. Width]. 7. Load the Bypass Tray with paper having a width of 89 mm. 8. Press the Start key and check that the results are OK. ✽ Make the adjustment again if the results are NG.

Adjustment Procedure

10.4.12
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper. • To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper • The default setting is 4 mm. “4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm

10.4.13
Functions Use

Cooling Fan Speed
• To set the Cooling Fan Speed. • Use when operating the Paper Cooling Fan Motor at full speed regardless of the paper type. Mode1: When the system speed is 60 mm/s (using the gloss paper or paper type other than plain paper), rotate the fan at half speed. When the system speed is 215 mm/sec or 165 mm/sec, rotate the fan at full peed. Mode2: The fan will be operated at full speed regardless of the system speed.

Setting/ Procedure

• The default setting is Mode1. “Mode1” Mode2

10.5 Firmware Version
Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check the Firmware version. • Use when the firmware is upgraded. • When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Touch [Firmware Version]. 3. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version.

305

10. Service Mode
bizhub C351/C450

Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006

10.6 Imaging Process Adjustment
10.6.1 Gradation Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] → [Dev. Bias Choice]
Functions Use • To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner • Color reproduction performance becomes poor. • The IU has been replaced. • The Image Transfer Belt Unit has been replaced. ✽ The Adj. Values of Dark and Highlight shown on the Gradation Adjust screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Conv. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density. ✽ The closer the Conv. Value to 0, the more ideal the image. • Gradation Mode : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts. • Resolution Mode : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts. • High Compression Mode : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts. Dark : 0 ± 100 Highlight : 0 ± 60 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Touch [Gradation Adjust]. Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Place the test pattern produced on the Original Glass. Place ten blank sheets of A3 paper on the test pattern and lower the Original Cover. Press the Start key. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern.) Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 2 through 6 twice (a total of three times). Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Values and Conv. Values of each color (C, M, Y and K) for Dark and Highlight. 9. Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Value. Dark: 0 ± 100 and Highlight: 0 ± 60: It completes the adjustment procedure. If neither Dark nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 2 to 6. • If a fault is detected, “0” is displayed for all values. In this case, turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after, and perform Gradation Adjust once again. • If either Max or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Density. • If a total of four sequences of Gradation Adjust do not bring the values into the specified range, check the image. • If the image is faulty, perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems.

Adjustment Specification Adjustment Procedure

Adjustment / Setting

306

the Transfer Belt refresh sequence will be completed. 2. From the Service mode. 2006 10. Open the Left Door and.2 Transfer Belt 10. using the Safety Switch Holding Jig. After about 5 min. 8.Field Service Ver. 6. Remove the Safety Switch Holding Jig. 307 . Tighten one screw and retract the Belt Refresh Pad from the Transfer Belt. enter the Transfer Belt Refresh mode. 3. Screw 5. Refresh Functions Use • To turn the Transfer Belt idly • To refresh the surface of the Transfer Belt when filming occurs on the Transfer Belt. 7. Safety Switch Holding Jig 3. 4. Press the Start key. Wait until predrive is completed. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting A.. Loosen one screw completely and press the Belt Refresh Pad up against the Transfer Belt. Filming 4036fs3100c0 Setting/ Procedure 1.0 Aug.6. turn ON the Left Door Switch.

Cleaning Bias Functions Use • To set the strength of the Transfer Belt cleaning bias • When the image pattern is not completely removed. cleaning sequence for every 1. 2006 B. Mode1 → Mode2 → Mode3 → Mode4 Setting/ Procedure <Print> • The default setting is Mode1. Not Print : To set the cleaning bias value in situations such as being recovered from the paper jam. • The strength of the bias increases as changing the mode as follows. “Mode1” Mode2 Mode3 Mode4 C. carrying out the image stabilization. or cleaning the 2nd image transfer roller. “Enable” Disable Adjustment / Setting D. “Enable” • Enable: Sets the upper limit value for Vdc • Disable: Does not set the upper limit value for Vdc Disable Use Setting/ Procedure 308 . thereby preventing part of the Photo Conductor surface from being left uncleaned due to filming • To select “Disable” for IDC Table Correction if a higher density image is desired • The default setting is Enable. IDC Table Revice Functions • To set the upper limit value of Vdc during the execution of the image stabilization sequence. Print : To set the cleaning bias value for printing. cleaning sequence is to be eliminated • The default setting is Enable. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Auto Cleaning Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To carry out a 1-min. 3.000 printed pages (sub scan direction: 216 mm or less) after the power has been turned ON • To select “Disable” for Transfer Belt Auto Cleaning if the wait time of 1-min. “Mode1” Mode2 Mode3 Mode4 <Not Print> • The default setting is Mode1.10. it strengthen the Transfer Belt cleaning bias in order to make the cleaner more effective.

3. 2. “0” (-10 to +10) To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking. Select the color to be adjusted.4 Functions TCR Level Setting • To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change. 5. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting D Max Density • To adjust gradation. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10.Field Service Ver. 9. Touch [Stabilizer]. Touch [END] to return to the [Process] menu screen.Check the copy image for any image problem. increase the setting value. Select the color to be adjusted. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. color. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 10. decrease the setting value. Call the Service Mode to the screen.3 Functions 10. 7. 1. and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of gamma of each color after Gradation Adjust. be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value.6. 6. 3. decrease the setting value. 4. 8. 1. Check the copy image for any image problem.6. Touch these keys in this order: [Process] → [TCR Level Setting]. To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking. NOTE • If the setting value has been changed. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [D Max Density]. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site “0” (-3 to +3) The central value of 0 corresponds to 7 % of T/C (in 1. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 309 . 2006 10. 3. 4. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. 5. To decrease T/C. • An image quality problem is not corrected even after Gradation Adjust has been run. To increase T/C. 2. Touch [Stabilizer Mode].0 Aug. increase the setting value. Select [COPY] or [Printer].0 % increments). 6.

Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Transfer Adjust].6 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment A. 1. be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 9. decrease the setting value. increase the setting value. Touch [Stabilizer]. 5. 8. “0” (-5 to +5) To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image). Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Background Voltage Margin]. increase the setting value. NOTE • If the setting value has been changed. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Check the copy image for any image problem. 2nd Transfer Adjust Functions Adjustment / Setting • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type.10. 7. 3. 6. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 7. 2006 10.6. Select the color to be adjusted. • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. Select the paper type with the transfer failure at the trailing edge. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. 3. Check the copy image for any image problem. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad. 6. Touch [Stabilization Only]. • Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem “0” (-5 to +5) To make the background level foggier.5 Functions Use Background Voltage Margin • To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color after Gradation Adjust. 2. To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image). Touch [END] to return to the [Image Adjust] menu screen. 5.6. Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10. To make the background level less foggy. 4. 3. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 310 . on which the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.0 Aug. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. decrease the setting value. 4. Select the side of the image (First side or Second side).

4. 1st Transfer Adjust Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage. Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting. Stabilization Only Functions Use • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. Initialize+Image Stabilization Functions Use • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. When the test pattern image has white spots. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. Select color/black. Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease) Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value 10. • To use when white spots appeared. NOTE • PC Drum memory (94mm pitch) may occur by taking measure to white spots occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it. Adjustment Procedure 311 . • When D Max Density and Background Voltage Margin of Service mode are changed. 3. 1. • Use if an image problem persists even after Gradation Adjustment has been executed.7 Stabilizer Adjustment / Setting A. See P. 4. • The value for the 1st image transfer adjustment will be reset when the new transfer belt unit is detected. Adjustment Procedure B. Call the Service Mode to the screen. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence.Field Service Ver. 3. 4. The Start key turns orange and stays lit up orange during the Stabilizer sequence. Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern. Touch [OK] to set the adjustment value. 2. adjust with the following procedure. 2. 10. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2006 B. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 1.0 Aug. 1. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. • Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode has been executed. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Transfer Adjust]. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Initialize+Image Stabilization]. 7. 2. 6. Change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.6. The value will be 0. Select [Test Mode] → [Halftone Pattern] to output the red or green test pattern. 3. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns green. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.363 3. “0” (-5 to +5) Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Stabilization Only].

Use Adjustment Procedure 312 .6. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver. 1: Image stabilization will be conducted by the normal cycle.6. • The default setting is OFF. Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10. Span Functions Use • Setting the period of the cycle for image stabilization • To use when making the period of the cycle before the image stabilization longer. 2. 1.8 Functions Use Thick Paper Density Adjustment • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies. two darker levels and two lighter levels around the standard central level. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Thick Paper Density Adjustment].0 Aug. if the density is lower than a reference value. Adjustment Procedure • The default setting is 1. Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. 3. 1. • Use when a paper misfeed occurs when thin paper is used. Light color: Touch the Darker key. • When there is a drop in T/C. • It decreases the transfer output value so as to prevent a paper misfeed from occurring. “1” 2 10. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [TCR Toner Supply]. If the toner density is found to be higher than the reference value. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2: Image stabilization will be conducted by the longer period of the cycle. a toner replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run. 5. 3. 2006 C. 2. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reaches the reference value. for which supply of toner is to be replenished. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 4.10.6. • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies • The fine-adjustment can be made over a range of a total of five steps.10 Functions TCR Toner Supply • To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of copies have been made of originals having a high image density.9 Adjustment / Setting Functions Thin Paper Duplex Mode • Turn this function ON when thin paper (64 g/m2) is used in an ambience of high temperature and high humidity in the 2-sided mode. 3. only a developer agitation sequence is carried out. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and. Select the color.

such as in high altitudes.6.12 Functions Dev. thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring.6. If the black is dark. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Monochrome Density Adjustment • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy • To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Lighter (2 steps). 2. Bias Choice • To change the setting of the developing bias voltage • When this function is turned ON. Call the Service Mode to the screen.Field Service Ver. 3. • The default setting is OFF. 3. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density. 2006 10. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure 313 Adjustment / Setting .0 Aug. 10. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Monochrome Density Adjustment]. touch the Lighter key. Darker (2 steps) If the black is light. it decreases the developing bias voltage. • Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure.11 Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10. touch the Darker key. “Std”. 1.

and touch [Detail Setting].7 CS Remote Care 10. It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the necessary data. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur. Data on adjustment d. 1 2 Clearing the RAM 1. * For connecting the modular cable. • Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care].) Adjustment / Setting Procedure 2 Step Using the telephone line modem Using the Fax line modem *1 Using E-mail 0 Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care Center. 2 • CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. See P. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 10. see the manual for the modem.7. clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2. Touch [RAM Clear].324 • When using the telephone line for connection. Connecting the modem Turn the power for the modem OFF.7. 2006 10. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count. when the fax line is used.10. and touch [OK].1 Outlines • CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/Fax line or E-Mail in order to control the machine. contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA. (For recommended modem. See P. use the recommended modem.324 314 . Select Set.0 Aug. a. The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered. Data on setting NOTE • It cannot be set when the following setting is set to “ON”. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable. Be sure to remove the Be sure to remove the telephone line modem telephone line modem when e-mail is used. Connect the modem and the wall jack with a modular cable. b.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care NOTE • For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up. 3. PM count. c. 3.

and touch [Detail Setting].Field Service Ver. 2. and touch [E-Mail]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code]. 2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center Telephone Number]. 4 Inputting the ID Code 1. and input Device ID (nine digits). → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection].323 315 . See P.323 Setting the Device ID 1. 2. 3. [-]. and touch [ID Code]. Touch [Respond Timeout] and enter the response timeout using the 10-Key Pad. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. 2. 2. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID]. See P. 2. NOTE • Under normal conditions. Using the Fax line modem *1 Using E-mail 3 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → Select [Service Mode] [System Setting].323 Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care 1. [-]. See P. and touch [Modem].0 Aug. 2. [W]. 1. time and the time zone using the 10-Key Pad. 3.323 Setting the Respond Timeout 1. and touch [Detail Setting]. See P. [W]. Input the seven digits ID of the service person. and touch [Detail Setting]. 2006 Procedure 10. and touch [Detail Setting].323 Setting the telephone number of the Center 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID]. [T].323 5 6 7 8 9 Inputting the Device telephone number Proceed to Step 10. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. and touch [Detail Setting]. 3. there is no need to change the default setting. and input the Center ID (five digits). Input the Device telephone number using the 10-Key Pad and [P]. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 2 Step Using the telephone line modem Selecting the CS Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection].323 Setting the Center ID 1. and touch [Fax]. Input the telephone number of the Center using the 10-Keys Pad and [P]. 3. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone Number]. and touch [ID Code] again. and touch [Set]. Input the date. [T]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. See P. and touch [Detail Setting]. Touch [Date & Time Setting]. See P. See P. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care].

and CS Remote Care setting will be displayed. See P. SMTP port number. and touch [Server Set]. the current setting information will be deleted. 2. See P.325 3. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission. • Messages can be exchanged only between the Center with initial connection and the Copier. POP3 Login name. Touch [Server for RX]. the E-mail address of the Center will be displayed by selecting [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. 10 Inputting the AT com. and try again. NOTE • The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the Center ID. and set the SMTP server address.10.Proceed to step 11.326 4. and APOP Authentication. 316 . Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. Connection Time Out and APOP Authentication. NOTE • Change this Command only when it is necessary. Executing the initial transmission 1.327 Proceed to Step 12. See P. and the E-mail address of the Center will be stored in the Copier. 2006 2 Step Using the telephone line modem Using the Fax line modem *1 Using E-mail Setting the E-mail address 1. and touch [Detail Setting]. 3. see the manual for the modem. [Basic Setting] → [E-Mail address]. NOTE • When receiving the initial connection Email message from the Center while CS Remote Care-related screen is being displayed. Touch [Send]. Connection Time Out. See P. mand for initializing the modem 1. see the error message to take necessary measure. Input AT Command. CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed. • For sending the initial connection E-mail. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition. and press Start key to carry out a transmission/reception test.326 5. Mail Check.323 11 Adjustment / Setting 12 Receiving the initial connection E-mail message Sending the initial connection E-mail message from the Center to the address of the Copier. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Procedure Field Service Ver. 3. and set POP3 server address.) • For details on AT Command. If it fails to exchange messages. Touch [TX/RX Test]. • When the initial registration is complete.0 Aug. 2. *1: This procedure is available only when the optional Fax kit (FK-502) is mounted. See P. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → and touch [Detail Setting].325 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care NOTE • This setting is not normally necessary. POP3 password and POP3 port number. Press [Receive]. 3. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. (They do not need to be changed in normal condition. • The initial connection from the Center will be carried out. 2. Touch [AT Command]. Telephone number of the Center and the Device telephone number have been input. When the machine is properly connected with the Center. see the manual for CS Remote Care Center. See P. and set the E-Mail address. the Device ID.

and touch [Software Switch Setting]. see to “B. Touch [Fix]. A. Input procedure 1. 3. In case you changed bit data by accident.]. and input 0 or 1 using the 10-Key Pad.Field Service Ver. 3.) 4. Touch [Bit Assignment]. SW No. Touch [Switch No. and input the SW number (two digits) using the 10-Key Pad. NOTE • About functions of each switch.0 Aug.List of software SW for CS Remote Care. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting].7. touch [HEX Assignment]. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Dial Mode Reservation Reservation Reservation Baud rate Functions 0 Pulse — — — *1 *1 *1 *1 Auto call on SC occurrence Auto call on date specification Reservation Reservation Reservation Auto call on the IC Life Auto call on CCD Clamp/Gain Adjustment failure Reservation Reservation Auto call on the toner supply Reservation Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Do not call Do not call — — — Do not call Do not call — — Do not call — Do not call — — 1 Tone — — — *1 *1 *1 *1 Call Call — — — Call Call — — Call — Call — — Default 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 SW 01 1 SW 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 03 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation 317 . 2. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. and select SW bit number using the arrow keys.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care 10. 2006 10. List of software SW for CS Remote Care NOTE • Do not change any bit not described on this table. be sure to restore the previous state.” B. and input using the 1Key Pad or A to F keys. (For setting by hexadecimal numbers.

Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 SW No.10. 3. SW 05 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 06 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 07 0 Reservation Redial for response time out Modem redial times Functions Modem redial interval Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 2006 0 *2 *2 *2 *2 — *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 — Do not redial — *4 *4 *4 *4 — *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 Reservation — — *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 1 *2 *2 *2 *2 — *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 — Redial — *4 *4 *4 *4 — *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 — — *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 Default 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 to 7 Reserved SW 08 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 10 SW 11 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error Adjustment / Setting 0 to 7 Reservation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timer 1 RING reception → CONNECT reception 318 .

2006 SW No. Timer 5 Wait time for other side's response Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery Functions Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception 0 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 — *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 — — 10. SW 12 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 13 SW 14 0 to 7 Reservation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 16 SW 17 0 to 7 Reservation 0 to 7 Reservation Attention display To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but the power for the modem is OFF. 3.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 1 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 — *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 — — Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 SW 18 0 Do not call Call 1 1 to 7 Reservation SW 19 to SW 40 0 to 7 Reservation — — — — 0 0 319 .

2006 *1: Baud rate Mode 9600 bps 19200 bps “38400 bps” 01-7 0 0 1 01-6 1 1 0 01-5 1 1 0 01-4 0 1 0 *2: Modem redial interval Mode 1 minute 2 minutes “3 minutes” 4 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes 7 minutes 8 minutes 9 minutes 10 minutes 05-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 05-2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 05-1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 05-0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 *3: Modem redial times Mode 06-6 06-5 06-4 06-3 06-2 06-1 06-0 Adjustment / Setting 0 to 9 times “10 times” 11 to 99 times 0 0 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 1 0 1 0 000 1011 to 110 0011 *4: Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error Mode 0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes “60 minutes” 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes 08-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 08-2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 08-1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 08-0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 320 . 3. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug.10.

Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 09-1 09-0 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 1 0 1 0 000 1011 to 110 0011 *6: Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT reception) Mode 0 to 31 sec “32 sec” 33 to 255 sec 0 0 1 11-7 11-6 11-5 11-4 11-3 11-2 11-1 11-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 *7: Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT reception) Mode 0 to 63 sec “64 sec” 65 to 255 sec 0 1 0 12-7 12-6 12-5 12-4 12-3 12-2 12-1 12-0 0000 0000 to 0011 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 *8: Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request telegram delivery) Mode 0 to 31 (x 100 msec) “32 (x 100 msec)” 33 to 255 (x 100 msec) 0 0 1 14-7 14-6 14-5 14-4 14-3 14-2 14-1 14-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 *9: Timer 5 (Wait time for other side’s response) Mode 0 to 29 sec “30 sec” 31 to 255 sec 0 0 0 15-7 15-6 15-5 15-4 15-3 15-2 15-1 15-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1101 1 1 1 1 0 0001 1111 to 1111 1111 321 . 2006 *5: Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error Mode 0 to 9 times “10 times” 11 to 99 times 0 0 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 10.Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug.

the Admin. A.7. They are controlled by the distributor. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. and touch [System Connection]. B. transmission key will not be displayed. refer to the manual for CS Remote Care Center. 2. NOTE • For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time. 3. touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the Center and tells that it is finished. transmission].7. the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center.7. Press the Start key. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 2. 2006 10. Touch [ID Code]. When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out. and input ID Code. 322 . 3. 3. Touch [Admin. 2. Press the Start key to output transmission log. 3. 4. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care]. Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4S paper. 1.10.) will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. 1. inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which CE can identify.7 Checking the transmission log • The transmission log list will be output to be checked. 10. * The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.4 Setup confirmation • Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up.7. Touch [ID Coke]. Touch [Communication Log Print]. Select [Administrator Setting]. 3. When finishing the Maintenance 1. and the transmission is not available. When the maintenance is finished.6 Adjustment / Setting Calling the Center from the Administrator • When the CS Remote Care setup is complete. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed. 2. Touch [Maintenance Complete]. 10. When starting the Maintenance Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. 1. 10.5 Calling the Maintenance • When CE starts maintenance. 2. and touch [Detail setting].0 Aug.

* When entering the phone No. • Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center. 2006 10. • Touch [ID code] to register the ID. 2. C. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 A. Primary Setting • Set the Center ID. • Use to newly build or change the system. • The default setting is E-Mail.7. Call the Service Mode to the screen.[#] : To be used as necessary Initial Transmission • Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care Center to register the machine.0 Aug. • When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed. • Use when registering and changing Service ID. ID Code Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the Service ID.8 Detail on settings 10. • The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered. [-] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing [W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end [T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing [P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing [*]. 1. • Use to change the set contents. (Only when the Modem or Fax is selected on the system Input. • Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-Key Pad. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting. System Selection Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the system type for remote diagnosis. 3.) 1 323 Adjustment / Setting . 10-Keys and keys on the screen have following meanings. 3. Device ID. Detail Setting (1) Machine Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Execute the primary setting. • Fax is available only when the optional Fax kit is being installed. E-mail address of the Center is displayed. Touch [CS Remote Care].Field Service Ver. Modem. (0000001 to 9999999) <Registration> • Touch [ID Code] and enter the Service ID. “E-Mail” Modem Fax B. and the phone No. or Fax. • Select E-Mail.

• Refer to “Software SW setting for CS Remote Care” for the setting. (3) RAM Clear Functions • To clear the following data at the Center ID Code. • Perform RAM Clear when setting the following setting to “ON”. 1. 1 (6) Response Time Out • It sets the intervals for resending E-Mails when transmission error occurred. 4. 2006 (2) Date/Time Input Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the data and time-of-day • Use to set or change the date and time-of-day. See P. • The default setting is 60 minute. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 3.0 Aug. Touch [CS Remote Care]. day and year). Date/Time Input. 1. and the time zone from the 10Key Pad. Touch [SET] to start the clock. (5) Software SW Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the CS Remote Care settings. • Use to output and use the Communication Log. 5. 3. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Disable. • To be used for reset the every data of the Center to default. NOTE • If RAM Clear is selected during transmission. Touch [Detail Setting] to access Communication Log Print. “60 minute” (10 to 1440) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 324 . Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date/Time Input. • To use when changing the intervals for resending E-Mails when transmission error occurred. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Enable “Disable” 1 Use (4) Communication Log Print Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To print out the Communication Log. • It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting. 4. 2.10. Load Tray 1 or Bypass Tray with A4S paper. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Primary Setting. Call the Service Mode on the screen. RAM clear processing will be implemented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether it is done properly or not. 5. Enter the date (month. and Common DT. 3. • To be used for setting CS Remote Care. Press Start key to print out the Communication Log. • To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary. 2. time-of-day.317.

. • Up to 64 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.[0 to 255]. 2006 (7) AT Command Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. <POP3 login name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care. • The default setting is No. • POP3 server address can be set with IP address or the domain name. • To set the address of the POP3 Server. • The default setting is No. 1 D.0 Aug. Server Setting • Server Setting can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting. • To set the port number for the POP3 server. <POP3 password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care. • The default setting is 110. (1) Server for RX <POP3 server> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care. <POP3 port number> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP3 port number used for the CS Remote Care.[0 to 255] <Input FQDN> • Enter the domain name. • This setting is available only when “Modem” is selected for the system setting. • To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization. “110” (1 to 65535) 325 Adjustment / Setting • To set the logon name for the POP3 server. <Input IP Address> • IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255]. • Up to 15 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 • To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization. 3. • To set the logon password for the POP3 server.Field Service Ver.[0 to 255]. • Enter the command and touch [SET] to register.

• To change the time interval for Mail Check. 2006 (2) Receive <E-mail Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care.. “60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec) Adjustment / Setting <APOP Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception.[0 to 255]. 326 .[0 to 255]. <Mail Check> Functions Use • To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care.0 Aug. • The default setting is No. • To set the e-mail address.10. • The default setting is No. “No” (1 to120 min. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. No) Setting/ Procedure <Connection timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connection during reception. • Up to 129 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.[0 to 255] <Input FQDN> • Enter the domain name. • To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care. <Input IP Address> • IP Address Version 4 format [0 to 255]. • The default setting is 60 Sec. • To change the timeout period for connection during reception. • To set the SMTP server address • SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name. Yes “No” (3) Send <SMTP server> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care. 3. • To authenticate the APOP during reception. • The default setting is No.

3. touch the “Setting Check” key for authentication. • To change the timeout period for connection during transmission. 2006 <SMTP port number> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 • To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care. • To use when authenticating during transmission.Field Service Ver. • The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen. User ID : Enter the User ID for SMTP authentication. “OFF” POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication * Setting to “POP Before SMTP” will set the time for POP Before SMTP. Domain name : Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication. “25” (1 to 65535) <SMTP Connection Time-out> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for transmission. • The default setting is 60 Sec. • To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server. • The default setting is No. “60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec) <Authentication Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server. • Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test. Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP. SMTP authentication • The default setting is OFF. (5) Data Initialization Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To initialize the contents for the sever setting.0 Aug. (4) TX/RX Test Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care. Password : Enter the password for SMTP authentication. • The default setting is 25. • Use to initialize the contents for the server setting. • Use to determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care. • The default setting is 60 Sec. * When setting to SMTP authentication. Yes “No” 327 Adjustment / Setting “60 Sec” (0 to 60 Sec) .

• If the same error is detected several times. turn the modem power OFF and ON. 0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting (No response to ATD) 0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving (No response to ATA) 0006 0008 Shut down of the data modem line (Host) (Carrier OFF is detected) • Transmit again manually. • Transmit again manually • Check if the power of the modem is ON. • Check if the power of the modem is ON.) RS232C Driver Over Run (When the modem detects Over Run. because the line is shut down at the host side. 3.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code A.7.10.) Machine ID has already been registered (Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the main unit that has already registered Machine ID. When Connecting by Modem 1 Error code 0001 0002 Error The line is busy (Busy detection) Failure of the Modem default setting at transmitting (When the transmission completes with modem initial setting failed) Solution • Transmit again manually. • Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main unit.) main unit side. (Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of shut down). • No solution. 328 .) If the same error is detected several times.) Receiving rejection (Receiving is made when the main unit is set to reject receiving.) • Set the initial registrations again for all including the host side. turn the modem power OFF and ON.0 Aug. tion (9600 bps to 38400 bps). Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.) • Check the setting condition of the host side. turn the modem power OFF and ON. 0009 Adjustment / Setting 000A 000B 000C 000D 0011 Baud Rate ERROR • Check the Baud rate of the (When selected Baud Rate is out of the specificasoftware DipSW. Break Interrupt (BI) Indicator (When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI) Indicator. • Check the setting condition of the main unit side. • Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main unit. turn the modem power OFF and ON. • Check if the power of the modem is ON. 2006 10. • Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main unit. • If the same error is detected several times. • If the same error is detected several times. 0018 0019 • Check Center ID setting of the Center ID Error (Center ID of the host is not identical with the one main unit side. • Check Center ID setting of the of start request telegram. Timeout of start request telegram delivery (Start request telegram is not delivered after line connection) Timeout of finish request telegram delivery • Transmit again manually.

1 NOTE • When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed.) Transmission / Receiving collision (Receiving is detecting during transmitting processing) • Try communication again.Field Service Ver. 3. Device ID Unregistered • Check Device ID setting of the (Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting.) • Check the setting of the host side.) Timeout of Telegram Delivery (At waiting mode of telegram delivery the machine fails to receive the telegram in a given time. main unit side. 329 . contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the error code. 001B 001E 0020 0027 • Try communication again. 2006 1 Error code 001A Error 10.) side.0 Aug. (Setting cannot be changed because the setting change is made during the machine is printing or starts printing. of start request telegram. Emergency call) comes from the main unit that • Check the setting of the host has not registered Machine ID yet. Impossible to change (During printing) • Try again when the machine is not printing. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Solution Device ID inconsistency • Check Device ID setting of the (Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main unit side.

• Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR POP3_CONNECT_ERR POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR POP3_FORMAT_ERR POP3_MEMORY_ERR POP3_JOBID_ERR POP3_NO_DATA_ERR 330 . 1062 1081 1084 Date expired • Ask the host to send another • Expiration date for data modification command instruction mail for modifying. on host side.0 Aug. 2006 B. • Check the SMTP Server on User side. 3. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. • Check the POP3 Server on User side. Received an error mail when Center setup is not complete Socket is not connected. • LAN cable on the Copier side is detached. ified due to the copy job currently performing. When connecting by E-Mails Error code 0001 0### 0003 0005 Error Connection Timeout during transmission Transmission error ***: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) Connection timeout when receiving Receiving error Solution • Check the SMTP Server on User side. • There are missing frame No. • Check the SMTP Server and POP3 Server on User side. • Check the status of the Machine registration on host side. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • Check the POP3 Server on User side. Frame No. 1030 Machine ID mismatching • Check the Machine ID setting. error • The last frame has not been received. 1092 Adjustment / Setting 2039 203E Network is down. • Received an E-Mail which tells that Machine ID • Check the Machine ID setting mismatches. has passed. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. • Check the connection between the Copier on the User’s side and the Network connector. • Check the Network environment on the User’s side. • LAN cable on the Copier side is detached. Modifying not available due to the copy job currently performing • Ask the host to send another • When informing the host that it cannot be modinstruction mail for modifying. • Check the status of the Machine registration on host side.10. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side.

4104 4105 4106 NOTE • When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed. • Contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the error code. When connecting by Fax modem Error code T50 R80 Error Host terminal ID not correct Solution • Check the telephone number set for host. 4103 Not Ready • Tried to transmit or receive an E-Mail when the • Wait for a while and try transmachine was not yet in the E-Mail receiving mitting again. status after power was turned ON. NVRAM writing error. Serial number received from the host not correct. 3. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. SMTP Channel Not Ready POP3 Channel Not Ready Not Ready other than the ones listed above. 331 .0 Aug.Field Service Ver. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Solution • Check the POP3 Server environment on User’s side. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. Disconnection of FAX-CSRC instruction when FASX-CSRC is not allowed. Host command error. R81 R82 R83 R84 NOTE • When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. • Check the status of the Machine registration on host side. Disconnection of writing instruction from host during machine is running. • Check the status of the Machine registration on host side. see the FK-502 Service Manual. • Contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the error code. contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the error code. 2006 Error code 3008 3009 Error POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR POP3_MAILBOX_FULL 10. 2 C.

the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure.• See the list of error message cate with the Center. Although the machine tries to communi. • Check the communication environment of the Center side. P.0 Aug. • Check if there is any problem in connection between the modem and the main unit. 1. Busy line Adjustment / Setting No response 332 .328 ⎯ ⎯ Complete successfully Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communi.10.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If communication is not done properly. check the condition by following the procedures shown below. * For the communication result. 3. Although the machine tries to communi. in the cases of Initial transmitting / Administrator transmitting / Maintenance Start transmitting / Maintenance Finish transmitting. there is any trouble and confirm the corresponding and the communication completes point. in the modem. At this time. Display of Communication result Communicating Communication trouble with the Center Cause ⎯ Solution ⎯ Although the machine tries to communi. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen. 2006 10. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting].• Check if the Power of modem cate with the Center. response from the Center.• Communicate with the Center cate with the Center. unsuccessfully.• Communicate with the Center again. there is any trouble in ON. cate with the Center. there is no again.7. the line to the Center is busy.

fixed zoom ratios.Field Service Ver. Others2 Others3 English. Italian.8.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Tel/Fax Number • To enter the TEL/FAX number of the service contact that will appear on the Touch Panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine. NOTE • When Main-power was turned ON while the Serial No. Fax1.8. Hungarian. English. • Upon setup. Duplex. Spanish. Finnish.8. Swedish. ADF. LCT. • Upon setup. • Use Interrupt key to enter “-. • Enter the TEL/FAX number (19 digits) from the 10-Key Pad.8 System 1 10. JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 ✽ These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to different marketing area settings: Japan US Europe Others1. Touch the [Fax Target]. • The numbers will be printed on the list output.0 Aug. and touch [END]. will be displayed. 2. 3. Japanese German. Dutch. at setup. Japanese English. Norwegian. the message to require entering the Serial No. Czech. 2006 10.) according to the applicable marketing area.3 Functions Use Serial Number • To register the serial numbers of the machine and options. Vender. Portuguese. 9 digits (0 to 9) Printer. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 10. Spanish. <Marketing Area> • Select the applicable marketing area and touch “END” to set the marketing area. French. • Upon setup. Japanese <Fax Target> 1.” 10. 10. Sorter/FN. 1 Setting/ Procedure • Type the serial numbers.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Marketing Area • To make the various settings (language. Scanner. Select the applicable marketing area using [+] and [-]. was not entered (including initial status). French. Make sure to enter the Serial No. Danish. etc. Fax2 333 . paper size.

0 Aug. 3.5 Functions Use Original Size Detection • To change the document size detection table. Copy Glass : To change the size detection table for the document glass.8. ADF : To set whether or not to detect 18k/16k while using ADF (only when marketing area is Europe) Setting/ Procedure <Copy Glass> • The default setting is “Table1. • Select the size from among the following five.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure No Sleep • To display the option of “OFF” for the Sleep Mode Setting screen available from Administrator Setting.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Foolscap Size Setting • To set the size for Foolscap paper. 220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8 x 13 334 . • Use to change the setting for the document size detection table. • Upon setup. • To display the option of “OFF” for the Sleep Mode Setting.” Adjustment / Setting Enable “Disable” 10. • The default setting is “Prohibit. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.” Permit “Prohibit” 10. <ADF> • The default setting is “Disable.” “Table1” Table2 NOTE • Table 2 can be set only when Original Size Detection Sensor FD2 is being mounted.8.8. 2006 10. • To change the size for Foolscap paper.10.

Data Clear Functions Use • To initialize the setting data. For details on items to be cleared.8 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Install Date • To register the date the main unit was installed. turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. “Error” displays. When “OK” is displayed. • Upon setup. Enter the date (Year 4 digit → Month 2 digit → date 2 digit) from the 10-Key Pad.382 1.Field Service Ver. Touch “Entry” key to set the date of installation. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 3. 4.8. 2. [System 1] → [Install Date].7 Initialization 10. 3. Select the key as follows. turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. and other improper displays. Select the key as follows. “Trouble”. • Use to clear the “Jam”. Press the Start key.382 NOTE • When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below. Select the key as follows.8. System Error Clear Functions Use • To reset the trouble data. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 2. Referring data: One-Touch Registration.” See P. User Authentication/Account Track. Setting/ Procedure 10. “Contents to be cleared by Reset function. 1. see “Contents to be cleared by Reset function. 4. B. Press the Start key. 2006 10. 3. • To clears the setting data. Setting/ Procedure 1.” See P. be sure to clear the data. [System 1] → [Initialization] → [System Error Clear].0 Aug. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 3. 4. [System 1] → [Initialization] → [Data clear]. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 A. For details on items to be cleared. 2. When [OK] is displayed. 335 Adjustment / Setting .

9 Functions Use Communication System Setting • To select communication system used for RS-232C port. • To switch RS-232C port in order to connect with the CS remote care modem or the JScribe.200 bps 7 bit Odd 1 bit JScribe2 19. CS Remote Care Baud rate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 9. the optional Expanded Memory (EM-306) needs to be mounted. • Communication requirements for each setting are shown below.10. 2006 10.enabled-device.600 bps 8 bit None 1 bit JScribe1 19.9.200 bps 8 bit None 1 bit NOTE • If connecting the machine to the JScribe-enabled-device. 3. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver.9 System 2 10. HDD Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 336 .0 Aug. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is CS Remote Care.8. “CS Remote Care” JScribe1 JScribe2 10.1 Functions Use • Not Used.

) • The following setting [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication /Account Track] →[General Settings] → [External Server] • The following setting [Administrator Setting] → [System Connection] → [IS OpenAPI Setting] • Mailbox Destination (scan) • Information on the original specified by the Program Destination • [User Setting] → [Initial Setting] → [Scan] <Page Scope Web Connection> • SSL/TLS 2 337 Adjustment / Setting . 3. Peripheral Mode • Select the operating mode of the Scanner. Image Controller Setting • Select the controller to be used. this setting should be set to “Controller 0”. <Control Panel on the machine> • Setting items included in [Network Setting] available from [Administrator Setting]. See the Setup Instructions for the Controller. this setting cannot be changed. • “Peripheral Mode” appears when “Others” is selected. 2006 10. • When the setting has been changed. Controller 3 : An external controller is used. Note on returning the setting from “Controller 1” to “Controller 0”. Others : An external controller is used.Field Service Ver. • Selecting “Controller 0” will initialize the following settings made while “Controller 1” was selected. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Image Controller Setting • To set the type of the controller. Reset the following items as necessary when using the Internal Standard Controller. Controller 1 : Fiery Controller 2 : An external controller is used. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] When [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to “ON”.9. Mode 1: Not use Mode 2: Not use Mode 3: Not use NOTE • When the following setting is “ON”.0 Aug. turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. (Except [Status Notification Setting] and [Prefix/Suffix Setting] available from the following setting.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. “Controller 0” : The standard controller is used. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Detail Setting]. • When setting up the controller.

” “Yes” No Use Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 10. • Applicable units: Transfer Belt Unit. Transfer Roller Unit. Japan.5 Functions Unit Change • To select who is to replace a unit. prompting the user to replace the part. When [Service] is selected : Life warning.9. 2006 10. Fax Multi Line.0 Aug. Fusing Unit. Fax Multi Line. M. IU (C. • When the unit life arrives.9. • Setting modes are Fax (Main). • Upon setup • The following are the default settings: US. Local Interface Kit or Scan Accelerator Kit is mounted.3 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Option Board Status • To set when the Optional Fax Mount Kit. When [User] is selected : Copying is inhibited.10. turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. 10. Others1/2/3 “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service Use Setting/ Procedure Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit Waste Toner Box Punch Dust Box 338 . • The default setting is “Yes. local I/F and JPEG. the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit.” Fax (Main) Fax (Sub) local I/F JPEG : Set : Set : Set : Set “Unset” “Unset” “Unset” “Unset” NOTE • When the setting has been changed. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Others 4 : “User” Service : User “Service” : User “Service” : User “Service” Europe.4 Functions Consumable Life Reminder • To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime PM parts lifetime display: An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached. Y. Paper Dust Remover/Ozone Filter. K) • Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime. Fax (Sub).9. 3. • The default settings are “Unset. Local Interface Kit or Scan Accelerator Kit is mounted. • Use when setting up the Optional Fax Mount Kit.

• To be used when CCD unit has bee changed. • The default setting is ON. “ON” Setting/ Procedure NOTE • When the setting is changed. the function becomes available by turning the sub power switch OFF and ON again. the default value needs to be set since the magnification offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD).8 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure LCT Paper Size Setting • To set the paper size for the LCT • Use to change the paper size for the LCT. After replacing the CCD unit. 10. 10. • The default setting is ON. 339 Adjustment / Setting . “ON” Setting/ Procedure NOTE • When the setting is changed.9.9 Functions Use Line Mag Setting • To set whether t use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping.9. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 OFF 81/2 x 11 OFF Software Switch Setting 10.9.9. A4 10. The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area.7 Functions Use Scan Caribration • To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Not Used. the default value needs to be set since the calibration value set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD). 2006 10. the function becomes valid by turning the sub power switch OFF and ON again.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. 3. After replacing the CCD unit. • To be used after replacing the CCD unit.

Select [Service Mode] → [System 2].10. • When an error occurs. 4. Select “ON. 3. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with Ethernet cable. 2006 10. it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error.9. and specify the IP address of the machine to start FTP. • When selecting [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [FTP Setting]. and touch [Data Capture]. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.) 2.” (While the Data Capture setting is “ON”.10 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Data Capture • When an error occurs. the print job data from the PC will be stored in the hard disk. NOTE • The following conditions are necessary for this function. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC. this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data. 1. Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E538DA 5. Input the user name and the password.0 Aug. 3. User name: capture Password: sysadm 4037F3E539DA 340 . When selecting [Security Setting] → [Security Details] → [Print Data Capture] in Administrator Setting. “Allow” must be set. Check the IP address of the machine. “FTP Server: ON” must be set. • This function is not available when using the optional Image Controller (IC402). • The hard disk must be mounted to the machine.

4037F3E541DA 341 Adjustment / Setting . Using the “ls” command. Using the “binary” command. 2006 Setting/ Procedure 10. display the list of the file available for capture.Field Service Ver. 4037F3E540DA 7. set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 6.0 Aug. 3.

10. • To use network fax function (IP address fax.11 Functions Use Network Fax Settings • To set whether or not to use network fax function. [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] • The default settings are OFF. Using the “get” command. Adjustment / Setting 2 10. 4037F3E542DA 9.0 Aug. 3. NOTE • When the data capture is set to “ON”. all print job data will be stored in the hard disk. Finish the command prompt. internet fax). 2006 8.9. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to “ON” in the following settings. and select “Restrict” for Print Data Capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk. transfer the data for capture to PC. • After receiving capture data. select [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Security Detail]. IP Address Fax : SIP-Fax : Internet Fax : ON Not Used ON “OFF” “OFF” Setting/ Procedure 342 .

Transfer Belt Unit. 10. 10. • When each of the maintenance parts is replaced. LCT Parts : Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT ADF Feed : Number of sheets of paper fed through the take-up section of the ADF ADF Reverse : Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF Sorter/Finisher: Number of sheets of paper fed out of the Sorter/Finisher 343 . which are provided with a new unit detection function. Black IU : Period of time over which the Black Developing Unit has been used.10 Counter • The Counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the Technical Representative to check or set as necessary. • Manual Tray <2> • Cyan IU • Magenta IU • • • • • • Use Setting/ Procedure : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 1 : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 2 : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 3 : Number of sheets of paper fed from Tray 4 : Number of sheets of paper fed from the Bypass : Period of time over which the Cyan Developing Unit has been used. Two or more counters can be selected. 2. • 3rd.1 Procedure 1. • 2nd. To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once.2 Functions Life • To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used. : Period of time over which the Magenta Developing Unit has been used.10. Touch [Counter] to show the Counter menu. • To clear the count of a counter. • To clear the count of each counter. Select the specific counter to be displayed. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly. which will undo the clearing operation. select the specific counters to be cleared. <1> • Fusing Unit • Transfer Roller Unit • Transfer Belt Unit • Paper Dust Remover/ Ozone Filter • 1st. 3.Field Service Ver. • 4th. and touch [END]. select the specific part and press the Clear key. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 10.10.0 Aug. press the Interrupt key. 3. • It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the Fusing Unit. touch [Counter Reset]. 2006 10. and IU. Yellow IU : Period of time over which the Yellow Developing Unit has been used.

which will undo the clearing operation. press the Interrupt key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly. Maint.-Set • Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-Key Pad.10. select the specific part and press the Clear key.10. press the Interrupt key. • To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected • To clear the count of a counter. • To clear the count of each counter.-Count • Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine. 3. Maint. an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the Basic screen. which will undo the clearing operation. press the Interrupt key. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • If the count is cleared mistakenly. • To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred • To clear the count of a counter.4 Functions Service Call Counter • To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the machine • To clear the count of each counter. • To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred • To clear the count of a counter. select the specific part and press the Clear key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly.0 Aug.10. • Pressing the Clear key will clear the count. which will undo the clearing operation.3 Functions Jam • To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the machine. • When a warning condition occurs. • When any given part is replaced. Use Setting/ Procedure 10. • Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen. Use Setting/ Procedure 10. which will undo the clearing operation. press the Interrupt key.10.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Maintenance • To set a count value for maintenance of any given part. select the specific part and press the Clear key.5 Functions Use Warning • To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type • To clear the count of each counter. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 10. 2006 10. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly.10. 344 .

Service Total : No. Scanner.10. It also displays the count value of using the specified mode. Total Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the count value for the service total counter. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Service Total • Use to check the total No. and Fax. • Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes. 345 . of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder. of pages printed by User mode and Service Mode. see “Trouble shooting” on page 316. of pages printed by User mode and Service Mode in Duplex. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service Mode.10. 10.9 Functions Use Service Call History (Data) • To display the trouble history in chronological order.10. Service Total (Duplex) : No. Scanner. of pages fed to the Automatic Document Feeder. 10. • Use to check the jam history in chronological order. NOTE • [Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code.Field Service Ver.10. Copy. • Use to check the trouble history in chronological order. • Use to check the No.12 Fax Connection failed Functions Use • To display the No. • To check the total number of printed pages including the one at Service Mode according to each paper size. Printer. Paper Size Functions Use • To display the count value for Service Total Counter of each paper size.0 Aug. Copy.11 Paper Jam History Functions Use • To display the jam history in chronological order. 2006 10. and Fax. 1 10. • Use to check the No. of times each mode was used. 10. of Fax transmission errors occurred. 1 B.10.10 ADF Paper Pages Functions Use • To display the No.8 Functions Use Counter of Each Mode • To display the printed pages in the following specified modes. in order to know the using condition.10. 10. of Fax transmission errors occurred. For details of JAM code. 10. 3. Printer.7 1 A. as well as No.

2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment List • To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment. which will let the machine produce the list. see FK-502 Service Manual. process adjustment.11.11. • Press the Start key.11. • Press the Start key. 10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source. 10. etc. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. see FK-502 Service Manual. 3.5 Protocol Trace For details. and others. • The time-of-day and date will also be printed. 10.11. Adjustment / Setting 10.11.4 Service Parameter For details.0 Aug.11 List Output 10. adjustment values. in Service Mode.3 Parameter List For details. • Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source. 10.6 Fax Setting List For details. • The time-of-day and date will also be printed.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Machine Management List • To produce an output of a list of setting values. Total Counter values.11. 346 . see FK-502 Service Manual. see FK-502 Service Manual. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs.10. which will let the machine produce the list. 2006 10.

check the panel display of the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor. If the input data is “0.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Sensor Check • To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. 4. • Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. Move the actuator to unblock the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor.0 Aug. 6. From the Sensor Check List that follows. Check that the data for “Take-Up” under “Tray 2” changes from “0” to “1” on the screen. Call the Service mode to the screen. 1. • It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a cover is open.” 3. 3. Remove the sheet of paper misfed. 2006 10.12.” For “Take-Up” under “Tray 2. 7. 8. Check that the data for “Take-Up” under “Tray 2” is “0” (sensor blocked). For the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor. the Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor is considered to be responsible for it. 2.Field Service Ver. you check the data of “Take-Up” of “Tray 2. Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check Example • When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the machine.” select “1” on the left-hand side of the screen. Select [State Confirmation] → [Sensor Check] and then select the screen that contains “Take-Up” under “Tray 2.” change the sensor. 347 .12 State Confirmation 10. A. 5. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 10. • The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis.

Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E506DA 348 . 3.0 Aug. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 B.10. Sensor Check Screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine.

Field Service Ver. PC-202) 10. Sensor Check List (1) Sensors 1 (Main Unit. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Symbol PC14 PC2 PC13 PC1 PC103 PC106 PC104 PC108 PC107 PC105 PC112-PF PC115-PF PC113-PF PC117-PF PC116-PF PC114-PF PC121-PF PC124-PF PC122-PF PC126-PF PC125-PF PC123-PF Panel Display Tray 1 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Chain Feed Tray 2 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Vertical Transport Take-Up Upper Limit Tray 3 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Vertical Transport Take-Up Upper Limit Tray 4 Device Detection Paper Empty Near Empty Vertical Transport Take-Up Upper Limit Part/Signal Name Tray 1 Set Sensor Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor Tray 2 Set Sensor Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor Tray 3 Set Sensor Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray 3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor Tray 4 Set Sensor Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Tray 4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray 4 Lift-Up Sensor Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position 349 . 3. PC-102. 2006 C.0 Aug.

10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. 2006 Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF Not at raised position Paper present Paper not present Paper not present Not OHP Loop not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Symbol PC111 PC112 PC113 PC114 PC115 PC110 PC28 PC30 PC27 PC4 PC10 PC35 PC11 PC36 Panel Display Manual Multi FD Size1 Multi FD Size2 Multi FD Size3 Multi FD Size4 Lift-Up Position Sensor Paper Empty Paper Passage Registration Roller Exit OHP Detect Fusing Loop Detect Color PC Drive PC Drive Main Sensor Detect Color PC Drive Sub Sensor Black PC Drive Main Sensor Black PC Drive Sub Sensor Part/Signal Name Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 Bypass Lift-Up Sensor Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Registration Roller Sensor Exit Sensor OHP Sensor Fusing Paper Loop Sensor Color PC Drum Main Sensor Color PC Drum Sub Sensor K PC Drum Main Sensor K PC Drum Sub Sensor ON ON ON ON At raised position Paper not present Paper present Paper present OHP Loop present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Adjustment / Setting 350 .0 Aug.

2006 (2) Sensors 2 (Main Unit.0 Aug. PC-402) 10.Field Service Ver.Horizontal zontal Transport Trans. 3. Paper Detect Unit Reverse Sensor Paper Sensor Turnover Empty Sensor 351 . Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Symbol PC4-LCT PC13-LCT PC12-LCT PC11-LCT PC1-LCT PC2-LCT PWBELCT PC3-LCT PC9-LCT PC7-LCT UN1-LCT PC14-LCT PC6-LCT PC8-LCT PC10-LCT PI2-DU PI1-DU PC1-DU PC1-HO PC6-HO LCT Panel Display Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Lower Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Stop Take-Up Vertical Transport Paper Empty Part/Signal Name Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Paper Feed Sensor LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Empty Board Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 At raised position 0 Not at raised position At lower limit Not at lower limit At home At stop position Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Malfunction ON At home In position Blocked Blocked Close Paper present Paper present Paper not present Paper present Out of home Not at stop position Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Operational OFF Out of home Out of position Unblocked Unblocked Open Paper not present Paper not present Paper present Paper not present Main Tray Empty Upper Paper Empty Sensor Shift Tray Empty Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Lower Over Run Lower Limit Sensor Manual Button Down Division Board Position Cassette Open Shift Motor Pulse Elevator Motor Pulse Duplex Set Paper Descent Key Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Tray Set Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Paper Passage1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Paper Passage2 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Hori.

10. 2006 Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Toner present Toner present Toner present Toner present In position In position In position In position Retracted Symbol PC17 PC16 PC15 PC18 PC19 PC26 PC25 PC20 PC29 Panel Display Devel.Retraction fer Belt Waste Toner Full Toner Toner Box Set Fusing Set Unit Fuser Roller Retraction Part/Signal Name Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/C Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/M Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/K Toner Set Sensor/C Toner Set Sensor/M Toner Set Sensor/Y Toner Set Sensor/K 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Sensor 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor Waste Toner Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor Fusing Unit In-Position Detection Signal Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Out of position Out of position Out of position Out of position Not Retracted Not Retracted Blocked In position In position Not Retracted PC12 PC31 Retracted Unblocked Out of position Out of position Retracted Adjustment / Setting PC32 – PC33 352 . 3. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.C Toner Empty oping M Toner Empty Y Toner Empty K Toner Empty C Toner Set M Toner Set Y Toner Set K Toner Set 2nd Retraction Transfer Trans.0 Aug.

) Empty (Elev.0 Aug. 3. 2006 (3) Sensors 3 (FS-507.Field Service Ver.) Home (CD-Align) Staple Standby Home (Store roller) Home (Exit roller) Punch2/3 Position SW Punch Speed Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor Elevator Tray Paper Sensor CD Aligning Home Position Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Storage Roller Home Position Sensor Exit Roller Home Position Sensor PC11-FN S2-FN S3-FN PC10-FN Shift Speed Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Unblocked ON Blocked Blocked OFF Unblocked Elevate Tray Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch Raised/Lowered Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch Home (Shift) Stapler 1 Home Staple Empty Self Priming Stapler 2 Home Staple Empty Self Priming Shift Home Position Sensor - Staple Home 1 Staple Empty 1 Staple Self Priming 1 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked - Staple Home 2 Staple Empty 2 Staple Self Priming 2 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Blocked Blocked Blocked 353 .Exit (Non-sort3) isher Exit (Finisher) Upper Paper Pass Part/Signal Name 1st Tray Exit Sensor Job Tray Exit Sensor Storage Sensor Upper Entrance Sensor Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Blocked Paper present Blocked Paper present Paper present Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked 0 Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Transport Lower Lower Entrance Sensor Full (Non-sort1) Full (Non-sort3) Full (Elev. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Symbol PC1-FN PC19-FN PC3-FN PC4-FN PC2-FN PC6-FN PC20-FN PC7-FN PC5-FN PWB-D FN PC8-FN PC9-FN PC14-FN PC12-FN PC13-FN Panel Display Multi Exit (Non-sort1) Staple Fin. JS-601) 10. Tray) 1st Tray Full Sensor Job Tray Full Sensor Elevator Tray Full Sensor Empty (Finisher) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor Surface (Elev.

10. — MS3-FN MS4-FN PI21-FN PI22-FN PI23-FN Stapler Safety SW Self Prime Front Door Upper Cover Staple Safety Switch (Rear) Staple Safety Switch (Front) Self-Priming Sensor Front Door Open Sensor Upper Cover Open Sensor 354 . 3.Paddle Home isher Bundle Roller Home Front Align Back Align Alignment Tray Entrance Sensor Paddle Home Position Sensor Swing Guide Home Position Sensor Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor Finisher Tray Sensor Paper present HP HP HP HP Paper present HP Paper present Paper present HP HP Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present 0 Paper not present Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name Home (Exit Belt) Exit Belt Home Position Sensor Crease Position Crease Tray Crease Home Crease Roller Home Crease Clock Paper Paper Surface Folding Position Sensor Saddle Tray Sensor Folding Home Position Sensor Folding Roller Home Position Sensor Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor Exit Tray Sensor Exit Tray Home Position Sensor Adjustment / Setting PI8-FN PI9-FN Paper present Paper surface detected Upper limit Lower limit Paper not present PI15-FN PI16-FN PI17-FN — PI18-FN PI19-FN PI20-FN — Lift Raised Position Lift Lowered Position Lift Clock Lift Middle Slide Home Stapler Home Staple Shift Upper Limit Sensor Shift Lower Limit Sensor Shift Motor Clock Sensor — Slide Home Position Sensor Staple Drive Home Position Sensor Staple Detecting Sensor Paper full HP HP Staples loaded No staple loaded Stapler connection detected Open READY Open Open Stapler Connect. PK-501) Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 PI1-FN PI2-FN PI3-FN PI4-FN PI5-FN PI6-FN PI7-FN PI10-FN PI13-FN PI11-FN PI12-FN PI14-FN Saddle Entrance Stitch Fin. 2006 (4) Sensors 4 (FS-603.0 Aug. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

side Open Symbol MS1-FN — MS2-FN — — — — — — PI3P-PK PI1P-PK PI2P-PK PC6-HO Panel Display Part/Signal Name Saddle Front Door SW Front Door Open Sensor Stitch Remain in — Fin. 3.Field Service Ver.Reverse Section isher Joint SW Joint Open Sensor Punch Punch Depth1 Unit Punch Depth2 Punch Depth3 Punch Depth4 Punch Dust Punch Timing Punch Motor Clock Punch (Home) Punch Depth Home Horizontal Transport Door — — — — — — Punch Motor Clock Sensor Punch Home Position Sensor Side Registration Home Sensor Horizontal Unit Door Sensor Blocked HP HP Blocked Punch trash full Unblocked 355 .0 Aug. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 0 Open Paper horiz. 2006 10.

not mounted Original loaded.0 Aug. • Reference values: C. • If the value is low. not mounted Original loaded. Y K Vdc: around 390 V. not mounted Original loaded. Use Setting/ Procedure 356 . 2006 (5) Sensors 5 (Main Unit) Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display 1 PC201 SW201 PC202 PC203 Scanner Home Sensor Scanner Home Sensor Size Reset Switch Original Cover Angle Sensor Original Size Detecting Sensor FD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD2 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 Original Size Detecting Sensor FD3 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD1 Original Size Detecting Sensor CD2 At home Lowered Less than 20° Original loaded.2 Functions Table Number • To display the Vg/Vdc output values calculated for the image density of the test pattern (amount of toner sticking) produced on the Transfer Belt during an AIDC detection sequence. not mounted Original loaded. 3. not mounted Original loaded. correct so that the image density becomes high. not mounted Original loaded. Original Cover Detect.20 Degree ing Sensor Original Size Detection 1 Original Size Detection 2 Original Size Detection 3 Original Size Detection 4 Original Size Detection 5 Original Size Detection 6 Original Size Detection 7 Original Size Detection 8 PC204 PC204 PC205 PC205 PC206 Adjustment / Setting PC206 PC207 10. correct so that the image density becomes low. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Vg: around 550 V • Used for troubleshooting of image problems.10.12. not mounted Original loaded. not mounted 0 Out of home Raised 20° or more Original not loaded Original not loaded Original not loaded Original not loaded Original not loaded Original not loaded Original not loaded Original not loaded Symbol Panel Display Part/Signal Name Org. M. • If the value is high.

and min. 10. 357 .4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Level History2 • IDC Sensor (Transfer Belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabilization sequence and ATVC value. • Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs. • • • • TCR-C/-M/-Y/-K: Shows the T/C output reading taken last.12. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems.Field Service Ver. The difference from the CLAMP value (G) should be within ±50 for G. • IDC Sensor: Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the IDC Sensor. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting Level History1 • To display TCR (T/C ratio). • Used for troubleshooting for the CCD Sensor.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Temp. B) should be within (90 for R and B. • • • • • Machine interior temperature Temperature on Fusing Belt side Temperature on fusing pressure side Machine interior humidity Absolute humidity : 0 to 100 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments : 0 to 100 in 1 increments 10. and BO and BE should be within 30. G. & Humidity • To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location (AIDC Sensor portion) inside the machine and fusing temperature. : Shows the latest Fusing Pressure Roller temperature data.0 Aug. The difference between each pair of RO and RE. and fusing temperature. and B. 2006 10.12.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. output values should be within ±100. GO and GE. • ATVC (C. • Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values. IDC1/IDC2 : Shows the latest IDC data. Temp-Belt : Shows the latest Heating Roller temperature data. K): Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 V to 3000 V). • ATVC (2nd) : Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 V to 5000 V). 10. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. “Reading taken last” means • Density of toner of the latest image • When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while Level History 1 is being displayed. 3. IDC/Regist Sensor output values. Temp-Press.12. Y.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure CCD Check • To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R.12. GAIN : The difference from the CLAMP values (R. CLAMP: The difference between the max. M.

✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. 2.12. • If the copy image is faulty. 5. “OK” or “NG. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Use Adjustment Procedure • If the copy image is faulty. Memory Bus Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory. 5. 2.] → [Compress / Decompression Check]. The check result will be displayed. 3. 4. • The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. Select either [Scanner → Memory]. 3.7 Memory / HDD Adj. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automatically. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. and from memory to printer. 4. B. 3.0 Aug. 3. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence. The check result will be displayed. 2006 10. Select the desired type of check. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. either Rough Check or Detail Check. 2. Detail Check • A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the addresses and buses in all areas. Compress / Decompression Check Functions • To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly. If the check results are NG. 4. Memory Check Functions • To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/read check. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Press the Start key to start the check procedure. When the check procedure is completed. ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. the results are shown on the screen. or both. 1. Adjustment / Setting Use Adjustment Procedure C. check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one.” 358 . Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. A. [Memory → PRT].] → [Memory Bus Check]. • If the copy image is faulty.] → [Memory Check].10. Rough Check • A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area. 1. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.

Adjustment Procedure F. NOTE • Make sure to turn main power switch OFF when upgrading is complete. 2. Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input/output operation check sequence and be terminated automatically. 4. Set the following setting. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. 3. 2. A7 to A7 or later. etc. or both. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. 2006 D. HDD Version Up Functions Use • To upgrade Administration data (Document management information. 3.] 3. • When the Firmware Card before Ver. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically. the Copier cannot be used unless HDD version is upgraded. Address information. 4. and wait for ten seconds to turn back ON. 2. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting • To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly performed. * “MFP Controller” is the only Firmware which can be upgraded. 4. A7 is upgraded to the Ver. and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed. [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. Touch the Start key to start upgrading the version. The check result will be displayed. “OK” or “NG.] → [Work Memory In/Out Check. 1.” ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. 359 . [Output Check]. the outcome will be displayed on the screen. A7 or later. • If the print image is faulty.Field Service Ver. 1. • When the hard disk is mounted. 1 E.0 Aug. “OK” or “NG. Work Memory In/Out Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure 10. When upgrading the version is complete. • To use when updating Firmware Card from the version before Ver. The check result will be displayed.] → [HDD Version Up] 3.] → [HDD R/W Check]. Select either [Input Check].” ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence. Open the Service mode. HDD R/W Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly. 1.) other than image data in HDD.

Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure. 3. 2. 2. HDD Version Down Functions Use • Not Used. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. 3. Adjustment / Setting Adjustment Procedure 360 . Use Adjustment Procedure 2 H. the malfunction code “C-D010” will appear. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence. 2.10. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence. 2006 G. • When the hard disk is to be initialized. (2) Logical Format (Only when initial is set up) 1.0 Aug. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. • If the hard disk is yet to be formatted. (1) Physical Format 1. ✽ Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it. 4. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. 4. • When the hard disk is mounted. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.] → [HDD Format]. Touch [Physical Format]. HDD Format Functions • To format the hard disk • The function proceeds in the order of Physical Format to Logical Format. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. (Physical Format to Logical Format) 1. 3. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. Touch [Logical Format].

the display is blank. M. Use Setting/ Procedure 10. the lot number will be displayed when the Front Door is closed. 2006 10. since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the Main Power Switch is turned ON with the Front Door open. M. Use Setting/ Procedure 10. • When an add-on memory is mounted.12. and that for K is displayed with reference to an ideal position. 3. • The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU.10 IU Lot No. • The IU lot number is displayed even with the Front Door opened. Y. • • • • • • • LPH Lot No. and K LPHs • Use for checking the LPH Status.) 10. • Use to check the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk. Y. an asterisk “✻” is displayed beside the color identification (C. • Use for check when color shift is evident. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the 10-digit lot number for each of C.12. and K IUs.8 Functions 10. 361 Adjustment / Setting . the machine automatically recognizes it and displays [Set].: LPH lot number (8 digits) Average Exposure: Average light intensity X: Print width accuracy Y: Linearity accuracy Z: Focus accuracy FFT Rank: Print width rank LPH Rank: 0 to 5 • If any one change is made from the default value as a result of LPH chip-to-chip corrections. and Y. • For each of C. • Use to setup the optional Security Kit SC-503. • When the Encryption Board is mounted. Y. • The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjustment has been completed.0 Aug. Nonetheless. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Memory/HDD State • To display the condition and amount of the memory and Hard disk.Field Service Ver. and K. the machine automatically recognizes it and displays its capacity. M. • Use for checking the IU Lot No. M.9 Functions Color Regist • To check each of C. and K) on the screen. and K for color shift amount. the color shift amount (in X and Y directions) at two locations (one at the front and the other in the rear) and the difference in color shift amount between the front and rear (X and Y directions) are displayed. M. M. • To display the mounting condition of the optional Encryption Board (Security Kit SC-503). • Display unit: dots • The shift amount is displayed with reference to K for C. Y.12. (The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the Front Door is closed. Y. however.12.11 LPH Status Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check various information on each of the C.

Tray 3.1 Procedure for Test Pattern Output 1. CMYK.2 Functions Use Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Gradation Pattern • To produce a gradation pattern.13 Test Mode • To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern. Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.12 Adjustment Data List Functions Use • To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit. • Black (1PC): Uses one color of black. 10.13. Select FEET or “HYPER”. 362 .13. Black (4PC). 3.10. 10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 10. Tray 4. Black (1PC) • Black (4PC): Uses four colors. “Cyan”. Touch the desired test pattern key.0 Aug. • Used for checking gradation reproducibility. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key. It also tests the printing operation in running mode.12. 2006 10. 4Color. Adjustment / Setting 4036fs3042c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Yellow. Magenta. as well as the Fax transmission. Select the color mode. 2. 3. Touch [Test Mode] to display the Test Mode menu. 8Color. • Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main unit. and Tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for printing. • The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of Tray 2.

4 Functions Use Lattice Pattern • To produce a lattice pattern. Blue. • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. Yellow.13. Magenta. MIX • Type the density level (0 to “255”). Black (1PC) • Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots). Black (1PC). 3.Field Service Ver. Select FEET or “HYPER. Magenta. Pattern SINGLE FEET Cyan CD Width: 5 FD Width: 5 Density: 255 Normal 4036fs3044c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). CMYK. Select the color mode. 4 Color. • Type the density level (0 to “255”). • Select “Normal” or Reverse.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Black (4PC). Black (4PC). Select “FEET” or HYPER. Select Gradation or Resolution. • A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background. “Cyan”. 4 Color. Red. 2006 10. Green. (Only select HYPER) Select the color mode.0 Aug. 3 Color. 10. Red. Yellow. . 363 Adjustment / Setting • Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density. “Cyan”.3 Functions Use Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255 10. Green. Blue. 4036fs3043c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). CMYK.13. 3 Color. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Halftone Pattern • To produce a solid halftone pattern.

364 .5 Functions Use Pattern Solid Pattern • To produce each of the C. 10. 2006 10. K. • Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. M. and K solid patterns. R. K Y SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 M C 4036fs3045c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).13. Y.0 Aug. Y. Select FEET or “HYPER.13. 3. and a patch of each of the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Produce 12-gradation-level patches of C.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.10. G. Adjustment / Setting SINGLE HYPER Gradation 4036fs3046c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Select FEET or “HYPER. M.6 Functions Use Pattern Color Sample • To produce a color sample. and B. Type the density level (0 to “255”). • Used for checking reproducibility of image density.

Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] → [Running Mode]. 3. Call the Service Mode to the screen.7 Functions Use Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 10. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color.13. 1. 4. 6. Select FEET or “HYPER. Bypass only). 5. 365 Adjustment / Setting SINGLE HYPER Gradation Border: OFF . 2006 10. 4036fs3047c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy).8 Functions Use Pattern LPH Pattern • To produce an LPH pattern. Select the paper size (Tray 1. Type the density level (0 to “255”). • Used for LPH chip-to-chip correction 4036fs3048c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). 3.13. Press the Start key to start the Running Mode.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Select the paper type. • Use to check the printing operation in Running Mode from each paper source.Field Service Ver. Select to turn ON or “OFF” the Border Line. Pressing the Stop key will stop operation.0 Aug. 10. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 8 Color Solid Pattern • To produce an 8-color solid pattern.9 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Running Mode • To test the printing operation in Running Mode. 2.13. 10. Select FEET or “HYPER.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.

[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF.10. 3. 2006 10. • Center staple position: The adjustment range is -7.0 mm to +7.13.15 FAX For details.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance section. 10.0 Aug.16 Finisher For details on adjustment.39 10.0 mm to +7. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. see the Service Manual for Option FS-603.17.17 Internet ISW • By using this setting. • To use when upgrading the Firmware by Internet ISW. • Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to “ON”. 10.10 Fax Test For details. Adjustment / Setting 1 10. ON “OFF” 366 . • For details for upgrading the Firmware. Functions Use Adjustment Specification • To adjust the positions of center staple and folding for the Finisher. this setting will automatically be set to “OFF” and cannot be changed. 10. • Use when the center staple and folding positions deviate from the correct ones in the copies made using the Fold & Staple function.1 Functions Use Internet ISW Set • To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW. See P. the Firmware stored in the Server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading. see FK-502 Service Manual. • Fold position: The adjustment range is -7.14 ADF For details. see DF-601 Service Manual. NOTE • When the following setting is set to “ON”.0 mm (in 1-mm increments). see FK-502 Service Manual.

ON “OFF” <Log-in Name> • Enter the Login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. <Server Address> • Enter the IP Address using the Version 4 method or FQDN method.2 HTTP Setting 10. • The default setting is OFF. A. <Authentication> • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is 60 sec. ON “OFF” B.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. Connection Time-Out Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time for the Timeout for accessing the Server. • Setting on the Proxy Server will be valid when this setting is “ON”. 2006 10. Data Input Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP Protocol. 3. • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server. Proxy Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Address and the Port Number for the Proxy Server. 30 to 300 sec. ON “OFF” C. • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server.17. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 • It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”. Connect Proxy Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to connect via Proxy Server when accessing the Server. • To use when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server. • To use when accessing the Server using the HTTP Protocol. <Password> • Enter the Password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. <Port Number> • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. • To use when changing the time for the Timeout for accessing the Server. Proxy Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Login name or Password when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server. E. • The default setting is OFF. 367 Adjustment / Setting . D.

• To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server. • To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) Mode (FTP Server side will inform the connection port before connecting). <Server Address> • Enter the IP Address using the Version 4 method or FQDN method. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 10. Data Input Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable downloading using FTP Protocol.3 FTP Setting • It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”. • Setting this to “ON” will enable the Proxy Server setting. of the Proxy Server. • To use when accessing the FTP Server. • The default setting is ON. • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server. Connection Setting Functions Use • To set the Port No. “ON” OFF B.) using the 10-key pad. <Port Number> • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.0 Aug. ON “OFF” C. 3. <PASV Mode> • The default setting is OFF. Connect Proxy Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to access the Server via Proxy Server. <Connection Time Out> • Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min. Adjustment / Setting D. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure 368 . <Port Number> • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. and also to set whether or not to enable PASV Mode. Proxy Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Address and the Port No. A.10. • To use when accessing the Server with FTP Protocol. and the time for Timeout when accessing the FTP Server.17. • The default setting is OFF.

• To use when updating the Firmware via network. 1. User ID Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the User ID for accessing the Program Server where Firmware is to be stored. Enter the User ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.17. 2006 10. NOTE • When it failed to connect to the Program Server. Service Mode bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting A. 10. 2. Select [Download].5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Download • Access the Program Server according to the Internet ISW setting. 2.Field Service Ver. 2. When connecting to ftp ftp:// (Host name or IP Address) / Directory name. NOTE • Enter the URL which format suits the Protocol to be used. 2. Enter the File Name (up to 63 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 1. See P. B. 369 . D. the error code and the message will be displayed. the Copier will automatically be restarted to complete the Internet ISW. 1. Select [User ID]. Select [FileName]. Touch [ISW Start] to start downloading the Firmware.4 Forwarding Access Setting 10. Check the cause of the error by the error code. URL Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the Address and Directory of the Program Server where the Firmware is to be stored in URL. Refer to “Error Cord List” for the error codes. Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select [URL]. Enter the Password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 1.17.69 4. 3. FileName Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the file name of the Firmware data to be downloaded. 1. and download the Firmware.0 Aug. When the Firmware is normally upgraded. Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the Password for accessing the Program Server where Firmware is to be stored. 2. and follow the message for resetting. or failed to download. When connecting to http http:// (Host name or IP Address)/ Directory name or https:// (Host name or IP Address)/Directory name. C. Select [Password]. The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting and transferring data.

372 P.372 P. 2.2 Exiting • Touch [Exit].372 P. Page P. Enhanced Security 11.371 P. Press the following keys in this order.11. Call the Service Mode to the screen.1 Enhanced Security Function Setting Procedure 11. Adjustment / Setting 11. 3.0 Aug.2 Enhanced Security Function Tree Service Mode Enhanced Security CE Password Administrator Password Administrator Feature Level CE Authentication IU Life Stop Setting NVRAM Data Backup Ref.373 370 .1. 1 4037F3E611DA 11.1 Procedure 1. Stop → 0→ Clear 3.1. Enhanced Security bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 11. Enhanced Security menu will appear.371 P.

0 Aug. • Use to change the Administrator Password. When forgetting the CE password.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure CE Password • To set and change the CE Password. call responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA. • Use to change the CE Password. NOTE • When the following setting leads to the Password Rules “ON”. • The initial setting is “12345678. New Password : Enter the new CE Password. the password with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one cannot be changed. 11. NOTE • When the following setting leads to the Password Rules “ON”. • Enter the CE Password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. 2006 11.” Current Password : Enter the currently using CE Password. 3.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security 11.Field Service Ver. the password with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one cannot be changed.3. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] • NEVER forget the CE password. Re-Input Password : Enter the new Administrator Password again. • Use this function when the administrator forget the Administrator Password because a new password can be set without entering the current Administrator Password with this. Re-Input Password : Enter the new CE Password again. 1 New Password : Enter the new Administrator Password.” .2 Functions Use Administrator Password • To set and change the Administrator Password. Enhanced Security bizhub C351/C450 11. • The initial setting is “92729272. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] 371 Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure • Enter the Administrator Password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.3.

Functions Use • To determine whether or not to authenticate CE Password as entering Service Mode.Original Stop Position ment Centering Auto Adjustment Auto Adj.3 Functions Use Administrator Feature Level • To set which Modes to be allowed for the Administrator to use in Service Mode. • The Modes allowed for the Administrator to use in each setting are as follows. set the CE Authentication to “ON” and change the initial CE Password beforehand. ON “OFF” 1 11. NOTE • For setting the following setting to “ON”.11. The default setting is Stop. 3.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure IU Life Stop Setting • To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life • Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF.3. 2006 11.3.0 Aug. Administrator Setting Function Printer Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Erase Leading Edge Leading Edge Adjustment System Setting → Expert Setting Scanner Adjustment Centering Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Centering ADF Adjust.4 Adjustment / Setting CE Authentication • It will not be displayed when the following settings are set to “ON”. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules]. “Stop” Not Stop 372 . of Stop Position Standard Size Setting Original Glass Original Size Detect Foolscap Size Setting Level 1 Level 2 € € € € € € € € € € € € Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Prohibit. • Use when allowing the Administrator to use some Modes in Service Mode. Enhanced Security bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. • Use when authenticating CE Password as entering Service Mode.3. Level1 Level2 “Prohibit” 11.

• Backup data can be restored by following the specified procedure when the trouble (CD3##) occurred. Touch [NVRAM Data Backup].0 Aug. 2006 11. 2. Wait for ten seconds or more and turn power back ON. Touch [Start] to start making a backup. Setting/ Procedure 373 .3. Check the message [Backup is completed. It usually makes backup every hour automatically. 3. and turn Main power OFF. See P.6 Functions Use 11. Refer to “Troubleshooting” for details on restoration procedure.]. 3. • To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unexpectedly.Field Service Ver. Enhanced Security bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting NVRAM Data Backup • To backup nonvolatile data (data stored in NVRAM) in the Copier to the Flash memory. • To backup data manually.456 1.

Stop → 9 3.2 Exiting • Touch [Exit].1 Billing Setting Function Setting Procedure 12.381 374 . 2.1. 2006 12.375 P. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1 4037F3E612DA 12.12. Billing Setting menu will appear.0 Aug.2 Billing Setting Function Tree Service Mode Billing Setting Counter Setting Management Function Choice Coverage Rate Clear Ref. Adjustment / Setting 12. Billing Setting 12. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Page P.1 Procedure 1.376 P. Press the following keys in this order. 3.1.

2: 2 counts. Others 2.3 Settings in the Billing Setting 12. Foolscap.) • Use to change the counting method for the counters. Others 1.1 Functions Counter Setting • To set the counting method for the Total Counter.) Use Setting/ Procedure 2 • A3/B4/11 x 17/81/2 x 14 • A3/11 x 17/B4/81/2 x 14/Foolscap • • • • Not counted (Default: Others 4. • To set the size regarded as the Large size (2 counts. it is regarded as the Large Size.3. 11 x 17. Others 3) NOTE • The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key counter. Japan) A3 and 11 x 17 (Default: US) A3. it is regarded as the Large Size. 1: 1 count. 11 x 14.Field Service Ver. 3: 3 counts. Size Counter • A3/11 x 17 : When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 399 mm at FAX scan). B4. and 81/2 x 14 (Default: Europe. and 81/2 x 14 ✽ Count-up Table Copying Size Mode 1 Total Size 2-sided Total 1 0 0 1-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 2 1 0 0 Specified sizes Mode 1 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 1 2 0 1 2-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 2 2 0 1 Specified sizes Mode 1 2 2 1 2 4 2 1 0: No count. Japan) Mode 2: Large Size is double counts (Default: US. Others 3) A3. 4: 4 counts 375 Adjustment / Setting . 3. : When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan direction and 355 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 337 mm at FAX scan). 2006 12.0 Aug. B4. Size Counter and Long Length Paper Counter. Total Counter Mode 1: 1 Count per 1 copy cycle (Default: Others 4. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 12. Others 2. Europe. : When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan direction and 330 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 313 mm at FAX scan). 11 x 17. Others 1. it is regarded as the Large Size (However the size in the main scan direction changes according to the Foolscap Size Setting.

• The default setting is Mode 4. 2 376 .3 to 915. Authentication Device.3. 2006 Long Length Paper Counter Mode • When printing on the long paper (457. • When the Authentication Device mount setting is set to “mount”. and 686. [Management Device 2].12. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Management Function Setting] → [Network Function Setting] Adjustment / Setting 2 A. Vendor or Key Counter IF Vendor NOTE • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Vendor 1]. PC FAX transmission / HDD TWAIN/PS Box Operator / PS Scan Direct / PS Job Spooler / Fiery: Scan to Box Also. (Only for Key counter.0 mm will be + 1 count) Mode 4: + 3 counts (457. Management Device (Data controller).3 to 686. the following applications will be invalid.0 Aug. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 1 Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • Select color mode of Key Counter. ✽ Message Type 1: Message for Key Counter Type 2: Message for Card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management B. [Vendor 2] or [Key Counter IF Vendor] is mounted. make sure that the [Internet Fax] setting is set to “OFF” with [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings]. Key Counter. • Set when the Key Counter IF Vendor is mounted. NOTE • The setting is available only when User Authentication and Account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. the counting value will be the total of the value set by the total counter mode and the value by this setting.1 to 915. 3. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • When the setting shows that [Management Device 1]. • Set when the Authentication Device (PageACSES) is mounted. the following setting will be set to “Disable”. the type of the color mode is same after mounting.0 mm will be + 2 count) 1 12. Authentication Device Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the Authentication Device is installed.3 mm or over).0 mm will be + 1 count.2 Management Function Choice • To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted. Key Counter IF Vendor Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the Key Counter IF Vendor is installed. Mode 1: + 0 count Mode 2: + 1 count Mode 3: + 2 counts (457.) • Select message of Vendor.

✽ Color Mode • When [Mode 1] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting]. • Set when the Management Device 1 is mounted. 3. Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle • When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting] and Large size is selected on [Large Size Counter Mode] Mode 1: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 6 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 8 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 10 counts per 1 copy cycle • When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting] and sizes other than Large Size are selected on [Large Size Counter Mode] Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle Setting/ Procedure ✽ Message Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted. 377 Adjustment / Setting . Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 • Set when the Key Counter is mounted. NOTE • The setting is available only when User Authentication is set “OFF” and Account Track is set “Off” or “Account Name + Password” with [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings]. D. 12. • Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the Key Counter is mounted.0 Aug. Key Counter Only Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the Key Counter is installed.Field Service Ver. Type 1: Message for Key Counter Type 2: Message for Card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management Type 4: Message for Remote SW NOTE • The setting is available only when User Authentication and Account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. Management Device 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the Management Device 1 is installed. 2006 C.

3.) Mode 2: Use non-contact type device (Logout with ID key is allowed. Management Device 2 Functions Use • To set whether or not the Management Device 2 is installed. (Only for Key counter. • Set when the Vendor 1 is mounted. ✽ I/F Type 1: Coin Vendor Type 2: Card Keeper ✽ Message Type 1: Message for Key Counter Type 2: Message for Card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management NOTE • The setting is available only when User Authentication and Account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. Adjustment / Setting 378 . 2 Setting/ Procedure F. NOTE • When using the Vendor along with the Key Counter.) NOTE • The setting is not available when either “External Server” of User Authentication. ✽ Management Setting • Select the Management Setting Mode Mode 1: Use contact type device (Logout with ID key is not allowed. • Set when the Management Device 2 is mounted. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.) • Select I/F and message of Vendor. “Password Only” of Account Track.12.0 Aug. “Do not synchronize” of User Authentication and Account Track or “Allow” of Public User Access has been set with [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings]. the type of the color mode and message are same after mounting. 2006 E. Vendor 1 Functions Use • To set whether or not the Vendor 1 is installed. Setting/ Procedure • Select color mode and message of Key Counter. inserting the Key Counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode” and removing it will set it to the “Vendor Mode”.

NOTE • Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below.0 Aug. ✽ I/F Type 1: Coin Vendor Type 2: Card Keeper ✽ Message Type 1: Message for Key Counter Type 2: Message for Card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management NOTE • The setting is available only when User Authentication and Account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Setting] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. PC print will and Print othbe set to ers will be set “ON”. PC print. PC print. PC print. (Only for Key counter. 379 . It needs resetting when canceling the setting in order to set back to “Not mounted” because the setting value will remain. and Print others will be set to “ON”. Vendor 2 Functions Use • To set whether or not the Vendor 2 is installed. 2 Setting Item Vendor 1 Factory Default Vendor 2 Factory Default ON ON Key Counter Authentication Key Counter IF Vendor Device Factory Default Factory Default ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Management Device 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Management Device 2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initial Setting Copy Operating Screen Utility Fax Active Screen Fax Basic Screen Default Setting Default Tab Network Function Setting Direct Input ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Administrator Setting OFF Copy will be set to “ON”.) • Select I/F and message of Vender. Send Data. and Print others will be set to “OFF”. and Print others will be set to “OFF”. Setting/ Procedure • Select color mode and message of Key Counter. to “ON”. ⎯ Copy.Field Service Ver. and Print others will be set to “ON”. 12. PC print. • Set when the Vendor 2 is mounted. 2006 G. Copy and Send Data. inserting the Key Counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode” and removing it will set it to the “Vendor Mode”. ⎯ ⎯ OFF Copy will be set to “ON”. the type of the color mode and message are same after mounting. Send Data. Send Data. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • When using the Vendor along with the Key Counter. Send Data. Copy. Each Function Setting (When IC-402 is not mounted) Copy. 3. PC print.

Changing Zoom Ratio Settings will be set to “Restrict”.) Prohibit ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ OFF Restrict Changing Job Priority. OFF OFF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Auto RX ⎯ ⎯ Administrator Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IPP Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Adjustment / Setting AppleTalk Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SMB Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ E-Mail TX (SMTP) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ E-Mail RX (POP) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Administrator Setting LDAP Setting Status Notification Setting Notification Item Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 380 . 3. IPP Setting will be set to “OFF”. 2006 Key Counter Authentication Key Counter IF Vendor Device Management Device 1 Management Device 2 2 Setting Item Each Function Setting (When IC-402 is mounted) Administrator Security Level Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Vendor 1 Vendor 2 Send Data will be set to “OFF”. Deleting Other User’s Jobs. and Accept IPP job will be set to “OFF”. E-Mail TX Setting.12. (Other settings are the same as IC-402 is not mounted. Print Setting will be set to “OFF”. All setting items will be set to “OFF”. Enabling LDAP will be set to “OFF”. E-Mail Notification. OFF Scan Setting. Scan to E-Mail. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. E-Mail RX Setting will be set to “OFF”. ON/OFF Setting will be set to “OFF”. Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Telephone Line Settings Forward TX Setting Incomplete TX Hold OpenAPI Setting OFF OFF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ OFF OFF Access Setting will be set to “Restrict” and Authentication will be changed to “OFF” setting. RegAccess to Job istering and Changing Addresses. Meter Count Notification will be set to “Restrict”.0 Aug.

Set • Touching [END] will clear the coverage rate. Billing Setting bizhub C351/C450 Coverage Rate Clear • To clear the coverage rate • Use to clear the coverage rate • The default setting is Unset.Field Service Ver. “Unset” 381 Adjustment / Setting .0 Aug. 2006 12. 3.3.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 12.

and make sure that the machine properly starts. Turn off the Main Power Switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.) Service Mode (System 1/2) Counter Setting Billing Setting Management Function Choice Fusing Optical Front Door Open/Close € ⎯ ⎯ € ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Main power switch Off/On ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ € € ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Trouble resetting ⎯ € € € € ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Initialization System Error Clear € € € ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Data Clear € ⎯ € ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ € ˆ *1 € € € Adjustment / Setting Adjustment of the touch panel position €: Will be cleared (initialized) ⎯: Will not be cleared ˆ *1: Items to be cleared Marketing Area (Fax Target Only) Foolscap Size Setting System 1 Install Date Tel/Fax Number No Sleep Original Size Detection System 2 HDD Image Controller Setting 382 . Procedure for Resetting 13. 5. or opening and closing the front door in case of a trouble. or opening and closing the front door. 1. Procedure for Resetting bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Use Setting/ Procedure 13.13. clear the status of the machine. 2. 2006 13. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.2 Contents to be cleared by Reset function 1 Items for clearing Contents to be cleared Jam display Rank A Malfunction display Rank B Rank C Erratic operation / display Utility Mode (Except items on Expert adjustment. • To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning power OFF and ON again.1 Trouble resetting Functions • If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning Main Power Switch OFF and ON again. Check to make sure that [OK] is displayed and the it has been reset. 4. 3. Turn Main Power Switch ON again while pressing the Utility/Counter key more than 10 seconds after.0 Aug. 3. Touch [Trouble Reset].

5. Remove 16 screws and the reinforcement frame.1 Adjustment of the Scanner Motor Belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Motor Assy has been removed.0 Aug. • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. Loosen the three screws that secure the Scanner Motor mounting bracket [1].Field Service Ver. [2] [1] [1] [1] [1] 3. Remove the IR Rear Cover. 2.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14. slide the Scanner Motor Assy [3] to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring [4]. With the Scanner drive gear set screw [2] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left. Mechanical adjustment 14. Tighten the three screws [2] to fix the Scanner Motor Assy into position. 2006 14. 4036fs3036c0 [2] [4] [2] [3] [2] 4. 3.1. 1. Perform this step three times. 4036fs3037c0 383 Adjustment / Setting [1] [1] [1] . Mechanical adjustment bizhub C351/C450 [1] 4037F2C076DB 14.

Mechanical adjustment bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.2 Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound [2] [1] 1. [2] [1] 4036fs3038c0 [3] 2. • Focus Positioning of the Scanner and Mirrors Unit must be completed. 2006 14. tighten the adjusting screw. loosen the adjusting screw (to which red paint is applied) [3] of the Mirrors Unit and press the carriage up against the cutouts. Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the center until it is pressed up against the cutouts in the rails [2].1.0 Aug.2 Scanner Position Adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Scanner Drive Cables have been rewound. If the Mirrors Unit is not pressed up against the cutouts. 4036fs3049c0 Adjustment / Setting 14.14. 3. Slide the Mirrors Unit [1] to the position shown on the left. [1] 1. 118 mm 4036fs3041c0 384 . Then.

0 Aug. 2006 [3] [2] 14. Mechanical adjustment bizhub C351/C450 Adjustment / Setting 2.Field Service Ver. 3. 3. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on the Bypass Guide Rack Gear [2] are aligned in a straight line. Make the Feed Direction Adjustment.3. Secure the Scanner [2] in the position shown on the left using the two Scanner positioning screws [3]. See P.1 Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed.3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section 14. [3] [1] 1. [2] [3] [2] 4036fs3050c0 385 .299 30 mm [3] 4036fs3040c0 14.

3.305 386 . Mechanical adjustment bizhub C351/C450 [1] Field Service Ver. carry out [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment]. See P. 5. When the Bypass Paper Size Unit base is mounted. Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that part A (edge) [2] of the Rack Gear [1] for the Bypass Paper Size Unit and part B [3] of the Bypass Unit Cover are aligned in a straight line. [3] [2] 4036fs3051c0 3. align the lever position of the Bypass Paper Size Unit with the tab at the center in a straight line. Then.0 Aug. 2006 2. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select [Machine] → [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment]. After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted. Adjustment / Setting 4036fs3052c0 4. check that the lever of the Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the Bypass Guide.14.

and paper location are displayed on the Control Panel of the machine. 3.Field Service Ver. [11] [9] [8] [7] [1] [2] [1] [2] [3] [3] [10] [5] [4] [9] [10] [5] [6] [6] 4037F4C501DA 387 . 2006 15.1 Misfeed Display • When a paper misfeed occurs. misfeed location.0 Aug. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 15. Jam Display 15. the misfeed message.

388 .1. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Display [1] Code *1 1101 3001 1201 [2] 2001 1001 [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] 1501 2001 9301 9201 1301 2001 1401 2001 3201 7403 7401 7402 7404 7405 7406 7401 7403 7404 7405 7407 6401 6402 6403 6404 9901 Misfeed Location Tray 1 take-up 2nd Image Transfer Tray 2 take-up Vertical Transport Manual Bypass take-up LCT take-up Vertical Transport Duplex Unit transport Duplex Unit pre-registration Tray 3 take-up Vertical Transport Tray 4 take-up Vertical Transport Exit Horizontal transport Field Service Ver. 2006 misfeed processing location Right Door Tray 2 Right Door Manual Bypass Slide Board LCT Right Door P.395 P.393 Duplex Unit Right Door [9] Finisher FS-507 / Job Separator JS-601 Finisher Door FS-507 [10] Finisher FS-603 Finisher Door FS-603 [11] ⎯ ADF Document Feeder Door ⎯ Duplex ⎯ System Control Jam 1 *1: JAM code will be displayed by the following setting.392 P.396 Paper Feed Unit Right Door P. [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Paper Jam History] Troubleshooting 15. and close the door.1 Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure • Open the corresponding door.15.399 FS-507 FS-603 Action P.398 P. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.0 Aug. 3.397 Right Door Horizontal transport cover P.

Field Service Ver. 389 Troubleshooting .2 Sensor layout 15.2.1 System Mounted with PC-402.0 Aug. [1] [2] [3]*1 [3]*1 [4] Exit Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Registration Roller Sensor OHP Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC30 PI1-DU PC28 PC27 PC1-DU [5] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 [6] Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor [7] Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor [8] LCT Vertical Transport Sensor [9] LCT Paper Feed Sensor PC1 PC107 PC2-LCT PC1-LCT *1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3]. 2006 15. 3. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] 4037F4C506DA 15.

2006 15.2. 3. 390 . [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] 4037F4C507DA [1] [2] Exit Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 PC30 PI1-DU PC28 PC27 PC1-DU PC108 [6] [7] [8] [9] Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC1 PC107 [3]*1 Registration Roller Sensor Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor PC117-PF Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC116-PF Troubleshooting [3]*1 OHP Sensor [4] [5] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor [10] Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor PC126-PF [11] Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC125-PF *1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3].0 Aug. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.15.2 System Mounted with PC-202.

wavy. 391 Troubleshooting . Instruct user in correct paper storage. deformed. first make checks of the following initial check items Check Item Does paper meet product specifications? Is paper curled. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. Change paper.Field Service Ver. Correct or change the defective actuator. Clean or change the defective roll/roller. Set as necessary. 2006 15. 3. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 15.1 Initial Check Items • When a paper misfeed occurs.3 Solution 15. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct position to accommodate paper? Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation? Clean or change the defective Paper Separator Finger. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. or damp. deformed.0 Aug. Change paper. or is the Clean or change the paper path. paper path deformed or worn? Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty.3.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) Exit Sensor (PC30) OHP Sensor (PC27) Control Board (PWB-MC) Registration Roller Clutch (CL3) Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Troubleshooting WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Initial check items PC1 I/O check. 2nd Image Transfer. energized. Fusing Misfeed A. (Except when feeding the paper from Tray 1) The leading edge of the paper does not block the Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) has been energized. (When the system speed is 60 mm/s or 165 mm/s) The OHP sensor (PC27) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC27 has been blocked by the paper. The OHP Sensor (PC27) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Detection Timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Exit Sensor (PC30) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Registration Roller Clutch has been 2nd Image Transfer. Sensor check PC30 I/O check. Sensor check PC28 I/O check. Sensor check PC27 I/O check. (When the system speed is 215 mm/s) *1 The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON.3. Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. a door or cover is opened and closed. Tray 1 take-up mis.15. 2006 15. Fusing misfeed The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a detection given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. (When the system speed is 215 mm/s) *1 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. a door or cover is opened and closed. Sensor check CL3 operation check CL1 operation check Change PWB-MC Action Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ22MC-8 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-6 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-12 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-2 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-14 (ON) PWB-MC PJ14MC-3 (ON) — Location (Electrical Component) — C to D-5 C to D-3 C to D-4 C to D-3 C to D-4 C to D-5 to 6 — 392 .(When the system speed is 60 mm/s or 165 mm/s) feed detection The leading edge of the paper does not block the OHP Sensor (PC27) after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) has been energized. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Detection of paper left in 2nd Image Transfer Detection of paper left in Tray 1 *1 bizhub C450 only B. a door or cover is opened and closed.2 Tray 1 take-up. 3.

Sensor check PC108 I/O check. The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC108) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Bypass Paper Bypass Feed Clutch has been energized. a door or cover is opened and closed. Vertical Transport. Paper left at Tray 2 or Bypass Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Detection Timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 2 Paper Feed Tray 2 take-up. a door or cover is opened and closed. Paper left at Tray 2 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor B. Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Action Tray 2 take-up.Motor has been energized.0 Aug. Multiple Bypass take-up 15. tical Transport misThe Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a feed detection given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108). Ver.3 Tray 2 take-up. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Vertical Transport Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC107 I/O check. 2006 15. Sensor check PC28 I/O check. 3.Field Service Ver. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting A. Sensor check M102 operation check Change PWB-Z Action Control Signal — PWB-Z PJ6Z-8 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-MC PJ24MC-6 (ON) PWB-Z PJ5Z-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — T to U-26 T to U-27 C to D-3 T to U-22 — 393 . or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.3.

15. Sensor check CL101 operation check Change PWB-Z Action Control Signal — PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ7Z<B>-14 (ON) — Location (Electrical Component) — T to U-27 T to U-24 — Troubleshooting 394 .0 Aug. 2006 Manual Bypass take-up Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC108 I/O check. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.

4 LCT Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-402) 15. Paper left at LCT Misfeed detected as a result of The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Vertical TransThe Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a port Section given period of time after the paper has blocked the LCT Transport Roller Motor (PC2-LCT). 2006 15. 3. delayed deactivation of sensor B. Detection Timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the LCT Transport Roller Motor (PC2Misfeed detected LCT) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Paper Feed Motor has at LCT take-up or been energized. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON.Field Service Ver. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Sensor check PC108 I/O check. a door or cover is opened and closed. Sensor check PC2-LCT I/O check. Sensor check M1-LCT operation check Change PWB-C1 LCT Action Control Signal — PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — PC-402 C-7 to 8 PC-402 C-7 T to U-27 PC-402 C-8 — 395 . a door or cover is opened and closed.3.0 Aug. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting A. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC1-LCT I/O check. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.

The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Paper left at Tray 3 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor B. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 Initial check items PC116-PF I/O check.5 Tray 3 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC-102/PC202) A. Tray 3 take-up or Vertical Transport The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse Section of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF). The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Detection Timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC117-PF) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor has been energized. a door or cover is opened and closed. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Sensor check PC108 I/O check.15.0 Aug.3. 3. The Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. Sensor check PC117-PF I/O check. a door or cover is opened and closed. 2006 15. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Sensor check M122-PF operation check Change PWB-C2 PF Action Control Signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2PF-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ5C2PF-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — PC-202 C-4 PC-202 C-4 T to U-27 PC-202 C-4 — Troubleshooting 4 5 6 396 .

6 Tray 4 Take-up and Vertical Transport Misfeed (PC202) 15. Sensor check PC126-PF I/O check. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting A. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Sensor check PC117-PF I/O check. a door or cover is opened and closed. Tray 4 take-up or Vertical Transport The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even after the Section lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF). a door or cover is opened and closed. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray 4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC125-PF I/O check. Paper left at Tray 4 Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactivation of sensor B. 3. The Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper.3. Detection Timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor Misfeed detected at (PC126-PF) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray 4 Paper Feed Motor has been energized.0 Aug. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.Field Service Ver. The Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. The Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. 2006 15. Sensor check M123-PF operation check Change PWB-C2 PF Action Control Signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2PF-2 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2PF-11 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ9C2PF-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — PC-202 G-6 PC-202 G-6 PC-202 C-4 PC-202 G to H-6 to 7 — 397 .

Detection Timing Type Description The Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a Duplex paper take-up sequence has been started. Sensor check PC1-DU I/O check. Duplex Transport Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Sensor check PI1-DU I/O check.7 Duplex Transport Misfeed A.0 Aug. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not blocked even after the lapse Misfeed detected at of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU). Sensor check M1-DU operation check M2-DU operation check Change PWB-A DU Change PWB-MC Action Control Signal — PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) — — PWB-A DU PJ3A-1 to 4 PWB-A DU PJ2A-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical Component) — T to U-27 Duplex Unit E-6 Duplex Unit C-6 Duplex Unit C-5 Duplex Unit C-5 — — Troubleshooting 5 6 7 8 398 .15. 2006 15.3. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC28 I/O check. a door or cover is Transport Section opened and closed. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the paper. Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 Paper left at Duplex (PC1-DU) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. 3. Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. B.

Paper left at Exit Section Exit Sensor (PC30) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is turned ON. 3. Sensor check PI1 I/O check.8 Fusing/Exit Misfeed 15. Detection Timing Type Description PC30 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the Exit Sensor (PC30). Jam Display bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting A. Sensor check Change PWB-MC Action Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ24MC-12 (ON) — — Location (Electrical Component) — C∼D-4 Duplex Unit E-6 — 399 . 2006 15. a door or cover is opened and closed. Action Relevant Electrical Parts Exit Sensor (PC30) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC30 I/O check.3.Field Service Ver. B. Misfeed detected at Fusing/Exit Section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Exit Sensor (PC30) has been unblocked by the paper during a switchback sequence.0 Aug. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.

Maintenance call mark Troubleshooting 4037F4E503DA 400 . on detecting a malfunction. 16.0 Aug. • On completing the restarting sequence. 3. the machine restores its operation to its ordinary condition. gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Control Panel. • Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the State Confirm screen. Malfunction code 16.2 Alert code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. 2006 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.1 Restarting • This machine automatically performs a restarting sequence if a minor fault that would not damage the machine occurs during operation.16. • No screen information is given for the restarting sequence.

IDC Sensor (Front) failure • The output from the photoreceiver of the IDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point of a bare surface on the Transfer Belt is 4.000 ms while the K PC Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0). P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9 Cyan Imaging Unit failure Magenta Imaging Unit failure Yellow Imaging Unit failure Black Imaging Unit failure P-21 Color Shift Test Pattern failure P-22 Color Shift Test Pattern failure P-26 ATVC (K) failure P-27 ATVC (2nd) failure P-29 ATVC (color) failure • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of color. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction.1 Alert list 16.0 V or less after the adjustment has been completed. 3. • The skew correction amount is greater than the specified value.5 g/m2 (IDC Sensor photoreceiver output) or less during max. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 • If an image stabilization or Scanner fault occurs. • The number of points detected in the main scan direction is more or less than the specified value during main scan direction registration correction.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment). 2006 16. • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the first image transfer ATVC value of Black. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction.3 V or more during an adjustment of the IDC Sensor.2. • The output from the photoreceiver of the IDC Sensor that takes a reading of a point in a toner pattern on the Transfer Belt is 1. • The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1. the corresponding warning code appears. • The output from the Color PC Drum Main and Sub Sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1. • All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the Transfer Belt are 0. . • The number of points detected in the Sub Scan Direction is more or less than the specified value during sub scan direction registration correction.000 ms while the Color PC Drum Motor is turning stably and the Lock signal is active (LOW-0). Code S-1 P-5 Item Description • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment CCD clamp gain adjustment failure value is faulty. P-30 Color PC Drum Main Sensor malfunction P-31 K PC Drum Main Sensor malfunction 401 Troubleshooting • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value.

CCD surface. 2006 16. Change PWB-MC 5 6 Troubleshooting 402 . and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty. if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged.1 S-1: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Action Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty. Clean the lens. and select [State Confirmation] → [Level History 1] to check the IDC value. or change Scanner. Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or PC9 if it is installed or connected improperly.3.3 Solution 16. Change PWB-C.0 V or less. Clean PC8 or PC9 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door. mirrors. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. change PC8 or PC9.3.16. IDC1: PC8.3 P-5: IDC Sensor (Front) failure P-28 IDC Sensor (Back) failure Relevant Electrical Parts IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (PC8) IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (PC9) Step 1 2 3 4 Control Board (PWB-MC) Image Transfer Belt Unit Action Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth. Change PWB-A.0 Aug. run an image stabilization sequence. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 16. IDC2: PC9 If the value is 1. 3.3.2 16.

4 16. 2006 16. 16. Clean the IDC Sensor window if dirty Clean the contact of the Imaging Unit connector if dirty Change Imaging Unit. if it is dirty Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit if the Transfer Belt is damaged.3. 3. Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary.9 P-22: Color Shift Adjust failure Relevant Electrical Parts IDC / Registration Sensor /1 (PC8) Step 1 2 3 IDC / Registration Sensor /2 (PC9) Action Check the LED retraction lever for locked position and. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Action Select [Image Process Adjustment] → [D Max Density] and.3.0 Aug. if there is any faulty condition evident.7 P-6: Cyan Imaging Unit failure P-7: Magenta Imaging Unit failure P-8: Yellow Imaging Unit failure P-9: Black Imaging Unit failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit C Imaging Unit M Imaging Unit Y Imaging Unit K Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Image Transfer Belt Unit 16. 16.Field Service Ver.3.5 16. Reinstall or reconnect PC8 or PC9 if it is installed or connected improperly.3. readjust.3.8 P-21: Color Shift Test Pattern failure Relevant Electrical Parts Image Transfer Belt Unit Step 1 2 Action Wipe clean the surface of the Transfer Belt with a soft cloth. Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit. Check the Vertical Transport Guide for installed position and correct as necessary. slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall it in position. 403 Troubleshooting .6 16.3. if the setting value is negative.

Call the [Sensor Check] screen to the screen by way of Service Mode. Open the Front Door and turn ON the Main Power Switch of the machine. for which a faulty condition has been checked. Change PWB-MC. 404 . 16.16. 2006 16. Check the sensor.12 P-26: 1st image transfer ATVC (Black) failure P-27: 2nd image transfer ATVC failure P-29: 1st image transfer ATVC (Color) failure Relevant Electrical Parts High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) Control Board (PWB-MC) Step 1 2 3 4 Image Transfer Belt Unit Action Check the contact of the Transfer Belt Unit and that of HV2 for connection and clean or correct the contact as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.14 P-31: Black PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts K PC Drum Main Sensor (PC11) K PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC36) Control Board (PWB-MC) Troubleshooting Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure *1. Change PWB-MC. 2. 3. 16. Clean PC10 or PC35 if it is dirty Open and close the Left Door to reset the fault. *1: Faulty sensor check procedure 1.3. If P-31 persists.3. 5. Change HV2. Close the Front Door and start [Stabilizer]. Change the Image Transfer Belt Unit.3. for installed position and proper connector connection.3.10 16. If P-30 occurs again. 3.3. During the Stabilizer sequence. for which a faulty condition has been checked.0 Aug. change PC10 or PC35. A sensor is faulty if its value does not change. change the sensor which was found faulty.13 P-30: Color PC Drum Sensor malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Main Sensor (PC10) Color PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC35) Step 1 2 3 4 5 Control Board (PWB-MC) Action Reinstall or reconnect PC10 or PC35 if it is installed or connected improperly. Change PWB-MC. Wipe the sensor. check to see if the values of the phase detection sensors (Color PC Drum Main/Sub and K PC Drum Main/Sub Sensors) change.11 16. clean of dirt if any. 4.

See PC-402 Service Manual. C0001 LCT communications error C0102 LCT Vertical Transport Motor malfunction C0204 Tray 2 Elevator failure B B B C0206 Tray 3 Elevator failure C0208 Tray 4 Elevator failure C0209 LCT Elevator Motor malfunction (Elevator malfunction) C0210 LCT ascent motion failure C0211 Bypass lifting motion failure See PC-402 Service Manual. 3.Field Service Ver.4 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. B C0212 LCT Shift Motor malfunction C0213 LCT shifting failure C0214 LCT ejection failure C0215 LCT Shift Gate malfunction B B B B 405 . on detecting a malfunction.4. • The Bypass Lift-up Sensor is not unblocked even when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the take-up position to the standby position was started. 2006 16. see the Service Manual for the corresponding option. Code Item Description See PC-402 Service Manual.0 Aug. 4037F4E505DA 16.1 Trouble code list * For the details of the malfunction codes of the options. gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Control Panel. B B • The Bypass Lift-up Sensor is not blocked even when the Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the Paper Lifting Plate from the standby position to the take-up position was started. Rank B B • The Lift-up Sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting 16. See PC-102/PC-202 Service Manual.

0 Aug. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Code Item Field Service Ver. 3.16. See FS-507or FS-603 Service Manual. Rank B C0301 Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn C0351 Paper Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn C1180 Finishing option transport system malfunction C1181 Finishing option Paddle Motor malfunction C1182 Finishing option Shift Motor mechanism malfunction C1183 Finishing option Elevator drive malfunction C1190 Finishing option Aligning Bar moving mechanism malfunction C1192 Finishing option Front Aligning Motor malfunction C1193 Finishing option Rear Aligning Motor malfunction C11A1 Finishing option Exit Roller pressure/retraction failure C11A2 Finishing option Storage Roller pressure/retraction failure C11A4 Finishing option Exit Motor malfunction C11B0 Finishing option Stapler Unit CD drive failure C11B1 Finishing option Stapler Unit Slide Motor malfunction C11B2 Finishing option stapling mechanism malfunction 1 C11B3 Finishing option stapling mechanism malfunction 2 C11B4 Finishing option Staple/Folding Motor malfunction C11C0 Punch Motor malfunction C11C1 Finishing option Punch Cam Motor drive failure C11C2 Finishing option Punch Unit Board malfunction C11C3 Finishing option Punch Side Registration Motor malfunction C11C4 Finishing option Punch Motor malfunction C11C5 Finishing option Punch Sensor malfunction B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B C C C C C Troubleshooting 406 . 2006 Description • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.

malfunction C2163 Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2164 PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2251 K PC Motor’s failure to turn • The SCD signal is detected for a continuous 0. 2006 Code Item Description 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Rank B C1401 Finishing option Backup RAM failure C2151 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure See FS-507or FS-603 Service Manual. BB B C2255 Color Developing Motor’s failure • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeto turn termined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. • The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not activated (retracted position) within 2 sec. C2256 Color Developing Motor’s turning • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predeat abnormal timing termined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. 3. B B 407 .5sec. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt's pressing motion. after the 1st Image Transfer Pressure/ Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the Transfer Belt's retracting motion. C2254 Color PC Drum Motor’s turning at abnormal timing • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.5-sec. after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller's pressing motion. • The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 1 sec. B B B B B B C2252 K PC Motor’s turning at abnormal timing B C2253 Color PC Drum Motor’s failure to • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeturn termined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. period while the PC Drum Charge Corona is being energized. B C2152 Image Transfer Belt pressure/ retraction failure B C2160 Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction • An output is automatically produced from the PC Drum Charge Corona of each color when the malfunction resetting procedure is performed after C2161 Magenta PC Drum Charge C2164 (PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction) Corona malfunction has been detected.Field Service Ver. The SCD signal is detected C2162 Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona for a continuous 0. after the 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning during a sequence of the 2nd Image Transfer Roller's retracting motion.0 Aug. • The 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor is not activated (retracted position) within 5 sec. • The 2nd Image Transfer Pressure Position Sensor is not deactivated (pressed position) within 2 sec. period at this time. • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning.

• T/C 0. 2006 Description • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. B C2451 New Transfer Belt Unit resetting failure C2551 Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor B B C2552 Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor B C2553 Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor B C2554 Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor B C2555 Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor B Troubleshooting C2556 Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor B C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor C2558 Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor B B 408 . • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a Rank B C2257 Cleaning Brush Motor failure to turn C2258 Cleaning Brush Motor’s turning at abnormal timing C2351 Toner Suction Fan Motor/K’s failure to turn C2352 Toner Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn B B predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • T/C 15.16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Code Item Field Service Ver. • T/C 12 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • T/C 15.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • T/C 0. • T/C 15. • T/C 3 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control.21 % or less is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. • A new installation is not detected when a new Transfer Cleaner Unit (Image Transfer Belt Unit) is installed.5 % or more is detected ten consecutive times in the Developing Unit as validated through the toner replenishing amount determination control. 3. • T/C 0.0 Aug.

• The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • A condition of “EEPROM is not connected” or “There is an access error” is detected in EEPROM of the Imaging Unit. 3. • No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0. C2652 Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2653 Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2654 Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2655 Cyan LPH correction data download failure C2656 Magenta LPH correction data download failure C2657 Yellow LPH correction data download failure C2658 Black LPH correction data download failure C3101 Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure C2651 Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error B C3201 Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn C3202 Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing C3301 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 failure to turn 409 . after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller’s pressing motion.5 sec. after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller’s retracting motion.5 sec.Field Service Ver. failing to adjust to an appropriate value. • The Fusing Pressure Position Sensor is not activated (pressed position) even when 30 encoder sensor pulses are counted after the Fusing Pressure/Retraction Motor has started turning for a sequence of the Fusing Pressure Roller’s pressing motion. 2006 Code Item Description 16.0 Aug. C C C C • No change is observed in the encoder sensor pulse even after the lapse of 0. C2559 Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255A Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255B Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255C Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure • TCR Sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting B B B Rank B B B B C C C C • An error is detected while the LPH correction data is being downloaded from EEPROM of LPH to PWB-MFPC when the Main Power Switch is turned ON.

or more after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. A B A A C3851 Heating Roller abnormally low temperature Troubleshooting A C3852 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature A 410 . • The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 °C within 50 sec. or Power Save. or more during Power Save. • The voltage of the Heating Roller Thermistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec. • A temperature of 190 °C or more of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a print cycle. or more during a standby state. or more during a standby state. • A temperature of 120 °C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more during a print cycle. 3. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Code Item Field Service Ver. • A temperature of 80 °C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec.0 Aug. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. print cycle.16. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. or more during a standby state. • . Rank B C3302 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 or Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 failure to turn C3451 Heating Roller warm-up failure A C3452 Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up • The voltage of the Fusing Pressure Roller Therfailure mistor does not increase by five steps within 20 sec. C3751 Heating Roller abnormally high temperature C3752 Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature • A temperature of 225 °C or more of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. • The temperature of the Heating Roller does not reach 100 °C and that of the Fusing Pressure Roller does not reach 195 °C within 200 sec. or more. • A temperature of 120 °C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. • A temperature of 70 °C or less of the Heating Roller is detected for 1 sec. • No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec. after the predrive of the Fusing Roller has been started during a warm-up cycle. • A temperature of 215 °C or more of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. C3461 New Fusing Unit resetting failure • A new installation is not detected when a new Fusing Unit is installed. • No zero cross signal is detected even with the lapse of 1 sec. or more during Power Save. after the Heating Roller Heater Lamp has been turned ON. or more before the start of the heater temperature control. A temperature of 80 °C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec. or more after the start of the heater temperature control. 2006 Description • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • A temperature of 80 °C or less of the Fusing Pressure Roller is detected for 1 sec.

• The hardware involved with the extraction function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) does not respond. • Memory of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is faulty. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.0 Aug. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Rank C C4705 Printer Time Out C4761 Compression hardware timeout • No image data is output from the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). B C5103 Main Motor turning at abnormal timing C5351 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn C5353 Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn C5354 Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn C5355 Cooling Fan Motor 3’s failure to turn C5356 Cooling Fan Motor 1’s failure to turn B B B B B B C5370 MFP Control Board Cooling Fan • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predeterMotor’s failure to turn mined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. C 411 . • The hardware involved with the compression function offered by the MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) does not respond. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. C C C C • The Motor Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor is turning. 3. • The Motor Lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. C C4765 Extraction hardware timeout C C C C C C4770 JBIG0 Error C4771 JBIG1 Error C4772 JBIG2 Error C4773 JBIG3 Error C4780 Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure C4781 Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C4782 Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C4783 Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure C5102 Main Motor’s failure to turn • The MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is faulty. 2006 Code Item Description 16.Field Service Ver. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary.

• The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner when the Scanner has moved 5 mm from the position. • The average output value of the CCD Sensor with the Scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value or more at the end of a scan job. • The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment. Rank C6102 Scanner Home Sensor malfunction B C6103 Scanner overrun failure B C6301 Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn C6704 Scanner Time Out B C C6751 CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure B C9401 Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON C9402 Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing A A CA051 Standard controller configuration • The controller of the MFP Control Board (PWBfailure MFPC) is faulty. Release Error C C 412 .0 Aug. • The Scanner Home Sensor detects the Scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the time when a prescan command and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a home return command is executed. • The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect a Scanner even when the Scanner Motor has been driven to move the Scanner over the maximum traveling distance. • Image data is not input from the Image Processing Board (PWB-C) to the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). 2006 Description • The Scanner Home Sensor is unable to detect the Scanner located at its home position.16. • A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface. • The output from the CCD Sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD Sensor gain adjustment. See FK-502 Service Manual. at which it blocks the Scanner Home Sensor. • The Fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the Motor remains stationary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Code Item Field Service Ver. • The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment. C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CA053 Controller start failure CB001 FAX Board Error 1 CB002 FAX Board Error 2 CB003 FAX Board Error 3 CB051 FAX Board mount failure 1 CB052 FAX Board mount failure 2 CB110 FAX Driver Error: Instance Generation Error or Observer Registration Error CB111 FAX Driver Error: Configuration Space Initialization NG CB112 FAX Driver Error: Semaphore Acquisition. 3. CA052 Controller hardware error • A controller hardware error is detected in the network I/F.

0 Aug. 3. 16. 2006 Code Item Description See FK-502 Service Manual. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Rank C C CB113 FAX Driver Error: Sequence Error among Main Body Tasks CB114 FAX Driver Error: Message Queue Control Error CB115 FAX Driver Error: Main Body Sequence Error among FAX Boards CB116 FAX Driver Error: FAX Board Nonresponse (Nonresponse after Initialization) CB117 FAX Driver Error: ACK Waiting Timeout Error CB118 FAX Driver Error: Receiving Undefined Frame CB119 FAX Driver Error: DMA Transfer Error CB120 JC Soft Error CB122 Device Error (GA LOCAL SRAM) CB123 Device Error (DRAM) CB125 Device Error (GA) CB126 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from DC during Suspension Process CB127 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from CC during Suspension Process CB128 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from LINE during Suspension Process CB129 Timeout Error due to Nonresponse from File System/File Driver during Suspension Process CB130 MIF Driver Error: Driver Soft Error CB131 MIF Driver Error: Reception Frame Length Error from Main CB132 MIF Driver Error: Reception Frame Header Error from Main CB133 MIF Driver Error: 232C i/f Sequence Error CB134 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM i/f Sequence Error CB135 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM CTL/ STL Register Error CB136 MIF Driver Error: AKC Waiting Timeout C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 413 .Field Service Ver.

0 Aug. 2006 Description See FK-502 Service Manual. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Code Item Field Service Ver.16. Rank C C C C C C C C C CB137 MIF Driver Error: DPRAM RESET Reception CB140 MSG I/F Error with JC CB141 I/F Error with Main: I/F Error with Driver CB142 I/F Error with Main: Undefined Command Reception CB143 I/F Error with Main: Command Frame Length Error CB144 I/F Error with Main: Command Parameter Length Error CB145 I/F Error with Main: Undefined Parameter CB146 I/F Error with Main: Command/ Response Sequence Error CB150 Line Control: External Class Instance Acquisition Error CB151 Line Control: Job Start Error (Starting Job Parameter Error/ Child Job Generation Error) CB152 Line Control: Doc Access Error (Report Buf Access Error) CB153 Line Control: Response Wait Timeout from External Task CB154 Line Control: Internal Que Table Control Error (create/enque/ deque) CB160 1 Destination Control: Instance Generation Error CB161 1 Destination Control: Timeout Error CB162 1 Destination Control: Interface Error C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CB163 1 Destination Control: Message Que Control Error CB164 1 Destination Control: Semaphore Acquisition Release Error CB165 1 Destination Control: Observer Registration Error CB166 1 Destination Control: Reception Resource Check Error CB167 1 Destination Control: Deployment Error of Sending Image Information CB168 1 Destination Control: Serialization Error of Receiving Image CB169 1 Destination Control: Access Error to Quick Memory Data C C C 414 . 3.

• Unable to communicate between the hard disk and MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the MSC (PWB-MFPC) during starting • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the PWB-C during starting. • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the Control Board during starting. • Abnormality of saved data (document information) is detected at data check in hard disk during starting. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Rank C CB170 Page Control: Internal Que Table See FK-502 Service Manual. Control Error (create/enque/ deque) CB171 Page Control: Instance Generation Error CB172 Page Control: Timeout Error CB173 Page Control: Interface Error CB174 Page Control: Semaphore Acquisition Release Error CB175 Page Control: Observer Registration Error CB176 Page Control: Unable to Check TTI Domain CB177 Page Control: Error Return from TTI Rasterizer CB178 Page Control: Receiving Job Generation Error CB185 Page Control: Receiving Data Size Logic Error (Receiving Data are not Multiples of DotLine) CB186 Page Control: ImageBuf Acquisition (alloc) Error CB187 Page Control: Error Return from Compressor CB188 Page Control: BandBuf Control Error (newInstance/get/free) CC001 Vendor connection failure • It is detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with “Installed” selected for the setting of vendor installation. • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM contents check of the LPH Board during starting. 2006 Code Item Description 16. • The error in save of JOB data to the Memory/ Hard Disk and its read error are detected. 3. C C C C C C C C C C C C C CC151 ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) CC152 ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) CC153 ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) CC154 ROM contents error upon startup (LPH) CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) C C C C C 2 CD001 Hard disk initialization abnormality CD002 JOB RAM save error CD004 Hard disk access error C C C 415 . • The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine is being checked.0 Aug.Field Service Ver.

CD251 No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting CD3## NVRAM Data error • JPEG board (Scan Accelerator Kit) is not mounted when the JPEG board mounting is set ON at Service Mode. C - 416 . • Unformatted hard disk is connected. 2006 Description • Hard disk is faulty. • Abnormality is detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM Data. • Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting. • The file has any abnormality. • The FAX board is not mounted when the FAX board mounting is set ON at Service Mode. • A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is connected. Rank C C C C C C C C C C • Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty. CD204 Expanded memory unit not mounted at JScribe able CD211 PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure • The optional expanded memory unit is not mounted when Jscribe is set able at Service Mode.0 Aug. • Hardware related to the transfer of memory image of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) fails to respond. C - 2 CD231 No Fax memory at FAX board mounting C 2 2 2 CD241 Encryption board setting error C C CD242 Encryption board mounting error • The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting. C C C C C CD005 Hard Disk Error 1 CD006 Hard Disk Error 2 CD007 Hard Disk Error 3 CD008 Hard Disk Error 4 CD009 Hard Disk Error 5 CD00A Hard Disk Error 6 CD00B Hard Disk Error 7 CD00C Hard Disk Error 8 CD00D Hard Disk Error 9 CD00E Hard Disk Error A CD00F Hard disk data transfer error CD010 Hard disk unformat CD011 Hard disk specifications error CD020 Hard disk verify error 2 2 CD201 File memory mounting error CD202 Memory capacity discrepancy C 2 2 CD203 Memory capacity discrepancy 2 • File memory capacity on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is not enough. • File memory capacity necessary for duplex printing is not enough during Duplex unit mounting.16. • The DIMM for FAX is not mounted during the FAX board is mounting. C C 2 C 2 Troubleshooting CD212 Compression/extraction timeout • Hardware related to the BTC compression funcdetection tion of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) fails to respond. • File memory capacity on the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) is not enough. • The data abnormality is detected by the HDD verify check. CD22# Trouble related to Security • Contact the responsible people of KONICA MINOTLTA before taking some countermeasures. 3. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Code Item Field Service Ver. • The file memory is not mounted.

etc. • An undefined malfunction occurs in the Scanner Section. • An undefined malfunction occurs in the Engine Section (PWB-MC.0 Aug. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Rank C C C C 2 CD370 NVRAM Data multiple errors CDC## Trouble related to Security • Multiple errors (Over 5) are detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data. failure CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction occurring CEEE2 Scanner Section undefined malfunction CEEE3 Engine Section undefined malfunction • An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). 417 . 3. CE002 Message and Method parameter • Unspecified data or parameter is detected.Field Service Ver.). • Contact the responsible people of KONIKA MINOTLTA before taking some countermeasures. 2006 Code Item Description 16.

Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.16. and Options • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) Rank C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C ASIC1 Error ASIC2 Error ASIC3 Error Image transfer Error between Electronic sorting Board and MFP Control Board C C C CF001 CT_SingleList Table Abnormal CF002 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal CF003 CT_DoubleList Table Abnormal CF004 CT_Queue Full Abnormal CF011 ArrayLink Abnormal CF012 FAT Link Abnormal CF013 File Size Abnormal CF021 setDelayMessage Table OverFlow CF022 procSetBootParamTcpipAddress() injustice CF023 MsgQue OverFlow CF031 getJobPageToIPE() page number injustice CF032 getJobHDDPageToIPE() page number injustice CF033 setDivTbl() limitation over CF034 HDDQUEUE Over Flow CF041 getAPPPtrFromAPPID() abnormal CF042 getAPPIndexFromAPPID() abnormal CF051 CC_InputPageEntry:operator[] page injustice CF061 IdeCommand_Set() status Abnormal Troubleshooting CF062 IdeCommand_Set() parameter Abnormal CF091 PCI ASIC1 ERROR CF092 PCI ASIC2 ERROR CF093 PCI ASIC4 ERROR CF101 SCAN TIME OUT C 418 . check the electrical component. • When the system program is aborted. 3. option. Relevant Electrical Components. Units. unit.0 Aug. 2006 • The machine displays an abort code (CFXXX) on the Control Panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition. 1 Code Item An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W.

0 Aug.Field Service Ver. and Options Compression function Error on Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) 1 Code CF111 Compress TIME OUT Item Rank C C C C C C CF112 Compress Table OverFlow CF113 Compress Table check CF121 Expand TIME OUT CF122 Expand Table OverFlow CF123 Expand ExpandLine Abnormal CF131 Print TIME OUT Image transfer Error between Electronic sorting Board and MFP Control Board An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Components. 2006 16. C CF201 startIRReadAnd Compress()Sequence CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence Abnormal CF203 convAPItoIJCParameter()page Abnormal CF204 calcCompresserUse()CmpExpID Abnormal CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane() Table OverFlow CF212 convAPItoIJCParameter()page Abnormal CF213 calcExpandUse() CmpExpID Abnormal CF221 startPrintOutput outputsize zero CF222 Next request comes during processing of startPrintOutput () CF223 Next request comes during processing of startWorkLoadOutput () CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout C C C C C C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) Communication Error (between IR-Systems) Image transfer Error on IR Input Bus C C C C C C C C C C C C CF411 Parity error CF421 Overrun error CF431 Parity error + Overrun error CF441 Framing error CF451 Parity error + Framing error CF461 Overrun error + Framing error CF471 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF412 Parity error CF422 Overrun error CF432 Parity error + Overrun error CF442 Framing error 419 . 3. Units.

0 Aug. and Options Communication Error • MFP Control Board (PWB(between IR-SysMFPC)/Copier Board tems) (PWB-CF) 1 Code Item Rank C C C CF452 Parity error + Framing error CF462 Overrun error + Framing error CF472 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF510 Parity error CF520 Framing error CF530 Parity error + Framing error CF540 Overrun error CF550 Parity error + Overrun error CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF580 Frame distortion of ADF CF600 Report receiving of print start that is out of sequence CF601 Report receiving of paper feeding that is out of sequence CF604 Outside IF/Command Queue CF614 “Output sequence” Queue CF624 Panel LCD date Queue CF704 Common data “Delete-waiting HDD accumulated job ID” Queue CF714 IRC/Command Queue CF724 Communication Error (IR detected) C C C C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine C C C C C Communication Error • MFP Control Board (PWB(IR detected) MFPC)/Engine An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W. • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF)/Control Panel • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C Engine/Command Queue C Troubleshooting CF734 Panel/Command Queue CF744 File Memory Transfer start-waiting Command Queue CF754 File Memory Compression requesting Command Queue CF764 Panel instruction delete job Queue CF774 Warning delete job Queue CF784 Application instruction delete job Queue CF794 Output page information for Duplex back side Queue C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C C 420 . Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Units. 2006 Relevant Electrical Components.16. 3.

...EPNet CF902 CF906 SIO Receiving Port. • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) 1 Code Item Rank CF7A4 Paper feed completion output pate information Queue CF7B4 Exposure compaction output page information Queue CF7C4 Pre-discharge completion output page information Queue CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data Queue CF7E4 Direct Key data Queue CF802 CF806 SIO Sending Port.. 2006 16.Fiery SIO Sending Port.PIC/PIC Terminal CF8ED SIO Sending Port.ENG C C C C C C C C C C C C C CF915 SIO Receiving Port....IRC CF812 SIO Sending Port...Field Service Ver... 421 .IRC CF912 SIO Receiving Port..EPNet CFA01 getOneImgTransInfoFromTh() No applied thread CFA02 chkEnableAllocExec() default error CFA03 setTransBandAndRepeatNum() error CFA04 Application ID error CFA05 Thread selection image processing mode error CFA06 getOneImgIndexNumFromTh() No applied thread CFA07 setBufBandFromOut() No applied thread CFA08 chkStartOutput() No applied thread CFA09 rptReleaseMemResultACS() No applied thread An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W.ENG C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board/ Electronic sorting Board • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C C C C C CF815 SIO Sending Port...0 Aug.... Units. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Components....Fiery SIO Receiving Port. 3. and Options An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W.PIC/PIC Terminal CF9ED SIO Receiving Port.

cpp.h CFA42 pcbuf_inout. • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) 1 Code Item Rank CFA10 rptEndBandTrans() No applied thread CFA11 cancelTransExec() No applied thread CFA12 CC_ImgTransInfo:allocTransIndex CFA13 CC_MultiThreadProfile:rptBuf2 MemClrEnd CFA21 Outside image input start CFA22 Inside image outside output start CFA23 Engine Input start CFA24 Buffer memory → File memory transfer Start CFA25 BTC compression/CMM start CFA26 Inside image PCIBridegDMA input/output start CFA27 File memory → Buffer memory transfer Start CFA28 BTC extension start CFA29 JPEG compression start CFA30 JPEG extension start CFA31 Software resolution conversion start CFA32 Hardware resolution conversion start CFA33 Software rotating processing start CFA34 Other Sequence malfunction CFA35 Buffer Array malfunction CFA36 Thread Service malfunction C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CFA37 Input image height 0 CFA38 Output image width 0 CFA41 pcbuf_exinput.cpp.16. 3.h CFA43 pcbuf_exoutput.h CFA61 DMA A CFA62 DMA B CFA63 DMA C CFA64 DMA D CFA65 DMA E CFA66 DMA F CFA67 DMA G 422 .0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Components.cpp. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. and Options An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W. Units.

0 Aug. C C CFB60 PCI slave error interruption • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/FAX Board/Local I/ F Board/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) C 423 .Field Service Ver. Units. 3. • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) 1 Code CFA68 DMA H CFA69 DMA I CFA70 DMA J CFA71 Interruption CFA72 Common register setting CFA73 PCIBridgeDMA Item Rank C C C C C C C C CFA74 BTC compression/Extension device CFA75 CMM CFB52 DMA_A error interruption Error concerning Data transmission Bus or hardware (IR Input system) Error concerning Data transmission Bus or hardware (inside the Board) Error concerning Data transmission Bus or hardware (Engine output system) Error concerning Data transmission Bus or hardware (inside the Board) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) C CFB53 DMA_B error interruption CFB54 DMA_C error interruption CFB55 DMA_D 0 error interruption CFB56 DMA_D 1 error interruption CFB57 DMA_D 2 error interruption CFB58 DMA_D 3 error interruption CFB59 CFB5A DMA_F error interruption CFB5B DMA_G error interruption DMA_E error interruption C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C C CFB5C DMA_H error interruption CFB5D CFB5E CFB5F C DMA_I error interruption DMA_J error interruption An exceptional instance occurred Watch Dog Timer Error interrupdue to the unextion pected Parameter in the System F/W. 2006 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Components. and Options An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W.

• MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/ JPEG Board C C C C C 424 .An exceptional put interface 1 instance occurred due to the unexCFB73 Overflow at DMA_A/B image pected Parameter in output interface 1 the System F/W. CFBA5 CFBA6 CFBA7 CFBA8 JpegASIC error interruption DMA_C error occurred. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. CFB74 Underrun at DMA_F ASIC 1 image output interface CFB75 Overflow at DMA_C ASIC 1 image input interface CFB76 Target abort CFB77 Master abort CFB78 Forced stoppage CFB79 Retry error detection of PCI master CFB7A Master read data parity error CFB7B Master write data parity error CFB7C System error CFB7D Slave read data parity error PCI Bus connection Device error • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CFB7E Slave write data parity error CFB7F Address parity error JpegASIC Error interruption CFBA4 DMA_A error occurred. and Options An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W.16. Units. JpegASIC error interruption PCI slave detected an error. Error concerning Data transmission Bus or hardware (Engine output system) • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C 1 Code CFB61 Item Rank Local bus error interruption CFB6E Underrun at DMA_D 0 image output interface 1 CFB6F Underrun at DMA_D 1 image output interface 1 CFB70 Underrun at DMA_D 2 image output interface 1 CFB71 Underrun at DMA_D 3 image output interface 1 • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C C C C CFB72 Underrun at DMA_G image out. 2006 Relevant Electrical Components.0 Aug. 3. JpegASIC error interruption Watch dog timer error occurred. JpegASIC error interruption DMA_D error occurred.

Error interruption JpegASIC error interruption CFBB2 JPEG system interruption occurred in more than one status during inner process mode with DMA_A.Field Service Ver. An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W. JpegASIC error interruption System error occurred. CFC13 Image transfer control information acquisition malfunction 425 . JpegASIC error interruption Slave read data parity error occurred. CFBB6 CFBB7 CFBB8 CFBB9 CFBBA CFBBB CFBBC CFBBD CFBBE CFBBF JpegASIC error interruption Target abort occurred. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Components. and Options • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/ JPEG Board 1 Code Item Rank JpegASIC error interruption JPEG system interruption occurred during inner proCFBAF cess mode with DMA_A. Units. JpegASIC error interruption Forced outage occurred. JpegASIC error interruption Master abort occurred. JpegASIC error interruption Master write data parity error occurred.0 Aug. JpegASIC error interruption CFBB3 EOI is not detected even after the set volume of data is transferred during extension with DMA_A JpegASIC error interruption CFBB4 Compressed data exceeded the set value during compression with DMA_A. JpegASIC error interruption PCI master detected the retrial error. 3. JpegASIC error interruption Master read data parity error occurred. C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C C C C CFC01 Color Number faulty CFC02 Thread Sequence malfunction CFC03 Thread Service Sequence malfunction CFC04 Thread Message Q malfunction CFC12 Output of output buffer 2 surpasses clear. 2006 16. JpegASIC error interruption Slave write data parity error occurred. JpegASIC error interruption CFBB5 EOI is not detected even after the set volume of data is transferred during compression with DMA_A. JpegASIC error interruption Address parity error occurred.

2006 Relevant Electrical Components.16. Units.0 Aug. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. and Options • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) 1 Code Item Rank CFD00 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A0 CFD01 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A1 CFD02 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A2 CFD03 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_B0 CFD04 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_B1 CFD05 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_B2 CFD06 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_C CFD07 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_D CFD08 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_E CFD09 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_F ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_G C C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C CFD0A C CFD0B ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H0 CFD0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H1 CFD0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_H2 CFD0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA-I C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C Troubleshooting CFD0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA-J CFD10 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA PCI Bridge CFD11 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA 19 ASIC1 C CFD12 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA JPEG CFD13 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA NO CFE00 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line=0: DMA_A0 C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) C 426 .

and Options • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) 1 Code Item Rank CFE01 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_A1 CFE02 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_A2 CFE03 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_B0 CFE04 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_B1 CFE05 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_B2 CFE06 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_C CFE07 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_D CFE08 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_E CFE09 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_F ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_G C C C C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C CFE0A C CFE0B ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_H0 CFE0C ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_H1 CFE0D ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA_H2 CFE0E ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA-I CFE0F ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA-J CFE10 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMAPCI Bridge CFE11 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA19 ASIC1 C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C C CFE12 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA JPEG CFE13 ASIC10 Timeout Number of DMA under operation and transfer completion line≠0: DMA NO CFF00 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_A0 CFF01 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_A1 CFF02 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_A2 C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) C C C 427 . 2006 16.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Components. 3. Units.

and Options • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Copier Board (PWB-CF) 1 Code Item Rank CFF03 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_B0 CFF04 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_B1 CFF05 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_B2 CFF06 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_C CFF07 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_D CFF08 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_E CFF09 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_F ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_G C C C • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/External Control Interface Board • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) C C CFF0A C CFF0B ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_H0 CFF0C ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_H1 CFF0D ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA_H2 CFF0E ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA-I CFF0F ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA-J CFF10 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA PCI Bridge CFF11 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA 19 ASIC1 C C C • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Engine • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) • MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC)/Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) • MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) C C C C Troubleshooting CFF12 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA JPEG CFF13 ASIC10 Timeout Waiting state of DMA band preparation register setting:DMA NO C C 428 .0 Aug. 2006 Relevant Electrical Components.16. 3. Units. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

• Opening/Closing the Dront Door • Turning Main Power Switch OFF/ON 429 .5 How to reset • Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble code. 3. 2006 16. * List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures Trouble Code Rank Rank A Rank B Rank C Resetting Procedures • Trouble Reset For details of Trouble Reset. see Adjustment/Setting.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting 16.

PC115 I/O check M103 operation check Change PWB-Z. Control Signal — — PWB-Z PJ7Z<A>-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ5Z-5 to 8 — Location (Electrical Component) — — T to U-25 T to U-22 — 1 2 3 4 Troubleshooting 5 430 .1 C0204: Tray 2 Elevator failure Relevant Electrical Parts Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC105) Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M101 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.6. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.2 C0211: Manual Bypass Paper Lifting Failure Relevant Electrical Parts Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC115) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M103 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of M101 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Control Signal — — PWB-Z PJ6Z-3 (ON) PWB-Z PJ4Z-4 to 5 — Location (Electrical Component) — — T to U-26 M-24 — 1 2 3 4 5 16. 2006 16.16. PC115 I/O check M101 operation check Change PWB-Z.6. 3. Check the connector of M103 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.0 Aug.6 Solution 16.

0 Aug. M26 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ7MC-8 (REM) PWB-MC PJ7MC-10 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 16. M12 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ13MC-7 (REM) PWB-MC PJ13MC-9 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. PC29 I/O check M13 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ24MC-9 (ON) PWB-MC PJ13MC-1 (REM) — 1 2 3 4 431 .6. 3.3 C0301: Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Suction Fan Motor (M12) Control Board (PWB-MC) 16.5 C2151: 2nd Image Transfer Roller pressure/retraction failure Troubleshooting Location (Electrical Component) Relevant Electrical Parts 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC29) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M13 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — C to D-2 — — — K-8 — — C to D-3 C to D-2 — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. 2006 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.6.6.Field Service Ver.4 C0351: Paper Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Paper Cooling Fan Motor (M26) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.

8 16. 3.16. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — 1 Troubleshooting 2 3 4 5 432 .6.6 C2152: Image Transfer Belt pressure/retraction failure Relevant Electrical Parts 1st Image Transfer Retraction Position Sensor (PC12) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M11 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.10 16.11 C2160: Cyan PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2161: Magenta PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2162: Yellow PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2163: Black PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction C2164: PC Drum Charge Corona malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y Imaging Unit /K High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the Imaging Unit contact and correct or clean as necessary. Change HV1.6. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 16.7 16.6.6.9 16. Check the HV1 contact and correct or clean as necessary. PC12 I/O check M11 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ20MC-6 (ON) PWB-MC PJ7MC-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical Component) — C to D-22 K-7 — 1 2 3 4 16.6.0 Aug.6.

6.6. Control Signal PWB-MC PJ33MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — H-2 C to D-18 — C to D-18 — — — H-2 C to D18 to 19 — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.6. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ2MC-3 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ33MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 16. M5 operation check (C0018) Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ2MC-7 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ33MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-13 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 433 Troubleshooting . Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. 2006 16. M7 operation check Change PWB-MC.Field Service Ver. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.14 C2253: Color PC Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.12 C2251: K PC Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts K PC Motor (M7) Control Board (PWB-MC) 16.0 Aug. 3.13 C2252: K PC Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts K PC Motor (M7) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action M7 operation check Change PWB-MC.

15 C2254: Color PC Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control Signal PWB-MC PJ33MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ33MC-13 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) C to D18 to 19 — 1 2 M5 operation check Change PWB-MC 16.16.6.6. Check the PU-1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Aug. M6 operation check Change PU-1 Control Signal — — PU1 PJ5PU1-11 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ3MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ3MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — P-5 K-15 — 1 2 3 4 5 16. 2006 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6.16 C2255: Color Developing Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Color Developing Motor (M6) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. 3.17 C2256: Color Developing Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Color Developing Motor (M6) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Troubleshooting Step Action M6 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal PWB-MC PJ3MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ3MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) K-15 — 1 2 434 . Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

3.Field Service Ver.20 C2351: Toner Suction Fan Motor/K’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Toner Suction Fan Motor/K (M23) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M23 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — H-2 K-3 — K-3 — — — C to D-21 — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M22 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.6. 2006 16. Control Signal PWB-MC PJ37MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ37MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 16. Check M23 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M22 operation check Change PWB-MC.6. Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ2MC-9 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ37MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ37MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 16. M23 operation check Change PWB-MC.19 C2258: Cleaning Brush Motor Turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action M22 operation check Change PWB-MC.0 Aug. Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ15MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-12 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 435 Troubleshooting . Check M22 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.6.18 C2257: Cleaning Brush Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) Control Board (PWB-MC) 16.

M20 operation check Change PWB-MC. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ15MC-1 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-3 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D20 to 21 — 1 2 3 4 16. 2006 16.6.21 C2352: Toner Suction Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M20 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Aug.6.23 C2451: New Transfer Cleaner Unit resetting failure C3461: New Fusing Unit resetting failure Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 Reinstall Unit Change PWB-MC Action Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) — — Troubleshooting 436 . Check M20 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. 3.6.22 16.16.

25 16. M3.0 Aug.6. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.26 16.Field Service Ver. Clean the TCR Sensor LED if dirty Change TCR Sensor C/M/Y. Control Signal — — — — — PWB-MC PJ8MC-1 to 4 PWB-MC PJ8MC-5 to 8 — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — C∼D-14 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 437 Troubleshooting . M4 operation check Change Imaging Unit.6.24 16.6. 3. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts TCR Sensor/C (PWB-N3) TCR Sensor/M (PWB-N2) TCR Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low. 2006 16. Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Correct the TCR Sensor spring moving part if faulty.

3. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC. Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ8MC-1 to 4 — — — Location (Electrical Component) — C to D-14 — — — Troubleshooting 1 2 3 4 5 438 .27 16.6.6.29 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected Cyan TCR Sensor C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected Magenta TCR Sensor C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected Yellow TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts TCR Sensor/C (PWB-N3) TCR Sensor/M (PWB-N2) TCR Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Clean the TCR Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and/or WIRING of the TCR Sensor if faulty.28 16. Change TCR Sensor C/M/Y.16. M3 operation check Change Imaging Unit.0 Aug. 2006 16. Change Imaging Unit.30 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected Black TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts TCR Sensor/K (UN10) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.6. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6. Control Signal — — — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16.

Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC.6. M3. Control Signal — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 16.33 16.0 Aug.6. Change Imaging Unit. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC. Reinstall Imaging Unit C/M/Y. 2006 16.32 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — — — — — — — — C to D-14 — — — C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected Black TCR Sensor Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /K TCR Sensor/K (PWB-N4) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty.Field Service Ver. M4 operation check Change Imaging Unit.31 16. 3.34 C2559: Cyan TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255A: Magenta TCR Sensor adjustment failure C255B: Yellow TCR Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts TCR Sensor/C (PWB-N3) TCR Sensor/M (PWB-N2) TCR Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the TCR Sensor window on the underside of the Imaging Unit if dirty Clean the TCR Sensor LED if dirty Correct the contact and/or WIRING of the TCR Sensor if faulty.6. Control Signal — — — — PWB-MC PJ8MC-1 to 4 PWB-MC PJ8MC-5 to 8 — — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 439 Troubleshooting .6. Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit if faulty.

Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.16. Change Imaging Unit.6. Clean or correct each contact of the Imaging Unit if faulty.6. Control Signal — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 16.0 Aug.6.37 16. 2006 16.35 C255C: Black TCR Sensor adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /K Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the Imaging Unit if faulty.6. Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — 1 Troubleshooting 2 3 4 440 . Change Imaging Unit.36 16.38 16. Change PWB-MC Change PWB-MFPC. 3.6.39 C2651: Cyan Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2652: Magenta Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2653: Yellow Imaging Unit EEPROM access error C2654: Black Imaging Unit EEPROM access error Relevant Electrical Parts Imaging Unit /C Imaging Unit /M Imaging Unit /Y Imaging Unit /K Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the connection between the Imaging Unit and the machine if dirty Reinstall Imaging Unit C/M/Y/K.

42 16. PC33 I/O check PC33 operation check M19 operation check Change Fusing Unit Change PWB-MC Control Signal — PWB-MC PJ26MC-12 (ON) — PWB-MC PJ14MC-5 to 6 — — 2 3 4 5 6 441 Troubleshooting 1 — .6.6.40 16.6. 2006 16.44 C3101: Fusing Pressure Roller pressure/retraction failure Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) Control Board (PWB-MC) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor Fusing Unit (M19) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M9 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFPC. Change LPH Assy.Field Service Ver. Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16.6.41 16. Change PWB-LED. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — C to D-6 — — LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the harness connection between LPH and PWB-LED if faulty.0 Aug.6. Correct the harness connection between PWB-LED and PWB-MFPC if faulty. 3.43 C2655: Cyan LPH correction data download failure C2656: Yellow LPH correction data download failure C2657: Magenta LPH correction data download failure C2658: Black LPH correction data download failure Relevant Electrical Parts LPH Assy/C LPH Assy/M LPH Assy/Y LPH Assy/K 16.

Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.45 C3201: Fusing Drive Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M2 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.16.6.46 C3202: Fusing Drive Motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action M2 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal PWB-MC PJ31MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-13 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) C to D-17 — 1 2 16.6. 2006 16. M9 operation check Change PU-1 Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ6MC-4 (REM) PWB-MC PJ6MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — K-9 — 1 2 3 4 442 .6.47 C3301: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /1’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Troubleshooting Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. M2 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ2MC-5 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ31MC-10 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-13 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — H-2 C to D-17 — 1 2 3 4 5 16.0 Aug. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the Fusing Unit drive for possible overload and correct as necessary.

3.0 Aug.54 C3451: Heating Roller warm-up failure C3452: Fusing Pressure Roller warm-up failure C3751: Heating Roller abnormally high temperature C3752: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally high temperature C3851: Heating Roller abnormally low temperature C3852: Fusing Pressure Roller abnormally low temperature Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Unit DC Power Supply (PU1) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the Fusing Unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). 2006 16. Change Fusing Unit.53 16.51 16.52 16. M15. /3’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16) Control Board (PWB-MC) 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.6. Control Signal — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — 443 Troubleshooting .6.Field Service Ver.6. PWB-MC and PU1 for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change PWB-MC Change PU1.6.6.49 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — C to D-21 — — — — — — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.6. Check the Fusing Unit.48 C3302: Fusing Cooling Fan Motor /2.50 16. M16 operation check 3 Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ15MC-4 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-6 (LOCK) PWB-MC PJ15MC-7 (REM) PWB-MC PJ15MC-9 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 4 Change PWB-MC 16.6.

60 16.59 16.] → [Memory Bus Check] → [Memory→PRT.65 C4761: Compression hardware timeout C4765: Extraction hardware timeout C4770: JBIG0 Error C4771: JBIG1 Error C4772: JBIG2 Error C4773: JBIG3 Error C4780: Compressor 0 command buffer stop failure C4781: Compressor 1 command buffer stop failure C4782: Compressor 2 command buffer stop failure C4783: Compressor 3 command buffer stop failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Change PWB-MFPC. Troubleshooting Control Signal — Location (Electrical Component) — 1 444 .58 16.6. 2006 16.63 16.6.6.6.0 Aug.6.57 16.6.6. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — 1 — 2 3 — — — — 16.6. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6.] Check the connectors on PWB-MFPC for proper connection and correct as necessary.56 16.6.62 16.55 C4705: Printer Time Out Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.6.16.64 16. Change PWB-MFPC.61 16. 3.

67 C5103: Main Motor Turning at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor (M1) Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action M1 operation check Change PWB-MC.Field Service Ver. Change PU1.6.66 C5102: Main Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Main Motor (M1) Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) 16.0 Aug. M1 operation check Change PWB-MC. Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — H-2 C to D-17 — — C to D-17 — — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PU1. 2006 16. Control Signal PWB-MC PJ31MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 445 Troubleshooting .6. 3. Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ2MC-1 (DC24 V) PWB-MC PJ31MC-3 (REM) PWB-MC PJ31MC-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 6 16. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

M21 operation check Change PU-1 Control Signal — — PU1 PJ10PU1-3 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — M to N-1 to 2 — 1 2 3 4 16.68 C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21) DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug.6. 2006 16.70 C5354: Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Troubleshooting Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. M18 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ6MC-1 (REM) PWB-MC PJ6MC-3 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — K-8 to 9 — 1 2 3 4 446 .6. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M10 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ7MC-6 (REM) PWB-MC PJ7MC-7 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — K-8 — 1 2 3 4 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.6.69 C5353: Cooling Fan Motor 2’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.

6.6. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — C to D-12 — — — C to D-12 — — — M-17 — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. 2006 16. M27 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-SIF PJ08SIF-3 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 447 .73 C5370: MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor (M27) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 3.71 C5355: Cooling Fan Motor/3’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M25) Control Board (PWB-MC) 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. M25 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ40MC-1 (REM) PWB-MC PJ40MC-3 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 16. M24 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-MC PJ40MC-4 (REM) PWB-MC PJ40MC-6 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 16.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.72 C5356: Cooling Fan Motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M24) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.6.

Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Check the PC201.16. Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 — PWB-C PJ11C-8 (ON) PWB-IC PJ3IC-1 (REM) PWB-IC PJ3IC-3 (LOCK) — — — N-13 S-9 — — 16. Correct the Scanner Motor set screw if loose.6. gear.75 C6102: Scanner Home Sensor malfunction C6103: Scanner overrun failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Scanner Motor (M201) Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct or change the Scanner drive (cable. 2006 16.74 16.6. 3. M201.0 Aug. PC201 I/O check M201 operation check Change PWB-IC. M202 operation check Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — PWB-C PJ81C-2 (REM) PWB-C PJ81C-3 (LOCK) — Location (Electrical Component) — — N-10 — Troubleshooting 1 2 3 4 448 . pulley. Change PWB-C. PWB-IC and PWB-C connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.6. Adjust [Image Position Leading Edge] and [Feed Direction Adjustment].76 C6301: Scanner Cooling Fan Motor’s failure to turn Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary. belt) if it is faulty. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.

Clean the lens. 2006 16.] → [Memory Bus Check] → [Scanner→Memory]. mirrors. Change PWB-C.6. Control Signal — — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 5 6 449 Troubleshooting . and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the Scanner if faulty. or change Scanner.Field Service Ver. Check the connectors between PWB-C and PWB-CF for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Aug. Change PWB-A.78 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the harness connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty. Change PWB-MFPC.77 C6704: Scanner Time Out Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Copier Board (PWB-CF) 16.6. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 1 — 2 3 4 — — — 16. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — — — — — — — — — Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. 3. Change PWB-C. CCD surface.

Change PWB-MFPC. Check the connectors of the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change Scanner Assy.80 C9401: Exposure Lamp’s failure to turn ON C9402: Exposure Lamp turning ON at abnormal timing Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy Flat Cable Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the flat cable for proper connection and correct or change as necessary.6. Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Aug. Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 450 .6. 2006 16. Change PWB-C.6. Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 16.16.82 Troubleshooting CC001: Vendor connection failure Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-MC) Coin Vendor (Japan) Coin Vendor Kit (North America.81 CA051: Standard Controller configuration failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made: [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Image Controller Setting].6. Europe) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the Vendor connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. 3. If the setting is changed. be sure to turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch.79 16. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 1 — — 2 3 — — — — 16. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

2006 16. Control Signal — — — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 4 451 Troubleshooting . Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) 2 16.0 Aug. Format Hard Disk. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — — — — — — — WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 Action Check the ROM version.83 16.6.6.6.6.89 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the Hard Disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.6.87 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 Action Check the ROM version. Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) 16. Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card.85 16.6. Change PWB-MFPC. Change Hard Disk.88 CD001: Hard disk initialization abnormality CD002: JOB RAM save error Relevant Electrical Parts 16.84 16. 3. Rewrite firmware using the Compact Flash card.6.86 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) CC154: ROM contents error upon startup (LPH) 16.Field Service Ver.

6.6.97 16.6. Reinstall the Dard Disk. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 2006 16.6.16.101 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error 1 16. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 — — — 452 .6.95 16. Change PWB-MFPC.92 16. Change Hard Disk.] → [HDD Format].102 CD020: Hard disk verify error Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Electronic Sorting Board (PWB-ES) Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the Hard Disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change Hard Disk.6.96 16.90 16.6.6.6. 3.6.6. Change PWB-ES.6.91 16.100 CD00E: Hard Disk Error A 16.98 16. Control Signal — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. Change PWB-MFPC.94 16.6.6.99 CD004: Hard disk access error CD005: Hard Disk Error 1 CD006: Hard Disk Error 2 CD007: Hard Disk Error 3 CD008: Hard Disk Error 4 CD009: Hard Disk Error 5 CD00A: Hard Disk Error 6 CD00B: Hard Disk Error 7 CD00C: Hard Disk Error 8 CD00D: Hard Disk Error 9 16.93 16.103 CD010: Hard disk unformat Troubleshooting Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Hard Disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.

106 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy 16.” See P. — — — — 453 Troubleshooting Step Action Location (Electrical Component) . 2006 16. Change PWB-MFPC.107 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Work Memory (D_WORK0) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check to see if the memory (D_WORK0) on PWB-MFPC is installed correctly.6. For details of setting.Field Service Ver. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — — — — — — — — WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 Action Check the Hard Disk specifications. Change the optional expanded memory unit (EM-306).108 CD204: Expanded memory unit not mounted at JScribe able Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Expanded Memory Unit EM-306 (option) WIRING DIAGRAM Control Signal Check to see if JScribe is able or disable in the following setting.336 2 3 3 Check to see if the optional expanded memory unit (EM-306) is installed correctly. select “CS Remote Care”.6. see “Adjustment/Setting.105 CD201: File memory mounting error 16. Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 3 2 16. Change the memory (D_WORK0) on PWBMFPC.104 CD011: Hard disk specifications error Relevant Electrical Parts Hard Disk 16.0 Aug.6. [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Communication System Setting] 1 * When JScribe function is not used. 3.6.6. Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) 2 16. Change the Hard Disk. Change PWB-MFPC.

111 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) PCI Expansion Board FAX Board FAX Memory WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check to see if the FAX Memory is installed correctly. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — 1 2 — — 454 .109 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure 16.6.6.112 CD241: Encryption board setting error 16.113 CD242: Encryption board mounting error Relevant Electrical Parts Troubleshooting Encryption Board (SC-503) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the Encryption Board connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change FAX Memory. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 2 Field Service Ver. Control Signal — — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 2 16. Change PWB-MFPC.16.6.110 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 Action Change PWB-MFPC. Change Encryption Board. Control Signal — Location (Electrical Component) — 2 16. Check to see if the PCI Expansion Board is installed correctly. 2006 16.0 Aug. 3. Check to see if the FAX Board is installed correctly.6.6.

Field Service Ver. Change JPEG Board. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — — — — 16. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 1 — 2 3 4 5 — — — — 455 Troubleshooting . 2006 2 16. Change PWB-MFPC. Change PCI Expansion Board.0 Aug. 3.114 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) JPEG Board (SA-501) PCI Expansion Board WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the JPEG Board connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the PCI Expansion Board connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.6.

Touch [*]. NOTE • When the restoration is performed in a short time. • Data backup will be automatically performed every hour. 4. 5.373 1. which can be restored with one restoration command. Touch the following code on the trouble code display screen. data restoration screen may not be displayed.115 CD3##: NVRAM Data error • When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost.16. 3. Backup can also be performed manually with the following setting. 4037F4E602DA 3. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.6.0 Aug. backup data can be used for restoration. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [NVRAM Data Back Up] See P. Stop → 0 → 7 → 1 → 3 → 9 2. Turn Main power OFF. 2006 16. The screen will be shifted to the data restoration screen to perform data restoration. return to the trouble code screen. Check the message which indicates that the data restoration was successfully conducted. 456 . and wait for ten seconds or more to turn it back ON. [*] will be displayed on the trouble code screen. Troubleshooting NOTE • In case it failed to restore data. 2 • Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected.

[Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Initialization] → [Data Clear]. 2006 16.] → [HDD Version Up] See P. 3. See P.335 Format Hard Disk.117 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connectors on PWB-MFPC for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MFPC.6. Change PWB-MFPC.116 CE002: Message and Method parameter failure Relevant Electrical Parts MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Hard Disk 16.6. conduct the following setting. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 1 1 — 2 — 3 4 5 — — — 16. and conduct the following setting.0 Aug. [Service Mode] → [Sate Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) 1 2 — — 457 Troubleshooting .359 Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again.Field Service Ver. Change Hard Disk. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 — — — — — — — WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action If it occurred after upgrading the Firmware.

6. Malfunction code bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Change PWB-C.0 Aug. Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 16.16.119 CEEE3: Engine Section undefined malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the PWB-MC connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PWB-MC Control Signal — — Location (Electrical Component) — — 1 2 Troubleshooting 458 . 3. 2006 16. Change PWB-A.118 CEEE2: Scanner Section undefined malfunction Relevant Electrical Parts Scanner Assy CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the connector connection between PWB-A and PWB-C if faulty.6.

1 2 3 4 5 Q to R-4 to 5 — P-6 to 7 Q to R11 to 12 Y-3 to 4 NO NO NO NO YES 6 459 Troubleshooting . 3.F2) on PU1 conducting? Is DC5 V being output from PJ13PU1-1 on PU1 and DC24 V from PJ12PU1-1? Is PJ12C on PWB-C securely connected? Is CN1UN201 on UN201 securely connected? WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) — Result NO NO Action Reconnect or change the I/F cable. Power supply trouble bizhub C351/C450 17. Reconnect. Change PU1. Change PU1. Change UN201. Check the WIRING from the wall outlet to SW1 PJ1PU1. Change PU1. Change PWB-MC 1 2 3 4 5 NO NO NO NO YES 17.2 Control panel indicators do not light.Field Service Ver.) WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) Q to R-4 to 5 — P-4 to 5 Q to R-6 I-13 Result NO Action Check WIRING between the wall outlet and PJ1PU1. Change PU1.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check) Relevant Electrical Parts Main Power Switch (SW1) Control Board (PWB-MC) DC Power Supply (PU1) Step Check Item Is a power voltage supplied across PJ1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? Are the fuses (F1 and F2) on PU1 conducting? Is DC24 V being output from PJ5PU1-2 on PU1? Is DC5 V being input to PJ7PU1-1 on PU1? Is DC5 V being input to PJ1MC-7 on the Control Board? (LED on PWB-MC does not blink. Power supply trouble 17. Change PU1. Reconnect.0 Aug. Relevant Electrical Parts Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Panel (UN201) DC Power Supply (PU1) Step Check Item Is the I/F cable between the Scanner and engine connected properly? Is a power voltage being applied across PJ1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1? Is the fuse (F1. 2006 17. Change PWB-C. Change PU1.

Troubleshooting 1 2 460 . Power supply trouble bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Is the power source voltage applied across CN44-1 and 3. Check wiring from PU1 to Duplex. 3. Malfunction in DF-601 1 2 17. Change F203.0 Aug. Change F201. or across 2 and 3? WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) Result NO Action Check wiring from power outlet to SW5 to PJ4PU1. Malfunction in Duplex. Change PU1. 1 R-6 2 S-6 YES NO 17.17. Change PU1.4 Power is not supplied to ADF Step Check Item Is DC24 V being output from CN51-1 on DF601? Is DC24 V being output from PJ12PU1-4 on PU1? Is the fuse (F201) on PU1 conducting? 3 — WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) S-14 O to P-7 Result YES NO YES NO Action Malfunction in DF-601 Check wiring from PU1 to CN53 to ADF. 2006 17. Fusing Unit Change PU1.5 Power is not supplied to duplex Step Check Item Is DC24 V being output from CN42-1 on Duplex? Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1-1 on PU1? Is the fuse (F203) on PU1 conducting? 3 — WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) J-10 O to P-3 Result NO NO YES NO Action Malfunction in Duplex.3 Fusing Heaters do not operate Relevant Electrical Parts Upper Right Door Switch (SW5) Fusing Unit DC Power Supply (PU1) Step Check Item Is the power source voltage applied across PJ4PU1-1 and 3 on PU1? During this time. the Right Door should be closed.

6 Power is not supplied to option 17. F205. 3.2 Finisher WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) K-14 NO Check wiring from PU1 to Finisher. Malfunction in Finisher. Change PU1. Change F204. Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet 1 NO 2 P-3 NO YES 3 — NO 17. Change PU1.6. Change F202. respectively. of the Finisher? Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to PJ5PU1-9 and PJ10PU1-5 on PU1. Power supply trouble bizhub C351/C450 17.0 Aug. Step Check Item Are DC24 V and DC5 V being applied to CN20-11 and CN20-1.6. respectively? Are there continuity in the 24-V fuse (F202) and 5-V fuse (F205) on PU1? Result NO Action Malfunction in Finisher.Field Service Ver. 1 2 P-5 R-7 YES — NO 3 461 Troubleshooting .1 Optional paper feed cabinet WIRING DIAGRAM (Location) O-27 Step Check Item Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connector CN28-1? Is DC24 V being output from PJ6PU1-2 on PU1? Is the fuse (F204) on PU1 conducting? Result Action Malfunction in Paper Feed Cabinet Check wiring from PU1 to CN48 to Paper Feed Cabinet. 2006 17.

High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias) 462 . the numeric values set for [State Confirmation] available from Service Mode can be used to isolate the cause of the image problem. Image quality problem 18. 3. 2006 18. High Voltage Unit (Developing Bias) Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced. A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller. Relevant Components: Imaging Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Standard values: Around 390 V A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.18. 4037F4E509DA 18. Standard values: Around 500 V A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric value is greater.1 Table Number 4037F4E511DA Troubleshooting Vdc-C Vdc-M Vdc-Y Vdc-K Vg-C Vg-M Vg-Y Vg-K • • • • • • • • • • Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced.0 Aug. Relevant Components: Imaging Unit. A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric value is smaller.1.1 How to read element date • As part of troubleshooting procedures.

01 % increments). 463 Troubleshooting . • Standard value: 7 ± 3 % • Relevant Components: LPH Unit.1. • Relevant Components: IDC Sensor. 2006 18.) (in 5 °C increments).3 V. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 4037F4E513DA TCR-C TCR-M TCR-Y TCR-K IDC1 IDC2 • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0. TCR Sensor K • • • • Shows the IDC bare surface output reading taken last (in 0. • Relevant Components: Fusing Unit Temp-Belt. The output range is 0 V to 5 V. Temp-Press. “Reading taken last” means: Latest toner density When the Start key is pressed.0 Aug. 3.01 V increments). Transfer Belt Unit • Shows the temperature of the Heating Roller (Temp-Belt) and the Fusing Pressure Roller (Temp-Press.2 Level History 1 18. the output value is displayed while a test print is being produced.Field Service Ver. It should normally be around 4.

High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer. Transfer Belt Unit Shows the latest ATVC level (which varies according to the paper type). Relevant Components: IDC Sensor. 2006 18. The value becomes greater as the Transfer Belt Unit has been used more. 3.3 Level History 2 4037F4E515DA IDC Sensor Adjust 1 IDC Sensor Adjust 2 • • • • • • • • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value.18.0 Aug. It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255. Neutralizing) ATVC -C ATVC -M ATVC -Y ATVC -K ATVC -2nd Troubleshooting 464 .1. 300 V to 3000 V (ATVC-C/-M/-Y/-K) 300 V to 5000 V (ATVC-2nd) Relevant Components: Transfer Belt Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

] → [Memory Bus Check]. Initial Check Items 2 • Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem is attributable to the Scanner or printer system.” • When an image quality problem occurs. first go through the “Initial Check Items” and.Field Service Ver.1 Initial Check Items A.467 465 .0 Aug.” 18.449 (action as instructed) B. Is image problem evident? Result YES Cause Printer Next Step Initial Check Items 3 NO Scanner See P. Document Scan CCD Sensor Board PWB-A Scanner system Image Processing Board PWB-C I/F Cable Copier Board PWB-CF Printer system LED Drive Board PWB-LED MFP Control Board PWB-MFPC Test Print F C DA • Evaluation Procedure Image Problem Lines.2 How to identify problematic part • This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial Check Items” and “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.] and produce a test print. and between memory and printer. 3. 2006 18. Initial Check Items 1 • Check first to see if image data is properly transmitted between Scanner and memory. and select and carry out [Scanner→Memory] and [Memory→PRT] checks. bands Action From [Service Mode]. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting 18. Action Enter the Service Mode. if the cause is yet to be identified. go to “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem. select [Test Mode] → [Halftone Pattern] → [SINGLE] → [HYPER] → [Gradation] → [C→M→Y→K] → [Density 64. Result OK NG Next Step Initial Check Items 2 See P.2. select [State Confirmation] → [Memory/ HDD Adj.

let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific single color or four colors 4 Color Mono Color 4037F4C517DA Troubleshooting • Evaluation Procedure Image Problem Action Result YES NO Cause Printer. select [Test Mode] → [Halftone Pattern] → [SINGLE] → [HYPER] → [Gradation] → [C→M→Y→K] → [Density 64]. 4 colors Printer.480 466 . 2006 C. bands From [Service Mode]. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Is image problem evident in each of all four colors? See P. 3.0 Aug. single color Next Step See P. Initial Check Items 3 • If the printer is responsible for the image problem.496 Lines.18. and produce a test print.

Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Shading sheet Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub Scan Direction White bands in Sub Scan Direction Color lines in Sub Scan Direction Color bands in Sub Scan Direction 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0 B. and reflectors Exposure Lamp is dirty Reflectors are dirty Machine → Scan Area → Image Position: Side Edge (Service Mode) The adjustment value for Image Position: Side Edge falls within the specified range. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. 6 7 YES Change Scanner Assy. Clean. Clean. Clean. and colored bands in Sub Scan Direction A. Original Pad is dirty.0 Aug. The white lines/bands or colored lines/bands are blurry. colored lines in Sub Scan Direction. Shading sheet is dirty. lens. Clean. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original.1 IR System: white lines in Sub Scan Direction. Readjust. Original Glass is dirty. 2006 18.3 Solution 18. Change CCD Unit. 467 . Clean. 3. white bands in Sub Scan Direction.Field Service Ver. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting 18.3. Mirror is dirty 5 Mirror. Exposure Lens is dirty Lamp.

colored lines in Main Scan Direction. Readjust.0 Aug. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Original Pad is dirty.3. 3. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.2 Scanner System: white lines in Main Scan Direction. 5 NO Change Scanner Assy. white bands in Main Scan Direction.18. Original Glass is dirty. 2006 18. NO 4 Machine → Scan The adjustment value for Image Area → Image Position: Leading Edge falls within Position: Top the specified range. Change CCD Unit. Edge (Service Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4. Clean. Troubleshooting 468 . Result YES YES YES Action Change original. and colored bands in Main Scan Direction A. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main Scan Direction White bands in Main Scan Direction Color lines in Main Scan Direction Color bands in Main Scan Direction 4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0 B. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.

0 Aug. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. 3. Clean. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 4036fs4029c0 A.Field Service Ver. 2006 18. Result YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Change CCD Unit. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Typical Faulty Images AA B. Original Pad is dirty. Change Scanner Assy. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. 469 Troubleshooting .3. Original Glass is dirty.3 Scanner System: color spots 18.

Clean. Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Clean. Exposure Lamp is dirty. Mirror is dirty. Original Pad is dirty. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10. Mirror. Shading sheet is dirty. Exposure Lamp.3.0 Aug. Original Glass is dirty. lens.4 Scanner System: fog A. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Original Glass Shading sheet Section Original Original Cover Check Item Original is damaged or dirty. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Change original. Clean. Basic Screen Quality/Density The problem is eliminated when the image is produced in the Manual exposure setting. 2006 18. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. and reflectors Reflectors are dirty. 3. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth.18. Change CCD Unit. Try another exposure level in Manual. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Lens is dirty. Clean. 11 NO Troubleshooting 470 . Original Cover does not lie flat. Change Scanner Assy. Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Clean.

5 Scanner System: blurred image. Perform “Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage” and “Scanner Position Adjustment. Position Original Glass correctly. 3.3.Field Service Ver. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4031c0 B. Change CCD Unit. blotchy image 18.” Change Scanner Assy. Check original loading position. 2006 18. NO 471 Troubleshooting . Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken. Original Glass tilts. Scanner is not aligned with the 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. A.0 Aug. Result YES YES YES YES 4 5 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4. Original Cover does not lie flat. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Change original. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 Section Original Original Cover Original Glass 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Check Item Original does not lie flat.

→ Change bushing. Scanner moves smoothly.6 Scanner System: incorrect color image registration. sync shift (lines in main scan direction) A. Result Action YES Change original. Cable kinks or is damaged. YES Change Original Cover if it is deformed or hinges are broken.0 Aug. 3. Change CCD Unit. YES Correct or change. Foreign matter on rails. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Original Original Cover Slide rails Drive Cables Scanner Assy 5 Check Item Original does not lie flat. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4032c0 B. NO Adjust the Scanner Motor timing belt.18. YES Clean and apply lubricant. → Change Scanner Motor. 2006 18. NO Troubleshooting 472 .3. 6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Original Cover does not lie flat.

Change the zoom ratio. Result NO Action Change the original mode (select one other than that resulted in moire).0 Aug. Select [Text Mode] or [Photo Mode]. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 2. YES 2 3 NO 473 Troubleshooting .Field Service Ver. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 4036fs4033c0 A. Moire distortions recur even after the original mode has been changed. 3. Typical Faulty Images B. 2006 18.3.7 Scanner System: moire 18. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Basic Screen Quality/Density Basic Screen Zoom Section Original Check Item Moire distortions recur even after the orientation of original has been changed.

Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.18. 3. 3 YES Perform “Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage” and “Scanner Position Adjustment. Result Action YES Reposition original. Check the original loading position.0 Aug. Change CCD Unit. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Section Original Original Glass Check Item Original is skew.3.8 Scanner System: skewed image A. Original Glass is in positive contact with the flat spring without being tilt.” NO Change Scanner Assy. 4 Troubleshooting 474 . The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Scanner Assy is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4034c0 B. NO Reinstall the glass. 2006 18.

Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Result NO YES Reinstall.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. Change CCD Unit. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4035c0 B. Change Scanner Motor. Scanner Assy is not properly aligned with 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Installation 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage Check Item Machine is installed on a level surface. 3. 2006 18. Change Scanner Assy.” Change belt. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Scanner Motor turns smoothly. Action NO NO A.3. Perform “Focus Positioning of the Scanner and 2nd/3rd Mirrors Carriage” and “Scanner Position Adjustment.9 Scanner System: distorted image 18. 2 3 4 Scanner Motor 475 Troubleshooting .

and reflectors Section Original Original Glass Shading sheet Check Item Original sticks to Original Glass.18. Clean. → Change CCD Unit. Reflectors are dirty. Original Glass is dirty. Troubleshooting 476 . The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Lens is dirty. Clean. lens. Wipe the surface clean with a soft cloth. Exposure Lamp is dirty.3. Result YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO Action Reposition original. Shading sheet is dirty. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Mirror.0 Aug. → Change Scanner Assy. Exposure Lamp. 2006 18. Clean Exposure Lamp. Clean. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Mirror is dirty. 3. Clean. rough image A.10 Scanner System: low image density.

Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 A. 2006 18. Typical Faulty Images AA Colored Area of Original ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4037c0 Black-and-White Area of Original B. Make manual settings according to the type of original. 3. (If the original contains a colored area in one of its corners.11 Scanner System: defective ACS 18.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Auto Color Level Adjustment (User Setting) 1 Check Item The problem persists even after the ACS Determination Level Adjust function has been changed. the machine may fail to properly detect the colored area. Result YES Action Change the original loading direction.) 477 Troubleshooting .3.

Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Check Item Result NO Reconnect. 3. printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image ProBoard (PWB-C) cessing Board are connected properly.3. Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Scanner and with no pins bent. The problem is eliminated as checked with the image on a test pattern produced. Troubleshooting 478 . Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B.0 Aug. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 4 5 Image Processing The problem is eliminated after Board (PWB-C) the I/F connection cable has been changed. NO Reconnect. Change I/F connection cable. black copy A. 2 3 NO NO Reconnect. 2006 18. CCD Unit Test Mode (Service Mode) Connectors of the CCD Unit are connected properly.12 Scanner System: blank copy. NO Change Image Processing Board.18.

The problem is eliminated as checked with the image on a test pattern produced.3. 3. printer Image Processing Connectors on the Image ProcessBoard (PWB-C) ing Board are connected properly. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting A. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Check Item Result NO Reconnect. NO NO 6 479 . 5 Image Processing The problem is eliminated after the Board (PWB-C) interface connection cable has been changed. Change Image Processing Board. 3 NO 4 Change interface connection cable. 2006 18. Reinstall expanded memory.13 Scanner System: abnormal image 18. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4040c0 4036fs4041c0 ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE Data on previous page AA 4036fs4042c0 Data on current page B. MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.Field Service Ver. Change MFP Control Board. Action Cable connecting Connector is connected properly Scanner and with no pins bent. 2 NO NO Reconnect. MFP Control Board (PWBMFPC) Test Mode (Service Mode) Data on previous page is mixed with data on current page.0 Aug.

colored lines in Main Scan Direction. white lines in Main Scan Direction. white bands in Main Scan Direction. → Change LPH Assy. Change Imaging Unit. white bands in Sub Scan Direction. Clean contact terminals. NO YES YES YES NO Troubleshooting 2 3 4 5 Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub Scan Direction White bands in Sub Scan Direction Colored lines in Sub Colored bands in Sub Scan Direction Scan Direction 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0 White lines in Main Scan Direction White bands in Main Scan Direction Colored lines in Main Colored bands in Main Scan Direction Scan Direction 4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0 B. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7. Change Imaging Unit.18. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit.14 Printer Monocolor: white lines in Sub Scan Direction. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Reconnect. Clean with cleaning jig.0 Aug. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [LPH Rank] and run [LPH Rank]. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Check Item Result YES 1 Image check A white line or black line in sub scan direction is sharp. colored bands in Main Scan Direction A.3. 2006 18. Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection. colored lines colored bands in Sub Scan Direction. Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside. Clean. 3. Action Select [Service Mode] → “[Machine] → [LPH Chip Adjust] and run [LPH Chip Adjust]. Clean contact terminal and check terminal position. Connectors and contact terminals make good connection between each IU and LPH Assy. LPH Assy The surface of the lens array is dirty. Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever. Image check The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6. 6 7 NO NO NO 8 480 .

Clean. The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. as the IU fails to keep up with a high demand for toner. 2006 18. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8. Printer Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction A. → Change High Voltage Unit (Image Transfer. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Neutralizing). Monocolor uneven image (uneven high density) occurs. 7 Image Transfer Belt Unit 8 NO NO 9 481 Troubleshooting .3.Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Image check 1 Check Item Uneven density of void area occurs. Clean using the LED Cleaning Jig. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [LPH Rank] and run [LPH Rank]. Slide out the IU and reinstall. Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of paper with no originals placed. Dirty on the outside. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 4036fs4045c0 B. Check the LED Drive Board connectors for proper connection.0 Aug. → Change Copier Board. → Change LPH Assy. Result YES High image density original 2 Uneven density in Sub Scan Direction occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm when a multi-copy cycle is run using an original with high image density (50% or more). 3. Change Imaging Unit. YES 3 4 5 6 LPH Assy Imaging Unit NO YES YES YES YES LPH Assy Image check LED surface is dirty.15 18. Change IU. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Check LPH Unit connector for proper connection. Cam gear operates properly. LED retracting lever is locked in position. → Change LED Drive Board → Change LPH Unit.

The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6. Cam gear operates properly. 5 6 NO NO NO Troubleshooting 482 . 2006 18.18. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B. Dirty on the outside. Monocolor uneven image (uneven high density) occurs. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 LPH Assy Image check 4 Image Transfer Belt Unit Section Imaging Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer.16 Printer Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction A. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Neutralizing). → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Clean. The surface of the lens array is dirty. 3. 7 Result YES YES YES YES Action Change Imaging Unit.0 Aug. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Check and correct contacts. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [LPH Rank] and run [LPH Rank].3. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Imaging Unit. Image Transfer Belt Unit makes positive contact with plates on rails. Clean with cleaning jig.

0 Aug. 3. The surface of the lens array is dirty.17 Printer Monocolor: low image density 18. Gear is cracked. YES Change gear. NO NO Check and correct contacts. . YES Go to step 8. Check Image Transfer Belt for damage. YES Go to step 14. Clean IDC Sensor.Field Service Ver. Toner empty lever and/or detecting switch are defective. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Result NO Action Go to next step.3 V. YES Clean. 483 Troubleshooting YES Clean. 2006 18.3. YES Go to step 8. The color TCR Sensor window on the LED Assy is dirty. IDC output value is around 4. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Image Transfer Belt Unit makes positive contact with plates on rails. Dirty on the outside. YES Go to step 14. Cam gear operates properly. YES Clean. NO NO Go to next step. NO Slide out the IU and reinstall. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section State Confirm → Table Number (Service Mode) Check Item Check data for Vg and Vdc. YES Reconnect. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B. Color Vdc : Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Black Vdc : Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Check TCR data. YES Clean with cleaning jig. A. Hopper Unit Connectors are loose. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 State Confirmation → Level History 1 (Service Mode) Level History data check results Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy TCR Sensor window Image Transfer Belt Unit LED retracting lever is locked in position.

The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 22. NO 22 Change Imaging Unit. Troubleshooting 484 . 2006 Result NO Action Go to next step. 18 YES Go to step 23. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight = 0 ± 60 The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of D Max. → Change High Voltage Unit/ 1 (Image Transfer. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. 17 Image Process Toner is properly supplied when Adjustment → TCR Toner Supply is run. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. TCR Toner Supply (Service Mode) Image Process The problem has been eliminated Adjustment → when T/C has been increased. → Change MFP Control Board → Change LPH Unit. 19 NO Go to next step. 20 21 After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. NO Go to next step. TCR Level Setting (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → D Max Density (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) “Conv. if the problem persists. → Change LED Drive Board. → Change Copier Board. Neutralizing). run Gradation Adjust.18. 3. → Change High Voltage Unit/ 2 (Developing Bias). Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Step Section Check Item Field Service Ver. make adjustments of D Max Density.0 Aug. → Change LPH Assy. NO Go to next step.

Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Change screen pattern. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4048c0 4036fs4049c0 B. Clean with cleaning jig. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight = 0 ± 60 The problem has been eliminated through the adjust of D Max.3 V. run Gradation Adjust. 3. 485 Troubleshooting . if the problem persists. Check Image Transfer Belt for damage. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 5 Section Photo/Density LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy Check Item Original type and screen pattern are selected properly. A. 2006 18. Slide out the Imaging Unit and reinstall. LED retracting lever is locked in position.0 Aug.IDC output value is around 4. 6 YES 7 NO Go to next step. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust.18 Printer Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure 18. Result NO YES YES YES YES NO TCR Sensor win.3.TCR Sensor window is dirty. The surface of the lens array is dirty. Dirty on the outside. NO Go to next step. tion → Level History 1 (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → D Max Density (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) “Conv. Clean IDC Sensor. 8 9 After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. Go to step 11. make adjustments of D Max Density. dow State Confirma. Clean. Clean.Field Service Ver.

2006 Result NO Action Change Imaging Unit. 10 Troubleshooting 486 . → Change Copier Board. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Step Section Check Item The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. Neutralizing). → Change MFP Control Board → Change LPH Unit. → Change LED Drive Board. Field Service Ver. → Change LPH Assy.18. → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 3. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer.0 Aug.

A. 3. Go to step 12.3 V. Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section State Confirmation → Table Number (Service Mode) State Confirmation → Level History 1 (Service Mode) Check Item Check data for Vg and Vb. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Result NO Action Go to next step. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Level History data Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc check results Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc LPH Assy Imaging Unit LPH Assy LED retracting lever is locked in position. Go to step 8. IDC output value is around 4. Color Vdc : Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Black Vdc : Around 390 V Vg : Around 500 V Check TCR data. Go to step 12. Typical Faulty Images ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD ABCD 4036fs4030c0 B. Check Transfer Belt for damage.19 Printer Monocolor: foggy background 18.The color TCR Sensor window on dow the LED Assy is dirty.3. Clean. Clean IDC Sensor.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. Slide out the IU and reinstall. TCR Sensor win. Clean with cleaning jig. 12 13 “Conv. YES YES YES YES NO YES YES YES NO YES Go to step 17. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight = 0 ± 60 487 Troubleshooting . 2006 18. Go to step 8. Go to next step. NO NO Go to next step. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. Image Process Adjustment → Background Voltage Margin (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) The problem is eliminated after Background Voltage Margin has been adjusted. The surface of the lens array is dirty. Dirty on the outside.

→ D Max Density (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. → Change Copier Board. Troubleshooting 488 . if the problem persists. 14 Image Process The problem has been eliminated Adjustment through the adjust of D Max. 3. → Change LED Drive Board. run Gradation Adjust. → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias).0 Aug. → Change MFP Control Board → Change LPH Unit. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Step Section Check Item Field Service Ver. Neutralizing). The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 15. 2006 Result NO Action Go to next step. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. make adjustments of D Max Density. NO Go to next step.18. 15 NO 16 Change Imaging Unit. → Change LPH Assy.

483 Perform [Transfer Adjust] of [Image Process Adjustment] under [Service Mode]. A. NO 489 Troubleshooting . Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Check Check Item There are void areas at the front side or high density section. 3. Remove foreign matter. Bias Choice]. Make the following adjustment: [Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] → [Dev. There is void area at the rear side section. Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots 4036fs4050c0 4036fs4051c0 B. 2006 18. Change Imaging Unit. Hopper Unit Installation environment Foreign matter or caked toner in the Toner Cartridge. Imaging Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. white spots 18. Change Imaging Unit.3.0 Aug. Clean. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action P.Field Service Ver. Is the atmospheric pressure at the installation site low? Result YES YES 2 3 4 5 YES YES YES YES 6 7 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 6.20 Printer Monocolor: void areas. Dirty on the outside.

2006 18. Change Imaging Unit. Dirty on the outside. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Imaging Unit Check Item Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection.3.0 Aug. The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 3. Result NO YES YES NO Action Clean contact terminal and check terminal position. Typical Faulty Images Colored spots AA 4036fs4052c0 B. 3. Change Imaging Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.21 Printer Monocolor: colored spots A.18. Troubleshooting 490 . Clean.

NO YES YES NO A.3. Typical Faulty Images blurred image 4036fs4031c0 B. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Result YES Action Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Paper Feed Direction Adj. Clean with cleaning jig. Imaging Unit Dirty on the outside. Clean. → Change LPH Unit. The surface of the lens array is dirty. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 LED Assy Section Image Check Check Item Image is distorted (stretched or shrunk). Change Imaging Unit. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 4. 2006 18. 2 3 4 5 491 Troubleshooting .].22 Printer Monocolor: blurred image 18. → Change LPH Assy. 3. Slide out the IU and reinstall.Field Service Ver. LED retracting lever is locked in position.0 Aug.

Neutralizing) The problem has been eliminated through the check of step4.0 Aug. Neutralizing). → Change MFP Control Board → Change Copier Board → Change LED Drive Board → Change LPH Unit.18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Result YES Action Check LPH Unit connector for proper connection. 1 (Image Transfer. 492 . 2006 18. 3.3. NO NO 3 4 High Voltage Unit/ Connector is connected properly. NO Reconnect. Check and correct drive transmitting coupling. or correct the contact.23 Printer Monocolor: blank copy. Check the LED Drive Board connectors for proper connection. black copy A. NO 5 Troubleshooting Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. clean. Change IU. Check. Typical Faulty Images Blank copy Black copy 4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0 B. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Image Check 1 Check Item A blank copy occurs. The PC Drum Charge Corona voltage contact or PC Drum ground contact of the Imaging Unit is connected properly. Imaging Unit 2 Coupling of IU drive mechanism is installed properly.

5-mm-pitch uneven image 18.Field Service Ver. 2006 18. 3. Typical Faulty Images 0.3.0 Aug. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section LPH Assy Check Item LED retracting lever is locked in position.5mm 4036fs4053c0 B. Result NO YES 493 Troubleshooting . A. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Slide out the IU and reinstall. Change Imaging Unit.24 Printer Monocolor: 0.

Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Check Item The drive mechanisms for spent toner conveying and IU are dirty. Action Troubleshooting 494 .0 Aug. 2006 18.25 Printer Monocolor: 2-mm-pitch uneven image A.3. Result YES NO Clean. Change Imaging Unit. Typical Faulty Images 2 mm 4036fs4054c0 B.18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.

Result YES NO Action Change Imaging Unit.3. Reinstall or change the IU Motor. Correct. Change Imaging Unit. Coupling of IU drive mechanism is installed properly.26 Printer Monocolor: 94-mm-pitch uneven image 18. There is play in the IU Motor. Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear has chipped off. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 A. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Image Transfer Roller is damaged.0 Aug. 2006 18. Change Imaging Unit. Typical Faulty Images 94 mm 94 mm 94 mm 4036fs4057c0 4036fs4055c0 4036fs4056c0 B. 3. Check and correct drive transmitting coupling. 2 3 4 5 6 YES YES YES NO 495 Troubleshooting .Field Service Ver.

18. YES Clean Cleaning Blade. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. oil. change Image Transfer Belt Unit. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty. NO Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. YES Clean. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 10. YES Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. YES Clean with specified solvent. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Sub Scan Direction White bands in Sub Scan Direction Colored lines in Sub Scan Direction Colored bands in Sub Scan Direction 4036fs4021c0 4036fs4022c0 4036fs4023c0 4036fs4024c0 B. Image Transfer Paper Separator Fingers are damaged or dirty. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. YES Clean or change. colored lines in sub scan direction. YES Clean.0 Aug. Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. Cleaning Blade is not effective in removing toner completely.) YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. 11 Result Action YES Clean the Comb Electrode by moving the Comb Electrode Cleaning Lever. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. and colored bands in sub scan direction A.27 Printer 4-Color: white lines in sub scan direction. YES Remove foreign matter. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Image Transfer Belt Unit Section Image Check Check Item A white line or colored line in sub scan direction. Fingerprints. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. → Change MFP Control Board 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Troubleshooting 496 . Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty or damaged. 3. YES Clean. 2006 18. Change Fusing Unit. white bands in sub scan direction. There is foreign matter on paper path. (See Maintenance.3.

Remove foreign matter. (See Maintenance. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Change Fusing Unit. Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. There is foreign matter on paper path. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.28 18. 3. colored lines in main scan direction. Typical Faulty Images White lines in Main Scan Direction White bands in Main Scan Direction Colored lines in Main Scan Direction Colored bands in Main Scan Direction 4036fs4025c0 4036fs4026c0 4036fs4027c0 4036fs4028c0 B. Clean or change. Clean. Clean Cleaning Blade. 10 Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. → Change MFP Control Board YES 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 YES YES YES YES YES YES YES NO 497 . Cleaning Blade is not effective in removing toner completely. and colored bands in main scan direction A. 2006 18. oil. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty or damaged. white bands in main scan direction. Fusing Paper Separator Fingers are dirty.3.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Image Transfer Paper Separator Fingers are damaged or dirty. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Troubleshooting Printer 4-Color: white lines in main scan direction. Clean. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged.0 Aug. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints.Field Service Ver. change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Clean or change. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9.

Terminal is dirty.29 Printer 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction A. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Result YES Action Clean with specified solvent. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. 3. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Clean. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints.0 Aug.18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. oil. YES 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES NO 6 Troubleshooting 498 . 2006 18. Reinstall. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4043c0 4036fs4044c0 B.3. (See Maintenance.

Neutralizing). → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. oil. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Field Service Ver. Reinstall. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item Fingerprints. 2006 18. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. Terminal is dirty. Printer 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction A. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. (See Maintenance. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Clean with specified solvent. 3. 6 Result YES YES 2 3 4 5 YES NO YES NO 499 Troubleshooting .0 Aug. Image Transfer Roller Unit Image Transfer Roller is installed properly.30 18.3. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Clean. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0 B.

Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.0 Aug. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. 3. 500 . YES NO NO YES YES IDC Sensor Image Process Adjustment →Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Sensor is dirty. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8. 2 3 4 5 Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Terminal is dirty. NO Go to next step. Neutralizing).18. “Conv. Clean. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Clean with blower brush. Go to step 10. 8 NO 9 Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. → Change MFP Control Board → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). NO Go to next step.31 Printer 4-Color: low image density A. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight: 0 ± 60 6 7 Troubleshooting The problem has been eliminated Image Process through the adjust of D Max DenAdjustment → D Max Density sity. Reinstall.3. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. run Gradation Adjust. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. 2006 18. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. make adjustments of D Max Density. (Service Mode) Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. if the problem persists. Typical Faulty Images ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE 4036fs4036c0 B.

Clean with blower brush. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package.32 Printer 4-Color: poor color reproduction 18. 9 501 Troubleshooting The problem has been eliminated Image Process through the adjust of D Max DenAdjustment →D Max Density sity. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 8. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. 2 3 4 5 Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Terminal is dirty. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. “Conv. if the problem persists. 2006 18. YES NO NO YES YES NO Go to next step.0 Aug. → Change MFP Control Board → Change High Voltage Unit/2 (Developing Bias). Neutralizing).Field Service Ver.3. IDC Sensor Image Process Adjustment → Gradation Adjust (Service Mode) Sensor is dirty. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Go to step 10. Clean. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Reinstall. run Gradation Adjust. A. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. 3. Value” falls within the specified range as checked through Gradation Adjust. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. (Service Mode) . make adjustments of D Max Density. Max: 0 ± 100 Highlight: 0 ± 60 6 7 8 Image Process Adjustment → Stabilizer → Reset + Stabilizer (Service Mode) After the Reset + Stabilizer sequence has been completed. NO Go to next step. NO Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Typical Faulty Images 4036fs4058c0 B. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater.

port Speed (Service Mode) Machine Check the specific color in which → Color regis. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. tration Adjustment (Service Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 11. Imaging Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit The surface of the PC Drum is scratched.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Slide out the IU and reinstall. → Change MFP Control Board NO 12 502 .33 Printer 4-Color: incorrect color image registration A. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Check Item Result YES Action Take action according to the warning code shown on the State Confirm screen. Machine condi. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4032c0 B.0 Aug. LPH Assy Image Transfer Belt Unit LED retracting lever is locked in position.3. go to next step.Vibration is given to the machine tion after main power switch has been turned ON. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Fingerprints. Image Transfer Roller is installed properly. Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Turn OFF and ON Main Power Switch. Change Imaging Unit.color shift occurs. oil. YES 2 3 NO YES 4 YES 5 6 7 8 9 YES YES NO YES YES Troubleshooting 10 YES 11 Perform [Color registration Adjustment]. (See Maintenance. If color shift is not corrected even with a correction of ± 1 dot. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 2006 18. Machine Brush effect or blurred image → Fusing Trans. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Drive coupling to the machine is dirty. Reinstall. Clean with specified solvent.18.occurs. 3. Readjust Fusing Transport Speed. Clean. Warning display The maintenance call mark is displayed on the panel.

oil. or other foreign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt. There are void areas in the trailing edge. Clean with specified solvent.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action P. Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Image Check Check Item There are void areas at the front side or high density section. 4 5 6 Paper path Transfer Roller Unit Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched.501 Perform [Transfer Adjust] of [Image Process Adjustment] under [Service Mode].Field Service Ver. Correct or change. 3. Charge Neutralizing Cloth is not separated and ground terminal is connected properly. Clean or change. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints. A.0 Aug. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Clean or change. Pre-Image Transfer Guide Plate is damaged or dirty. Change Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. YES NO Result YES YES 2 YES 3 YES 7 8 9 YES YES YES NO 10 503 Troubleshooting . Remove foreign matter. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 9. white spots 18. Typical Faulty Images Void areas White spots 4036fs4050c0 4036fs4051c0 B. Paper Dust Remover Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. (See Maintenance. Change Transfer Roller Unit.34 Printer 4-Color: void areas.3. There is foreign matter on paper path. 2006 18.

The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 7.35 Printer 4-Color: colored spots A. Clean or change.) Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. or other foreign matter is evident on the Image Transfer Belt. Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. 2 YES 3 4 5 6 7 YES YES YES YES NO Troubleshooting 504 . Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Imaging Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Change Fusing Unit. (See Maintenance. Image Transfer Belt is dirty or scratched. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. There is foreign matter on paper path. → Change Fusing Unit. Clean with specified solvent. Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4052c0 B. 2006 18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.18. 3. Fingerprints. oil. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit if belt is damaged. Paper dust accumulates on Paper Dust Remover. 8 Result YES YES Action Change Imaging Unit.0 Aug.3. Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Paper Dust Remover Fusing Unit Image Transfer Roller is dirty or scratched. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit. Remove foreign matter.

0 Aug.3. Result YES YES 2 3 NO Change Fusing Unit. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Paper Machine → Fusing Temperature (Service Mode) Check Item Paper type does not match. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 2. 3. Readjust Fusing Temperature. 505 Troubleshooting .36 Printer 4-Color: poor fusing performance. A. 2006 18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Change the setting. Changing fusing temperature eliminates the problem of poor fusing performance and offset. Typical Faulty Images Poor fusing performance Offset CF CF CF 4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0 B. offset 18.Field Service Ver.

Change Fusing Unit. Change the setting. YES YES YES YES 5 6 NO Change Fusing Unit.3. 2006 18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is dirty. blurred image A. 2 3 4 Fusing Unit Paper type does not match.37 Printer 4-Color: brush effect.0 Aug. Machine Changing fusing speed eliminates → Fusing Trans. Readjust Fusing Transport Speed. 3.the problem of brush effect and blurred image. Troubleshooting Procedure Step Section Paper 1 Check Item Paper is damp. Install Paper Dehumidifying Heater. Fusing Belt is dirty or scratched. Result YES Action Change paper to one just unwrapped from its package. port Speed (Service Mode) The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.18. Troubleshooting 506 . Typical Faulty Images Brush effect Blurred image 4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0 B. Clean.

6 Result YES YES YES YES YES 5 507 Troubleshooting . Typical Faulty Images AA 4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0 B. Remove foreign matter. or other foreign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Action Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 4 Section Image Transfer Roller Unit Paper path Fusing Unit Check Item Image Transfer Roller is scratched or dirty. → Change High Voltage Unit/1 (Image Transfer. → Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. 2006 18.3. Neutralizing). oil.0 Aug. Clean or change. Clean with specified solvent. NO A. There is foreign matter on paper path. Change Fusing Unit.) Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.38 Printer 4-Color: back marking 18. Fusing Entrance Guide Plate is scratched or dirty. The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5. Transfer Belt Unit Fingerprints. → Change Fusing Unit. (See Maintenance. 3. Lower Fusing Roller is scratched or dirty.

3.18.0 Aug. Result Action YES Change Fusing Unit. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 Section Fusing Unit Check Item The Fusing Belt is scratchy.3. Typical Faulty Images 204-mm-pitch uneven image 204 mm 4036fs4064c0 B. Troubleshooting 508 .39 Printer 4-Color: 204-mm-pitch uneven image A. 2006 18.

0 Aug. Correct. 509 Troubleshooting . Image Transfer Roller is damaged.Field Service Ver. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 A. 2006 18. Change Image Transfer Belt Unit. Result YES NO YES Action Change Imaging Unit. Typical Faulty Images 94 mm 94 mm 94 mm 4036fs4057c0 4036fs4055c0 4036fs4056c0 B. 3. Troubleshooting Procedure Step 1 2 3 Section Imaging Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Roller Unit Check Item The surface of the PC Drum is scratched. Change Image Transfer Roller Unit.40 Printer 4-Color: 94-mm-pitch uneven image 18. The Image Transfer Belt Unit drive gear is intact.3.

18. Image quality problem bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 Blank Page Troubleshooting 510 .

1.Field Service Ver. Parts layout drawing 19. 3. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [9] [8] 4037F5C519DA Appendix 19.1 Main unit 19.0 Aug.1 ADF section [17] [16] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Exit Motor (M3-DF) Exit Cover Sensor (PC7-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) Document Size Volume (R1-DF) Tray Open/Close Sensor (PC8-DF) Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Take-up Cover Sensor (PC3-DF) Transport Motor (M2-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) ROM (IC7-DF) 511 Appendix .

2006 19.1.19. 3. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug.2 IR section [1] [12] [11] [10] [2] [3] [4] [9] [5] [8] [6] [7] 4037F5E502DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Scanner Motor (M201) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) CCD Sensor Board (PWB-A) Size Reset Switch (SW201) Inverter Board (PU201) Exposure Lamp (FL201) [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Scanner Home Sensor (PC201) Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC202) Original Size Sensor FD1 (PC203) Scanner Cooling Fan Motor (M202) Scanner Motor Drive Board (PWB-IC) Original Size Sensor FD2 (PC204) Appendix 512 .

2006 19. 3.0 Aug.1.Field Service Ver. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [4] 4037F5C503DA [3] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [8] [7] [5] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M9) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M15) Fusing Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M16) Suction Fan Motor (M12) Cooling Fan Motor/1 (M24) Cooling Fan Motor/3 (M25) Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M21) Ozone Ventilation Fan Motor (M18) Electronic sorting Board (PWB-ES) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Standard Memory (D_FILE0) Standard Memory (D_FILE0) Hard Disk Drive (HDD) Control Board (PWB-MC) MFP Control Board Cooling Fan Motor (M27) Toner Suction Fan Motor (M20) Toner Suction Fan Motor/K (M23) Paper Cooling Fan Motor (M26) 513 Appendix Cooling Fan Motor/2 (M10) .3 Engine section [18] [17] [16] [2] [1] 19.

Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.19. 2006 [10] [11] [1] [2] [3] [9] [4] [8] [7] [6] [5] 4037F5C504DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] LAN Board (PWB-LAN) Copier Board (PWB-CF) IDC/Registration Sensor/2 (PC9) Fusing Pressure/Retraction Sensor (PC33) IDC/Registration Sensor/1 (PC8) Temperature/humidity Sensor (PC7) [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Left Door Switch (SW3) Slide Interface Board (PWB-SIF) Work Memory (D_WORK0) NVRAM Board (PWB-NVR) MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Appendix 514 .0 Aug. 3.

Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [3] [5] [6] [7] [4] [14] [13] [12] [1] [2] [11] [9] [10] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] LPH Assy/K (LPH K) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) Main Erase Lamp/K (LA4) Main Erase Lamp/C (LA3) ATDC Sensor/C (PWB-N3) Main Erase Lamp/M (LA2) ATDC Sensor/M (PWB-N2) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [8] 4037F5C505DA Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA1) ATDC Sensor/Y (PWB-N1) Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor (PC32) Waste Toner Full Sensor (PC31) LPH Assy/Y (LPH Y) LPH Assy/M (LPH M) LPH Assy/C (LPH C) 515 Appendix . 2006 19.0 Aug.Field Service Ver. 3.

19. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3. 2006 [27] [26] [25] [1] [3] [4] [5] [2] [24] [23] [7] [22] [6] [21] [20] [11] [19] [18] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Registration Roller Clutch (CL3) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL101) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Toner Set Sensor/K (PC20) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/K (PC24) Toner Supply Motor C/K (M3) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/K (PC18) Toner Set Sensor/C (PC19) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/C (PC23) Toner Set Sensor/M (PC26) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/C (PC17) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/M (PC22) [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [9] [10] [8] [12] [17] [15] [13] [16] [14] 4037F5C506DA Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/M (PC16) Toner Set Sensor/Y (PC25) Toner Near-Empty Sensor LED/Y (PC21) Toner Near-Empty Sensor PQ/Y (PC15) Toner Supply Motor Y/M (M4) Developing Clutch/K (CL2) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) Color Developing Motor (M6) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) 1st Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M11) K PC Motor (M7) Main Motor (M1) Fusing Pressure Roller Pressure/Retraction Motor (M19) Appendix [12] [13] [14] 516 .0 Aug.

2006 19. 3. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [6] [7] [14] [13] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [12] [8] [9] [11] [10] 4037F5E534DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] Right Door Switch (SW2) Fusing Paper Loop Control Solenoid (SL1) Control Panel (UN201) Fusing Paper Loop Sensor (PC4) Upper Right Door Switch (SW5) Main Power Switch (SW1) Counter/K (CNT1) [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] Bypass Paper Size Unit (VR1) Bypass Paper Pick-Up Solenoid (SL101) Front Door Switch (SW4) DC Power Supply (PU1) High Voltage Unit/2 (HV2) High Voltage Unit/1 (HV1) Flickerless Resistor (R2) (220-240 V areas only) 517 Appendix .0 Aug.Field Service Ver.

0 Aug. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [15] [14] [13] [12] [1] Field Service Ver. 3.19. 2006 [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] 4037F5C508DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Fusing Retraction Position Sensor (PC34) Registration Roller Sensor (PC28) 2nd Image Transfer Pressure /Retraction Sensor (PC29) OHP Sensor (PC27) Exit Sensor (PC30) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC114) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC113) Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC111) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC112) Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC110) K PC Drum Main Sensor (PC11) 1st Image Transfer Retraction (PC12) Color PC Drum Main Sensor (PC10) Color PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC35) K PC Drum Sub Sensor (PC36) Appendix 518 .

1. 3. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 4037F5C509DA [1] [7] [6] [5] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2] [3] [4] Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Tray 1 Double Feed Sensor (PC1) Tray 1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC2) Tray 1 CD Paper size Sensor (PC3) [5] [6] [7] Tray 1 Paper Size Board (PWB-I1) Tray 1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC13) Tray 1 Set Sensor (PC14) 519 Appendix .Field Service Ver.4 Tray 1 19.0 Aug. 2006 19.

5 Tray 2 [12] [13] [14] [7] [6] [10] [8] [11] [9] [15] [1] [2] [5] [4] [3] 4037F5C510DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray 2 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC107) Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC106) Tray 2 Lift-Up Sensor (PC105) Tray 2 Paper Size Board (PWB-I2) Tray 2 Board (PWB-Z) Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor/L (PC102) Tray 2 Set Sensor (PC103) [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] Tray 2 CD Paper Size Sensor/S (PC101) Tray 2 Lift-Up Motor (M101) Tray 2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC104) Tray 2 Paper Feed Motor (M102) Tray 2 Vertical Transport Motor (M103) Bypass Lift-Up Sensor (PC115) Tray 2 Door Set sensor (PC109) Appendix 520 .1. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.19. 3. 2006 19.0 Aug.

6 Duplex section 19. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 4037F5C520DA [6] [1] [2] [3] Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor (in PWB-A) (Pl2-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (in PWB-A) (PI1-DU) [4] [5] [6] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) 521 Appendix . 2006 19.1. 3.Field Service Ver.0 Aug.

0 Aug. 2006 19.2 PC102/PC202 (Option) [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [23] [24] [22] [20] [21] [25] [26] [6] [7] [19] [8] [18] [17] [16] [15] [13] [14] [12] [10] [11] [9] 4037F5C511DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Tray 3 Transport Roller Motor (M120-PF) Door Set Sensor (PC111-PF) Tray 3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF) Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117PF) Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor (PC115-PF) Tray 4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor (PC124-PF) Tray 4 Lift-Up Sensor (PC123-PF) Tray 4 Transport Roller Motor (M121-PF) Tray 4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Tray 4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PF) [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] Tray 4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC122-PF) Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC128-PF) Tray 4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC127-PF) Tray 4 FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I4 PF) Tray 4 Set Sensor (PC121-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) Tray 3 FD Paper Size Detection Board (PWB-I3 PF) Tray 3 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC118-PF) Tray 3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC119-PF) Tray 3 Set Sensor (PC112-PF) Tray 3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC113-PF) Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Tray 3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Appendix [10] [11] [12] [13] 522 . 3. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.19.

3.Field Service Ver. 2006 19.3 PC-402 (Option) [23] [24] [1] [2] [3] [21] [4] [5] [22] [20] [19] [18] [17] [15] [13] [14] [16] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] Transport Roller Motor (M2-LCT) Right Lower Door Sensor (PC5-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) Upper Paper Empty Sensor (PC3-LCT) Paper Empty Board (PWB-E LCT) Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Shift Motor (M4-LCT) [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [11] [12] 4037F5C512DA Paper Descent Key (UN1-LCT) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC9-LCT) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT) Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Interface Board (PWB-H LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) 523 Appendix Tray Set Sensor (PC6-LCT) . Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] 19.0 Aug.

3.19. 2006 19.0 Aug.4 FS-507 (Option) [22] [1] [2] [3] [21] [4] [5] [6] [7] [19] [20] [18] [17] [8] [9] [10] [16] [15] [11] [14] [13] [12] 4037F5C514DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Upper Cover Sensor (PC18-FN) 1st Tray Full Sensor (PC6-FN) 1st Tray Exit Sensor (PC1-FN) Lower Entrance Sensor (PC2-FN) Storage Sensor (PC3-FN) 1st Tray Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL2FN) Front Door Sensor (PC17-FN) Finisher Tray Paper Sensor (PC5-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Switch (S2-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor LED (PWB-C FN) Elevator Motor (M7-FN) [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] CD Aligning Home Position Sensor (PC9-FN) Shift Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC11-FN) Shift Motor (M8-FN) Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M6-FN) Staple Home Position Sensor (PC14-FN) Elevator Tray Paper Sensor (PC8-FN) CD Aligning Motor (M5-FN) Lower Paddle Motor (M9-FN) Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor PQ (PWB-D FN) Upper Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) Appendix [10] [11] 524 . Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

3.Field Service Ver. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [5] [6] [7] [8] 4037F5C515DA [1] [18] [15] [16] [17] [2] [3] [4] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [9] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Punch Motor (M11-FN) Pinch Speed Sensor (PC15-FN) Entrance Motor (M1-FN) Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M13-FN) Upper/Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN) Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor (M12-FN) Set Switch (S1-FN) ROM (IC3-FN) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Control Board (PWB-A FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Storage Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) Upper Paddle Motor (M15-FN) Upper Paddle Solenoid (SL3-FN) Elevator Tray Full Sensor (PC7-FN) Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC13-FN) Elevator Tray Lower Limit Switch (S3-FN) Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) 525 Appendix . 2006 19.0 Aug.

5 JS-601 (Option) [4] [1] [2] [3] 4037F5C513DA [1] [2] Job Tray Cover Sensor (PC21-FN) Job Tray Exit Sensor (PC19-FN) [3] [4] Job Tray Full Sensor (PC20-FN) 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL-4) Appendix 526 .19. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 19.

3. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] 4037F5C516DA 19.Field Service Ver.0 Aug.6 FS-603 (Option) [17] [16] [1] [2] [15] [14] [13] [12] [11] [10] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Transport Motor (M1-FN) Entrance Motor (M9-FN) Saddle Clutch (CL1-FN) Joint Open Switch (MS2-FN) Front Door Open Switch (MS1-FN) Finisher Control Board (PWB-A FN) Front Aligning Motor (M4-FN) Staple Safety Switch (Front) (MS4-FN) Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18-FN) [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] Shift Motor (M6-FN) Slide Motor (M8-FN) Exit Motor (M3-FN) Rear Aligning Motor (M5-FN) ROM (IC6-FN) Staple Safety Switch (Rear) (MS3-FN) Paddle Motor (M2-FN) Staple/Folding Motor (M7-FN) 527 Appendix . 2006 19.

0 Aug. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. 2006 [19] [18] [17] [16] [15] [20] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [14] [13] [12] [7] [8] [11] [10] [9] 4037F5C521DA [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] Entrance Sensor (PI1-FN) Folding Roller Home Position Sensor (PI12-FN) Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11-FN) Folding Position Sensor (PI10-FN) Upper Cover Open Sensor (PI23-FN) Front Door Open Sensor (PI22-FN) Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4-FN) Finisher Tray Sensor (PI6-FN) Exit Tray Sensor (PI8-FN) Exit Tray Home Position Sensor (PI9-FN) [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] Saddle Tray Sensor (PI13-FN) Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17-FN) Stack Full Sensor (PI24-FN) Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16-FN) Exit Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7-FN) Rear Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5-FN) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2-FN) Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15-FN) Staple/Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI14-FN) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3-FN) Appendix [10] 528 . 3.19.

2006 19. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [5] [6] [7] 4037F5C517DA 19.Field Service Ver.7 PK-501 (Option) [1] [10] [9] [2] [3] [4] [8] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Punch Motor (M1P-PK) Side Registration Home Sensor (PI2P-PK) Punch Motor Clock Board (PI3P-PK) Photo Sensor Board (PWB-C PK) LED Board (PWD-D PK) [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Side Registration Motor (M2P-PK) Punch Trash Full LED Board (PWB-F PK) Punch Trash Full Photo Sensor Board (PWB-E PK) Punch Control Board (PWB-B PK) Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P-PK) 529 Appendix . 3.0 Aug.

3.0 Aug.8 Horizontal Transport Unit [4] [1] [2] [3] 4037F5C518DA [1] [2] Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-HO) Turnover Empty Sensor (PC6-HO) [3] [4] Paper Sensor (PC1-HO) Horizontal Unit Door Sensor (PC4-HO) Appendix 530 .19. 2006 19. Parts layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.

0 Aug. CN54 CN19 CN18 CN9 CN8 CN10 CN58 CN6 CN4 Location N-13 D-25 to 26 D-23 to 24 E-13 to 14 E-13 E-14 R-16 D-4 to 5 D-4 No.Field Service Ver. Connector layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] 20. Connector layout drawing Description Number of Pin ➀ Possible to confirm by removing external cover. 2006 20. 3. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] CN No. [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [10] [13] [12] [11] 4037F5C534DA CN No. [1] [17] [2] [3] 3 2 14 14 3 6 [16] 3 6 3 2 2 6 2 6 4 14 4 [15] [14] No. 1 Not possible to confirm by removing external cover. CN61 CN45 CN44 CN39 CN99 CN40 CN41 CN98 Location D-12 R-3 R-3 D-14 D-11 to 12 M-1 to 2 U-10 to 11 D-12 531 Appendix .

20. 3.0 Aug. CN38 CN69 CN11 CN62 CN75 CN57 CN22 CN14 CN28 CN48 CN102 [14] Location D-8 D-21 D-20 M-18 M-17 M-17 I-8 D-19 N-27 M-22 S-22 [13] No. CN101 CN103 CN108 CN106 CN25 CN29 CN7 CN32 CN31 CN35 Location S-22 R-22 S-25 S-24 D-2 D-1 to 2 D-15 D-20 to 21 D-20 R-9 Appendix 532 . [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] CN No. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] CN No. Connector layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [21] Field Service Ver. 2006 [1] [20] [19] [2] [3] [4] 9 [18] 12 [5] 6 4 3 4 3 3 3 3 4 [6] 6 4 3 [17] 2 2 [16] 2 3 3 4 4 [9] [11] [10] 4037F5C535DA [7] [8] [12] [15] No.

[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [10] [9] [8] 4037F5C536DA CN No. Connector layout drawing bizhub C351/C450 [3] 4 [4] 2 3 [5] 3 2 2 2 12 [19] [18] [1] [2] [17] [16] 4 3 [15] 9 [14] 14 15 11 13 6 2 2 [7] [6] 2 [13] [12] No. CN72 CN5 CN15 CN12 CN13 CN26 CN50 CN49 CN16 CN3 Location I-8 D-5 D-19 J-2 I-8 D-3 to 4 J-2 N-27 N-26 to 27 D-5 [11] No.Field Service Ver. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] CN No. CN105 CN104 CN34 CN107 CN24 CN27 CN23 CN21 CN17 Location R-25 R-23 to 24 S-24 R-26 E-2 to 3 E-1 to 2 I-7 D-3 I-9 533 Appendix .0 Aug. 3. 2006 20.

21. 3.0 Aug.1 Main unit Print request received Main Motor (M1) Cleaning Brush Motor (M22) Color PC Drum Motor (M5) K PC Motor (M7) Color Developing Motor (M6) With reference to print request 2nd Image Transfer Pressure/Retraction Motor (M13) Fusing Drive Motor (M2) Developing Bias DC (Y/M/C/K) Drum Charge Corona Bias Y. Timing chart 21. 2006 21. C Drum Charge Corona Bias K Main Erase Lamp/Y (LA1) Main Erase Lamp/M (LA2) Main Erase Lamp/C (LA3) Main Erase Lamp/K (LA4) TOD Signal 1st 2nd Original Original With reference to TOD Tray1 Paper Feed Clutch (CL1) Intermediate Transport Motor (M14) Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL3) Exit Sensor (PC30) Appendix 4037F5E537DA 534 . Timing chart bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver. M.

0 Aug. 2006 High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 86ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 21. 3.2. Timing chart 900mm/sec=High 150mm/sec=Low 4037F5E538DA 535 Appendix bizhub C351/C450 .2 Automatic Document Feeder Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW High CW Low 50ms Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 705ms 766ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid 705ms (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time 384ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms 21.1 1st Original Preliminary Take-up Start Misted Original Detecting Signal Start 1st Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 1st Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 2nd Original Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on 104ms 61ms 104ms 61ms 1-sided mode /DSET DSET Signal Transmission off Field Service Ver.21.

2006 4037F5E539DA . 3.0 Aug. Timing chart 3rd Original Exchange to Start /DSET CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 705ms 86ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] off on off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time 384ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Field Service Ver.Appendix bizhub C351/C450 536 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Start on /SCEND off on off DSET Signal Transmission 104ms 61ms 21.

3rd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exit to Start 4th Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exchange to Complete 4th Original Preliminary Take-up Start 2nd Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Exit to Start on /SCEND off on DSET Signal Transmission 104ms 61ms /DSET off DSET Signal Transmission CW On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] 88ms Field Service Ver. 2006 Take-up Motor 86ms (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor 82ms 181ms 315ms off 82ms 181ms 315ms CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) 705ms off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Original Exit Time 1397ms Original Exchange Time Original Exchange Time 384ms 384ms Original Exit Time 1397ms 21. 3.0 Aug. Timing chart 4037F5E540DA 537 Appendix bizhub C351/C450 .

3.Appendix bizhub C351/C450 538 3rd Original Exit to Complete 4th Original Exit to Start 4th Original Exit to Complete 82ms 181ms 82ms 181ms 315ms 315ms 3rd Original Exit to Start 21. 2006 4037F5E541DA . Timing chart on /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exit Time 1397ms Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Original Exit Time 1397ms Field Service Ver.0 Aug.

0 Aug. Timing chart 539 4037F5E542DA Appendix bizhub C351/C450 .21. 3.2.2 1st Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 1st Original Preliminary Take-up Start Misted Original Detecting Signal Start on /SCEND off on 104ms 61ms 104ms /DSET DSET Signal Transmission off Field Service Ver. 2006 High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 61ms High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] 86ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] Mixed original detection mode Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW High CW Low 50ms Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) 705ms off on 705ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off 766ms Original Exchange Time 384ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms 21.

3. Timing chart on /SCEND off on /DSET off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW High CW Low Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid Reverse side Original Exchange Time 1330ms Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on (SL1-DF) off Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 2006 4037F5E543DA .Appendix bizhub C351/C450 540 1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 103ms 456ms 97ms 150ms 563ms 133ms 1st Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start 21.

3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Complete 2nd Original Exchange to Start 1st Original Exit to Start 2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Preliminary Take-up Start 1st Original Exit to Complete on /SCEND off on 104ms 61ms /DSET off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 86ms Field Service Ver. 3.0 Aug. 2006 High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 181ms 315ms On Registration Amount of Registration Loop 6[mm] High CW Low Exit Motor (M3-DF) off Low High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 705ms 939ms 20ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exchange Time 730ms Preliminary Take-up Time 952ms Original Exit Time 1365ms 21. Timing chart 4037F5E544DA 541 Appendix bizhub C351/C450 .

3. Timing chart on /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor( off PC1-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on ( ) Exit Solenoid SL2-DF off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Reverse side Original Exchange Time 1330ms Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Field Service Ver. 2006 4037F5E545DA .Appendix bizhub C351/C450 542 2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 1st Original Exchange to Start 103ms 456ms 97ms 150ms 563ms 563ms 2nd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start 21.0 Aug.

3. Timing chart 4037F5E546DA 543 Appendix bizhub C351/C450 .3rd Original Exchange to Start 2nd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exchange to Complete 2nd Original Exit to Complete 3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on /SCEND off on /DSET off High CW Take-up ( M1-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 86ms Field Service Ver. 2006 High CW Transport (M2-DF) Low off Low Motor High CCW 181ms 315ms High CW Low Exit Motor (M3-DF) Low off High CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 939ms 20ms off on ( ) Registration Clutch CL1-DF off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid Original Exchange Time 730ms Original Exit Time 1365ms (SL1-DF) off 21.0 Aug.

0 Aug. 2006 4037F5E547DA . 3. Timing chart /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Reverse side Original Exchange Time 1330ms Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on Field Service Ver.Appendix bizhub C351/C450 544 3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Complete 3rd Original Exit to Start 103ms 456ms 97ms 150ms 563ms 133ms 3rd Original (Reverse Side) Exchange to Start on 21.

2006 CW Transport (M2-DF) Motor 181ms 315ms off CCW CW Exit Motor (M3-DF) off CCW Empty Sensor (PC4-DF) With Paper Without Paper on Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) off Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) on Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) off on Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) off on 939ms 20ms off on Registration Clutch (CL1-DF) off on Exit Solenoid (SL2-DF) off on Turnover Solenoid (SL1-DF) off Original Exit Time 1365ms 21. Timing chart 4037F5E548DA 545 Appendix bizhub C351/C450 . 3.0 Aug.3rd Original Exit to Start 3rd Original Exit to Complete on /SCEND off on /DSET off CW Take-up Motor (M1-DF) off CCW Field Service Ver.

Timing chart bizhub C351/C450 Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 3. 2006 Blank Page Appendix 546 .21.

0 .08 Ver. 3.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Standard Controller 2006.

0 has not been changed in Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 2.0 Service manual Ver. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 deleted. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.Revision history After publication of this service manual. Therefore.0: The revision marks for Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. show 1 to the left of the revised section. • To indicate clearly a section revised. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 2. • When a page revised in Ver.0 has been changed in Ver.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are. 3.0 1. 2. 2. 2006/08 2006/02 2005/03 Date 3. 3. 2 1 — Revision mark Error corrections / Corresponded to a Card Version G4 Error corrections / Corresponded to a Card Version A7 Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . • When a page revised in Ver. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. 3. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.

........................................................5 3.2..........2............5....................4 3.......................... 5 Outline.......................................................................1 3.........4........... 2 Maintenance 2........................0 Aug......6 3.............8 3.. 12 Installation of software ...............2........ 1... 28 i Troubleshooting Details of each function...............1 3...........2 3..................................... 2006 Standard Controller CONTENTS Standard Controller General 1............................ 31 Error Code List for the Internet ISW................. 25 Action When Data Transfer Fails...................................... 5 Installing the Cygwin ......4 3.........................2 3..3 3.................3..........................................................................................5...............2....3......................................................................3................................................ 4 Outline .......................................................................................3...............................1 3...................................................................1 1.... 4 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin ................Field Service Ver..................................................................7 3............................... 12 Maintenance General ............... 12 System environment ... 20 Updating method.................4 3.....................................................................................3.................... 18 Adjustment / Setting Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 ................. 28 Service environment ..5 How to write firmware data ................................................... 3....................................2 3.........................................................2 3................................................................. 1 Type .........................................................5 3.. 25 Updating the Firmware with the Internet ISW..............1 3........ 28 Preparations for Firmware rewriting .............................................3............... 15 Screen.......................................................................................................................5................2 Controller specifications ................. 28 Firmware rewriting .......... 3.................. 5 Service environment ..1 3............................................5 3... 3 Firmware upgrade ........ 8 Writing into the Compact flash ............................................................................... 13 Update of software ...........4..............................................3...........................................................................................................................................3 3.................................. 3....................................................................2 Checking the controller firmware version ................4 3................3..................................... 1 Supporting client specifications ........5................... 16 3................... 12 Function outline.........................................................3 3...............5...2............... 27 Out line...3 3............ 5 Settings of the Windows Environmental Variable.... 9 Correspond model ......... 34 Firmware rewriting by compact flash ....................................................

....................... 7...2 7....................................... 41 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX. Checking the Image Controller Setting ...... 37 Troubleshooting 5................... ....................................... 6. 39 Troubleshooting procedures.................3 7........... 3......................... 43 General 7................................................................................................. 39 Status codes .....................................4 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance ii ................... 2006 Standard Controller Adjustment/Setting 4............................................................Field Service Ver.... 42 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed...0 Aug... 39 Unable to print over the network...............................................1 Checking the system configuration ......................... 39 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP.................................... 7................................

2.85 % PCL PS Not available Network Scan Functions Software Accessories (1) Drive CD Software Accessories (2) Compatible Paper Size 2 Resolution Power Requirements Operating Environmental Requirements Fonts Options *1: The optional Local Interface Kit (EK-702) is required. NT4.0 Aug.3 SNAP) NetBEUI.1. FTP. NetWare 5.1 DHCP. TWAIN Driver. Max. Ethernet II.x Network Print Service SMB RAW Port Printing (Port 9100: To be changed from Page Scope Light) IPP 1.xx. 802. or IEEE 1284 *1 IPX/SPX (Auto. BOX Utility OS: Windows98/98SE/Me.3. Controller specifications Standard Controller Latin 80 Fonts Latin 136 Fonts General 1.1 Type Print Speed Controller specifications Type Built-in type controller B&W : 45 ppm (A4 paper. 3. 2006 1. NetWare 4. USB 2. 6...x.0.1. 1. and simplex or duplex) 1 Printer Language CPU Program ROM RAM Hard Disk Host Interface PPC750 FX 600 MHz 64 MB 512 MB 40 GB Standard: Ethernet (10Base-T or 100Base-TX) Optional: USB 1.2. NetWare 4.Field Service Ver. 1 General PCL5e/c Emulation PCL XL Ver..x.30 °C 15 .1 Emulation PostScript 3 Emulation (3011. Apple Talk Network Protocol Pserver (NDS) . ARP/ICMP. standard paper size A3 Wide Equivalent to 600 dpi in main scanning direction × 1800 dpi in sub scanning direction Shared with main unit 10 .0.x Pserver (Bindery) . 5. 2000. TCP/IP SMTP.. SNMP. 802. 6. POP3. XP. Front Manager. BOOTP SLP. 802. Server2003 Page Scope Web Connection has been built into the controller firmware.x NDPS . HTTP 1.xx) . and simplex or duplex) Color : 35 ppm (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11 paper. and simplex or duplex) : 44 ppm (8 1/2 x 11 paper... LPD Scan to FTP with URL Notification Scan to PC with URL Notification Scan to E-Mail Scan to HDD with URL Notification TWAIN PCL5c Printer Driver.x.

x) Interface General With a parallel connection IEEE1284 (Compatible/Nibble/ECP)*1 Browser The following browser is required to use Page Scope Web Connection: Netscape Communicator version 4. Windows XP.0 Aug. Windows Me. Controller specifications Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 3. 6. NetBEUI. 5. 2 .x.5 or later (Java-compliant) *1: The optional Local Interface Kit (EK-702) is required.2 PC RAM OS Supporting client specifications IBM PC and its compatible 64 MB or more (128MB or more for XP) Windows 98/98SE. Windows 2000.x. Windows NT 4. 2006 1. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. IPX/SPX (NetWare 4.1.0.5 or later (Java-compliant) Internet Explorer version 5. Windows Server 2003 With a network connection Connection method Protocols Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX TCP/IP.

Field Service Ver. Touch “Firmware Version. Checking the controller firmware version • The version of the controller firmware can be checked on the control panel of the machine. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. Checking the controller firmware version Standard Controller Maintenance 2.” 3. Check the firmware versions. 3.0 Aug. 2006 2. 2. 3 Maintenance .

Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. perform the following procedure without fail. 1 Firmware upgrade Outline 3. • When initialization of Fax Function Parameter has been completed after updating the firmware to Ver.69 or later (Phenomena) • Long size paper fax cannot be received (reception error for over 600 mm. 4.) • 600 dpi fax cannot be received (the resolution is decreased to 400 dpi. 1. • Initialize the [Fax Function Parameter] by the following setting. A7 or later.0 Aug.69 or later is installed before shipment.373 5. NOTE • In the case the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is installed. output the list of the items which need to be reset.] → [HDD Version Up] See P.1 • There are two ways to update the Firmware: One is by directly connecting with the Copier using the Compact Flash. enter the Serial Number with the following step. (Occurrence condition) • When updating the Firmware card from the version before Ver. 3. Perform the following setting. • When firmware Ver. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. and the other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW. However.) (Workaround) After updating the firmware. initialize Fax Function Parameter by following procedures. NOTE • Before initializing the parameter. see FK-502 Service Manual. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [NVRAM Data Backup].359 3. following phenomena occurs when MFP controller firmware is updated with following conditions.69 or later. A7 to the Ver. in following case Fax Function Parameter dose not need to be initialized.333 2. [Service mode] → [System 1] → [Serial Number] See P. Perform the following setting.3. NOTE • When updating the Firmware card before Ver. Maintenance 4 . When the Serial Number Input screen is displayed after the Firmware was updated with Main power being ON. [Service Mode] → [Fax Setting] → [Initialization] For detail of initializing procedure.69 to the Ver. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. See P. 2006 3.

Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 3.Field Service Ver.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Cygwin Outline • Write the firmware into the compact flash using Cygwin.2 3. 3. • Cygwin consists of two types: Full install version and light version that is comprised only of necessary files. 4037F2E546DA 5 . and click [Next (N)].exe] on CD-ROM in which Cygwin is stored.0 Aug.2 Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash • Compact flash (Service Tool: 4037 0751 ##) 3. 2006 2 3. Select “Install from Local Directory”. 3.2. 4037F2C501DA 2. For the full installation version 1.2.3 Installing the Cygwin A. 4037F2E545DA 3. Click [Next (N)]. Double click the [setup.2.

Check to make sure that “Root Directory” is in default setting. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure to check that “Root Directory” is in default setting. (Described below is the sample procedure when CD-ROM drive is E-drive.” 5. Maintenance 4037F2E547DA 6.0 Aug. 2006 4.) 7. select the [cygwin] folder in CD-ROM drive. Click [Next (N)]. For installing from CD-ROM. • Do not change the setting value except “Root Directory. 3. Specify the folder for installation. 4037F2E548DA 6 . Specify the place of the data to be installed. [C:\cygwin].3. [C:\cygwin]. Click [Next (N)].

0 Aug. For the light version 1. Confirm that the “Cygwin” folder is created directly in the C drive (Windows system drive).Field Service Ver. Click [Next (N)]. 3. Decompress the downloaded compressed file “cygwin_rhein_phase2. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 4037F2E549DA 4037F2E550DA 9. B. 3. Click [Complete] to start installing. 7 Maintenance . 2. 2006 8.zip” directly to the C drive (Windows system drive).

3.2. Click the “New” in System Variable Setting. After installing. 2006 3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver.4 Settings of the Windows Environmental Variable 1.0 Aug. Set the following two values as the Windows Environmental Variable. Maintenance 4036fs2620e0 3.3. Variable name CYGWIN HOME Variable value ntsec /home/username 4036fs2621e0 8 . and click the “Environmental Variable” of “Advanced” tab. 2. open the Property of “My Computer”.

Field Service Ver. Double-click the Firmware data.5 Writing into the Compact flash 3.exe. Put the data of Firmware in the optional directory. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 1. and specify the directory to be uncompressed.” 2. delete it before uncompressing. 3. 4038F2E563DB NOTE • When old Firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) NOTE • The file name of Firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****.0 Aug. 9 Maintenance 4038F2E562DB .2. 2006 3. • When the firmware data is decompressed. and then uncompress it. “card_work” folder is created in the selected directory and the data is decompressed in this folder.

5. Use the Command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory. 6. which was recognized through the procedure 3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 4. and check the Drive name. and push the “Enter”. Mount the Compact flash on the PC.) Maintenance 4038F2E564DB 10 .0 Aug. Click “Start” → “Program” → “Accessories” → “Command Prompt” to open the Command Prompt.bat. which was recognized in the Windows. Specify the Drive of Compact flash. 2006 3. 3.3.” (Input the C: \bizhub\card_work>mkcf f (Drive number): in the below figure. and execute the “mksf.

Once the “mkcf. Upon completion of writing. 8. 3.Field Service Ver. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched. 2006 3. Remove the Compact flash from PC. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 7. 4038F2E565DB 9. 11 .0 Aug. NOTE • When removing the Compact flash.bat” is executed. CHECKSUM is executed. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. data writing into the Compact flash is started. “VERIFY OK” appears.

19 • Format the compact flash card by the FAT or vxWorks form. 2006 3. Computer CPU Correspond OS Required memory Others • IBM PC/AT compatible machine • Pentium III / 500 MHz or higher is recommended.3. See P.18 • Compare the firmware data written into the compact flash card with the one saved in PC. See P. Color machine B/W machine • bizhub C250/C300/C350/C351/C352/C450 • bizhub C250P/C352P/C450P • bizhub 200/250/350 • Di2510/3010/3510/2510f/3010f/3510f 3.0 Aug.19 Maintenance Basic functions Compare Firmware with a card Advanced functions Create a Firmware Image from a card Format a card 3. See P.2 Function outline • The following functions are available with this software. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 2 Field Service Ver.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows.3.19 Display information about a card • Acquisition the information of firmware data written into the compact flash card. NOTE • vxWorks form is not applicable See P.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card.3. 256MB (Windows XP/2003) is recommended. Function type Function name Write Firmware to a card Description • Write firmware data into the compact flash card. See P. Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 • More than 128 MB (Windows 2000). • Windows 2000. 3.3.18 • Create the firmware image form using the firmware data written into the compact flash card. 3.3 System environment • The following system environments are required or recommended to use the software. • Drive that is able to Read/Write compact flash 12 .

Double click [setup.Field Service Ver. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 9J06F2E700DA • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. 1. • When any anti-virus program is activated. 2006 3. 9J06F2C673DA 2.exe] to start the installation of the software. quite the program before the installation. NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication. 3. Click [Next >]. 13 .3.4 Installation of software 3.0 Aug.

3. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. 9J06F2E702DA 14 .0 Aug. 9J06F2E701DA Maintenance 4. select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. After checking the contents of license agreement.3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. and click [Next>]. 2006 3.

3. 3. Select [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006] of [Add/Remove Programs] in Windows Control Panel menu to delete the program. delete (uninstall) the currently installed program and install the new version. 1. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller 9J06F2E703DA 9J06F2E708DA 9J06F2E709DA 7.5 Update of software • To update the software version. Quite the program if the software is activated. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]).Field Service Ver. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 6. 3. Click [Install] to start installation.3.0 Aug. • Follow the procedures shown below to delete (uninstall) the program. 2. 2006 5. 15 Maintenance .

3.6 Screen A. • To display the license agreement and version information of the tool. • Displayed screen is different between Basic mode and Advanced mode. • Select the check box of [Enabled Advanced Features] to enable advanced functions at main window.18 • To select the compact flash drive to which the data to write.17 • To select the function to be used. 2006 3. See P.3. corresponds to the card you wish to write to: 16 .0 Aug. Advanced mode When the advanced mode is selected [1] [2] Maintenance [3] [4] [6] [5] 9J06F2E704DA [1] [2] [3] About Copyright Info Settings • To display the outline of the tool. See P. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode. [4] What would you like to do? [5] Select the location of the Firmware to write to the card: [6] Select the drive letter that • To select the location where the firmware is stored in PC. 3. • To display the dialog to enable the advanced functions. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver.

However. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Features]. • Not available yet. • If [YES] is selected. data consistency can be ensured by data verification of check sums during data writing. LastUsed : The drive used at previous time is selected.Field Service Ver. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. vxWorks : Not available yet. Also advanced functions can be selected at the main window. • Select the default card format during software starting. it takes more time for data writing compared to the case without sums calculation (Basically this mode shall be selected. check sums calculation is skipped during data writing. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller B. • Set whether to calculate check sums during data writing. it fails to ensure the reliability of the written data. 3.0 Aug. [2] [3] Default Drive Letter [4] [5] Default Image Block Size Calculate sums when writing [6] Folder for Temporary Files • Set the folder for saving temporary files during the tool is activating. The temporary file is automatically deleted after the operation completes normally. • Select how to set default of compact flash drive during software starting.) • If [No] is selected. [1] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] 9J06F2E705DA [1] Enable Advanced Features Default Setting for Card Format • Enable the setting of advanced functions at the dialog by selecting the check box. Although it take less time for data writing compared to the case with sums calculation. 17 Maintenance . FAT : The format to be used by all models that the software supports. 2006 3. None : [Please Select] is displayed on the screen every starting and the drive should be selected every time.

• The firmware data (file) format saved in PC shall consistent with the one written into the compact flash.tar.0 Aug.3. • [Compressed firmware type] means the compressed formed image file that is created using the tool’s function of the [Create a Firmware Image from a card].tar. • C350 firmware requires the compact flash over 64 MB. The FW data of the models shown below can be written. • [Uncompressed firmware type] means the image file that is uncompressed the compressed firmware file.gz or *.img) into the compact flash. • After the comparison.img. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. (2) Compare Firmware with a card • Compare the firmware data written into the compact flash and the one (file) saved in PC.gz ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ *.tar. The FW data of the models shown below can be written. 3. 2006 3.tar. Although the compact flash with larger capacity than the original one can be used. • Firmware of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P requires the compact flash over 128 MB.gz rhein3_cf. display the check sum information (comparison result dialog) of the firmware data of the compact flush and the file. • To write FW data into the compact flash.img Compressed firmware type Uncompressed firmware type Di3510/350/250/ 200 firmware type ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ma001 ma001a Maintenance 200/250/350 NOTE • The above-mentioned [Indexed firmware type] and [Di3510/350/250/200 firmware type] shall be comprised of multiple files and one of the files shall be named as above.gz rhein2_cf.img. use the compact flash with the same capacity as the one used for the original image file.3. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash.gz tss2_cf.gz *. • To write the image file data (*. it is not covered under warranty.7 Details of each function A. <Corresponding models and firmware file type> File type Models C450/C450P/C351 C352/C352P/C300 C350 C250/C250P Di2510/3010/3510/ 2510f/3010f/3510f Indexed firmware type rhein1_cf. 18 .

only FAT format is available but not vxWork format. The image file is written into the compact flash in the uncompressed form. • The created FW image file is automatically compressed and created as the Compressed firmware file (*. Therefore this tool doesn't create uncompressed firmware file (*. (3) Display information about a card • Display the information of the firmware data written into the compact flash. 19 . • For the series of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P. Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash. MSC version is displayed.gz). 2006 3. and the compact flash that the firmware data is written cannot be browsed on the Windows OS. The information to be displayed is according to the type of written FW data. which makes file control difficult.img). the uncompressed data would occupy too much capacity. 3. This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data. it becomes the own file style that is different from the FAT.0 Aug. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance B. however. • To write the firmware data into the compact flash. NOTE • In current version.img.Field Service Ver. (2) Format a card • Make format of the compact flash in FAT or vxWork form. the card should be formatted in FAT form to clear (initialize) the description of the compact flash. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. • After the firmware data is written into the compact flash. • For the series of Di3510/200/250/350 series. check sums of each firmware data is displayed.

Put the firmware data in the optional directory. and then uncompress it.exe.0 Aug. and specify the directory to be uncompressed. In the case of C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P series 1. 9J06F2E711DA NOTE • When old firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed.3. Double-click the firmware data.8 How to write firmware data A. 2006 3.3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 20 . delete it before uncompressing.” 2. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) Maintenance 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. 3.

2006 3. which was recognized in the Windows. and check the drive name. 9J06F2E706DA 21 . 5. Mount the compact flash on the PC. NOTE • When using the external compact flash drive such as USB be sure to connect them before starting this tool. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. 3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 3. Select the check box of [Write Firmware to a card].0 Aug. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006.Field Service Ver.

Move to the folder decompressed at step 2. confirm that only "###_cf. Click [Open]. 3. NOTE • If the file extension is set to be not displayed in Windows. 9. 2006 6.tar. Select the file type [C450/ C351/C352/ C300/C350/C250 Indexed Firmware]. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver.3.gz" (### is for model name) is displayed. 9J06F2E713DA 8. and select. Click [Browse].gz” will not be displayed. 9J06F2E714DA 22 . 9J06F2E707DA Maintenance 7.0 Aug. the file name “.

and click [YES]. If these drives are selected mistakenly to make the writing. In the dialog. 11.0 Aug. re-confirm the firmware data and the written destination drive. NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination. the screen goes back of the main window. which is confirmed at step 3. it may give fatal damage on Windows system or delete the saved data. 3. (If [NO] is clicked. Therefore pay close attention when selecting the drive.Field Service Ver. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 9J06F2E715DA 10. the following dialog is displayed. 12.) 9J06F2E716DA 23 . 2006 3. When clicking [Write] button. [Write] button is changed form gray into active status.

Confirm each check sums are identical and quit Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. the following screen appears.0 Aug. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. 2006 13.3. 15. Maintenance 9J06F2E717DA NOTE • The contents displayed on the screen may different according to the model type. Take out the compact flash from the PC. When the writing is completed. 14. NOTE • When removing the compact flash. 16. In this screen. The above is the screen displayed for firmware data writing of bizhub C450. NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer . Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 3. and data writing starts. Click [Yes]. check sums will be compared between the firmware data and one written into the compact flash. 24 .do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure.

Remove the screw [1] and the metal Blanking Plate [2]. Up to six types of F/W will be displayed on the control panel. 5. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated. [3] 1 4. 6. 3. 1 1. Insert the Compact Flash card into the slot.0 Aug. 2. 3. 4037F2J517DA 25 .Field Service Ver.4 Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The F/W is updated using the Compact flash. 4037F2C017DA Turn ON the Main Power Switch.4. 2006 3. [2] [1] 4037F2C016DA 3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance 3.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned ON. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.

13. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated. 14. 2006 7. (The Start key blinks green. data may sometimes be internally updated. Turn ON the main power switch.) 9. Select [Firmware Version].) 8. the following message will be displayed. Check also the Check Sum value (“Check Sum XXXX”) shown on the Touch Panel. 1 11. Check that the Control Panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly (“Downloading Completed”). 26 . NOTE • When turning the main power ON for the first time after the Firmware is updated. In that case. 3.3. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 10. Remove the Compact Flash card from the slot. Press the Start key. (At this time.0 Aug. Maintenance 4037F2E627DA 12. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch. Never turn the main power OFF until either the Serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed. the Start key starts blinking red.

If the procedure is still abnormally terminated. *2: The Optional Fax Multi Line ML-501 is necessary for the above procedure. take the following steps. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance • If “NG” appears on the Touch Panel. If the procedure is abnormally terminated. Perform the data rewriting procedure again.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. 1. 3. change the board that has caused “NG” and carry out data rewriting procedure. change the Compact Flash for a new one and try another rewriting sequence. 3. MFP Controller Scanner Printer LPH Fax Board Controller1 MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) Image Processing Board (PWB-C) Control Board (PWB-MC) LED Drive Board (PWB-LED) Fax Board (Main) *1 Fax Board (Sub) *2 1 Fax Board Controller2 *1: The Optional FAX Kit FK-502 is necessary for the above procedure. 1 2. 27 . indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red).4. 2006 3.2 Action When Data Transfer Fails 3.

so the Copier will automatically receive the Firmware from the Program Server over a network for updating.5. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 3. the Network parameter. 4037F2E621DA 3. 2006 3. the Firmware can be updated when the operator is at the User’s without Firmware data.3. With the Internet ISW. • When the following setting is set to “ON”.366 of the main unit service manual. Adjustment/Setting “Internet ISW”. and touch [END]. 3.1 Updating the Firmware with the Internet ISW Out line • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the Firmware with the control panel of the Copier.5. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 28 . “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. • Sub-power switch is set to OFF. etc. NOTE • Settings such as Server setting. • For details of each setting item. • The Copier is connected to such a network environment that the Firmware can be downloaded on the internet using the ftp or http Protocol. See P. The “Internet ISW” will not operate under the following conditions. Internet ISW Set 1.5. Touch [ON]. • When the following setting is set to “ON”: [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • The Copier has the job currently performing. refer to Manin Unit Service Manual. Program Server Address as well as Firewall Address need to be set to the Copier. Touch [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [Internet ISW]. Maintenance 3. 2. • Main power switch is set to OFF.3 Preparations for Firmware rewriting • For using the Internet ISW. Call the Service Mode to the screen.2 Service environment The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function. will be available by selecting “ON” on this setting.5 3.0 Aug. A.

Field Service Ver. set the Proxy Server Address and the Port Number. [PASV Mode]. 1. 3. and enter the Login through 60. perform the setting for a Proxy Server. and set the time for the Connection Time Out between 30 and 300 seconds. and select [ON]. Connecting by ftp 4 5 29 . data transmission port can be secured to enable the file transmission. 3. Data Input Setting • Touch [HTTP Setting]. Select [Port Number]. accessing to the Proxy Server. Protocol Setting • It performs the setting concerning the Protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW. 1.0 Aug. and select [ON]. and enter the Password on the on-screen keyboard. Proxy Server • For connecting via Proxy Server. 2006 3. 2. Connection Time-Out • Select [Connection Time-Out]. select 2. 2. Select [Connection Time Out]. and select [ON]. When Authentication is necessary for accessing to the Proxy Server. Select the [Server Address]. ⎯ Data Input Setting • Touch [FTP Setting]. 3 1. and set the time for the Connection Time Out from 1 [Authentication]. Step 0 1 2 Connecting by http Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. Connect Proxy • For connecting via Proxy Server. Select [Log-in Name]. Select [Port Number]. 3. select [ON]. Connection Setting Proxy Authentication • Set the Login name and the Password which • Perform the setting for accessing FTP may be necessary for Authentication when server. *PASV Mode: This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as inside the Firewall. and select [ON]. Since with PASV mode. Select [Password]. When connecting in PASV mode. • When connecting to the Program Server using a proxy server. and set the Port Number for FTP server from 1 through 65535. select name on the on-screen keyboard. and set the Port Number for the Proxy Server from 1 through 65535. and set the Proxy Server Address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme. the client with restriction sets the Port Number. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance B.

and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [END]. and touch [END]. 4. 7. and touch [END]. 4037F2E622DA 3. and enter the directory which stores the Program Server Address and the Firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL method. Select [Password]. Select [User ID]. 2006 C. and touch [END]. 5. Select [URL]. and enter the file name of the Firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen keyboard. and enter the Password which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-screen keyboard.3. When connecting to http http://(host name or IP address)/directory name or https://(host name or IP address)/directory name When connecting to ftp ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name 6. Maintenance 30 . 3. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. Select [File Name]. Touch [END] to finish setting. Forwarding Access Setting • To make the access setting for the Program Server which stores the Firmware data 1. NOTE • Enter the URL which matches to the Protocol to be used. 2. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting].0 Aug. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode].

[Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Download] 2. 1. Perform the following setting. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. 3. 4037F2E623DA 3. and start downloading. 4037F2J517DA 31 Maintenance . • Do not turn power OFF while downloading. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW.4 Firmware rewriting 3.5. The Copier will automatically start running.Field Service Ver. and it starts accessing the server. A. 4037F2C624DA 4. Touch [ISW Start]. Select the F/W to be updated. 2006 3. ask the administrator for permission beforehand.0 Aug.

Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. NOTE • When turning the main power ON for the first time after the Firmware is updated. an error code and the message will be displayed. 3. In that case. Never turn the main power OFF until either the Serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed.3. When the Firmware is normally updated. 2. data may sometimes be internally updated. refer to “Error Code List for the Internet ISW”. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data. It can be used with the Firmware Version before conducting updating. See P. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network. and touch [OK]. 1. C. the following message will be displayed. and try updating again. Maintenance 4037F2E627DA (2) Failing to update the Firmware due to the Network trouble. During Firmware Updating 1. Check the settings for the network by error codes.34 32 . and touch [OK] to return to the Main screen. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. restart the Copier in auto or manual mode to display the outcome. NOTE • For error codes. Restart the Copier in auto or manual mode. 3.0 Aug. 2006 B.

Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance (3) Failing to update the Firmware after downloading has started 1.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. When updating on the control panel. Confirming the Firmware Version. 2. 3. D. NOTE • Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the Main power OFF/ON if the Firmware is not updated. When it failed right after updating has started. Call the Service Mode to the screen. touch [settings] on the standby screen. 2006 3. Select the [Firmware Version]. Once Firmware updating has started. the ROM in the Copier will be deleted. restart the Copier. 3. 33 . Check if the Firmware Version is updated. • Firmware can be updated with the Compact flash with the Main power OFF. and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading. 2. and check the Network settings again. and restart the Internet ISW. 1. Touch [Download].

2006 3. inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. When updating with CS Remote Care. inform the corresponding error code to KONICA MINOLTA. 34 . (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following setting.3.5 Error Code List for the Internet ISW • When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • Check the status of the following setting. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem. the message on the status and the error code will be displayed on the control panel. • Check the User’s network environment. <Sample Display> Maintenance 4037F2C619DA Error code Control panel Description Countermeasure • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. 3.5.0 Aug. 0x00000001 Illegal error on the control 0x00000010 Parameter error 0x00111000 Error concerning the network • Connection has been completed. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center.

• There is no space for F/W data to be downloaded. • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally. • It failed to prohibit the job. 0x00004### • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Maintenance Description Error concerning the network • It cannot be connected to the server. • Set the PASV mode to “Invalid”. • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. • It cannot be accepted because the sub-power is OFF.• Wait for the current Internet ISW to be cuted. FTP error • Error reply code for the PASV command. • ISW being executed by other method. 0x10000103 0x10000104 0x10000106 35 . [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem. Error concerning the network • Others FTP error • Reply code when it failed to be connected Countermeasure • Check the network environment of the User. • It cannot be accepted because of the job currently being executed. • Check sum error • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. etc. Error concerning the network • Disconnection occurred Error concerning the network • The network is not connected. • Wait for the current job to be completed and try it again. etc. User’s name. 0x00007### 0x1000 0100 0x10000101 0x10000102 • The Internet ISW is already being exe. and try it again. 3. Error concerning the network • Communication Timeout. (It failed to lock the operation. 0x00005### 0x00006### • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. • Wait for about 30 minutes and try it again. completed. 2006 Error code Control panel 0x00111001 0x00111100 0x00111101 0x00111110 0x00110010 3. FTP error • Error rely code for the RETR command.Field Service Ver. • Check the IP address. 0x00001### • Check to see if FTP server normally operates.) → It failed to lock the job because the operation is already locked with PSWC. inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. FTP error • Error reply code for the PORT command. 0x00002### 0x00003### FTP error • Error reply code for the User command • Check to see if FTP server operates or Pass command normally. • Turn sub-power ON and try it again. FTP error • Error reply code for CWD command FTP error • Error reply code for the TYPE command.0 Aug.

During the process by the subset program. This code is used temporarily to make it in error status. 2006 Description Countermeasure 0x10000107 File access error • The file downloaded has an error. The temporary error when running the subset • When starting the Internet ISW in a normal program. Firmware upgrade Standard Controller Error code Control panel Field Service Ver. and another ISW is necessary. 3. with the subset program. • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is • The size of the file to be downloaded is of the correct type.0 Aug. it has to be in the “Failed” status unless the Internet ISW is successfully conducted. • The area F/W is stored is destroyed. the rebooting will start • Wait until ISW is automatically exeand the Internet ISW will be executed cuted on MFP side. too large. • When it is identified to be the different type of F/W. • The header of the file which has been read has an error. 0x10000108 0x20000000 Maintenance 36 .3.

A. The change of the setting becomes valid when the Main Power Switch is turned OFF and ON after the appropriate change has been made on the panel.” • Selecting “Controller 0” will initialize the following settings made while “Controller 1” was selected.[Detail Setting]. it is necessary to select “Controller 0” in [Image Controller Setting]. Reset the following items as necessary when using the Internal Standard Controller. 2. 3. Checking the Image Controller Setting Standard Controller Adjustment/Setting 4. Note on returning the setting from “Controller 1” to “Controller 0.Field Service Ver. Touch [System 2]. NOTE • If the setting is changed. [Administrator Setting] . Check that [Controller 0] is selected in [Image Controller Setting]. Checking the Image Controller Setting • Whenever the controller is mounted.[Network Setting] . 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. <Control Panel on the machine> • Setting items included in [Network Setting] available from [Administrator Setting].) • [Administrator Setting]-[User Authentication/Account Track]-[General Settings]-[External Server] • [Administrator Setting]-[System Connection]-[IS OpenAPI Setting] 2 • Mailbox Destination (scan) • Information on the original specified by the Program Destination • [User Setting] → [Initial Setting] → [Scan] <PageScope Web Connection> • SSL/TLS 37 Adjustment / Setting . be sure to turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. (Except [Status Notification Setting] and [Prefix/Suffix Setting] available from the following setting. 3. 2006 4.0 Aug.

3.4. Checking the Image Controller Setting Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 2006 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 38 .0 Aug.

Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports]. See “User’s Guide [Copy Operations]” of the machine. Status codes Code C-A051 C-A052 C-A053 Description Standard controller configuration failure Action Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). see the C450 Main Unit Service Manual 7. Go to item 2. Enter the correct divi. Controller start failure Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC) if the problem occurs again when the Main Power Switch of the machine is turned OFF and ON.) Check the machine control panel for jobs in print queue. Priority may be changed as necessary. Check Possible Cause Action Remark An error on machine side (paper running Correct the error. Touch [Configuration Page] and press the Start button. For details of how to replace the MFP Control Board.See “User’s Guide sion ID in the printer [Print Operations].” The correct division ID driver and try re-transhas not been entered. etc. Faulty controller hardware Change the MFP Control Board (PWB-MFPC). 6. 1. out. 2006 5. Press the Utility/Counter key. Enter the password to unlock the job. 3. 39 .1 Troubleshooting procedures Unable to print over the network. Waiting its turn Is the print job displayed on the 1 machine control panel? Yes The job is locked. Checking the system configuration Standard Controller Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 5. let the printer print a Configuration Page to check for system configuration.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. Checking the system configuration • When a malfunction occurs. 2. 3. 7. (access code) No Data is yet to be received. toner running out. mitting the job again.

” Yes Controller board (MFP Control Board) oper. Printer driver incorrectly installed Is the response of 2 Ping sent from the PC to the machine? Field Service Ver.0 Aug.7. IP address and/or subnet mask incorrectly set. the faulty relay device. Turn OFF and ON the machine main power switch. Set the correct IP address and subnet mask. Reconnect the cable Check with the conand restart or change troller network LED. Restart the PC.” reinstall it properly. 2006 Action Set the correct port. Troubleshooting 40 . Uninstall the printer driver through the See “User’s Guide proper steps and then [Print Operations]. PC operates erratically temporarily. No Network cable is disconnected or a relay device is faulty. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Check Possible Cause The print destination port setting is wrong.Restart the controller ates erratically tempo. rarily. Remark See “User’s Guide [Print Operations]. 3. See “TCP/IP Setting” in Installation Guide.board.

Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller 7. IP address of the FTP server is wrong. A timeout condition occurs. parties are connected to the network or not.in the FTP server is administrator and enter tion” appears.✻ . Failed to log on to the FTP server because of the wrong user account. Check with the network administrator and make the correct proxy setting.” Proxy setting is wrong. specified.” The timeout value depends on the network’s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server. Port number is wrong.Field Service Ver. 2006 7. Check with the network administrator. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number.controller and FTP server nected during file trans. Send Ping from PC to the The network is discon. See “User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].to check to see if both fer. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct user name and password. Check Possible Cause Action Remark The FTP server is not in Check with the network service. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address.0 Aug. The message “Server 2 Connect error” appears. The FTP server stops during file transfer. The FTP server hard disk becomes full during file transfer. The message “Failed to A directory not existing Check with the network 1 connect to the destina. 3. the correct directory. 41 Troubleshooting Check with the network administrator.2 Unable to transmit data through Scan to FTP. administrator. Set a longer value for “FTP Connection Timeout.

sion as necessary so that the Operations].” The timeout value depends on the network’s traffic conditions and load on the FTP server.3 Unable to transmit data through Scan to E-Mail/Internet FAX. Set a longer value for “SMTP Connection Timeout. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct IP address. Decrease resolution to make small the data size or change The size of the scan data the setting for Scanned File See “User’s Guide exceeds the upper limit value Separation and Binary Divi[Network Scanner set for Maximum E-Mail Size. 2006 7.” Remark Port number is wrong.7. The message 1 “Server Connect error” appears.0 Aug. connected to the network or not. ✽ The message 2 “E-mail Size Over” appears. 3. Send Ping from PC to the controller and SMTP server to The network is disconnected check to see if both parties are during file transfer. IP address of the SMTP server is wrong. See “User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations]. Action Check with the network administrator. A timeout condition occurs. Troubleshooting 42 . Check Possible Cause The SMTP server is not in service. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver.” scan data does not exceed the Maximum E-Mail Size. Check with the network administrator and enter the correct port number.

Check Yes Possible Cause The destination mail address is wrong. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller 7.” An error message 1 is returned from the mail server. Remark See “User’s Guide [Network Scanner Operations].4 E-mail does not reach the destination when transmission through Scan to E-Mail/Scan to Internet FAX is completed. 2006 7. 3. No or is not receiving. 43 Troubleshooting . mail stored in the POP3 server. Action Enter the correct mail address.Field Service Ver.0 Aug. The receiving end is being unable to receive.

2006 Blank Page Troubleshooting 44 .0 Aug. Troubleshooting procedures Standard Controller Field Service Ver. 3.7.

02 Ver.0 . 2.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Automatic Document Feeder (DF-601) 2006.

2. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision .0: The revision marks for Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2006/02 2005/03 Date 2. 2. • When a page revised in Ver. • When a page revised in Ver.Revision history After publication of this service manual.0 1. Therefore. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 only are shown with those for Ver.0 deleted.0 has not been changed in Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0 Service manual Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3. 2. • To indicate clearly a section revised. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. 3.0 has been changed in Ver. 2.0 are left as they are. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 3. 1 — Revision mark Integrated with the bizhub C351 Service Manual.

....................................5 2.......... 3 Machine specifications............... 1................... 5 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller ..............................................................................................................................6 1..........................2 Adjustment/Setting 4..................................................................... 1 Paper type ............................ 5 Transport Belt.............................. 9 Sensor Section.6 2...................... 4 Maintenance 2...................................3............................ 12 ADF ...............................................................5 1................................4 1..Field Service Ver. 9 2....... 12 Front Cover/Rear Cover ................ 11 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ...... 5.......................................................................................................... 11 Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General ....................3 2..........................................................................................................2 How to use the adjustment section ............................................... 12 Disassembly/Assembly procedure. 1 Paper feed prohibited originals ........................................................................... 3 Operating environment ........ 15 Service Mode .........................1.................................................1 3.................................................................................1....................................................... 1 Type .......8 3............................1 3..................................................................... 12 3.................. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder CONTENTS Automatic Document Feeder (DF-601) General 1..............................................4 2................... 1 Functions .......................................................... 5........................... 5 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .................2 2.......0 Feb.....1 1.........1 Periodical check ................. 2 Mixed original feed chart............................................ 6 Separation Roller ....1.................. 2...............................8 Product specification ....1...................................................... 8 Exit Roller / Roll ......................................... 16 Service Mode setting procedure.................................... 8 Registration Roller .............................................................................3 1....3......................................................2 1....7 1........................................................................3 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .................................1.............................7 2..................................................1 5.............1............................1............1 2.............................................................................................................................................. 2 Paper feed not guaranteed originals......... 3. 16 ADF setting procedure.........................................................2 3.................................................... 16 i Troubleshooting Other ................................................................ 7 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller ................. 2................... 9 Turnover Roller..........................1.......................................

...........2.........3 5...........1 Automatic Document Feeder Original Stop Position ........... 6.................3..............................................2.......................1 6....................................................................................... 16 Auto Stop Position Adjustment ....4 6....2 5.........3........................................................................................................ 23 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side ................ 20 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position ........4......................4 7............. 31 Sensor layout...3........................................................................3...............3..................................... 31 Solution ............................................................6 Adjustment of the registration loop value ......................... 2006 5................................................................................................... 36 ii .................2 6..................... 7.........................................0 Feb... 23 Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side .......................... 33 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed...................... 16 Paper Passage ..................5 8................................................................ 35 7....... 31 Misfeed display ... 26 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction ..............................................................................................2 7.........................................................................................................1 5....................................... 17 Sensor check screen .....3 6..........................1 Troubleshooting 7.....................2 Sensor check list ....................................... 32 Transport section misfeed.. 27 Maintenance 6................................. 19 Sensor Auto Adjust .... 31 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............5 Adjustment / Setting 6..........4........... 20 Adjustment of the tray volume ........................ 17 Sensor Check ..........3 5.............................. 19 5.......................................................3..................................2.............. 21 Adjustment of the document skew......4...........................5 5............ 24 Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction .................. 18 General 5..4 Mechanical adjustment ...............................................4............................................1 6............................... 34 Transport Tray section misfeed ...................................3 6.....................................................................................5 6.....................Field Service Ver................................................................1 7...........3 7............... 32 Initial check items ......... 32 Paper Take-Up section misfeed .................... 16 Registration Loop Adj..............................................................4 5....................... 28 Sensor auto adjustment ..... 22 Adjustment of the document stop position ... ..........................3..............................................................................................1 7..............................3 Jam Display.. Set error detection ................1.........................................2 7.............. 29 Troubleshooting 7......2.. 18 Original Tray Width.....3 6......2 6............. 25 Manual adjust: 1-Sided Set/ 2-Sided Set.........2............................................................................................................. 2................4......3...............................

25 to 55. Product specification Automatic Document Feeder Paper Take-Up from top of stack Endless Belt Transport Mode Loop Turnover Mode U-turn Turnover + Switchback U-Turn Turnover Mode (only in 1-Sided Mode) 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode 1-Sided Mode 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.75 lb) Original Exit Tray: 38 sheets (210 g/m2. 1 General .2 Functions Standard Mode Modes Thick Paper Mode Mixed Original Detection Mode 1.25 lb) Document Feed Table: 38 sheets (210 g/m2.0 Feb.25 lb) 1-Sided Mode 129 to 210 g/m2 (34. Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Combination Table. 55.3 Paper type Standard Mode Plain Paper Type of Document Thick Paper Mode Plain Paper Mixed Original Detection Mode Plain Paper Detectable Document Size*1 Metric area: B6S to A3 Inch area: 5.75 lb) 1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb) 2-Sided Mode 50 to 110 g/m2 (13.Field Service Ver.5 to 11 × 17 Standard Mode / Mixed Original Detection Mode Capacity Thick Paper Mode *1 For the Combined Original Detection Mode.5S / 5. 55.5 × 8.1 Name Product specification Type Duplexing Document Feeder Paper Take-Up Transport Type Turnover Paper Exit Installation Document Alignment Document Loading Screw cramp to the main unit Center Face up 1. 1.25 to 29. 21.25 to 29. 2006 1.25 lb) Original Exit Tray: 100 sheets (80 g/m2. 2.75 lb) General 1.5 × 8.25 lb) Document Feed Table: 100 sheets (80 g/m2. 21.

damaged sheet Sheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in askew Take-up failure.. torn or wrinkled Sheets severely curled OHP Film (Transparency Film) Label Paper Offset Master Paper Sheets clipped or notched Sheets patched 1. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. B4 or 11 × 17) Sheets with rough surface (e. Type of Original Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 . Sheets misfed Patched part folded or torn sheet. transport failure Take-up failure. damaged sheet Take-up failure. transport failure Paper with many punched holes (e. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 1. defective drive mechanism due to jammed staples or clips Take-up failure. trouble occurrence will be highly possible.0 Feb.g. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. transport failure Take-up failure.1. 2. Sheets misfed General Sheets folded.15 mm) Heat Sensitive Paper Ink Jet Paper Sheets with smooth surface (Coated Paper) Intermediate paper Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Possible Trouble Dog-eared. Sheets misfed Take-up failure.25 lb) or more in 2-Sided Possible Trouble Take-up failure. Sheets misfed Damaged sheet. damaged sheet. letterhead) Sheets penciled Sheets folded Sheets other than detectable-size sheets Sheets of less than 35 g/m2 (9.g. Product specification Field Service Ver. Sheets misfed Take-up failure. exit failure.25 lb) or more Sheets of 110 Mode g/m2 (29.. exit failure Edge folded. transport failure Take-up failure. image deformation Take-up failure Contamination Image deformation. Type of Original Sheets stapled or clipped together Sheets glued together Sheets of 211 g/m2 (56. paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible. transport failure Take-up failure.4 Paper feed prohibited originals • If fed. multi-page feed.25 lb) Transport failure Transport failure. take-up failure Image deficit Take-up failure 2 .5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals • If fed. loose leaf) limited Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes to vertical feeding Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Sheets two-folded or Z-folded (A3.

5 8. Mixed Original Feed Can not Set Original Tilted with in 2 % or less is 80 % 1.5 × 11 8.5 × 8. 2.2 kg (31.5 8. 2006 1.5 OK OK OK NG 5.5 × 14 OK OK OK NG 8.5 × 8. Original Size Mixed Original Size 297 mm A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S 297 mm A3 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG NG A4 OK OK OK OK OK* NG NG NG 257 mm B4 OK OK OK OK OK* NG B5 OK OK OK OK OK* NG 210 mm A4S OK OK OK NG A5 OK OK OK NG 182 mm 148 mm B5S OK OK A5S - 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm OK For Inch Max. Original Size Mixed Original Size 11 11 × 17 8.5 × 14 8.5 × 11S 5.5 × 11 OK OK OK* OK* NG NG 8.Field Service Ver.0 Feb.5 % or less) NO.5 5.25 inch (H) 14.5S 11 × 17 OK OK OK* OK* NG NG 11 8.6 Mixed original feed chart For Metric Max.5 5. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 60 W or less 586 mm (W) × 519 mm (D) × 135 mm (H) 23 inch (W) × 20.7 Machine specifications DC24V (supplied from the main unit) DC5V (generated within the Automatic Document Feeder) Power Requirements Max.5 × 8.5 × 11S OK OK OK NG 5.5 × 8.5 5. Product specification Automatic Document Feeder 1.25 lb) 3 General - .5 inch (D) × 5.5S OK OK NG * Mixed Original Feed available (Tilted with in 1.

2006 Automatic Document Feeder 1.8 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. 2. Product specification Field Service Ver.1. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.0 Feb. General 4 .

Periodical check Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance 2.1 Transport Belt A.0 Feb. Remove two C-clips [1]. Remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy [2] from the belt [3] connected. ensure that the Transport Belt Roller Assy is set exactly to the connection belt. 4582fs2503c0 [6] [5] [5] 4. Replacing procedure 1. 2006 2. 2. Remove two screws [5].1. NOTE • In reassembling.1 Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. [1] [1] 4582s2501c0 [2] [3] 2. 4582fs2504c0 5 Maintenance .Field Service Ver. Pull out and remove the Transport Belt Roller Assy [4]. 4582fs2502c0 [4] 3. and pull up the Roller Section [6]. 2. 2.

1. Remove the Transport Belt [7]. and remove the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller connecting section [9] from the shaft [10]. Automatic Document Feeder [7] 4582fs2505c0 2. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. and remove the Pick-up/ Paper Take-up Roller Assy [6]. Remove four C-clips [7] of the Pickup Roller and the gear-fixing C-clip [8] (black) of the Pick-up/Paper Takeup Roller connected Belt. Remove the screw [4] (on the rear side) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller Assy shaft positioning plate and two C-clips [5] (at both ends) of the Pick-up/Paper Take-up Roller Assy shaft. To reinstall. Periodical check Field Service Ver. Replacing procedure 1. 4582fs2508c0 6 . press inward and unlock the locking claws [2] at both ends of the Paper Take-up Section Guide (the Inner Cover). [3] Maintenance [1] 4582fs2506c0 [5] [6] [5] [4] 2. 4. 6. 2. 2006 5. Remove the Pick-up Roller [11].2.2 [2] Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller A.0 Feb. 4582fs2507c0 [9] [10] [8] [7] [7] [11] 3. reverse the order of removal. and remove the Paper Take-up Section Guide [3].

reverse the order of removal. [3] 4582fs2524c0 7 . 4582fs2510c0 [2] 2.0 Feb. Select “Service Mode” → “Counter” → “Life” and clear the count of “ADF Feed. 7. Unlock the Separation Roller Cover locking claws. To reinstall. Pinch the roller shaft at both ends and pull out the Separation Roller Assy upward.1. NOTE • Be careful not to lose the Pick-Up/ Take-Up Roller fixing pin. 2. Remove C-clip (black) of the Paper Take-up Roller. Remove the Separation Roller Assy [2].3 Separation Roller [1] A. and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [12]. and remove the Separation Roller Cover [1]. reverse the order of removal.Field Service Ver. NOTE • The Separation Roller Assy is of a set-in type. To reinstall. 4582fs2511c0 [5] [4] 3. and remove the Separation Roller [5]. 2006 2. Remove the Holder [3] and the shaft [4]. 4. 6. Replacing procedure 1.” Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance [12] 4582fs2509c0 2. Periodical check 5.

2. Wet a cloth with alcohol. Periodical check 2.4 Automatic Document Feeder [2] Field Service Ver.5 Registration Roller [2] [1] [2] Maintenance A. Remove the Wire Harness Saddle [4] and the screw [5] from the Registration/Timing Sensor mounting plate [3].1. Cleaning procedure 1. [3] [4] 4582fs2523c0 2. and use it to wipe up the Registration Roller [6]. Wet a cloth with alcohol. [4] 4582fs2513c0 4. 2. Remove four screws [2] from the Registration Roller Cover. 2. 2. and use it to wipe up the Pick-up Roller [2]. 4582fs2512c0 [5] [3] 3.0 Feb. [6] 4582fs2514c0 8 . 2006 Pick-up Roller / Paper Take-up Roller / Separation Roller [1] A. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1]. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1].1. Paper Take-up Roller [3] and Separation Roller [4].

4582fs2517c0 2. Periodical check Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance A. Remove the Registration/Timing Sensor mounting plate. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1]. and use it to wipe up the Exit Roller [2]/Roll [3]. 2. Clean the Registration [1]/Timing Sensor [2] with a blower brush or the like.6 Exit Roller / Roll [3] [1] 2. [1] [2] 4582fs2516c0 [3] 2.8 2. [2] 4582fs2515c0 2. 4582fs2522c0 9 .1.0 Feb. and open the Turnover Guide Plate [2].1. 2006 2. Cleaning procedure 1. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover [1].1. Cleaning procedure 1. Cleaning procedure 1.8 Sensor Section [1] [2] A.Field Service Ver. Wet a cloth with alcohol. Wet a cloth with alcohol. 2. See P. and use it to wipe up the Turnover Roller [3].7 Turnover Roller A.

Remove the Registration Roller Cover. 2. Clean the Paper Empty Sensor [3] with a brush or the like.0 Feb. Open the Paper Exit Section Cover. Automatic Document Feeder [3] 4582fs2519c0 5. See P. 6. [4] Maintenance 4582fs2520c0 10 . Clean the Paper Exit Sensor [4] with a brush or the like. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2006 3.2.8 4.

Field Service Ver. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A. be sure to ground your body. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. C. Other Automatic Document Feeder Maintenance 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. 11 . B. Removal of PWBs NOTE • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. when two or more screws are used for a single part. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened.0 Feb. It should also be noted that. 2006 3. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. D. • As a general rule. 3. 2.

Open the Paper Take-up Section Cover [1] and the Paper Exit Section Cover [2].0 Feb. page P.12 P. 2. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 3. [1] 4037F2C512DA 12 .12 3. 2. 3. Remove the Front Cover [4] by removing two screws [3]. Remove the connector for ADF [1] from the machine.12 P.3. 3.3. Remove the Rear Cover [6] by removing two screws [5].1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Front Cover/Rear Cover [5] [6] [2] Maintenance [3] [1] [3] [4] 4582fs2521c0 1.3 3. Other Field Service Ver.2 ADF 1.3.2 No 1 2 3 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Exterior Parts Unit Front Cover Rear Cover ADF Part name Ref.

0 Feb. Remove two screws [2]. Remove the ADF [3]. Open the ADF. 4037F2C514DA 13 Maintenance . 2006 [2] [2] 3. 3. Other Automatic Document Feeder 2. 4037F2C513DA [3] 4.Field Service Ver. 2.

2006 Maintenance Automatic Document Feeder Blank Page 14 . 2.3.0 Feb. Other Field Service Ver.

The power supply is properly grounded. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. 2006 4. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. The units. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. B. The density is properly selected. 9. 6. direct sunlight. Correct paper is being used for printing.. 5.g. 2. 3. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. 4. slit glass. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.0 Feb. 6. etc. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. high humidity. 10. 2. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 15 .Check to see if: 1. PC Drum. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e.Field Service Ver. the following advance checks must be made. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 5. 3. ventilation. How to use the adjustment section Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting Adjustment/Setting 4. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. levelness of the installation site. Toner is not running out. 7. 8. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. or related part is dirty. parts. The Original Glass. etc. 2.. 4. A. and supplies used for printing (developer.

Main Scanning Direction Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the start position for image scanning • Upon replacement of the ADF See P. 2.0 Feb.23 B. • To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Registration Rollers.24 C. • When “Auto Adjust Stop Position” is NG. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. • Upon replacement of the ADF See P.25 16 . 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 5.2. 5.2. • Check for skew. • When a document misfeed or skew occurs.1 ADF setting procedure Original Stop Position • To make a manual adjustment of the document stop position and scanning position in each of the ADF modes.26 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 5. See P. 5.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Registration Loop Adj. Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the second side.5.1 Service Mode Service Mode setting procedure For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.2 5.28 5. See P. Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the document stop position for the first side.2. Service Mode Field Service Ver.3 Auto Stop Position Adjustment A. • Upon replacement of the ADF See P.

2. • If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation. if the Start key is pressed again during the suspension. Then.2. 5. 2. No paper detected: 0) 17 . if the Start key is pressed during the operation. Touch the “ADF” key. Touch the “ADF” key. Set the mode to the Service Mode. (Paper detected: 1. A. “1-Sided Mixed Orig” and “2-Sided”. NOTE • After starting the operation by pressing the Start key. 2. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from “1-Sided No Detect”.5 Functions Use Sensor Check • To check sensors on the paper path. malfunction. 4. the Start key will not work. and check the screen display. Touch the “Sensor Check” key. 3. 4.0 Feb. Service Mode Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting Paper Passage • To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes. Set the mode to the Service Mode. Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like.Field Service Ver. The Start key color changes from orange to green.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 5. 2. Press the “Start” key. the Paper Through Test ends. and closure failure condition). <Procedure> 1. • If there is no Original set in the Take-up Tray. the operation will be suspended. Set the Original in the Take-up Tray. 3. The operation starts. • When a document misfeed occurs. Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. <Procedure> 1. 5. • All Originals set in the Take-up Tray are passed through. • Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document misfeed occurs. 2006 5. the test will be forced to end. Touch the “Paper Passage” key. the operation will be resumed. 6. Upon the completion of all Originals passed through.

3. The ADF up to 20 degree open when sensor (PC202) detected.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. Service Mode Field Service Ver.5. A. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 5. 2. <Output display of Width S> • The operation of the sensor can be checked whether it is normal or faulty by changing the guide width of the Document Take-up Tray to change the output value. the Transport (Convey) Section Open / Close Sensor. the Exit Section Open / Close Sensor and the Middle Tray Open / Close Sensor are displayed as Faulty Set Detected when they are opened.0 Feb. Sensor monitor Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PC4-DF PC3-DF PC7-DF PC202 PC8-DF PC1-DF PC6-DF PC5-DF PC2-DF R1-DF Empty Original Take-Up Unit Inter lock Exit Cover Transport Convey Middle Tray Registration Exit Section Reverse Timing Width Empty Sensor Take-up Cover Sensor Exit Cover Sensor Original Cover Angle Sensor Tray Open/Close Sensor Registration Sensor Exit Sensor Turnover Sensor Pick-up Sensor Document Size Volume Paper not present OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present 0 Paper present CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Adjustment / Setting Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name 18 .3 5. The “20 Degree” on the IR. 4037F3E515DA • Note with care that the Take-up (Feed) Section Open / Close Sensor.

2006 5.3.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Sensor Auto Adjust • To make an automatic adjustment of the sensor. Service Mode Automatic Document Feeder Original Tray Width • To set the maximum and the minimum width for the width sensor. 2. • When the sensor is replaced.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 5.Field Service Ver. • When a document misfeed occurs.3. • When an original size is erroneously detected See P.29 19 Adjustment / Setting .20 5. See P.0 Feb. • When a document misfeed occurs.

” [1] 4582fs3504c0 3. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Press the “Start” key.” 3. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 6.0 Feb. 1.1 Mechanical adjustment Adjustment of the tray volume • Read out the value of maximum width and minimum width of the document width detection volume interlocked with the Document Take-up Tray Edge Guide. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch “ADF. 6. 2. 2. Narrow the width across the edge guides [2] by sliding them to their minimum width. [2] 4582fs3506c0 20 . Widen the width across the edge guides [1] by sliding them to their maximum width.” Adjustment / Setting 4582F3E501DA 4. Touch “Original Tray Width. Adjustment procedure 1. Confirm that the Result is “OK.” A.6. 2. Touch “Max. Width.

Fold the copy in half. Loosen screw [2] (two on the front side and three on the backside) on the document feeding tray.” 8. 6. Touch “END. 5. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). 2. Width.” 6. Confirm that the Result is “OK. Specifications: ± 2 mm from the center • If the deviation falls outside the specified range.0 Feb. 4582F3E502DA If the Result is “NG”: • Possible causes includes failure of the document width detection volume (R1-DF).” 7. Touch “Min. move the tray to the rear. 7. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen. Set up the following functions: • Auto Paper • 1-sided original / 1-side copy 4582fs3508c0 [1] A B 4582fs3509c0 3. 2. 6.Field Service Ver. wrong wiring to the volume and failure of the PWB-A DF. [2] 4582fs3510c0 21 . use the following procedure to make an adjustment. check to see if the arrow is on the side of A or B. A.2 Adjustment of the document edge guide reference position Adjustment standard: Displacement of the document edge should be within 4 ± 1 mm to the Feed Direction scale. If the crease deviates on the side of B. 4. With reference to the crease. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting 5. Press the “Start” key. 2006 6. If the crease deviates on the side of A. Press the “Start” key. move the tray to the front. Make recheck. Adjustment procedure 1.

5. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). If the image tilts in direction of [3]. If the image tilts in direction of [2]. • If the image tilts more than the specifications. 8. Set up the following functions: • Auto Paper • 1-sided original / 1-side copy 4582fs3508c0 [1] [2] 3. 7. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 6.0 Feb.0 mm for document of A4 size.0 mm max. Specifications: Tilt 3. 6.0 % or less with respect to the document length. Make recheck. within 3.6. Check in which direction. 2. perform the following steps to make the adjustment. the image tilts on the copy fed out of the machine. Tighten two screws [4].3 Adjustment of the document skew Adjustment standard: Skew should be ± 1. move the Document Feeder toward the front. Press the “Start” key. 4. [2] or [3]. [3] 4582fs3511c0 Adjustment / Setting [4] 4582fs3512c0 22 . 1. Loosen two front screws [4] on the right hinge. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2. move the Document Feeder toward the rear.

4. 3. 4037F3E525DA 6. 1.” Touch “Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side.0 Feb. 6.” Touch “Auto Stop Position Adjustment. Touch “ADF.Field Service Ver. Press the “Start” key. 4582fs3508c0 23 . Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray [1] (with the side having an arrow facing up). 2. The following adjustment is made in the Service Mode.4 Adjustment of the document stop position • Adjustment of the document stop position is made automatically and manually (by entering numbers). 2. 4.1 A. Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 1-Side Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E527DA 6. 2006 6.” [1] 5.

” Then. • Manually correct the value of “1-Sided Set.” Touch “Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side.6. Touch “END. Make sure that Result is “OK.” 8.” 6.4. Mechanical adjustment 7. touch “SET. NOTE • Make sure that the blank surface of the chart faces up.” 24 . • Manually correct the value of “2-Sided Set. 4. 1. Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder [1] in the document feeding tray. Press the “Start key. If the Result is “NG”: • Check and correct the skew of the document. If the Result is “NG”: • Check and correct the skew of the document.” 8. Auto adjust: Sub Scanning Direction 2-Side Field Service Ver. 2.” 9.2 A.” Touch “Auto Stop Position Adjustment. 6.” 9. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen. 3. Check that Result is “OK” and then touch “SET. Touch “END.” Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E529DA [1] 5. Touch “ADF. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen.” 4582fs3508c0 7. 2.0 Feb.

” 25 . Place the chart furnished with the Document Feeder in the document feeding tray (with the side having an arrow facing up).” Touch “Main Scanning Direction. Check that Result is “OK” and then touch “SET. If the Result is “NG”: • Check and correct the skew of the document. Touch “END. Adjustment / Setting 4582fs3508c0 7.0 Feb. Touch “ADF. 4.3 A. 2.” 8. 6. 3. Touch “Exit” on the Service Mode screen. • Manually correct the value of “Main Scanning Direction. Press the “Start” key. 2.” 9. 2006 6. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder 4037F3E531DA Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1.Field Service Ver.” Touch “Auto Stop Position Adjustment.” [1] 5. Auto adjust: Main Scanning Direction 6.4.

Select “1-Sided Set” or “2-Sided Set.) • To shift the position in the direction of F. Touch “ADF. 3. set the code to -. 1. 2006 Manual adjust: 1-Sided Set/ 2-Sided Set Adjusted range: -7 mm to + 7 mm A.” 4037F3E533DA Adjustment / Setting E F 4582fs3517c0 4.6. Touch “END.” Touch “Original Stop Position.0 Feb.4 Automatic Document Feeder Field Service Ver.4. • To shift the position in the direction of E. 6. (Press the “+/-” key to change the +/code. Enter the value from the ten-key pad. 2.” 5. set the code to +. 2. Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.” 26 . Mechanical adjustment 6.

set the code to -.” Touch “Original Stop Position. 2. 2.” 5.Field Service Ver. Touch “END. 3. 2006 6.) • To scan the image in the direction of C. Select “Main Scanning Direction.” C D 4582fs3518c0 27 Adjustment / Setting 4.” . Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder 4037F3E533DA Adjusted range: -3 mm to + 3 mm A. • To shift the image in the direction of D.5 Manual adjust: Main Scanning Direction 6. 6. 1. Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen. Enter the value from the ten-key pad.4. set the code to +. Touch “ADF. (Press the “+/-” key to change the code.0 Feb.

Touch “ADF. 4037F3E535DA Adjustment / Setting 5. (Press the “+/-” key to change the +/.” Select the registration loop value.value. • Too much loop value may result in dog-eared document. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.0 Feb.6. Touch “END. 3. 2. Adjustment Procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.5 Adjustment of the registration loop value Adjusted range: -5 mm to + 5 mm Default value: 0 (Loop value: 5 mm) • The loop value is increased by the entered + value and decreased by the entered . Enter the value from the ten-key pad. 1. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 6. 4. and too little loop value may result in askew document.) 6.” Touch “Registration Loop Adj. 2.” 28 .code. A.

” Press the Start key. A. replace it if necessary. Touch “ADF. 3. 1. If the result is “OK” touch the “END” key on the panel. If the result is “NG” check the influencing sensor.” and “ADF Sensor Auto Adj. 6. Adjustment procedure Call the Service Mode to the screen.6 Sensor auto adjustment • The detection level of the document through path sensor is automatically adjusted. 2006 6. Select “Initialize and Sensor Auto Adj.” or “ADF Sensor Auto Adj. 5. and then make readjustment. • The adjustment has two modes: “Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj.Field Service Ver. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting 6.” 4037F3E537DA 4. 2.” • Make this adjustment as appropriate after the replacement of the Control Board (PWB-A DF) or in case of the document detection error.” Touch “Sensor Auto Adjust. 7. 29 . 2.0 Feb.

Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.6. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 30 .0 Feb. 2.

Code 6401 6403 6402 6404 Misfeed location Paper Exit / Turnover section Transport section Paper Take-Up section Transport Tray section Misfeed access location Paper Exit section Cover Paper Take-Up section Cover Paper Take-Up section Cover Paper Exit section Cover Action P.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.1 Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs.33 P.32 P. 2006 7. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.Field Service Ver. Jam Display Automatic Document Feeder Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 7.34 P. 7. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.1. and close the door. message.35 7. 7.0 Feb.2 Sensor layout [4] [1] [3] [1] Exit Sensor [2] Turnover Sensor PC6-DF PC5-DF [3] Pick-up Sensor [2] 4582fs4502c0 PC2-DF PC1-DF [4] Registration Sensor 31 . 2.

Set as necessary. Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned ON within a prepaper not reached set time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse rotation.2 Paper Take-Up section misfeed A. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 7. 2. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Replace paper. sensor check M1-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement 32 .3 7. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Correct or replace the defective actuator. the Pick-Up Sensor B.7. deformed. sensor check PC2-DF I/O. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. Jam Display Field Service Ver. or damp? Replace paper. deformed. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. 7. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. wavy. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty.1 Solution Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs.3. Detection timing Type Misfeed due to paper not reached the Registration Sensor Description Misfeed is detected if the Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started normal rotation.3. Action Relevant electrical parts Troubleshooting Registration Sensor (PC1-DF) Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN7A-9 (ON) PWB-A DF CN7A-12 (ON) PWB-A DF CN5A-1 to 6 — Location (Electrical components) — ADF G-5 ADF G-5 ADF B to C-6 — 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items PC1-DF I/O. first perform the following initial check items.0 Feb.

0 Feb.Field Service Ver. sensor check PC5-DF I/O. 2006 7. B. 2.3 Transport section misfeed 7. the Pick-Up Sensor Misfeed due to paper not reached the Turnover Sensor Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Transport Motor (M2-DF) started. Jam Display Automatic Document Feeder A.3. Action Relevant electrical parts Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Take-up Motor (M1-DF) Transport Motor (M2-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN7A-12 (ON) PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) PWB-A DF CN5A-1 to 6 PWB-A DF CN4A-1 to 6 — Location (Electrical components) — ADF G-5 ADF C-4 ADF B to C-6 ADF B to C-6 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC2-DF I/O. sensor check M1-DF operation check M2-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement 33 Troubleshooting . Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Pick-up Sensor (PC2-DF) is not turned OFF within a paper remaining at preset time after the Take-up Motor (M1-DF) started reverse rotation.

sor Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor (in the 2-Sided Mode) Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was turned ON in the 2-Sided mode. Misfeed due to Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned OFF within a preset paper remaining at time after the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) was tuned ON. sensor check PC6-DF I/O. sensor check M3-DF operation check PWB-A DF replacement Troubleshooting 34 . 2006 Paper Exit / Turnover section misfeed A.0 Feb. the Exit Sensor B. Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Exit Motor (M3-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) PWB-A DF CN9A-6 (ON) PWB-A DF CN3A-1 to 6 — Location (Electrical components) — ADF C-4 ADF C-4 ADF B to C-7 — 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items PC5-DF I/O.7. 2. Detection timing Type Description Misfeed due to paper remaining at Misfeed is detected if the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) is not turned OFF within a the Turnover Sen.3.4 Automatic Document Feeder Field Service Ver. Jam Display 7.preset time after the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) was tuned ON.

Action Relevant electrical parts Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) Control Board (PWB-A DF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-A DF CN9A-3 (ON) PWB-A DF CN9A-6 (ON) — Location (Electrical components) — ADF C-4 ADF C-4 — 1 2 3 4 Initial check items PC5-DF I/O. 2006 7. sensor check PWB-A DF replacement NOTE • Each sensor is automatically adjusted when the Main Power Switch is turned ON as special means for detecting a paper misfeed. Jam Display Automatic Document Feeder Troubleshooting A. 35 . sensor check PC6-DF I/O.5 Transport Tray section misfeed 7.Field Service Ver.3. Detection timing Type Misfeed due to paper not reached the Exit Sensor (in the 1-Sided Mode) Misfeed at the Transport Tray Description Misfeed is detected if the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is not turned ON within a preset time after exit operation started in the 1-Sided Mode. B.0 Feb. a misfeed is detected as paper remaining misfeed at the corresponding sensor. 2. If a sensor adjustment error occurs through this procedure. Misfeed is detected if the difference between the paper feeding size measured at the Turnover Sensor (PC5-DF) and that measured at the Exit Sensor (PC6-DF) is 20 mm or more.

2. the Panel of the main unit will have the following display.blocked) Paper Take-Up Section Open/ Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Size Reset Switch on the main unit (when turned ON) [2] [3] - Troubleshooting 36 .8. When the document is set in the ADF Detection timing Paper Exit section Open/ Close Sensor (when lightblocked) Transport Tray Open/Close Sensor (when light. [3] [2] [1] 4582F4E502DA <Panel display and detection timing for each> Panel display [1] Description of error Paper Exit section Cover set error Transport Tray section Cover set error Paper Take-Up section Cover set error ADF set error Detection start When the Main Power Switch turn ON.0 Feb. When the Main Power Switch turn ON. Set error detection Field Service Ver. Set error detection • When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected. When the Main Power Switch turn ON. 2006 Automatic Document Feeder 8.

0 . 2.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE Automatic Duplex Unit 2006.02 Ver.

2.0 1. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.0 has been changed in Ver. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. Therefore. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted. 3. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 1 — Revision mark Error corrections Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . • To indicate clearly a section revised. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver.Revision history After publication of this service manual. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 deleted. 2006/02 2005/03 Date 2. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. show 1 to the left of the revised section. • When a page revised in Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. 2. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0 are left as they are. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0 Service manual Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised.

............ 2.................................... 1........1 7....................................................................................1 2...................2 3................ 1 Maintenance 2................................................................. 4 Maintenance Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting 2.............1 Periodical check ...........2.......1.................................................................................3 1................................ 8 Sensor check list .....1 i General ........... 1 Operating environment .........................................................................................2 2.............2 6....1 5.............................................................. 8 Sensor check list.................................................. 2............. 8 Sensor check screen..............................................1 Adjustment/Setting 4.1 5.. 5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ..................................................................2...... 5......................................................................................................................................................... 7 Sensor check.......2 How to use the adjustment section ................................................................................................................3........ 6 3.............................................................................................................................. 9 Troubleshooting 7. 7............................................ 3 ....................1..........................................1............1 3.............. 6 Duplex Unit...................................................3 Other ............................1........................... 1 Type .................. 8 Check procedure ................................................................................................2 1..................... 8 5.......... 11 Sensor layout ................ 1 Machine specifications........................................1 Mechanical adjustment .................... 1 Paper type ......................................................... 5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .............................1 1........... 9 Adjusting the paper reference position ......................2 Jam Display .......Field Service Ver................................................4 Product specifications ................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ............................ 3 Transport Roller / Roll 2................................................................................. 3 Ventilation Section.................... 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure................................................................... 11 Misfeed display resetting procedure .................................... 2006 Automatic Duplex Unit CONTENTS Automatic Duplex Unit General 1................................................................... 3 Transport Roller / Roll 1 ................................................. 3.................. 6.......................... 11 Misfeed display ..............................................................................3 3............................................. 5.................................................................... 11 7.......0 Feb.....................

.............................1 7....... 2006 Automatic Duplex Unit 7.. 2............................................0 Feb............................................................................................ 13 7....................Field Service Ver...................3...............3 Solution .............. 12 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed ...2 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General ii ...... 12 Initial check items .3..........

25 inch) 176.7 to 311. 1.3 Machine specifications DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V ± 5 % (supplied from the main unit) Power Requirements Dimensions *1 Weight *1 109 mm (W) × 440 mm (D) × 344 mm (H) 4.2 mm (5.0 to 457. 2006 1.Field Service Ver.2 1 Type Paper type Plain paper Thick Paper 1 to 3 *1 Size Print paper size A5S to A3 Wide.25 inch (W) × 17.5 x 12.4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. 1 General . 1. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.5 to 68 lb) 139.5S to 12 × 18 width length *1: Image is not guaranteed when Thick Paper 3 is used.9 kg (6. 1.25 inch (D) × 13. the reference value when removing from the Main Unit is indicated.5 lb) *1: Because it is standard equipment.2 mm (7 x 18 inch) General 1. 5. 2.5 inch (H) 2.5 × 8.1 Name Type Installation Document Alignment Product specifications Type Duplex Unit Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit Mounted on the right side door of main unit Center 1.0 Feb. Product specifications Automatic Duplex Unit 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.

0 Feb.1. 2. Product specifications Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 2006 General Blank Page 2 .

Maintenance 4535fs2501c0 2. Remove the Duplex Unit.6 2. 2. Cleaning procedure 1.1. wipe the Transport Roller / Roll 1 [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the Transport Roller / Roll 2 [2]. 2006 2.1. 3 A. 2. 2.2 Transport Roller / Roll 2. Open the Duplex Unit Door [1].Field Service Ver. 2.1 Transport Roller / Roll 1 [1] A. Periodical check Automatic Duplex Unit Maintenance 2. Cleaning procedure 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 3 [3] clean of dirt.0 Feb.1 Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol. See P. [2] [1] [3] 4535fs2502c0 3 .

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 3. [1] [2] 4535fs2503c0 [2] Maintenance [3] 2. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2]. 2006 2. Periodical check Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver.1. Cleaning procedure 1. 4535fs2504 c0 4 .2. wipe the outside of the Ventilation Section [1] clean of dirt.3 Ventilation Section A. wipe the inside of the Ventilation Section [3] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.0 Feb.

screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. Removal of PWBs NOTE • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. • As a general rule. Other Automatic Duplex Unit Maintenance 3. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.Field Service Ver. D. 5 . 3. B. when two or more screws are used for a single part. It should also be noted that. 2. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. C. be sure to ground your body. 2006 3.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A.0 Feb. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.

1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Duplex Unit 1.6 3. Remove two screws [3]. Other Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 6 .3. 2.3.3 3.0 Feb. [1] 4535fs3503c0 Maintenance [4] [3] [2] [3] 4535fs3502c0 3. Unplug two connectors [1].2 No 1 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Unit Duplex Unit Part name Ref. page P. and remove the Duplex Unit [4]. 4. 2006 3. 2. For details of how to remove the wiring cover. Remove the wiring cover. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2]. see the Maintenance of the main unit service manual.

etc. 7 Adjustment / Setting . Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. levelness of the installation site. slit glass. high humidity. 6. 2. ventilation. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 3. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). and supplies used for printing (developer. The units. 4. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Correct paper is being used for printing.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 2.0 Feb. The Original Glass. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. parts. 2006 4. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. the following advance checks must be made. or related part is dirty. 5. B. 2. 7.. 4. 10. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. 3.g. Toner is not running out. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. 5. How to use the adjustment section Automatic Duplex Unit Adjustment/Setting 4. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. 9.Check to see if: 1. The density is properly selected. etc. PC Drum..Field Service Ver. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. A. The power supply is properly grounded. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. 8. direct sunlight. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. 6. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature.

2. Set the mode to the Service Mode.2 Sensor check list A.1 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. and closure failure condition). 2. Touch the “Sensor Check” key. Touch the “State Confirmation” key. 2006 5. 3. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. 5.5. Adjustment / Setting 4535F3E504DA 5. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.2 5. Sensor check Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver.2.2.0 Feb. malfunction. 5.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PI2-DU PI1-DU PC1-DU Set Paperpassage 1 Paperpassage 2 Duplex Unit Door Set Sensor Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 OPEN Paper present Paper present 0 CLOSE Paper not present Paper not present Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name 8 . <Procedure> 1.

Measure the width of printed reference line A. 2.Field Service Ver. 6. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Duplex Unit Adjustment / Setting 6. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. Touch “1st.1 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position 1.0 mm 5. 6. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.0 Feb. Specifications: 3. Produce another test print and check for width A. A test print will then be produced. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. enter the correction value. 2. Touch “Machine”→“Printer Area”→ “Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge. 4535F3E506DA A 4. 2006 6.” 4535F3E505DA 3. 4535fs3506c0 9 .0 mm ± 1.” and then press the “Start” key.

2006 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 10 .6. Mechanical adjustment Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb.

1.2 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [1] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 [2] Synchronizing Roller Sensor PI1-DU PC28 [3] Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 PC1-DU 11 .0 Feb. Code 9201 9301 Misfeed location Duplex Unit transport section misfeed Duplex Unit pre-registration section misfeed Misfeed access location Duplex Unit Door Action P. 7.Field Service Ver. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.1 Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs. 7. Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Troubleshooting 4535fs4502c0 Troubleshooting 7. 2. message.13 7. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit. 2006 7. and close the door.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.

Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver. Troubleshooting 12 . or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. or damp? Replace paper. Correct or replace the defective actuator. Set as necessary. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty.7. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. deformed. deformed. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Replace paper.1 Solution Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. 2. wavy. 2006 7. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary.0 Feb. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.3 7.3. first perform the following initial check items.

Action Relevant electrical parts Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC28) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) Switchback Motor (M1-DU) Duplex Unit Transport Motor (M2-DU) Duplex Control Board (PWB-A DU) Control Board (PWB-MC) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-MC PJ24MC-6 (ON) — — PWB-A DU PJ3A-1 to 4 PWB-A DU PJ2A-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical components) — C450 C to D-3 — — Duplex Unit C to D-5 Duplex Unit C to D-5 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Initial check items PC28 I/O. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is blocked by the paper. a door or cover is opened and closed. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. 2006 7. Duplex Unit transport section misfeed detection B.2 Duplex Unit transport section misfeed 7. sensor check PC1-DU I/O. Detection timing Type Description The Synchronizing Roller Sensor(PC28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Duplex Paper Take-up sequence started.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. Detection of paper remaining in the Duplex Unit transport section The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) or Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) are blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. sensor check M1-DU operation check M2-DU operation check PWB-A DU replacement PWB-MC replacement 13 . sensor check PI1-DU I/O. Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Troubleshooting A. 2. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 1 (PI1-DU) is blocked by the paper.3. The Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Transport Sensor 2 (PC1-DU) is blocked by the paper.

Jam Display Automatic Duplex Unit Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 2. 2006 Blank Page Troubleshooting 14 .7.

0 .SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC-102/PC-202 2006.02 Ver. 2.

0 has been changed in Ver. 2. • When a page revised in Ver. 2006/02 2005/03 Date 2.Revision history After publication of this service manual.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 Service manual Ver. 3.0 are left as they are.0 1. • To indicate clearly a section revised. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 only are shown with those for Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. • When a page revised in Ver. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. 1 — Revision mark Error corrections Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision .0 deleted. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. 2. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. 3. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. show 1 to the left of the revised section. Therefore. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0 has not been changed in Ver. 2. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. 2. 3.

11 Adjustment/Setting 4...............................................................2...................................................................................... 2.... 4 Replacing the Pick-up Roller................................................................................................................................................................3.........................................................1 3.................. 12 3.............................2 3.................... 10 Cleaning procedure .............................................1 1...... 11 Pick-up Roller...........................................................4................... 9 Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 12 Vertical Transport Roller.............3 3.......................................... 14 Check procedure ......3.......................................................................................... 10 Separation Roller ...........................3 3.............................................4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure...........2 1................... 1 Paper type . 2..............................................................2 3........................................................4 3.................................1...........1 5................... 11 Paper Take-up Roller..................... 8 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............. 5........ 3 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.1...........................2 Other ....... 1 Operating environment .......................................... 10 Rear Cover...........................................Field Service Ver......................................................... 15 5.........................................1 5............................ 14 Sensor check list................ 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) .......2..........1 2.....2.............................2 i General PC-102/PC-202 CONTENTS ............................... 14 Sensor check screen.....1 3.............................. 1 Maintenance 2.............................................2 How to use the adjustment section ....1 3................ 1.4.................................. 2006 PC-102/PC-202 General 1................ 9 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover.. 9 Cleaning parts list ..............1 Periodical check ...................................................................................................................................1 3............................................ 5.....2 2................................. 1 Type .......................................................................... 6 Maintenance Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting 2............................................................. 3....................................... 3 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy................................................................................................. 8 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)....4.........4 Product specifications ....................................................................0 Feb.2............1............................ 14 Sensor check list ........................... 13 Sensor check......2 3..................4................................................3 1.......................................3 3....... 1 Machine specifications......................................................

............3................................................2 6.............................................................1 General Jam Display. 24 Solution ............................................ 21 Initial check items .2 7................................................ 23 7................................1 Troubleshooting ii ............................ 21 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-102/PC-202) .............3.................1 8. 8.............. 2006 6...1......................... 16 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge......................................................................................1 Troubleshooting 7....................... 19 Misfeed display resetting procedure ......2 7... 7..................................................................................................................................2 8...... 24 Trouble code list............................................................................................... 16 Print Positioning: Side Edge .............. 24 Trouble code display .......................................................1...... 24 How to reset ....................................................................................................................... 16 Adjusting the paper reference position ...........1 6.............................. 25 C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure ....................................4..................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 8..............................1 7.................................1.........3 8........3 Adjustment / Setting Maintenance Trouble code .... 17 6.............. 19 Sensor layout.....................................0 Feb.................................. 20 Solution ..4 8....................................................... 22 Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-202) ........ 2............................................ PC-102/PC-202 Mechanical adjustment .................Field Service Ver......................................................1 7.................................................................. 19 Misfeed display ...3.....3 7...........................................................................

Product specifications 1.1 Name Type Product specifications Type 2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device Desk type Center Installation Document Alignment 1.2 1 Type Paper type Plain paper Thick Paper 1 to 3 *1 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.5 to 68 lb) Size Capacity A5S to A3. 21.4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.0 kg (48.5 × 8. 5.5 inch (W) × 10.5S to 11 × 17 3rd Drawer 4th Drawer 500 sheets (80 g/m2. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 75 W or less 570 mm (W) × 263 mm (H) × 548 mm (D) 22. 21.5 lb) PC-202:25.0 Feb.9 kg (57 lb) 1.25 lb) 500 sheets (80 g/m2.25 inch (H) × 21.Field Service Ver.5 inch (D) PC-102:22. 1 General PC-102/PC-202 General .25 lb) *1: Image is not guaranteed when Thick Paper 3 is used. 2006 1. 1. 1.3 Machine specifications DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V ± 5 % Power Requirements Max. 2.

2006 General PC-102/PC-202 Blank Page 2 . Product specifications Field Service Ver.1.0 Feb. 2.

1. See P. NOTE • Be careful not to lose spring at this time.10 2. and remove the Separation Roller Assy [10]. [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2611c0 [4] [3] [3] 4348fs2612c0 [7] [5] [6] [5] 4061F2C501DA 4.1 2. 2. Remove the Right Door. [10] [9] [8] 5. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4]. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer. 4061F2C502DA 3 Maintenance 3. 2. 2006 2.Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2]. Remove two C-rings [5] and the shaft [6]. and remove the Paper Separation Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [7].0 Feb. the Guide [9]. PC-102/PC-202 Maintenance . Remove the C-ring [8].1 Periodical check Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) Replacing the Separation Roller Assy 1. 6. Periodical check 2.

(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. (Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row. • Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed. 5. 2006 PC-102/PC-202 NOTES • Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine.3 4. See P. Periodical check Field Service Ver.2.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller [1] 4348F2C502DA 1.1.0 Feb. 2. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from two wire saddles. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 4 . 4348fs2623c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy.) See P. Remove the Tray3.10 2. Remove the Rear Right Cover. [3] [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2603c0 [4] [4] [5] 4348fs2604c0 6. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. Maintenance 2.) 3.

and remove the shaft Assy [15]. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left. [9] 4348fs2606c0 [10] 9.0 Feb. Remove the C-ring [13]. 2006 2. [12] [11] 4348fs2607c0 [15] 10. . Periodical check [7] [6] 4348fs2605c0 [8] 8. and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12]. [14] [13] 4348fs2608c0 5 Maintenance PC-102/PC-202 7. the bushing [14]. 2. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7].Field Service Ver. Remove the C-ring [8] and remove the bushing [9].

[3] [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2603c0 6 . Periodical check [16] [18] [16] Field Service Ver.2.1. Remove the Tray3. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [18].) 3.3 4. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. (Remove the Right Lower Cover for 4th row. Repeat steps 1 to 11 similarly for the 4th Drawer. [20] 4348fs2610c0 Maintenance NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. 13. 2. 2006 11. (Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. Remove the Rear Right Cover. Remove the C-ring [19] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [20]. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from two wire saddles. 2.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller [1] 4348F2C502DA 1. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3].0 Feb. See P.) See P.10 2. PC-102/PC-202 [17] 4348fs2609c0 [19] 12. Remove two E-rings [16] and the bushing [17]. 5.

[6] 4348fs2605c0 [8] [9] [10] [9] 4348fs2618c0 [11] [12] 9. two bushings [9]. 10. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with frame. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. and remove the Pick-up Roller Assy [10]. 2. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. PC-102/PC-202 [4] .0 Feb. 7 Maintenance [8] 8. 2006 2.Field Service Ver. Repeat steps 1 to 8 similarly for the 4th Drawer. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12]. Remove two C-rings [8]. [5] [4] 4348fs2617c0 [7] 7. 4348fs2619c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. Periodical check 6.

be sure to ground your body. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. 2006 PC-102/PC-202 3. 8 . Maintenance D. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. It should also be noted that. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. Other Field Service Ver. C. B. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. when two or more screws are used for a single part.0 Feb. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. 2. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. • As a general rule. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.3. 3.1 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items A.

2. 2.11 P.10 P.10 P.12 PC-102/PC-202 . page P. 2006 3. page P.2 3.2. Other 3.0 Feb.10 3.10 P.1 No 1 2 3 4 5 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Right Door Rear Right Cover Exterior parts Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Part name Ref.2 No 1 2 3 4 Cleaning parts list Section Separation Roller Paper feed section Paper Take-up Roller Pick-up Roller Transport section Vertical Transport Roller Part name Ref.11 P.12 9 Maintenance P.Field Service Ver.10 P.

3. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7]. 2. 10 .1 [2] [3] [6] [5] [4] 4348fs2621c0 Maintenance 1.3 PC-102/PC-202 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover [7] [1] 3. 5. 2006 3. 2. Other Field Service Ver. Rear Cover 3.3. Remove the Right Door [1].0 Feb. 3. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2]. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].2 [1] [1] [2] 4348fs2622c0 1.3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3]. 4. Open the Right Door [1].

4.4 Cleaning procedure PC-102/PC-202 Maintenance 4348fs2612c0 NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. Remove the Tray3. [3] [3] [5] 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4]. wipe the Paper Take-up Roller [1] clean of dirt. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.) 2. 11 . Other 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2.0 Feb. Repeat steps 1 to 4 similarly for the 4th Drawer. 5. wipe the Separation Roller [5] clean of dirt. 4348fs2613c0 3.10 2.1 Separation Roller 1. (Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. 4. See P. See P.4. [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2611c0 [4] 3.3 3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2]. 3.2 Paper Take-up Roller [1] 4348fs2601c0 1. 2006 3.Field Service Ver. Remove the Right Door.

(Remove the Tray4 from 4th row. 2006 Pick-up Roller 1. wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.3 PC-102/PC-202 [1] Field Service Ver. Other 3. 4. Remove the Tray3. See P. Open the Right Door. 4348fs2602c0 3. 2.3 3. 2. wipe the Pick-up Roller [1] clean of dirt.0 Feb.4 [1] [1] Maintenance Vertical Transport Roller 1.) 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 4348fs2620c0 12 . Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the 4th Drawer.3.

5.. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 7. the following advance checks must be made. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. PC Drum. 3. Toner is not running out. A.g.Check to see if: 1.. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. etc. The power supply is properly grounded. 6. 2006 4. 2. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. ventilation. etc.Field Service Ver. 3. 9. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 4. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. The density is properly selected. 8. 13 Adjustment / Setting PC-102/PC-202 Adjustment/Setting . 2. 6. slit glass. The units. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). direct sunlight.0 Feb. The Original Glass. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. 10. 2. parts. levelness of the installation site. high humidity. and supplies used for printing (developer. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. Correct paper is being used for printing. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. or related part is dirty. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. B. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. 5. 4.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. How to use the adjustment section 4.

For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. malfunction. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. <Procedure> 1. Touch the [Sensor Check].2 5. 2. 2. Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E502DA 14 . 2006 PC-102/PC-202 5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 5. Touch the [State Confirmation].0 Feb.1 Sensor check Check procedure • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely.1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. 3.2. and closure failure condition). 5.

2 Sensor check list 5.Field Service Ver. 2006 5. 2.0 Feb. Sensor check A.2. Sensor monitor 1 (PC-102/PC-202) Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 PC112-PF Device Detection PC115-PF Paper Empty PC113-PF Near Empty PC117-PF Vertical Transport S PC116-PF Take-Up PC114-PF Upper Limit PC121-PF Device Detection PC124-PF Paper Empty PC122-PF Near Empty PC126-PF Vertical Transport S PC125-PF Take-Up PC123-PF Upper Limit Tray3 Set Sensor Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor Tray4 Set Sensor Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor Set Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present Raised Position Set Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present Raised Position 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not raised Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Symbol Panel display Part/Signal name Not raised 15 Adjustment / Setting Paper not present PC-102/PC-202 .

Call the Service Mode to the screen. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. 6. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area]. 2006 PC-102/PC-202 6. When the LPH Unit has been replaced. 6. • If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.0 Feb.1 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. perform adjustment according to the following procedure.0 mm 6. 3. Measure the width of printed reference line A.1. 7. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction.1 Print Positioning: Side Edge 1. 5. Touch [Print Positioning: Side Edge] → [3rd]. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E504DA 4. 2.6. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.0 mm ± 1. Specification: 3. enter the correction value. 2. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. A 4348fs3509c0 16 .

Field Service Ver. move the Edge Guide toward the rear. Watching the graduations [3] provided in the drawer. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual. Loosen three screws [2] at the center of the Paper Lifting Plate. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 3. Tighten the adjustment screw. Touch [Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge] → [3rd]. 12. 13. 2. Repeat steps 1 to 15 similarly for the tray4. 14. Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge Adjustment / Setting 6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 9.1. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area].0 Feb. move the Edge Guide toward the front. • If width A is smaller than the specified value.2 1. 2. 11. [1] 4348fs3601c0 [4] [3] 4348fs3602c0 10. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range. Slide out the drawer [1] and unload paper from it. move the Edge Guide [4] in the rear. • If width A is greater than the specified value. 4061F3E506DA 4. 17 PC-102/PC-202 . Perform another test print and check the reference deviation. 2006 [2] 6. Mechanical adjustment 8. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen.

2.0 Feb. Repeat steps 1 to 7 similarly for the tray4.0 mm ± 1. Measure the width of printed reference line A. 2006 5. 8.6.0 mm 6. Specification: 3. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 7. enter the correction value. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. 4348fs3509c0 PC-102/PC-202 A Adjustment / Setting 18 . Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range.

7.23 7. clear the sheet of paper misfeed.1 Jam Display Misfeed display • When misfeed occurs. 2. [1] [2] Code 1301 2001 1401 2001 Misfeed location Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Section Tray 3 Paper Vertical Transport Section Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Section Tray 4 Paper Vertical Transport Section Misfeed access location Right Door Right Door Action P. [1] [1] [2] [2] 4061F4C501DA No.0 Feb. message. 2006 7. Jam Display 7.22 P. and close the door.Field Service Ver. 19 Troubleshooting PC-102/PC-202 Troubleshooting .1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door.1. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.

2.0 Feb. Jam Display Field Service Ver. 2006 7.2 PC-102/PC-202 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] 4061F4C502DB [1] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor [2] Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor [3] Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC108 PC117-PF PC116-PF [4] Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor [5] Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor PC126-PF PC125-PF Troubleshooting 20 .7.

0 Feb. Jam Display 7. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. 2.3 7. 2006 7. or damp? Replace paper.Field Service Ver. 21 Troubleshooting . deformed. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty.1 Solution Initial check items PC-102/PC-202 • When a paper misfeed occurs. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty. Correct or replace the defective actuator. Replace paper. first perform the following initial check items. Set as necessary.3. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures. wavy. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. deformed.

a door or cover is opened and closed. 2. sensor check PC117-PF I/O.7.2 PC-102/PC-202 Field Service Ver. The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. sensor check PC108 I/O. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Action Relevant electrical parts Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) — — Location (Electrical components) — PC202 C-4 PC202 C-4 C450 T to U-27 — — 1 2 3 Initial check items PC116-PF I/O. sensor check M122-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement Troubleshooting 4 5 6 22 .0 Feb. The Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) has been blocked by a paper. 2006 Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-102/PC-202) A. The Tray 3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC117-PF has been blocked by a paper. Tray3 Paper TakeUp section/Vertical transport section misfeed detection Tray3 detection of paper remaining B.3. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) is energized. a door or cover is opened and closed. Jam Display 7.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. sensor check PC126-PF I/O. Action Relevant electrical parts Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ9C2 PF-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical components) — PC202 G to H-6 PC202 G to H-6 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PC125-PF I/O. a door or cover is opened and closed. Tray4 Paper TakeUp section/Vertical transport section misfeed detection Tray4 detection of paper remaining B. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. 2.3 7. The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC126-PF has been blocked by a paper. a door or cover is opened and closed. The Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. 2006 7. sensor check M123-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement PC202 G to H6 to 7 — 23 Troubleshooting PC202 C-4 PC-102/PC-202 Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-202) . The Tray3 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126PF) has been blocked by a paper. Jam Display A. The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON.3. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) is energized.Field Service Ver. sensor check PC117-PF I/O.0 Feb.

on detecting a malfunction.8.1 Trouble code Trouble code display • The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that.3 How to reset • Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. 4061F4E504DA 8. 2.0 Feb. Troubleshooting 24 . gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.2 Code C0206 C0208 Trouble code list Item 3rd Drawer Lift-Up Failure 4th Drawer Lift-Up Failure Description • The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation for the drawer began. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 8. 2006 PC-102/PC-202 8. 8.

0 Feb.4. sensor check PC123-PF I/O. PC114-PF I/O. 2. Check the PU1 connector for proper connection. sensor check M124-PF operation check M125-PF operation check PWB-C2 PF replacement PWB-MC replacement PU1 replacement — 2 — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 — PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-3 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-3 (ON) PWB-C2 PF PJ4C2 PF-4 to 5 PWB-C2 PF PJ8C2 PF-12 to 13 — — — — PC202 C-3 PC202 G to H-5 PC202 C-5 PC202 G-3 to 4 — — — 25 Troubleshooting PC-102/PC-202 .1 Solution C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure Relevant electrical parts Lift-Up Motor 1 (M124-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Motor (M125-PF) Tray3 Lift-Up Upper Limit Sensor (PC114-PF) Tray4 Lift-Up Sensor (PC123-PF) Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF) main unit Control Board (PWB-MC) main unit DC Power Supply (PU1) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. 2006 8.Field Service Ver. and correct as necessary. and correct as necessary.4 8. and correct as necessary. Trouble code 8. Check the connector of each motor for proper drive coupling.

Trouble code Field Service Ver.8. 2.0 Feb. 2006 PC-102/PC-202 Blank Page Troubleshooting 26 .

2.0 .02 Ver.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE PC-402 2006.

show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. 2.Revision history After publication of this service manual. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 1 — Revision mark Error corrections Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . 2.0 1. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0 are left as they are.0: The revision marks for Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0 has not been changed in Ver.0 Service manual Ver. 3.0 deleted. 2. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. 3. • To indicate clearly a section revised. show 1 to the left of the revised section. 2006/02 2005/03 Date 2. • When a page revised in Ver. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. Therefore. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.

.... 10 Cleaning procedure .. 9 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover............................ 14 Vertical Transport Roller..................................................................... 1 Type ................................................................ 17 Sensor check............................. 1 Paper type ......................... 6 2............................................................................................ 9 Disassembly/Assembly parts list..................... 2. 1 Machine specifications............3.............................................................................................. 18 Check procedure ..2.........1 5............................................... 14 Pick-up Roller........................4 Product specification ......................................1 1.2 How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................1 Periodical check ......................................4..................................1 3.....................................................................................................2 3.................... 3 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy.......2 1.3.................................. 3. 1 Operating environment .................................................0 Feb.. 3 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller................................................ 18 Sensor check list.2 Other .............................. 10 Drawer................................................................................................................................................................................................ 9 Cleaning parts list .... 11 Wire................ 2006 CONTENTS PC-402 General 1.................. 1 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance PC-402 Maintenance 2.......................4 Disassembly/Assembly procedure........................................................................................................................................................ 2...............................................................3 1...................4 3....................................................................................4.................................1...................................................................................................................................... 14 Adjustment/Setting 4............................3....1 2........... 15 3.2 3....................................2 3............1.............4.......................... 3 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ......... 10 Rear Cover.................1 3... 1...1 3....... 5....................................... 5.............................Field Service Ver.......................4....2 2....................................... 11 Separation Roller ....................................................................................3 3.........................................................................1 3......................3 3.............3 3.....................................................4 3......................................................................................... 8 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .......2................................... 18 i ..... 4 Replacing the Pick-up Roller.......... 8 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)..... 14 Paper Take-up Roller...................3 3..............3.1..

....................3 8..................................................................................... 26 Solution .....................................................3...................... 34 C0214: LCT Shift Failure ......2 General Shifter movement timing belt adjustment ......... 34 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure ........... 35 Solution ...2 Trouble code ................................................. 29 Trouble code display .................................................1..................... 20 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge..................... 31 C0001: LCT communication error....1 7................................................................... 33 C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure................. 20 Adjusting the paper reference position ........................Field Service Ver.....................1............................................ 25 Misfeed display . 25 Sensor layout..............3......................................................................................................................................................1 Maintenance 7...................3...... 27 Initial check items ...3.................................................3 Jam Display............................... 18 Sensor check list. 33 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure................ 20 Print Positioning: Side Edge ......................................................................................1 8...... 6............................5 8...........................................................................1 5.......... 32 C0210: LCT Lift Failure..........................................................................................................................1 6....................................................................................................................................................................... 19 6.....................3............. 32 8.6 Troubleshooting 8............2 PC-402 Sensor check screen .....2 6............................2 8...1.................2 7.....3......................3........2...................................................... 30 How to reset....................................... 22 Troubleshooting 7.....1 Adjustment / Setting 8..............................................2.. 32 C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure .............. 7..............1 7................. 8.................. 22 6.....................................2...................... 27 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed ..4 8...................... 2.................................................................... 2006 5.............................................................3..........................................................1 Mechanical adjustment ............2 8...3 8.......1 8.3.................................. 29 Trouble code list............ 28 7.............................................. 25 Misfeed display resetting procedure ..............7 ii ....0 Feb...........................................

0 Feb. Product specification .5 inch (D) 25.5 × 11 2500 sheets (80 g/m2. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.5 to 68 lb) Paper Type Paper Size Capacity A4.9 kg (57 lb) 1. Product specification General 1. 2006 1. 21. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 45 W or less 570 mm (W) × 263 mm (H) × 548 mm (D) 22. 1 General PC-402 1.25 lb) *1: Image is not guaranteed when Thick Paper 3 is used.4 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.25 inch (H) × 21.2 1 Paper type Plain paper Thick Paper 1 to 3 *1 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) 91 to 256 g/m2 (24. 1.5 inch (W) × 10. 2.3 Machine specifications DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V ± 5 % Power Requirements Max. 8.1 Name Type Installation Document Alignment Type Large Capacity Cabinet Front loading type LCC Desk type Center 1.Field Service Ver.

0 Feb. 2. Product specification Field Service Ver. 2006 General PC-402 Blank Page 2 .1.

2006 2. [5] [3] [3] [4] 4348F2C503DA [8] [7] [6] 4. 4348F2C504DA 3 Maintenance 3. and remove the Separation Roller Assy [8]. NOTE • Be careful not to lose spring at this time.10 2. PC-402 2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2].Field Service Ver. Remove the C-ring [6].0 Feb.1. See P. the Guide [7]. Remove two C-rings [3] and the shaft [4]. Periodical check Maintenance 2. and remove the Paper Separation Roller fixing Bracket Assy [5].1 Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) Replacing the Separation Roller Assy [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2509c0 1. Remove the Right Door. Periodical check .1 2. 2.

4348F2C501DA [3] 5.10 2. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. Disconnect the connector [1] from the Main Control Board. • Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when installed. [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2502c0 [5] [4] [4] 6.0 Feb. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.3 4. See P.” See P. 4348fs2503c0 4 . 4348fs2623c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. Periodical check Field Service Ver.2.2 Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller [1] 1. 2. Remove the Tray3. See the procedures 1 to 2 in “Separation Roller Assy. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover. 3.1. Maintenance 2. 2006 PC-402 NOTE • Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns to the metal bracket of the machine.

Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12]. Remove the shaft Assy [10]. [12] [11] 4348fs2506c0 5 Maintenance . [8] [8] [9] 4348fs2505c0 [10] 9. 2. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. Periodical check 7. 2006 2. PC-402 [7] [6] [6] 4348fs2504c0 8. 10. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove the bushing [9].

See the procedures 1 to 2 in “Separation Roller Assy.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller [1] 1. Disconnect the connector [1] from the Main Control Board. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover. 2006 11. 4348F2C501DA [3] 5. 2. Remove two E-rings [13] and the bushing [14]. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.3 4.2.1. Periodical check [15] Field Service Ver. 2. 4348fs2508c0 Maintenance NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy.0 Feb.” See P. Remove the Tray3. 3. [13] PC-402 [13] [14] 4348fs2507c0 [16] [17] 12. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Take-up Unit [3]. and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [15]. See P.10 2. [2] [2] [2] 4348fs2502c0 6 . Remove the C-ring [16] and remove the Paper Take-up Roller [17].

7 Maintenance 8. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12]. PC-402 . two bushings [9]. Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time. Periodical check 6. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Take-up Cover [7]. [12] 4348fs2518c0 NOTE • Replace the Separation Roller Assy. 2. Remove two C-rings [8].0 Feb. and the Pick-up Roller Assy [10]. 2006 [4] [4] 2.Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with frame. [6] [8] 4348fs2515c0 [8] [9] [10] [9] 4348fs2517c0 [11] 9. [5] 4348fs2516c0 [7] [6] 7.

2.0 Feb. B. Removal of PWBs NOTES • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.1 A. • As a general rule. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting. PC-402 Other Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items 3.3. 8 . • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. 2006 3. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. when two or more screws are used for a single part. It should also be noted that. C. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. Other Field Service Ver. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened. Maintenance D. be sure to ground your body.

10 P.14 P.10 P.10 P.14 .2.10 P.2 No 1 2 3 4 Cleaning parts list Section Separation Roller Paper feed section Paper Take-up Roller Pick-up Roller Transport section Vertical Transport Roller Part name Ref.15 9 Maintenance P. page P. 2.0 Feb.2 3.10 P.2. Other 3.10 P.1 No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) PC-402 Disassembly/Assembly parts list Section Right Door Rear Right Cover Exterior Parts Lower Right Cover Front Right Cover Rear Cover Unit Drawer Wire Part name Ref.Field Service Ver.14 P. 2006 3. page P.10 3.

Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].3.0 Feb. Other Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].3.3.1 [1] [2] [3] [5] [4] 4348fs2520c0 [6] Maintenance 1. 2.3 PC-402 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover [7] 3. 5. 2006 3. 10 . 3. Rear Cover 3. 2. Open the Right Door [1].2 [1] [2] [1] 4348fs2521c0 1. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7]. 4. Remove the Right Door [1]. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].

Remove the Drawer. Other [2] [3] [1] 4348fs2522c0 1. 2006 3. [4] [4] [5] [6] 4. 4348fs2523c0 [7] NOTE • To prevent injuries.0 Feb. NOTE • When removing the Connector Board. 2. Remove the paper. NOTE • Do not peel off pulley protective mylar sheet. See P.Field Service Ver. [7] 4348fs2524c0 3. 3. the connector [5].4 Wire [3] [1] [2] [1] 4348fs2525c0 1. 4348fs2526c0 11 Maintenance PC-402 .3. 3. 5. 2.3 Drawer [3] 3. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner Cover Assy [5]. Remove four screws [3] and slide out the drawer [2]. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Front Cover Assy [2]. Remove two screws [4]. press the guide rail [7] inside the machine. and remove the Connector Board [6]. use care not to drop the drawer from the guide rail. [4] [5] [4] 4.11 2.3. Press the Drawer Eject Button [1] and slide out the drawer [2]. Unplug the connector [3]. Remove the Drawer.

[15] [16] [15] [16] [16] [15] [14] 8. [15] [14] 4348fs2531c0 12 . Remove four Pulley Covers [15]. [8] 4348fs2528c0 Maintenance [10] [11] NOTE • When assembling. be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [10] with convex section of gear 2 [11]. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Driver Cover [7]. 10. 2006 5. PC-402 [7] [6] 4348fs2527c0 [9] 6. Other Field Service Ver. 4348fs2529c0 [13] [12] [12] 4348fs2530c0 7. Remove three screws [8] and remove the Driver Mounting Plate Assy [9]. 9. 2.3.0 Feb. Remove three screws [12] and remove the Reinforcement Bracket Assy [13]. Unhook four pulleys [16]. Remove two C-clips [14].

the bushing [25].Field Service Ver. Other 11. Remove two C-rings [28]and the Take-up Drum [29].0 Feb. [20] 4348fs2533c0 [23] [22] 4348fs2534c0 [24] [27] [25] [26] [24] [24] [26] 4348fs2535c0 15. Remove four screws [22] and remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy [23]. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs [18] and remove the Main Drawer [19]. Remove four screws [20] and remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy [21]. • Install so that cut parts [30] at both ends of shaft face up. • When reinstalling the Take-up Drum. NOTES • Take care not to lose fixing pins. NOTE • Use care not to bend the wires. 13 Maintenance [22] 14. 12. Remove the Ground Plate [17]. PC-402 . 4348fs2532c0 [21] [20] 13. 2006 [18] [18] [19] [18] [18] [17] 3. Remove three C-rings [24]. 2. [28] [29] [29] [28] [30] 4348fs2536c0 17. check that the direction of the wire coming from both Take-up Drums are the same. and two gears [26]. 16. Remove the Take-up Drum Assy [27].

” See P. Remove the Tray3.3. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2]. 3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy. 3.10 2.14 3. 14 .4 PC-402 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol. wipe the Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. See the procedures 1 to 2 in “Cleaning of Separation Roller. 2. Remove the Tray3. [3] Maintenance 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.” See P. Remove the Right Door. See the procedures 1 to 2 in “Cleaning of Separation Roller.4.3 Pick-up Roller [1] 4348fs2513c0 1. 4348fs2510c0 3. wipe the Pick-up Roller [1] clean of dirt.0 Feb. 2. See P.14 3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy.4. 2.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.1 Separation Roller [2] [1] [1] 4348fs2509c0 1. 2006 3. wipe the Paper Take-Up Roller [1] clean of dirt. Other Field Service Ver.2 Paper Take-up Roller [1] 4348F2C502DA 1.

2006 3. Open the Right Door.Field Service Ver.0 Feb.4 Vertical Transport Roller 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Other 4348fs2519c0 15 Maintenance PC-402 [1] 1. 2. . 2. wipe the Vertical Transport Roller [1] clean of dirt.4.

2006 Maintenance PC-402 Blank Page 16 . 2. Other Field Service Ver.0 Feb.3.

6. 3. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. high humidity. and supplies used for printing (developer. direct sunlight. PC Drum. Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. 10. 2. The density is properly selected. Correct paper is being used for printing. 2. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. 6. B. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field.0 Feb.Check to see if: 1. PC-402 Adjustment / Setting 4. 4. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 9. parts. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. the following advance checks must be made. use utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.g.. 2. 2006 4. 8. etc. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. Precautions for Service Jobs 1. Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be extremely hot. Toner is not running out. A. levelness of the installation site.Field Service Ver. The Original Glass. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. 5. ventilation. or related part is dirty. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. The power supply is properly grounded. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. 4.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 3. 7.. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. 5. How to use the adjustment section 17 . slit glass. The units. etc.

Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E702DA 18 .2 5.1 • To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely.0 Feb. Touch the [Sensor Check]. 2. <Procedure> 1. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. 5. data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including a misfeed. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 3. and closure failure condition). PC-402 Sensor check Check procedure 5. malfunction. 2. Touch the [State Confirmation].1 Sensor check list Sensor check screen • This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit. Call the Service Mode to the screen.2. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.5. 2006 5.

Sensor check list 5.Field Service Ver. Sensor check Sensor monitor 2 Operation characteristics/Panel display 1 0 Not raised Not lowered Not at home Not at return position Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Paper not present Symbol PC4-LCT PC13LCT PC12LCT PC11LCT PC1-LCT PC2-LCT PWB-E LCT PC3-LCT PC9-LCT PC7-LCT UN1-LCT PC14LCT PC6-LCT PC8-LCT PC10LCT Panel display Lift-Up Upper Lift-Up Lower Shift Tray Home Shift Tray Stop Part/Signal name Tray Upper Limit Sensor Tray Lower Position Sensor Shifter Home Position Sensor Shifter Return Position Sensor Raised Position Lowered Position At home Return position Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present Paper present malfunction ON At home Set Blocked Blocked Take-Up Vertical Transport Paper Empty Main Tray Empty Shift Tray Empty Lower Over Run Manual Button Down Division Board Position Cassette Open Shift Motor Pulse Elevator Motor Pulse Paper Feed Sensor LCT Vertical Transport Sensor Paper Empty Board Upper Paper Empty Sensor Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Lower Limit Sensor Paper Descent Key Shift Gate Home Position Sensor Tray Set Sensor Shift Motor Pulse Sensor Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor OFF Not at home Out of position Unblocked Unblocked 19 Adjustment / Setting operational PC-402 .0 Feb. 2.2. 2006 5.2 A.

1 Print Positioning: Side Edge 1.0 mm 6.6. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area]. 2. enter the correction value. 5. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. Adjustment / Setting 4061F3E704DA 4. PC-402 Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the paper reference position 6. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Call the Service Mode to the screen. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.0 mm ± 1. When the LPH Unit has been replaced. 2006 6. When the image on the print is offset in the sub scan direction.0 Feb. A 4348fs3509c0 20 . 3. Measure the width of printed reference line A.1 NOTE • Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed. 7. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. • If adjustment cannot be completed only by inputting numeric value. 2. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. Touch [Print Positioning: Side Edge] → [3rd]. Specification: 3.1. perform adjustment according to the following procedure. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 6. When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.

Press the Drawer Release button [1] and then slide out the drawer [2] from the Paper Feed Cabinet. 2006 6.0 Feb. 13. 4348fs3511c0 • If width A is greater than the specified value Turn screw D counterclockwise. [2] [1] 4348fs3510c0 [3] [4] 9. • If width A is smaller than the specified value Turn screw D clockwise. 21 Adjustment / Setting 4348fs3512c0 PC-402 . Perform another test print and check the reference deviation. Tighten the adjustment screw. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and turn screw D [4] to make the adjustment. Mechanical adjustment 8.Field Service Ver. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range. NOTE • Do not damage the passage surface of the Right Door. 10. 4348fs3513c0 11. 2. Open the Right Door. 12.

Slide out the Drawer and remove it. Measure the width of printed reference line A. Touch [Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge] → [3rd].2 [1] Shifter movement timing belt adjustment 1.2 PC-402 Field Service Ver.0 mm 6. 4061F3E706DA 4.6.0 mm ± 1. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen.1. If the measured width A falls outside the specified range. Produce another test print and check to see if width A falls within the specified range. 2. see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.0 Feb. Specification: 3. 7. Lift the Main Drawer [1]. use caution because the wire of the Main Drawer comes off easily. Mechanical adjustment 6. For details of how to display the Service Mode screen. 3. 4348fs3501c0 [2] [2] 22 . Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. enter the correction value. 2006 Dup Print Positioning: Side Edge 1. NOTE • When reinstalling. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area]. 2. and remove two screws [2] fixing the Shift Tray. A Adjustment / Setting 4348fs3509c0 6. 2.

Field Service Ver. 4348fs3504c0 23 Adjustment / Setting . 7. 5. [3] PC-402 [4] [3] 4348fs3502c0 [5] [6] 4. Remove the Shift Tray [5]. Mechanical adjustment 3. 2006 6. Loosen the screw [7] fixing the Tension Pulley Assy as shown to the left and move it in the direction of the arrow. tighten the fixing screw [7]. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Shifter [4].0 Feb. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5] as shown on the left and release the lock. After moving the Shifter. 2. 4348fs3503c0 [7] 6.

6. 2006 PC-402 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 24 .0 Feb. 2. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.

25 Troubleshooting . Jam Display • When misfeed occurs.1. clear the sheet of paper misfeed. and close the door. misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.Field Service Ver.28 7. message. 2006 7.0 Feb.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door. Jam Display Troubleshooting 7. No. [1] Code 1501 2001 Misfeed location LCT Paper Take-Up section LCT Paper Vertical Transport Section Misfeed access location Right Door Action P.1 Misfeed display PC-402 [1] [1] 4061F4C701DA 7. 2.

7. Jam Display Field Service Ver.0 Feb.2 PC-402 Sensor layout [1] [2] [3] 4061F4C702DB [1] Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor [2] LCT Vertical Transport Sensor PC108 PC2-LCT [3] Paper Feed Sensor PC1-LCT Troubleshooting 26 . 2. 2006 7.

3 7.1 Solution PC-402 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs. or damp? Replace paper. 27 Troubleshooting . Correct or replace the defective actuator. wavy. or worn? Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger. first perform the following initial check items.3. Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. deformed. Jam Display 7. deformed. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller. or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn? sary. Set as necessary.Field Service Ver. Action Is a foreign object present along the paper path. Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty. 2. Replace paper. or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. 2006 7. Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.0 Feb.

sensor check PC108 I/O. Action Relevant electrical parts Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) Tray2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 (ON) PWB-Z PJ6Z-11 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4 — Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 C-8 PC-402 C-7 C450 T to U-27 PC-402 C-8 — 1 2 Initial check items PC1-LCT I/O.7. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC1-LCT has been blocked by a paper. LCT detection of paper remaining B. sensor check M1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 28 . The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set to ON. LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical transport section misfeed detection The Tray 2 Vertical Transport Sensor (PC108) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) has been blocked by a paper. a door or cover is opened and closed. 2. a door or cover is opened and closed. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. sensor check PC2-LCT I/O. Jam Display 7. 2006 LCT Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed A.3.0 Feb. Detection timing Type Description The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) or the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) is energized.2 PC-402 Field Service Ver. The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC2-LCT has been blocked by a paper.

on detecting a malfunction.1 Trouble code PC-402 Troubleshooting Trouble code display • The main unit's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that. gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. Trouble code 8. 8. 4061F4E704DA 29 . 2006 8.

• The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. the time on the watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-down operation began. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operating. Trouble code Field Service Ver. • The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) is blocked while the paper lift-down operating. • The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-down operation began. etc.0 Feb.8. • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up operation began. 2006 8. C0210 LCT Lift Failure C0212 LCT Lock Release Failure Troubleshooting C0213 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure • The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor (M3LCT) began with the Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) set to L. 30 . • The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) is energized after the lowering operation is finished. 2..2 PC-402 Code C0001 C0209 Trouble code list Item LCT communication error LCT Elevator Motor Failure Description • Due to a software malfunction. • The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-down operation began. • The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower). • The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up operation began.

Trouble code • The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the shift operation began (shift to the right). • The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the return operation began (shift to the left). C0215 LCT Shift Motor Failure 8.2. • The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left). • The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). 2006 Code C0214 Item LCT Shift Failure Description 8. • The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) cannot detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Shift Motor (M4-LCT) is turning backward/forward (raise/lower).1 How to reset • Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch. 31 Troubleshooting PC-402 .Field Service Ver. 2. • The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift operation began (shift to the right). • The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return operation began (shift to the left).0 Feb.

8. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling.2 C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure Relevant electrical parts Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Interface Board (PWB-H LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.1 Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal — — Location (Electrical components) — — 1 2 Turn the main unit off. Trouble code Field Service Ver. and correct as necessary. 2. 2006 8. PC10-LCT I/O.0 Feb.3. PWB-C1 LCT replacement 8.3 PC-402 Solution C0001: LCT communication error Relevant electrical parts 8. and correct as necessary.3. then on again. sensor check M5-LCT operation check PWB-H LCT replacement PWB-C1 LCT replacement — 2 — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-6 to 7 — — — 3 4 5 PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-6 — — Troubleshooting 6 32 .

3. sensor check PC10-LCT I/O. 2006 8. SL1-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — PWB-C1 LCT PJ7C LCT-4 (ON) — 33 Troubleshooting PC-402 Relevant electrical parts . and correct as necessary.4 C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure Relevant electrical parts Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 C-8 — 1 2 3 Check the SL1-LCT connector for proper connection. sensor check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C LCT-15 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-9 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-2 (ON) — 8. Trouble code Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 C-7 PC-402 G to H-3 PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-5 to 6 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection. 2.3 C0210: LCT Lift Failure 8. PC4-LCT I/O.0 Feb. sensor check PC7-LCT I/O.Field Service Ver. and correct as necessary.3. sensor check PC13-LCT I/O.

sensor check M3-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — 2 — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-1 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-2 to 3 — — 3 4 5 PC-402 G to H-6 PC-402 G to H-6 — 8. sensor check PC11-LCT I/O.3.0 Feb.3. 2. and correct as necessary.5 PC-402 Field Service Ver. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. sensor check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-3 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-7 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-8 (ON) — Troubleshooting 2 3 4 5 34 . and correct as necessary. PC8-LCT I/O. 2006 C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure Relevant electrical parts Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT) Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection.6 C0214: LCT Shift Failure Relevant electrical parts Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-4 PC-402 G to H-4 — 1 Check the sensor connectors for proper connection. PC14-LCT I/O.8. and correct as necessary. sensor check PC12-LCT I/O. Trouble code 8.

sensor check M4-LCT operation check PWB-C1 LCT replacement — 2 — PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-3 (ON) PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-4 to 5 — — 3 4 5 PC-402 G to H-5 PC-402 G to H-6 — 35 Troubleshooting PC-402 Relevant electrical parts . PC8-LCT I/O. 2006 8. and correct as necessary.3.0 Feb. 2.7 C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure 8.Field Service Ver. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling. Trouble code Shift Motor (M4-LCT) Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Control signal Location (Electrical components) — 1 Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper connection. and correct as necessary.

2.8. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2006 PC-402 Blank Page Troubleshooting 36 .0 Feb.

1.SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE FS-507 2005.0 .03 Ver.

• To indicate clearly a section revised. 2. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual.0: The revision marks for Ver.0 deleted. Therefore. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0 has not been changed in Ver. 2. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 3. 2005/03 Date 1. 3. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.0 Service manual Ver. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required.0 has been changed in Ver.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2. 3. • When a page revised in Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.Revision history After publication of this service manual. 2.0 are left as they are. • When a page revised in Ver.

.............................................................................................................................................................. 12 Sensor check screen........3.........1 4................................ 5.............................. 5 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ..........2.................................3 Product specification ................................................2 2............. 8 2...4 Adjustment/Setting 3..2 How to use the adjustment section ...........3 1..................2..... 5 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) ......... 6 Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover....... 12 Sensor check list . 12 4................. 6 Disassembly/Assembly procedure.......1 1......................................... 1.........................5 1...6 1............................. 12 Sensor check list.....3........................................................................................ 1 Functions ............................................................................................................................................................................... 4...............4 1............ 12 Check procedure .........................1 Mechanical adjustment .........................................1 1..2 5...................................................................................................................... 2 Sort and staple capacity .. 7 Stapling Unit......................... 3 Machine specifications................................ 1 Paper type .........1 4......................... 6 Punch Unit ......................................... 11 Sensor check................ Group offset ............................3..........1........... 2.......................................................... 14 5....................3................................................................................................... 1 Sort............................ 1 Group................................................................. 3 Operating environment ........1 i ..........................3................. 8 Job Separator JS-601 (Option) .......................................................................... 2005 CONTENTS FS-507 General 1......................... 2 Sort staple/Group staple .............................................. 1........ 1 Type ...... 3 Hole Punch ................................................................................................8 Stapling.....................................................0 Mar.................. 3 Maintenance 2...............................................................................................................................................1 2....................................2 1...............2 1...........................................7 1. 2 General Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance FS-507 1............Field Service Ver.................................................................... 14 Check/Adjustment of the Punch Hole positions.....1 2.........................................3 2.............................3 Other ...............3............................................ 4................................................................................ 14 Checking the punch hole position .................. Sort offset......................................................3...................................................................2 2............................................

........11 Troubleshooting 7..................... 8............3....................................................................................................1 8...................................................................................... 20 Third tray exit .......... 14 Adjustment of the Upper / Lower Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL1-FN)....3.............................................................. 26 Solution .............3.............. 20 Shifting Operation ... 7................................. 1...................................................3..................................................................................3................................................. 16 Adjustment of the Exit Motor (M3-FN) Timing Belt .........................3.................... 19 Operation in each test mode operation ........ 15 Adjustment of the 3rd Entrance Switching Solenoid (SL4) ...........2 5....3 5.............................3 Jam Display....... 20 Secondary paper output tray Exit ......2 FS-507 Adjustment of the punch hole position.................................................................................Field Service Ver......... 28 Primary Paper Output Tray Exit section misfeed .3......................... 25 Sensor layout............ 21 Stapling Unit CD Movement........... 21 Aligning Plate Operation ...............3.....3 5..........................0 Mar..3...................................1...2 Timing belt tension adjustment...........3....5 Adjustment / Setting 7.............................................................3..............................1..10 7.....1 7...........2...................... 19 Test mode setting procedure ....... 20 Finisher Tray Exit ...............................12 7...........1 8..... 15 Adjustment of the 1st Tray Entrance Selecting Solenoid (SL2-FN) .......................................2 7................................... 17 Board switch ........................................................ 16 Adjustment of the solenoids .........2 5.............2 8........................................................... 23 Sensor Test...........................................1 8.....................3....... 27 Transport section misfeed......9 7.............................................4 6..........................................4 7...................... 15 5..........1 5................................................ 29 8.....................6 7..........................1 7.........2................................... 22 Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing..................................................3 7..................... 15 Adjustment of the Lower Entrance Motor (M2-FN) Timing Belt .......................................... 23 Maintenance 7................2 8.................................3..........3.. 22 Elevator Tray Operation ...2 7.................................................. 20 Primary paper output tray Exit ...........1 5................... 15 Adjustment of the Upper Entrance Motor (M4-FN) Timing Belt .......3 Adjustment of the Elevator Tray Upper Limit Sensor ........... 27 Initial check items .......................................................................... 22 Punch Hole Operation ................................................2............................................. 25 Misfeed display ..................................................3........ 15 General 5.3 5.......................... 22 Punch Hole 2/3 Switching.......3 ii ....................................................................3..........3..............................................3........................ 19 Test mode operations ......... 2005 5......................................... 21 Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing ...............................................................................................8 7...................... 18 Test mode .........7 7....3.................... 7................. 25 Misfeed display resetting procedure .....................................13 Troubleshooting 8..........

.......................... 33 C1182: Shift Motor drive malfunctions ......3...9 9......................4 9...........5 8...3................................................ 2005 8...4 8............................... 31 FS-507 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Trouble code...... 32 Trouble code list. 31 Horizontal Transport section misfeed .......................5 9.................................2 9. 35 C11A2: Storage Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction..................... 35 C11A1: Exit Roller/Rolls Spacing Motor drive malfunction .........................3...............3 9........................................1 9............................................................................2 9.................................................................. 30 Stapler section misfeed..... 34 C1190: CD Aligning Motor drive malfunction .................... 34 C1183: Elevator Motor drive malfunctions ............................ 37 C11C0: Punch Motor drive malfunction ...........7 8.........................0 Mar............6 8............................................. 34 9.......3.................1 9........... 36 C11B0: Stapling Unit Moving Motor drive malfunction.............Field Service Ver..........3......3........3.......... 9....................................6 9..........................7 9.......... 1.....3........................................................... 32 How to reset .....................3........................... 30 Paper Stack Exit section misfeed... 29 Secondary Paper Output Tray Exit section misfeed ....................2........................ 38 Solution............... 36 C11B2: Stapling Motor drive malfunction 1....3..................................8 9...... 32 Trouble code display .............1 9..............3..................................................3.................8 9................3................................ 37 C11B3: Stapling Motor drive malfunction 2...........................10 iii ...........3.....3 Third Tray Exit section misfeed (JS-601).. 37 C11C4: Hole Position Selector Motor drive malfunction ..................................................................3..........

1.0 Mar. 2005 .Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting FS-507 Maintenance General iv Blank Page Field Service Ver.

Field Service Ver. Sweden Punch Kit (PK-506) 1. Sort Offset Punch. Group staple Group Punch.1 Type Installation Document Alignment Supplies Option Type Multi Staple Finisher Freestanding Center Staple Cartridge Job separator (JS-601). 2005 1.5S/ 5.3 Paper type • Remove the Finisher off the machine for feeding the long paper. of Sheets to be Stapled - Paper Type Plain paper Thick paper OHP Film Translucent paper Envelope Label paper Letterhead 1 General FS-507 1. Sort.2 Functions Metric: 4holes.1 Group. Product specification General 1. of Holes Modes 1.5 to 13 × 19 Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb 60 to 256 g/m2 16 to 68 lb 20 sheets Tray Capacity 250 sheets Exit Tray 1st paper exit tray No. Sort Staple Punch No. • The maximum loading capacity shown is for when loading the single type of paper (80 g/m2) 1. Sort Punch.3. Group Offset.5 × 8. Group offset Paper Size B5S/B5 to A3 Wide 5. Group Offset Punch.0 Mar. Sort Offset. Product specification . Sort Staple. 1. Normal Punch Group. Inch: 2holes / 3holes.5 × 8.

5 lb. 8. A4S.25 × 10.5 × 11S or smaller).25 × 10. *2 : The number of Sheets to be Stapled is limited for high-density images. A5S 8. of Sheets to be Stapled 50 sheets *2. Sort offset Paper Size B5S/B5 to A3 Wide 7.0 Mar.5 Diagonal: CD direction 216 to 297 mm.3 Sort staple/Group staple Paper Size B5S/B5 to A3 7. 1. *3 Paper Type Plain paper 3. 8. 8.75 2 .5 × 14 or larger) *1 : Cover Mode . 24.25 to 55. A3.91 to 209 g/m2. adjust it in parallel or diagonal according to the length in CD direction. Product specification 1. B4 Staple Filling Mode Staple Detection Stapling Position *1 Manual Staple None *1 : For 1 point stapling.5 × 14 A4. B5S. B5.000 sheets 60 to 90 g/m2 16 to 24 lb (A4S. 11 × 17 A4.500 sheets (B4.5 × 11S or smaller).5 lb Tray Capacity 3. Parallel: CD direction 182 to 216 mm.25 × 8.5 × 11S. 7. 11 × 17 B5.4 Stapling Dedicated Staple Cartridge Mode (5.5 to 13 × 19 Weight 60 to 209 g/m2 16 to 55.1.5 to 11 × 17 Weight Tray Capacity Exit Tray 2nd paper exit tray No.5 × 11. 1. 8.25 × 10. of Sheets to be Stapled - Paper Type Plain paper Thick paper General 1. (Color Wise 3: 20 sheets x 20 sets) *3 : 35 sheets when using Color Copy 90 paper. A3 8.3.3.000 staples) Available (Nearly Empty: 20 remaining staples) Rear: Diagonal 45° 1 point Front: Diagonal 45° 1 point Rear: Diagonal 28° 1 point Front: Diagonal 28° 1 point Rear: Parallel 1 point Front: Parallel 1 point Side: Parallel 2 points A4S.5 × 11.000 sheets (A4S. B4 8. 8.5 × 11.25 × 10. 8. 2005 Sort.5 × 14.5 × 11S.2 FS-507 Field Service Ver. 1.5S/ 7. 8.5S/ 7.500 sheets (B4.5 × 14 or larger) Exit Tray 2nd paper exit tray No. 8. *1 1.

1. of Holes Punch dust full detection 1. NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice. of Sheets to be Stapled 2 pages 3 to 5 pages 6 to 10 pages 11 to 20 pages 21 to 30 pages 31 to 40 pages 41 to 50 pages No.25 inch (W) × 38.Field Service Ver.7 Machine specifications DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit) DC 5 V (generated by Finisher) 63 W or less 538 mm (W) × 978 mm (H) × 637 mm (D) 21.5 Sort and staple capacity FS-507 General • (Reference: Actual value) Determined by number of Sets or number of Sheets based on number of bindings.6 Hole Punch Metric: 4holes. A.2 kg (86. 3 . Product specification 1. of Sheets 200 Sheets 400 Sheets 600 Sheets 800 Sheets 1800 Sheets 2400 Sheets 3000 Sheets 1.8 Operating environment Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit. Power Consumption Dimensions Weight 1. 2005 1. Number of stacked paper No. of Sets 100 sets 80 sets 60 sets 40 sets 60 sets 60 sets 60 sets No.0 Mar. Inch: 2holes / 3holes non No.5 inch (H) × 25 inch (D) 39.5 lb) Power Requirements Max.

0 Mar. Product specification Field Service Ver. 1. 2005 General FS-507 Blank Page 4 .1.

C. • When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. Other Maintenance 2. when two or more screws are used for a single part. Red-painted screws • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. Other A. 2005 2. be sure to ground your body.Field Service Ver. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied • Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures. B. 5 . 1. Removal of PWBs NOTE • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component. D. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. It should also be noted that. screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items FS-507 2. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.0 Mar. • As a general rule. Variable resistors on board Maintenance NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.

2.6 P. Remove four screws [4] and remove the Rear Cover.8 2.0 Mar. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Upper Front Cover.6 P.7 P.1 Disassembly/Assembly procedure Upper Cover/Upper Front Cover/Lower Front Cover/Rear Cover Maintenance [1] [1] [5] [4] [4] [2] [2] [3] 1. Other Field Service Ver. 2005 2.8 P. Open the Upper Door [5] Remove four screws [1] and remove the Upper Cover.6 P. page P.2.3. 4. 3.3 2. 6 .6 P. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Lower Front Cover.2 FS-507 No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) Section Upper Cover Exterior Parts Upper Front Cover Lower Front Cover Rear Cover Unit Option Punch Unit Stapling Unit Job Separator JS-601 Part name Ref. 5. 1.

Other Punch Unit A. and remove the Punch Unit [3]. Removal Procedure 1. 1. 2005 2.2 [1] 2.Field Service Ver.0 Mar. [2] [2] 4683F2C502DA [4] NOTE • When installing the Punch Unit. Remove the upper cover. Remove the connector [1].3. See P. FS-507 4683F2C501DA [2] 3.6 2. Remove two screws [2]. insert the Gear of the Finisher [4] into the Gear of the Punch Unit [5]. [5] 4683F2C503DA 7 Maintenance .

Remove three claws [3].0 Mar. [1] 4684fs2501c0 [4] 2.4 Job Separator JS-601 (Option) 1. [1] [1] [2] 4683F2C504DA [3] 2.2. and remove the rear cover of the Job Separator [4]. Holding both sides of the cover [1]. Other 2. 2005 Stapling Unit 1. unplug the connector [3].3. and remove the Stapling Unit [4] from the moving cradle. [2] [3] 4684fs2502c0 Maintenance 2.3 FS-507 Field Service Ver. 1.3. and remove the front cover of the Job Separator [2]. lift the cover up and take it off. [4] [3] 4683F2C505DA 8 . Remove three claws [1]. Remove two screws [2].

Other 3. 1.0 Mar. 2005 [5] 2. Remove two screws [5] and the connector [6]. and remove the Job Separator [7]. [6] [7] Maintenance 4683F2C506DA 9 FS-507 .Field Service Ver.

Other Field Service Ver. 2005 Maintenance FS-507 Blank Page 10 .0 Mar.2. 1.

levelness of the installation site. etc. Toner is not running out.Check to see if: 1. A. etc. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. 7. Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. 6.0 Mar. and supplies used for printing (developer. 3. 5. If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. 4. 2. 8. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). 10. 1. parts. The Original Glass.Field Service Ver. ventilation. The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. Advance Checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting” the default settings are indicated by boldface. The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. 2. FS-507 Adjustment / Setting 3. B. The power supply voltage meets the specifications. The density is properly selected. or related part is dirty.. the following advance checks must be made. Correct paper is being used for printing